nauenataes teat
as yeasts Aiea me Ore
Pat oh ai wine Aaape com dibad ey a es oa steed pape ey trices ebagg ts tof pt ade aM ’ er coe ni abytauedh rs wher ne ehp enti Elo pred (OSM ena dt td DPF Fb ved thet ane ede eet adabe ese b ap sk pOe MOM Drama rc eb a! heb ein ge kab te os or wd at doce plieaihgs dade hah et pie Cqettent ede goth PAU eap A a Pee PNT De) pieleye freadrpl brave okt oat tiaitidyen stig od edow meee wT,
iy
fod aee | Pera eer ete Pt ue
ror
nel pheeary oe jibe: anes tee fates Hess pte et Bir 1106 SORRUR ti iaaaidat it Be f Nain ade, eb aly
1469 “ odes oite + ate itt vendor . Serr adore rey baeal mest Pret arets) adie pte yt ah eit ai i ' nye medyrtagyebet Nee plcdL OTHE ry one g oda cages foray peerere rea yy) Pe etene PA Pa « thiteneatatas tle ate rie pred be ony epbdehec’ ? ‘urbe sh) Ad tide
ele ee diber Ayiasne oh tie sis Fejashitle yal ' ie aehideqal rere keeuety ie arte ST aa yout tabeadie atiastalaicstnc ont mM legate Seidel vifol ° ite Mens Prverers errr gs) , prt pyitet fw
ote aie a eT eee ae i ae CTS A elite ie tu
Peeters? Pr ndeneri fel: f
Nyabewegiaternty ce ae bapgeeth Beeb etel wa - hai
Vibewaghaee sats ulvvofatisagelabad fete te wAle trae teh
i pe ieraeyt
‘ " ii
LN i ‘ ' - J Rew vg legit
Bo daranauhadid fi viltisedal para anh of alge tdi Sontag
tod athe) Heng Weniee abe ilk
popenidy tebe
seen taly ' a 5
i
idea
yey?
hed aha podeted phat pty erepatny) Okt oe RRid abel oy, ish
Mabe ap hh ii
ebm RE OR EEU RELI To wage laryn dy
° rant pay eae Lilja fh per ieen | rage i, janine blah: qico) ¢
iy ial
heli tere Hy viel meat
srihedehe wer Ditiagt ealiioate
stingy avai
oe be H. eel dan vee in rary iat: iftesat ite bsg ipivadal fel te ade Wy) wit bianie EN AN tele i aie eae , eile ne , Us cru 1H ice ititede mr gly {j ix ‘ah eb WRAL nett es
eu nt ‘ ‘ ve | tea omen Pearly f
at bat : ma i ,! Sieh iNiait aati ee sites LAE Pde tera ; Pi aha } i}
eg spf
CE test apt sans Con eT peed aN
Nt MEL H Pree nh) se aalite se ibe es dibye
’ etsy ivan Gh TeTAgl ig eae hey fed
ty" ‘ Hea ane di wetoeld
bh Qyagt i bee Vibe pbew es Sebadattte
deh phate
of oleal
plegf ‘ Teh gve yates) He
Padelis ‘ ia + int oa + tee ii") ' ji idee rink ele ete ot ens
ay ase | eee wa tothvilgran crepe eft (ottayate cad oe eepe tt ayend
wil tree Ha yTM ab natalie
pit i ay ltd
than wed
i} iiaela ac fine ri
Marlal Cte vi
‘Me wn aut 7 ib Hee
sain " " Di Wy
} Westie! Mat dst add
deade ' pe Nidlea hws an
yh patie 199 hel pire ey? Jechiap: beled i
tien peal
cl Peg
Migs pater
jon tt ines
ritpeses ALTE ron tis ron nay y hit pute piel
‘ ib , Pain thy ey ve » (6 Tytopiretor tt lata if cof vtveed Hen W Soper A mee ees He rite poryemeeaglh pipeereiahs patel} Gt ren ‘ a pederegedel thedvnbyeriene
aie
le Hoegiebe ae ter
a
mA SF ‘vt Ay Neel ha: ale ryeite HT Sipe the ' Ayes) gine yee Msaet gheee enue
mtet tate eae a ")
” biased ist ay ' wilt
alte yereea ee
rata tnt sprite ry tie Ht alontenage et pne A cant
Ajeet a Kean? i withh Meld ene ei atl ead lo i teat ad Pr bea bel
ih Wythe bie ee a wee Heel g tee 1 why wes Loni goad te ui ' + celia Weped Orhaee Shin ohh Piao Irn
ye eyelpieay
wiry eegeryiva Peat}
hosted ahh tt
eniited i He Ets ryt t
14 anit i iit Hy 1pm
ital
ent ‘7 Ae iy bib ioe
wu
vrab abate EY heed fh
pyeeeee
pity geet
io ewe agree Rall
ADAG Le nye
SN Yastaty id H stig ‘ vey MeN} 4 sitghintt b hoededvscanng hike Pap ise naelt ater ins] nt ae SHlAtE Giatiy yt g ea) 1 Hike 4th pets
Vi ee : pre ra ead ity 1
th obeas th paige
eiened ' NADINE tase, ne
A iedaet on gi pei be mays hans ponere +4 Maul wena Mis Hay ope iy ays ee aS Ae } piv jhe Ws gidygell Aacrael wih ee isis Y pala he setegenaet aha 2 ofl
‘ rw Why : at Jebogy (ieee
ty ‘ depdtiey 4
HRT
be Tee
+ Sa PaS Te
Hi “4
satatad
i" Ate
Hi | sew yrae? 4 Hegel me ‘ divin ie ey Latahoy ys aur
yes
rie " yet gyn foghagh if yldies ' i yi ii fye Teen apne e rt * ih
Ailey ner few aeytk al ite gedzaes kwh] CaLUIE FENN
4 esredite pny
j ate
wile analy pay
; v HN 4 . opeeeer
hs “dy ony in. 4G aldey +4 ayes ieseayene t plblifeters weil eH perageea toa Maiedly iter seins ge? Peek: surdiony Meuse ley Agee! aa) : ij “f tt rey se 36 Lk tel der ital! Feber endl nfd (el gion beet ar PrerrerT wir re
wet tee , Ne ‘aydrdrat Seva
Poet chee loge’ wr} wali? PePerery cers eee Ee Gute: 96 Matel ay og
snl tke
givens Hylands
rt Carty Le yatrebaet tine ; yieks bee ‘ f Perey ae vate gh tedhd 1 are i tue! Dated et rege ene dere hale» +P key et be fits yy 4th hw Wate jie SA De is year une say tne Brere | rent peed ake veer etree dey
Hapgrtartgt
ep sieenalt
panes
1 sine 44
every bn Se whee
wait ; elite brow ig acadiel
+] Coa ate ‘ nie waverialys
ae mn
fi deaaied « Adit pe {
Val My "1 " LMAAL ASE Bias bots h, stn Hoed arity ser ght ag ha state y correrioren cay ro tea berry fer err a Gr i 52 Yd be ys ey ras: eer bp re tat Ob be Gabe A Pa ltd rat teh ie pe aye ie pian taey init v4} ” ‘ Hs ein > Routt Messiind Hie alee) piljte i B Bi eye) veel ii H sh eel a , ate lita) Higienehe bbe iciterie
saad sy Adsed he ried yer of
fey
Phere tun w isi age
wat yy!
cattia itatee ee
epee swell selva
habe hgie ru) it i ¥ is Hi th ene i lieels "4 dee
pM dace
eat iliragtest
tuner
Peete
4 v rey an rvs Culy sali yh diay talents OBreitg nt ens Cine end Fea Hay sg Me werd tee hes ft Hearts
ey
(ir eyes ore
, ite
' a ist erie >
Pea
ee irs Lebehy mts iyi ian eit
a bu + '
OT
FOR THE PEOPLE FOR EDVCATION FOR SGIENCE
LIBRARY OF
THE AMERICAN MUSEUM
OF
NATURAL HISTORY
ayn
i POR ' vi Wy At
. i NW f
PROCEEDINGS
OF PHE
_| INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE
IQI5
PROCEEDINGS
= ry [ m4 r / OF THE 2) (O) & | i on a LY
—_<
|
Indiana Academy of Science
1915
H. EH. BARNARD, Editor
FORT WAYNE PRINTING COMPANY CONTRACTORS FOR STATE PRINTING AND BINDING
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE (COO RASS UIT ALUN STO) TT eve SaaS AB nce ths kee Ree ae SIE EO REO MEES 30d © 5 Bea wiSperine ee res amen ee SOE e Mena bs amb Gace eg US alee Gals ol & 7 Aippropria tion for wlOMA4eOM a co sis aks cetiestie a aes dias en eels ele 7 An Act for the Protection of Birds, Their Nests and Hggs............ 9 Public Offenses—Hunting Birds—Penalty..................... eee 10 OlhicenslO TA WOT Sse a Mem ah eee G48 MeN awit cede ae, Nt Mae Nan ange iil DEGUUNTE. Comrie, wr. us cslas eae oudeegoe meses Di elee net ie om eS 11 COIN. LOL Samer cat eH na 5 ana aanee Si Saunt aI ROMS ee trees oe) i ott ALY eee eae 12 Commutteessacad emiyg ots ciencey pl ONG Bice atria acer eee 12 Officers of the Academy of Science (A Table of)..................... 14° IN [remiallo Gre Sheee sears eee iy Se fe untin trata he «Nap Mau A avo MIRE a ac fs i Aa en 15 . Ee HOW SHR ee re net aah rod TE eee ice ah lam Nts ee Alcea eet nL SES ak Me mea ee eter Ue 15 PAT EIN CMV UETIMO CRSA erties eRe tit iy cama eee oe ae OR Came Mr A: Si, SRS a ge 24 IMEnaURESS Ok thas (Sjoretumer IMIG Sono kako oo eb oecouc ooo saauscuouuouse 4] Minutes of the Thirty-first Annual Meeting...................... . 43
Program of the Thirty-first Annual Meeting........................ 49
Shins helpline ds
Pa sie ea cea) oe
i. a + ria ay
Gah es Mone di! 4
Ts hn ta pyr;
CONSTITUTION.
ARTICLE I.
Section 1. This association shall be called the Indiana Academy of Science.
Sec. 2. The objects of this Academy shall be scientific research and the diffusion of knowledge concerning the various departments of science; to promote intercourse between men engaged in scientific work, especially in Indiana; to assist by investigation and discussion in developing and making known the material, educational and other resources and riches of the State; to arrange and prepare for publication such reports of investigation and dis- cussions as may further the aims and objects of the Academy as set forth in these articles.
WueEreas, The State has undertaken the publication of such proceed- ings, the Academy will, upon request of the Governor, or one of the several departments of the State, through the Governor, act through its council as an advisory body in the direction and execution of any investigation within its province as stated. The necessary expenses incurred in the prosecution of such investigation are to be borne by the State; no pecuniary gain is to come to the Academy for its advice or direction of such investigation.
The regular proceedings of the Academy as published by the State shall become a public document.
ARTICLE II.
Section 1. Members of this Academy shall be honorary fellows, fellows, non-resident members or active members.
Sec. 2. Any person engaged in any department of scientific work, or in original research in any department of science, shall be eligible to active membership. Active members may be annual or life members. Annual members may be elected at any meeting of the Academy; they shall sign the constitution, pay an admission fee of two dollars and thereafter an annual fee of one dollar. Any person who shall at one time contribute fifty dollars to the funds of this Academy may be elected a life member of the Academy, free of assessment. Non-resident members may be elected from those who have been active members but who have removed from the
6
State. In any case, a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect to membership. Application for membership in any of the foregoing classes shall be referred to a committee on application for membership, who shall
consider such application and report to the Academy before the election.
Sec. 5. The members who are actively engaged in scientific work, who have recognized standing as scientific men, and who have been members of the Academy at least one year, may be recommended for nomination for election as fellows by three fellows or members personally acquainted with their work and character. Of members so nominated a number not exceed- ing five in one year may, on recommendation of the Executive Committee, be elected as fellows. At the meeting at which this is adopted, the mem- bers of the Executive Committee for 1894 and fifteen others shall be elected fellows, and those now honorary members shall become honorary fellows. Honorary fellows may be elected on account of special prominence in science, on the written recommendation of two members of the Academy. In any case a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect.
ARTICLE III.
Section 1. The officers of this Academy shall be chosen by ballot at the annual meeting, and shall hold office one year. They shall consist of a President, Vice-President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary, Press Secretary and Treasurer, who shall perform the duties usually pertaining to their respective offices and in addition, with the ex-presidents of the Academy, shall constitute an Executive Committee. The President shall, at each annual meeting, appoint two members to be a committee, which shall pre- pare the programs and have charge of the arrangements for all meetings for one year.
Sec. 2. The annual meeting of this Academy shall be held in the city of Indianapolis within the week following Christmas of each year, unless otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee. There shall also be a summer meeting at such time and place as may be decided upon by the Executive Committee. Other meetings may be called at the discretion of the Executive Committee. The past Presidents, together with the officers and Executive Committee, shall constitute the council of the Academy, and represent it in the transaction of any necessary business not especially pro- vided for in this constitution, in the interim between general meetings.
7
Sec. 3. This constitution may be altered or amended at any annual meeting by a three-fourths majority of the attending members of at least one year’s standing. No question of amendment shall be decided on the day of its presentation.
185 Wve VS)
1. On motion, any special department of science shall be assigned to a curator, whose duty it shall be, with the assistance of the other members interested in the same department, to endeavor to advance knowledge in that particular department. Hach curator shall report at such time and place as the Academy shall direct. These reports shall include a_ brief summary of the progress of the department during the year preceding the presentation of the report.
2. The President shall deliver a public address on the morning of one of the days of the meeting at the expiration of his term of office.
3. The Press Secretary shall attend to the securing of proper newspaper reports of the meetings and assist the Secretary.
4. No special meeting of the Academy shall be held without a notice of the same having been sent to the address of each member at least fifteen days before such meeting.
5. No bill against the Academy shall be paid without an order signed by the President and countersigned by the Secretary.
6. Members who shall allow their dues to remain unpaid for two years, having been annually notified of their arrearage by the Treasurer, shall have their names stricken from the roll.
7. Ten members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of busi- ness.
AN ACT TO PROVIDE FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE REPORTS AND PAPERS OF THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.
(Approved March 11, 1895.)
Wuereas, The Indiana Academy of Science, a chartered scientific association, has embodied in its constitution a provision that it will, upon the
8
request of the Governor, or of the several departments of the State govern- ment, through the Governor, and through its council as an advisory board, assist in the direction and execution of any investigation within its province without pecuniary gain to the Academy, provided only that the necessary expenses of such investigation are borne by the State; and,
Wuereas, The reports of the meetings of said Academy, with the several papers read before it, have very great educational, industrial and economic value, and should be preserved in permanent form; and,
Wuereas, The Constitution of the State makes it the duty of the General Assembly to encourage by all suitable means intellectual, scientific and agricultural improvement; therefore,
Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the State of Indiana, That hereafter the annual reports of the meetings of the Indiana Academy of Science, beginning with the report for the year 1894, including all papers of scientific or economic value, presented at such meetings, after they shall have been edited and prepared for publication as hereinafter provided, shall be published by and under the direction of the Commissioners of Public Printing and Binding.
Sec. 2. Said reports shall be edited and prepared for publication without expense to the State, by a corps of editors to be selected and appointed by the Indiana Academy of Science, who shall not, by reason of such service, have any claim against the State for compensation. The form, style of binding, paper. typography and manner and extent of illustration of such reports shall be determined by the editors, subject to the approval of the Commissioners of Public Printing and Stationery. Not less than 1,500 nor more than 3,000 copies of each of said reports shall be published, the size of the edition within said limits to be determined by the concurrent action of the editors and the Commissioners of Public Printing and Stationery: Provided, That not to exceed six hundred dollars ($600) shall be expended for such publication in any one year, and not to extend beyond 1896: Provided, That no sums shall be deemed to be appropriated for the year 1894.
Sec. 3. All except three hundred copies of each volume of said reports shall be placed in the custody of the,State Librarian, who shall furnish one copy thereof to each public library in the State, one copy to each university college or normal school in the State, one copy to each high school in the State having a library, which shall make application therefor, and one copy to such other institutions, societies or persons as may be designated by the
9
Academy through its editors or its council. The remaining three hundred copies shall be turned over to the Academy to be disposed of as it may determine. In order to provide for the preservation of the same it shall be the duty of the Custodian of the State House to provide and place at the disposal of the Academy one of the unoccupied rooms of the State House, to be designated as the office of the Academy of Science, wherein said copies of said reports belonging to the Academy, together with the original manu- seripts, drawings, ete., thereof can be safely kept, and he shall also equip the same with the necessary shelving and furniture.
Sec. 4. An emergency is hereby declared to exist for the immediate taking effect of this act, and it shall therefore take effect and be in force from and after its passage.
APPROPRIATION FOR 1915-1916.
The appropriation for the publication of the proceedings of the Academy during the years 1915 and 1916 was increased by the Legislature in the General Appropriation bill, approved March 9, 1915. That portion of the law fixing the amount of the appropriation for the Academy is herewith given in full.
For the Academy of Science: For the printing of the proceedings of the Indiana Academy of Science twelve hundred dollars: Provided, That any unexpected balance in 1915 shall be available for 1916, and that any unexpended balance in 1916 shall be available in 1917.
AN ACT FOR THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS, THEIR NESTS AND EGGS.
Src. 602. Whoever kills, traps or has in his possession any wild bird, or whoever sells or offers the same for sale, or whoever destroys the nest or ege's of any wild bird, shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction thereof shall be fined not less than ten dollars nor more than twenty-five dollars: Provided, That the provisions of this section shall not apply to the following named birds: The Anatidae, commonly called swans, geese, brant, river and sea duck; the Rallidae, commonly ealled rails, coots, mud-hens gallinules; the limicolae, commonly called shore birds, surf birds, plover, snipe, woodcock, sandpipers, tattlers and curlew; the Gallinae, commonly called wild turkeys, grouse, prairie chickens, quails and pheasants;
10
nor to English or European house sparrows, crows, hawks or other birds of prey. Nor shall this section apply to persons taking birds, their nests or eggs, for scientific purposes, under permit, as provided in the next seciton.
Sec. 603. Permits may be granted by the Commissioner of Fisheries and Game to any properly accredited person, permitting the holder thereof to collect birds, their nests or eggs for strictly scientific purposes. In order to obtain such permit the applicant for the same must present to such Com- missioner written testimonials from two well-known scientific men certify- ing to the good character and fitness of such applicant to be entrusted with such privilege, and pay to such Commissioner one dollar therefor and file with him a properly executed bond in the sum of two hundred dollars, payable to the State of Indiana, conditioned that he will obey the terms of such permit, and signed by at least two responsible citizens of the State as sureties. The bond may be forfeited, and the permit revoked upon proof to the satisfaction of such Commissioner that the holder of such permit has killed any bird or taken the nest or eggs of any bird for any other purpose than that named in this section.
PUBLIC OFFENSES—HUNTING WILD BIRDS (Approved March 15, 1913.)
Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the State of Indiana, That section six (6) of the above entitled act be amended to read as follows: Section 6. That section six hundred two (602) of the above entitled act be amended to read as follows: Section 602. It shall be unlawful for any person to kill, trap or possess any wild bird, or to purchase or offer the same for sale, or to destroy the nest or eggs of any wild bird, except as otherwise provided in this section. But this section shall not apply to the following named game birds: The Anatidae, commonly called swans, geese, brant, river and sea duck;the Rallidae, commonly known as rails, coots, mud-hens and gallinules; the Limicolae, commonly known as shore birds, plovers, surf birds, snipe, woodcock, sandpipers, tattlers and curlews; the Gallinae, com- monly called wild turkeys, grouse, prairie chickens, quails, and pheasants; nor to English or European house sparrows, blackbirds, crows, hawks or other birds of prey. Nor shall this section apply to any person taking
PENALTY.
birds or their nests or eggs for scientific purposes under permit as provided” in the next section. Any person violating the provisions of this section shall, on conviction, be fined not less than ten dollars ($10.00) nor more than fifty dollars ($50.00).
Indiana Academy of Srience.
Orricmrs, 1915-1916.
PRESIDENT, ANnpDREW J. Bianey.
Vick-PRESIDENT, Amos W. Burter.
SECRETARY, Howarp E. Enpers.
ASSISTANT SECRETARY, EK. B. WiILuisAMson.
PRESS SECRETARY, Frank B. WADE.
TREASURER, Wiutiam M. BuancHarp.
Eprtror, H. EK. Barnarp.
g EXpmcutrive CoMMITTEE:
ARTHUR, J. C., CULBERTSON, GuEenn, McBnru, W. A., Bienry, A. J., Dryer, Cuas. R., Mees, Caru.L., Buancuarp, W. M., EHicenmann, C. H., Mortirr, Davin M., Buatcuury, W. S., Enpers, Howarp. H., Mernpenuatt, T. C., BRANNER, J. C., Evans, PR. N., Naytor, JosmpyH P., BurRRAGE, SEVERANCE, Dennis, D. W., Noygrs, W. A., Burtier, Amos W., Founy, A. L., Wann, F. B. CoaGgsHaALL, W. A., elas, ©), IPQ. WALDO, (©) 7Ay, Couuter, Joun M., Hesstpr, Roper, Wiuey, H. W., CouLTER, STANLEY, JOEN, Jo IPs 1D. Wiuuramson, EH. B.,
JORDAN, D. S., WriGHtT, JOHN S.
(11)
12
CURATORS:
ES OUDAINN ae ons sont els eis 6 Wie ea ee Roe ee eee J. C. Arruur. HINTOMOLOGN o> fears os curr a ee te eee W. S. BLATcHLey. HerPETOLOGY
MAMMALOGY (i toskeseNewaere Bkekay te Ras nce eg Tek aes eee A. W. Burter. ORNITHOLOGY J
Ics (ats Ina on COCs qe aan Eee RO roe Ry Pema tye Det a oe ane Pitas, H. C. EIGENMANN.
CoMMITTEES ACADEMY OF SCIENCE, 1915-1916.
Program. Membership. STANLEY CouLtTER, Lafayette EK. R. Cumminas, Bloomington L. F. Bennert, Valparaiso Epwin Morrison, Richomnd
SEVERANCE BurraaGe, Indianapolis H. L. Bruner, Indianapoils
Nominations. Auditing. Witspur A. CocsHaty, Bloomington J. P. Nayuor, Greencastle W. A. McBeru, Terre Haute GLENN CULBERTSON, Hanover A. S. Hatuaway, Terre Haute
State Library. Restriction of Weeds and Diseases. W. S. Buarcuiry, Indianapolis Rosperr Hesster, Logansport A. W. Buruier, Indianapolis F. M. Anprews, Bloomington JAMES Brown, Indianapolis J. N. Hurry, State House, Indian- apolis
STANLEY Counrer, Lafayette
D. M. Mortier, Bloomington
Biological Survey. Academy to State. C. C. Dram, Bluffton R. W. McBripg, Indianapolis H. W. AnperRson, Crawfordsville GLENN CULBERTSON, Hanover Grorce N. Horrer, West Lafayette H. E. Barnarp, Indianapolis U. O. Cox, Terre Haute A. W. Burt.uer, Indianapolis
J. N. NiEuwLANnpD, Notre Dame W. W. Wootten, Indianapolis
Distribution of Proceedings.
H. EK. Enpers, West Lafayette
Joun B. Dutcuer, Bloomington
A. W. Burier, State House, In- dianapolis
W. M. Buancuarp, Greencastle
13
Publication of Proceedings. H. KE. Barnarp, Editor, Indianapolis C. R. Drynr, Fort Wayne M. E. Hacerrry, Bloomington R. R. Hype, Terre Haute J. S. Wricut, Indianapolis
14
“pareyeuere “TN OA “paeyoue]e] “TAT “M THeYSBOY “VM Bad fs dla “tT oM SHBYY UV] Al by “M ‘snuyyyuoo “f “AA SHBYY Ud] “Cr oM “WOOT “V “AN “WOOT “VOM “Wed “VOM “Og “V OM ‘WOO “VM "HOMO “V OM
“IPSN “V OM “PPVAOXS “SL {" ‘THe4008 LL ‘Te4008 Lf ‘TEAS “Lf *[JPAQVS Br Fis (°
“uoUURYS “dq oM
“uoUURYSs “OM
“uOUURYS “dM
“uoUUeYS “dM
y
“Opie M OPIRM 1D “V
‘suryuer “ed *O ‘suru "dO ‘sulyuo? “dq °O ‘suryjuer “q 'O
‘suryuel “q “O ‘surpuot “dO
MAUASVAU TL
OpBM “A “OpeM “ad OpeM “a “OpeM “A ul
Weng “EL OLN WARNS “EL OLA “SUIBYPOOM “AQ UYOr nHoddvy, VD Fy bat ote eee OU We
yey) “YM Sopeeyy MOGI Vt ss Modqy “WH oes qnoqqy "Wk “AK (09%)
maton itiars|
uoVUog, “AA “O0K) UOJUOg “MA OOK) “UOLUOg “AA “OOe) UOUOg, “AQ *OOX)
| AMVALSRMOMG SSort¢]
WMONUTOS wlO
WOSUURTTTEM, “EL “Ol os stopust “LH ‘suopuoy “OH Wg “WO “UOSURITILAA “OT UOSTURIT[LAA “EL “OT
VOULSIET *(* “V ‘AoUSI, “(* “V ss“ KOUWSIGD “(? “VW “ULOSUBYT “TT of? “UTOSURY “PT of? ‘*"ULOSUBAT “PT of?
***"ULOSTRAT “Epo f*
“OULPOg] UOSp]/RUOC]
“AMV LOD Oah
oulpog Wosp|/Ruocd
“OZLNYOS “VW “Oo
‘oZyNYOS “V “Gl
oZq NOS u “ny AoW *(* “V Youste *( °V Yous "f° “V vous “( "V “URULION “MoM _{ WRULION “AA “MA \ | doqyno,) AoTURAIG
“LSS
“s1opuyy “OI pe
UO} WOE] “M
AOUSIET * ‘Vv AOUSTG p Aouslg] ‘it
AOUSTE A (ges
lags at
NOUS
“WLOSURYy “" THOSURAT “PY
UOT “Gg WUAT]
VY BLIAA “9
lO[QPOP “E] UUATT LOTTO INOW “E UUArTy]
uyor uyor uyor? uyor uyor uyor uyor uyor? uyor Uyor’ 7°)
USM 8 “VUSLIMA “8 USL “S “VYShl MA “S “VUSLIMA *S “YULGLL AA *S “VYGSLIM “SG
USM “S YSN “8 aes i “OP RM ;
“LopNE, “AQ soury oP, “AA soury “Lop “MA soury “op “AA SsouLy “Lop “AA soury “oppug, “AA soury Topng “MA Ssoury Lope, “AA SOULY OV LOM OG
AWHUAVOV VNVICNI
shite Ao your
“posvooo0d «
Yousley *(* VW [[eysdo,) “y ANG ]ILM
“OSRLIN ET OOURLOADG ,OULpOg UoSsp]Ruod
LO[ARVN “cf MOAI, “YM “SUGATT ON ‘ef '* £OTOM TT "’V “WOS}.L0qG]N,) UOT) MOM OT TN. ¥ 3: *LO]Ss0 |] Jl OP "VULGLIEMA “SG UO o's 'S9QnAr “rT * eal
5 MM YOTLM “MA ADAIR LY *, SVULOWT, “G * -stuued “MA "Cd
“UURUIUOGIW “PT
“OPIRM “VO
7" ARU) SBULOL TL,
** 'doqpnory AovpUBIG
1opgng “MoV
ie en "* “SOoAON “WV “M
a SINYIW “OD “£
“(oqdmey Tf
Boe AOR il
‘]JRVyuopuoPy "OY WL
© LOUUR IE,“ ) UO?
se Su OT Gitct el:
* foyPNO,) “PAY Uyor?
* UPTO [* at A PIAVC
UNGLCISGY |
HHL wlO SMO TLALO
9161-SI61 SI6L-PI6I PIGI-EI6I SLOL- GIGI GIGI-TI61 [161-O161 O161-6061 6061-8061 SO61-ZO6I ZO61- 9061 9061-SO061 SO61-PO6I POGL-cO06I S061 GO6T GO6T- LOGI 1061-0061 O061L- 6681 O6OST-SOsT 86ST Z681 ZOST-9681 9OST-S68T GOsSL V6st POST Ost COST GOST GOST LOST L68t- 0681 OGST-6ss1 OSdST-Sss1 SSST-LS81 Lssl-OSSs 1 OSST- OSs
“SUV OLA
15
MEMBERS.* FELLOWS. {tAbbott, G. A., Grand Forks, N. Dak............ aM Seated 41908 Professor of Chemistry, University of North Dakota. Chemistry. Mey mRowentiws. (Orono; Nie... .06. ae ee eielatacdeue wecl ss bootamn otto see 1898
President of University of Maine. Mathematics and General Science.
Anderson, H. W., 1 Mills Place, Crawfordsville, Ind Professor of Botany, Wabash College.
Botany.
Andrews, F. M., 744 E. Third St., Bloomington, Ind................ 1911 Assistant Professor of Botany, Indiana University.
Botany.
Arthur, Joseph C., 915 Columbia St., Lafayette, Ind................ 1894 Professor of Vegetable Physiology and Pathology, Purdue Uni-
versity. Botany.
Barnard, H. H., Room 20 State House, Indianapolis, Ind Chemist to Indiana State Board of Health. Chemistry, Sanitary Science, Pure Foods.
Blanchard, William M., 1008 S. College Ave., Greencastle, Ind....... Professor of Chemistry, DePauw University, Greencastle, Ind. Organic Chemistry.
Beede, Joshua W., cor. Wall and Atwater Sts., Bloomington, Ind..... 1896 Associate Professor of Geology, Indiana University.
Stratigraphic Geology, Physiography.
*K very effort has been made to obtain the correct address and occupation of each member, and to learn what fine of science he is interested in. The first line contains the name and address; the second line the occupation; the third line the branch of science in which he is interested. The omission of an address indicates that mail addressed to the last printed address was returned as uncalled for. Information as to the present address of members so indicated is requested by the secretary. The custom of dividing the list of members has been followed.
tDate of election.
ttNon-resident.
16
Benton, George W., 100 Washington Square, New York, N. Y....... 1896 Editor in Chief, American Book Company. Bion eyecATTanew ose LOOres, EL ie tenn 0: otis sie eo ete eee ies 1897
President and Professor of Biology and Geology, Moores Hill College. Biology and Geology. BinnineCatharinerGoldens Wiashinetona Ds. ve ns 1895 Microscopic Expert, Pure Food, National Canners Laboratory.
Botany. Blatchley, W.S., 1558 Park Ave., Indianapolis, Ind................ 1893 Naturalist.
Botany, Entomology and Geology.
Bodine, Donaldson, Four Mills Place, Crawfordsville, Ind........... 1899 Professor of Geology and Zoology, Wabash College. Entomology and Geology.
Breeze, Fred J., care American Book Company, New York, N. Y.... 1910 With the American Book Company. Geography.
Bruner, Henry Lane, 324 S. Ritter Ave., Indianapolis, Ind.......... 1899 Professor of Biology, Butler College. Comparative Anatomy, Zoology.
Bivens \yWailllinewan Ibrox, \Bilkoyormmriavernorn, InG@l do. oA dace oseces sco anos President Indiana University. Psychology.
Burrage, Severance, care Eli Lilly Co., Indianapolis, Ind............ 1898 Charge of Biological Laboratory, Eli Lilly Co. Bacteriology, Sanitary Science.
Butler, Amos W., 52 Downey Ave., Irvington, Ind................. 1893 Secretary, Indiana Board of State Charities. Vertebrate Zoology, Anthropology, Sociology.
Cogshall, Wilbur A., 423 S. Fess Ave., Bloomington, Ind............ 1906 Associate Professor of Astronomy, Indiana University. Astronomy and Physics.
Coole IMMGELANQ. ING Bivins abel INTs Ualeetelies 6 beets acablels csicele snk < 1902 Professor of Plant Pathology, Rutgers College. Botany, Plant Pathology, Entomology.
Coulter, John M., care University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill........... 1893 Head Department of Botany, Chicago, University. Botany.
Coulter, Stanley, 213 S. Ninth St., Lafayette, Ind.................. 1893
Dean School of Science, Purdue University. Botany, Forestry.
Coxulilysses!O- 32) OBox Sl, Merre Hautes Inds. 2.2 ase a2. - ee 1908 Head Department Zoology and Botany, Indiana State Normal. Botany, Zoology.
Culbertson Glennwhanoverdndeews see bee Oe eee eee 1899 Chair Geology, Physics and Astronomy, Hanover College.
Geology.
Cumings, Edgar Roscoe, 327 E. Second St., Bloomington, Ind....... 1906 Professor of Geology, Indiana University.
Geology, Paleontology.
Davisson, Schuyler Colfax, Bloomington, Ind...................... 1908 Professor of Mathematics, Indiana University.
Mathematics.
Weama@hbarlesiC:yBhititon: lind oss 2 ee ae Si on eee 1910 Druggist.
Botany.
Benniss Davide orth, hiehmond nds 444.6 4s oes cee ee 1895 Professor of Biology, Earlham College.
Biology...
Dryer, Charles R., Oak Knoll, Fort Wayne, Ind.........-.....4.-.. 1897 Geographer.
DutecheryJss se bloomimnetons Linde = ceric a ceteris ioe ers er oneiers eae Assistant Professor of Physics, Indiana Un:rversity.
Physics.
Eigenmann, Carl H., 630 Atwater St., Bloomington, Ind............ 1893 Professor Zoology, Dean of Graduate School, Indiana University. Embryology, Degeneration, Heredity, Evolution and Distribution
of American Fish.
finders, Howard Edwin, 105 Quincy St., Lafayette, Ind............. 1912 Associate Professor of Zoology, Purdue University.
Zoology.
5084—2
18
Hivansrercy Norton, latayetta winds. nine oss tn a et uae cesar 1901 Director of Chemical Laboratory, Purdue University.
Chemistry.
Molen, Awana Wee, ladkoyoyenoreanoyel, Wael, jy. 5 555 ans con eannge nse co 1897 Head of Department of Physics, Indiana University. Physies.
Golden’ Nie3: Liatavetter Un diexc yc. 4. ok aca ee ae ee ee 1899 Director of Laboratories of Practical Mechanies, Purdue Uni-
versity.
Mechanics.
Tiers Vavilllieian Mixeernornel IME (UieoRnaR Whoo ssoncoce nono 7o 50077] . 1893 Dean of College of Engineering, University of Illinois.
lnlavemerriny, IML, 1B, [Blkeyorammnstiom, Wine), .. s¢sesccc0cnnecounsccsuee 1913
Hathaway, Arthur S., 2206 N. Tenth St., Terre Haute, Ind.......... 1895
Professor of Mathematics, Rose Polytechnic Institute. Mathematics, Physics.
lnlegsiigie, IRoloerin ILeeains joi, WnGl. 55 ghcncoenemoneadooosoonseduuede 1899 Physician. Biology. Hilliard, C. M., Simmons College, Boston, Mass................... 1913 louie, GeO. INic, West Wanienvene®, lal. .o5555acenaceoeoocuccouuse- 1913 leluseinys ds INin5 lhacheimeyoollis, Maelo, 5 Soden soccookoasouconuvoudouone 1910
Secretary, Indiana State Board of Health. Sanitary Science, Vital Statistics, Eugenics. TEtuston al Ae iNew Work (itive. ie iene ee en eleanor mene 1893 byes Roscoe vayantondreilerrenblariie mses eri oie inna enna anne: Assistant Professor, Physiology and Zoology, Indiana State Normal. Zoology, Physiology, Bacterialogy. Kenyon, Alfred Monroe, 315 University St., West Lafayette, Ind..... Professor of Mathematics, Purdue University.
Mathematics.
Kern-ehiranikea Dis Statex@ ollese ances cence ee eierh re) einen nest 1912 Professor of Botany, Pennsylvania State College. Botany.
Lyons, Robert H., 630 E. Third St., Bloomington, Ind.............. 1896
Head of Department of Chemistry, Indiana University. Organic and Biological Chemistry.
McBeth, William A., 1905 N. Eighth St., Terre Haute, Ind.......... 1904 Assistant Professor Geography, Indiana State Normal. Geography, Geology, Scientific Agriculture.
WNEAEStCrS OV ae Dem oamitacOs CMG s: 64... kek es Sela Pate a eek ate 1893
Micesm@ sh MerrenElautes Imi, 2s hk ack. oe eb oak le bees eae ee 1894 President of Rose Polytechnic Institute.
Middleton, A. R., West Lafayette, Ind Professor of Chemistry, Purdue University. Chemistry.
7Miller, John Anthony, Swarthmore, Pa........................... 1904 Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy, Swarthmore College. Astronomy, Mathematics.
Moenkhaus, William J., 501 Fess Ave., Bloomington, Ind........... 1901 Professor of Physiology, Indiana University. Physiology.
IMl@Ge, IRielakai! 1B IDremrerny (COO. . ss snchancoucccuacuuceusucgccuc 1893 With U.S. Bureau of Mines. Chemistry, Radio-activity.
Morrison, Edwin, 80 8S. W. Seventh St., Richmond................. Professor of Physics, Karlham College. Physies and Chemistry.
Mottier, David M., 215 Forest Place, Bloomington, Ind............. 1893
Professor of Botany, Indiana University. Morphology, Cytology.
Nal or eeland Greencastle wslindn= aie, pr wet eas oneness eed tee 1903 Professor of Physics, Depauw University. Physics, Mathematics.
Nieuwland, J. N., The University, Notre Dame, Ind... ............ Professor of Botany, Editor Midland, Naturalist. Systematic Botany, Plant Histology, Organic Chemistry.
TNiowes, \WWrailllieyin /ANllovertk Wiropins WMS ese oo secasconoscdaseousuocas- 1893 Director of Chemical Laboratory, University of Illinois. Chemistry.
Pohlman, Augustus G., 1100 E. Second St., Bloomington, Ind........ 1911
Professor of Anatomy, Indiana University. Embryology, Comparative Anatomy.
20
Ramsey, Rolla R., 615 KE. Third St., Bloomington, Ind...........
Associate Professor of Physies, Indiana University.
Physics.
Ransom, James H., 323 University St., West Lafayette, Ind.........
Professor of General Chemistry, Purdue University.
General Chemistry, Organic Chemistry, Teaching.
Rettger, Louis J., 31 Gilbert Ave., Terre Haute, Ind......./.......-
Professor of Physiology, Indiana State Normal. Animal Physiology.
Rothrock, David A., Bloomington, Ind............... Bete abs salty:
Professor of Mathematics, Indiana University. Mathematies.
Scott, Will, 731 Atwater St., Bloomington, Ind..................:..
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Indiana University. Zoology, Lake Problems.
Sloewaoin, Cligralles: Wo, IWioremein, OUIR), 25254545 5ceobreseccoe seen
With Oklahoma State Geological Survey. Soil Survey, Botany.
Smith, Albert, 1022 Seventh St., West Lafayette...................
Professor of Structura] Engineering. Physics, Mechanics.
7iSmith, Alexander, care Columbia University, New York, N. Y.....
Head of Department of Chemistry, Columbia University. Chemistry.
Smith, Charles Marquis, 910 S. Ninth St., Lafayette, Ind...........
Professor of Physics, Purdue University. Physics.
Stone, Winthrop He Wlatayette, Umde 2 2. sass eee alee ae ee oe 4 AAO le
President of Purdue University. Chemistry.
TiAl, AOSey OM, wen MEMOIRS, JER ghost as cusnuaaccoucdsesunes eso
President of Swarthmore College. Science of Administration..
Van Hook, James M., 639 N. College Ave., Bloomington, Ind........
Assistant Professor of Botany, Indiana University. Botany.
—
1906
1902
1896
1906
1911
1912
1908
1895
1912
1893
1898
LET
Wade, Frank Bertran, 1039 W. Twenty-seventh St., Indianapolis, Ind. Head of Chemistry Department, Shortridge High School. Chemistry Physics, Geology and Mineralogy.
77Waldo, Clarence A., care Washington University, St. Louis, Mo.... 1893 Thayer Professor Mathematics and Applied Mechanics, Washing-
ton University.
Mathematics, Mechanics, Geology and Mineralogy.
TID cbstermy BS IMieekensine con Ms LEP ag: os ce ete oe es 1894 Entomologist, U. S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
Entomology.
Westland, Jacob, 439 Salisbury St., West Lafayette, Ind............ 1904 Professor of Mathematics, Purdue University. Mathematics.
Wiley, Harvey W., Cosmos Club, Washington, D. C................ 1895
Professor of Agricultural Chemistry, George Washington Uni- versity.
Biological and Agricultural Chemistry.
Woollen, William Watson, Indianapolis, IJInd.................. 1908 Lawyer. Birds and Nature Study.
Wright, John S., care Eli Lilly Co., Indianapolis, Ind............... 1894
Manager of Advertising Department, Eli Lilly Co. Botany.
NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.
Ashley, George H., Washington, D. C.
Bain, H. Foster, London, England. Editor Mining Magazine.
Branner, John Casper, Stanford University, California. Vice-President of Stanford University, and Professor of Geology. Geology.
Brannon, Melvin A., President University of Idaho, Boise, Ida. Professor of Botany.
Plant Breeding.
Campbell, D. H., Stanford University, California. Professor of Botany, Stanford University. Botany.
22
Clark, Howard Walton, U. S. Biological Station, Fairport, lowa. Scientific Assistant, U. S. Bureau of Fisheries.
Botany, Zoology.
Dorner, H. B., Urbana, Illinois.
Assistant Professor of Floriculture. Botany, Floriculture.
Duff, A. Wilmer, 43 Harvard St., Worcester, Mass. Professor of Physies, Worcester Polytechnic Institute. Physics.
Evermann, Barton Warren, Director Museum.
California Academy of Science, Golden Gate Park, San Francisco, Cal. Zoology.
Fiske, W. A. Los Angeles, Cal., Methodist College.
Garrett, Chas. W., Room 718 Pennsylvania Station, Pittsburgh, Pa. Librarian, Pennsylvania Lines West of Pittsburgh. Entomology, Sanitary Sciences.
Gilbert, Charles H., Stanford University, California.
Professor of Zoology, Stanford University. Ichthyology.
Greene, Charles Wilson, 814 Virginia Ave., Columbia, Mo. Professor of Physiology and Pharmacology, University of Missouri. Physiology, Zoology.
Hargitt, Chas. W., 909 Walnut Ave., Syracuse. N. Y.
Professor of Zoology, Syrcause University. Hygiene, Embryology, Eugenics, Animal Behavior.
Hay, Oliver Perry, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Research Associate, Carnegie Institute of Washington. Vetebrate Paleontology, especially that of the Pleistocene Epock.
Hughes, Edward, Stockton, California.
Jenkins, Oliver P., Stanford University, California.
Professor of Physiology, Stanford University. Physiology, Histology.
Jordan, David Starr, Stanford University. California.
President Emeritus of Stanford University. Fish, Eugenics, Botany, Evolution.
23
Kingsley, J. S., University of Illinois, Champaign, III. Professor of Zoology. Zoology.
Knipp, Charles T., 915 W. Nevada St., Urbana, Illinois. Assistant Professor of Physies, University of Illinois. Physics, Discharge of Electricity through Gases. MacDougal, Daniel Trembly, Tucson, Arizona. Director, Department of Botanical Research, Carnegie Institute, Wash- ington, D.C. Botany. MeMullen, Lynn Banks, State Normal School, Valley City, North Dakota.
Head Science Department, State Normal School. Physies, Chemistry.
Mendenhall, Thomas Corwin, Ravenna, Ohio. Retired. Physies. “‘Hngineering,’’ Mathematics, Astronomy.
Moore, George T., St. Louis, Mo. Director Missouri Botanical Garden.
Newsom, J. F., Palo Alto, California. Mining Engineer.
Purdue, Albert Homer, State Geological Survey, Nashville, Tenn. State Geologist of Tennessee.
Geology.
Reagan, A. B.
Superintendent Deer Creek Indian School, Ibapah, Utah. Geology, Paleontology, Ethnology.
Slonaker, James Rollin, 334 Kingsley Ave., Palo Alto, California. Assistant Professor of Physiology, Stanford University. Physiology, Zoology.
Springer, Alfred, 312 Hast 2d St., Cincinnati, Ohio.
Chemist. Chemistry.
24
ACTIVE MEMBERS. Aldrich, John Merton, M. D., S. Grant St., West Lafayette, Ind. Zoology and Entomology. Allen, William Ray, Bloomington, Ind. Allison, Evelyn, Lafayette, Ind. Care Agricultural Experiment Station.
Botany.
Anderson, Flora Charlotte, Wellesley College, Wellesley, Mass. Botany.
Arndt, Charles H., Lafayette, Ind. Biology.
Atkinson, F. C., Indianapolis. Chemistry.
Baderscher, J. A., Bloomington, Ind. Anatomy.
Baker, George A., South Bend. Archaeology.
Baker, Walter D., N. Illinois St., Indianapolis, Ind. Care Walderaft Co. Chemistry. Baker, Walter M., Amboy. Superintendent of Schools. Mathematics and Physics. Baker, William Franklin, Indianapolis. Medicine. Baleom, H. C., Indianapolis. Botany. Baldwin, Russell, Richmond, Ind. Physies. Banker, Howard J., Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. Botany. Barcus, H. H., Indianapolis. Instructor, Mathematics, Shortridge High School. Barr, Harry L., Waveland. Student. Botany and Forestry.
25
Barrett, Edward, Indianapolis. State Geologist.
Geology, Soil Survey.
Bates, W. H., 306 Russell St., West Lafayette. Associate Professor, Mathematics.
Beals, Colonzo C., Russiaville, Ind.
Botany.
Bell, Guido, 431 E. Ohio St., Indianapolis. Physician.
Bellamy, Ray, Worcester, Mass.
Bennett, Lee F., 825 Laporte Ave., Valparaiso. Professor of Geology and Zoology, Valparaiso University. Geology, Zoology.
Berry, O. C., West Lafayette.
Engineering.
Berteling, John B., South Bend. Medicine.
Binford, Harry, Earlham.
Zoology.
Bisby, Guy Richard, Lafayette, Ind. Botany.
Bishop, Harry Eldridge, 1706 College Ave., Indianapolis. Food Chemist, Indiana State Board of Health.
Blew, Michael James, R. R. 1, Wabash. Chemistry and Botany.
Bliss, G. S., Ft. Wayne.
Medicine.
Blose, Joseph, Culerville, Ind. Physies.
Bond, Charles S., 112 N. Tenth St., Richmond. Physician.
Biology, Bacteriology, Physical Diagnosis and Photomicrography. Bourke, A. Adolphus, 1103 Cottage Ave., Columbus.
Instructor, Physics, Zoology and Geography.
Botany, Physies. Bowles, Adam L., Terre Haute.
Zoology.
26
Bowers, Paul E., Michigan City. Medicine.
Breckinridge, James M., Crawfordsville. Chemistry.
Brossman, Charles, 1616 Merchants Bank Bldg., Indianapolis. Consulting Engineer.
Water Supply, Sewage Dispasol, Sanitary Engineering, ete.
Brown, James, 5372 E. Washington St., Indianapolis. Professor of Chemistry, Butler College. Chemistry.
Brown, Paul H., Richmond. Physies.
Brown, Hugh E., Bloomington, Ind.
Bruce, Edwin M., 2401 North Ninth St., Terre Haute. Assistant Professor’ of Physics and Chemistry, Indiana State Normal. Chemistry, Physies.
Butler, Eugene, Richmond, Ind.
Physies and Mathematics.
Bybee, Halbert P., Bloomington. Graduate Student, Indiana University. Geology.
Canis, Edward N., 2221 Park Ave., Indianapolis. Officeman with William B. Burford. Botany, Psychology.
Caparo, Jose Angel, Notre Dame. Physies and Mathematics.
Carlyle, Paul J., Bloomington. Chemistry.
Carmichael, R. D., Bloomington. Assistant Professor of Mathematics, Indiana University. Mathematics.
Carr, Ralph Howard, Lafayette. Chemistry.
Carter, Floyd R., Frankport, Ind. Botany.
Caswell, Albert E., Lafayette.
Instructor in Physics, Purdue Unviersity.
Physies and Applied Mathematics. Chansler, Elias J., Bicknell.
Farmer.
Ornithology and Mammals.
Clark, George Lindenburg, Greencastle, DePauw University. Chemistry.
Clark, Elbert Howard, West Lafayette.
Mathematics.
Clark, Jediah H., 126 Kast Fourth St., Connersville.
Physician. Medicine.
Clarke, Elton Russell, Indianapolis. Zoology.
Collins, Jacob Roland, West Lafayette, Purdue University. Instructor in Physies.
Conner, S. D., West Lafayette.
Coryell, Noble H., Bloomington.
Chemistry.
Cotton, William J., 5363 University Ave., ludianapolis. Physics and Chemistry.
Cox, William Clifford.
Crampton, Charles, Bloomington, Ind.
Psychology.
Crowell, Melvin E., 648 E. Monroe St., Franklin. Dean of Franklin College.
Chemistry and Physies.
Cutter, George, Broad Branch Road, Washington, D. C. Reti ed Manufacturer of Elect:ical Supplies. Conchology.
Daniels, Lorenzo H., Rolling Prairie.
Retired Farmer. Conchology.
Davis, A. B., Indianapolis, Ind. With Eli Lilly and Company. Chemistry.
28
Davis, D. W., Greencastle. Biology.
Davis, Ernest A., Notre Dame. Chemistry.
Davis, Melvin K., Anderson.
Instruetor, Anderson High School.
Physiography, Geology, Climatology. Dean, John C., Indianapolis.
Astronomy.
Deppe, C. R., Franklin.
Dewey, Albert H., West Lafayette. Department of Pharmacy, Purdue University.
Dietz, Harry F., 408 W. Twenty-eighth St., Indianapolis. Deputy State Entomologist.
Entomology, Eugenics, Parasitology, Plant Pathology.
Dolan, Jos. P., Syracuse.
Donaghy, Fred, Ossian.
Botany.
Dostal, Bernard F., Bloomington. Physies.
Downhoour, 2307 Talbot Ave., Indianapolis, Ind. Geology and Botany.
Drew, David Abbott, 817 East Second St., Bloomington, Ind. Instructor in Mechanics and Astronomy. Astronomy, Mechanics, Mathematics and Applied Mathematics.
DuBois, Henry, Bloomington, Ind.
Duden, Hans A., 5050 EH. Washington St., Indianapolis. Analytical Chemist.
Chemistry.
Dunean, David Christie, West Lafayette. Instructor in Physics, Purdue University.
Dutcher, J. B., Bloomington,
Assistant Professor of Physics, Indiana University. Physies.
Karp, Samuel E., 242 Kentucky Ave., Indianapolis. Physician.
Hasley, Mary, Bloomington, Ind.
Edmonston, Clarence E., Bloomington.
Graduate Student, Physiology, Indiana University. Physiology.
Edwards, Carlton, EKarlham College, Earlham.
Ellis, Max Mapes, Boulder, Colo.
Instructor in Biology, University of Colorado. Biology, Entomology.
Emerson, Charles P., Hume-Mansur Bldg., Indianapolis. Dean Indiana University Medical College. Medicine.
Kssex, Jesse Lyle, 523 Russell st., West Lafayette, Ind. Chemistry.
Evans, Samuel G., 1452 Upper Second St., Evansville. Merchant.
Botany, Ornithology.
Ewers, James H., Terre Haute. Instructor in High School. Geology.
Felver, William P., 3253 Market St., Logansport. Railroad Clerk.
Geology, Chemistry.
Fisher, Homer Glenn, Bloomington. Zoology.
Fisher, Martin L., Lafayette.
Professor of Crop Production, Purdue University. Agriculture, Soils, and Crops, Birds, Botany.
Foresman, George Kedgie, Lafayette, Purdue University. Chemistry.
Frier, George M., Lafayette.
Assistant Superintendent, Agricultural Experiment Station, Purdue University. Botany, Zoology, Entomology, Ornithology, Geology. Fulk, Murl E., Decatur. Anatomy.
Fuller, Frederick D., 215 Russell St., West Lafayette. Chief Deputy State Chemist, Purdue Experiment Station. Chemistry, Microscopy.
30
Funk, Austin, 404 Spring St., Jeffersonville. Physician. Diseases of Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat. Galloway, Jesse James, Bloomington. Instruction, Indiana University. Geology, Paleontology. Garner, J. B., Mellon Institute, Pittsburgh, Pa. Chemistry. Gatch, Willis D., Indianapolis, Indiana University Medical School. Anatomy. Gates, Florence A., 3435 Detroit Ave., Toledo, Ohio. Teacher of Botany. Botany and Zoology. Gidley, William, West Lafayette. Department of Pharmacy, Purdue University. Gillum, Robert G., Terre Haute, Ind. Glenn, E. R., Froebel School, Gary, Ind. Physies. Goldsmith, Wiliam Marion, Oakland City. Zoology. Gottlieb, Frederic W., Morristown. Care Museum of Natural History. Assistant Curator, Moores Hill College. Archaeology, Ethnology. Grantham, Guy E., 437 Vine St., West Lafayette. Instructor in Physics, Purdue University. Graybook, Irene, New Albany, Ind. Botany. Greene, Frank C., Missouri Bureau of Geology and Mines, Rolla, Mo. Geologist. Geology. Grimes, Earl J., Russellville. Care U. S. Soil Survey. Botany, Soil Survey. Hamill, Samuel Hugh, 119 E. Fourth St., Bloomington. Chemistry.
dl
Hammerschmidt, Louis M., South Bend. Science of Law.
Happ, William, South Bend.
Botany.
Harding, C. Francis 111 Fowler Ave., West Lafayette. Professor of Electrical Engineering, Purdue University. Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry.
Harman, Mary T., 611 Laramie St., Manhattan, Kansas. Instructor in Zoology, Kansas State Agricultural College. Zoology.
Harman, Paul M., Bloomington.
Geology.
Harmon, Paul, Bloomington, Ind. Physiology.
Harvey, R. B., Indianapolis.
Heimburger, Harry V., 701 West Washington St., Urbana, Ill. Assistant in Zoology, University of Illinois.
Heimlich, Louis Frederick, 703 North St., Lafayette. Biology.
Hendricks, Victor K., 855 Benton Ave., Springfield, Mo. Assistant Chief Engineer, St. L. & S. F. R. R.
Civil Engineering and Wood Preservation.
Henn, Arthur Wilbur, Bloomington.
Zoology.
Hennel, Cora, Bloomington, Ind.
Hennel, Edith A., Bloomington, Ind.
Hetherington, John P., 418 Fourth St., Logansport. Physician.
Medicine, Surgery, X-Ray, Electro-Therapeutics.
Hinman, J. J., Jr., University of Iowa, lowa City, Ia. Chemist, Dept. Public Health and Hygiene. Chemistry.
Hoge, Mildred, Kirkwood, Bloomington, Ind.
Zoology.
Hole, Allen D., Richmond. Professor Earlham College. Geology.
o2
Hostetler, W. F., South Bend. Geography and Indian History. Hubbard, Lucius M., South Bend.
Lawyer.
Huber, Leonard L., Hanover, Ind. Zoology.
Hufford, Mason E., Bloomington. Physics.
Hurd, Cloyd C., Crawfordsville, Ind. Zoology.
Hutchins, Chas. P., Buffalo, N. Y. Athleties.
Hutchinson, Emory, Atwater St., Bloomington, Ind. Zoology.
Hutton, Joseph Gladden, Brookings, South Dakota. Associate Professor of Agronomy, State College. Agronomy, Geology.
Hyde, Carl Clayton, Bloomington, Ind.
Geology.
Hyslop, George, Bloomington, Ind. Philosophy.
Ibison, Harry M., Marion.
Instructor in Science, Marion High School.
Iddings, Arthur, Hanover.
Geology.
Imel, Herbert, South Bend. Zoology.
Inman, Ondess L., Bloomfield. Botany.
Irving, Thos.-P., Notre Dame. Physies.
Jackson, D. E., St. Louis, Mo.
Assistant Professor, Pharmacology, Washington University.
Jackson, Herbert Spencer, 127 Waldron St., Lafayette, Ind. Botany.
Jackson, Thomas F., Bloomington.
Geology.
Bis)
James, Glenn, West Lafayette. Mathematics. Johnson, A. G., Madison, Wisconsin. Jones, Wm. J., Jr., Lafayette. State Chemist, Professor of Agriculture and Chemistry, Purdue Uni- versity. Chemistry, and general subjects relating to agriculture. Jordan, Charles Bernard, West Lafayette. Director School of Pharmacy, Purdue University. Koezmarek, Regedius M., Notre Dame.
Biology. Keubler, John Ralph, 110 E. Fourth St., Bloomington. Chemistry.
vonKleinsmid, R. B., Tucson, Ariz.
Koch, Edward, Bloomington. Physiology.
President University of Arizona.
Krewers, H., Crawfordsville, Ind. Chemistry.
Liebers, Paul J., 1104 Southeastern Ave., Indianapolis.
Ludwig, C. A., 210 Waldron St., West Lafayette, Ind. Assistant in Botany, Purdue University.
Botany, Agriculture. Ludy, L. V., 229 University St., Lafayette. Professor Experimental Engineering, Purdue University. Experimental Engineering in Steam and Gas. Malott, Clyde A., Bloomington. Physiology. Marshall, E. C., Bloomington. Chemistry. Mason, Preston Walter, Lafayette, Ind. Entomology.
Mason, T. E., 226 S. Grant St., Lafayette, Ind. Instructor Mathematics Purdue University. Mathematics.
McBride, John F., 340 S. Ritter Ave., Indianapolis, Ind. Chemistry.
5084—3
34
McBride, Robert W., 1239 State Life Building, Indianapolis. Lawyer.
McCartney, Fred J., Bloomington.
Philosophy.
McClellan, John H., Gary, Ind.
McCulloch, T. S., Charlestown.
McEwan, Mrs. Eula Davis, Bloomington, Ind.
McGuire, Joseph, Notre Dame.
Chemistry.
Mance, Grover C., Bloomington, Ind.
Markle, M. S., Richmond.
Miller, Daniel T., Indiana University, Bloomington. Anatomy.
Miller, Fred A., 3641 Kenwood Ave., Indianapolis. Botanist for Eli Lilly Co.
Botany, Plant Breeding.
Molby, Fred A., Bloomington, Ind. Physics.
Montgomery, Ethel, South Bend. Physics.
Montgomery, Hugh T., South Bend. Physician.
Geology.
Moon, V. H., Indianapolis. Pathology.
Moore, George T., St. Louis, Mo. Director, Missouri Botanical Garden. Botany.
Morris, Barclay D., Spiceland Academy, Spiceland. Science.
Morrison, Harold, Indianapolis, Ind.
Mowrer, Frank Karlsten, Interlaken, New York. Co-operative work with Cornell University. Biology, Plant Breeding.
Muncie, F. W.
Murray, Thomas J., West Lafayette.
Bacteriology.
Myers, B. D., 321 N. Washington St., Bloomington. Professor of Anatomy, Indiana University.
Nelson, Ralph Emory, 419 Vine St., West Lafayette. Chemistry.
North, Cecil C., Greencastle.
Northnagel, Mildred, Gary, Ind.
Oberholzer, H. C., U. S. Department Agriculture, Washington, D. C. Biology.
O’Neal, Claude E., Bloomington, Ind. Graduate Student, Botany, Indiana University. Botany.
Orahood, Harold, Kingman. Geology.
Orton, Clayton R., State College, Pennsylvania. Assistant Professor of Botany, Pennsylvania State College. Phytopathology, Botany, Mycology, Bacteriology.
Osner, G. A., Ithaca, New York.
Care Agricultural College.
Owen, D. A., 200 South State St., Franklin. Professor of Biology. (Retired.) Biology.
Owens, Charles E., Corvallis, Oregon. Instructor in Botany, Oregon Agricultural College. Botany.
Payne, Dr. F., Bloomington, Ind.
Peffer, Harvey Creighton, West Lafayette. Chemical Engineering.
Petry, Edward Jacob, 267 Wood St., West Lafayette. Instructor in Agriculture.
Botany, Plant Breeding, Plant Pathology, Bio-Chemistry.
Phillips, Cyrus G., Moores Hill.
Pickett, Fermen L., Bloomington.
Botany Critic, Indiana University Training School. Botany, Forestry, Agriculture. Pipal, F. J., 11 S. Salisbury St., West Lafayette. Powell, Horace, West Terre Haute. Zoology.
36
Prentice, Burr, N. 216 Sheetz, West Lafayette. Forestry. Price, James A., Fort Wayne.
Ramsey, Earl E., Bloomington. Principal High School.
Ramsey, Glenn Blaine, Orono, Me.
Botany.
Reese, Charles C., 225 Sylvia St., West Lafayette. Botany.
Rhinehart, D. A., Bloomington. Anatomy.
Rice, Thurman Brooks, Winona Lake. Botany. Schaeffer, Robert G., 508 E. Third St., Bloomington. Chemistry. Schnell, Charles M., South Bend. Earth Science. Schultz, E. A., Laurel. Fruit Grower. Bacteriology, Fungi. Schierling, Roy H., Bloomington. Shimer, Dr. Will, Indianapolis. Director, State Laboratory of Hygiene. Shockel, Barnard, Professor State Normal, Terre Haute, Ind. Showalter, Ralph W., Indianapolis. With Eli Lilly & Company. Biology. Sigler, Richard, Terre Haute. Physiology. Silvey, Oscar W., 437 Vine St., West Lafayette. Instructor in Physics. Physies. Smith, Chas. Piper, College Park, Md. Associate Professor, Botany, Maryland Agricultural College. Botany. Smith, Essie Alma, R. F. D. 6, Bloomington.
of
Smith, E. R., Indianapolis. Horticulturist.
Smith, William W., West Lafayette, Genetics. Biology.
Snodgrass, Robert, Crawfordsville, Ind.
Southgate, Helen A., Michigan City.
Physiography and Botany.
Spitzer, George, Lafayette. Dairy Chemist, Purdue University. Chemistry.
Stech, Charles, Bloomington. Geology.
Steele, B. L., Pullman, Washington.
Associate Professor of Physics, State College, Washington.
Steimley, Leonard, Bloomington.
Mathematics.
Stickles, A. E., Indianapolis. Chemistry.
Stoltz, Charles, 530 N. Lafayette St., South Bend. Physician.
Stoddard, J. M.
Stone, Ralph Bushnell, West Lafayette. Mathematics.
Stork, Harvey. Elmer, Huntingburg.
Botany.
Stuart, M. H., 3223 N. New Jersey St., Indianapolis. Principal, Manual Training High School. Physical and Biological Science.
Sturmer, J. W., 119 E. Madison Ave., Collingswood, N. J. Dean, Department of Pharmacy, Medico-Chirurgical College of Phila-
delphia. Chemistry, Botany.
Taylor, Joseph C., Logansport. Wholesale merchant.
Terry, Oliver P., West Lafayette. Physiology.
38
Tetrault, Philip Armand, West Lafayette. Biology.
Thompson, Albert W., Owensville. Merchant.
Geology. Thompson, Clem O., Salem. Principal High School. Thornburn, A. D., Indianapolis. Care Pitman-Moore Co. Chemistry.
Travelbee, Harry C., 504 Oak St., West Lafayette. Botany.
Troop, James, Lafayette.
Entomology.
Trueblood, Iro C. (Miss), 205 Spring Ave., Greencastle. Teacher of Botany, Zoology, High School.
Botany, Zoology, Physiography, Agriculture.
Tucker, Forest Glen, Bloomington.
Geology.
Tucker, W. M., 841 Third St., Chico, California. Principal High School.
Geology.
Turner, William P., Lafayette.
Professor of Preatical Mechanics, Purdue University.
Vallance, Chas. A., Indianapolis.
Instructor, Manual Training High School. Chemistry.
Van Doran, Dr., Earlham College, Richmond. Chemistry.
Van Nuys, W. C., Neweastle.
Voorhees, Herbert S., 2814 Hoagland Ave., Fort Wayne. Instructor in Chemistry and Botany, Fort Wayne High School. Chemistry and Botany.
Walters, Arthur L., Indianapolis.
Warren, Don Cameron, Bloomington. Ind.
Waterman, Luther D., Claypool Hotel, Indianapolis. Physician.
Webster, L. B., Terre Haute, Ind. Weatherwax, Paul, Bloomington, Ind. Weems, M. L., 102 Garfield Ave., Valparaiso. Professor of Botany. Botany and Human Physiology. Weir, Daniel T., Indianapolis. Supervising Principal, care School office. School Work. Weyant, James E., Indianapolis. Teacher of Physics, Shortridge High School. Physies. Wheeler, Virges, Montmorenci. Whiting, Rex Anthony, 118 Marsteller St., West Lafayette. Veterinary. Wiancko, Alfred T., Lafayette. Chief in Soils and Crops, Purdue University. Agronomy. Wicks, Frank Scott Corey, Indianapolis. Sociology. Wiley, Ralph Benjamin, West Lafayette. Hydraulic Engineering, Purdue University. Williams, Kenneth P., Bloomington. Instructor in Mathematics, Indiana University. Mathematics, Astronomy. Williamson, EK. B. Bluffton. Cashier, The Wells County Bank. Dragonflies. Wilson, Charles E., Bloomington. Graduate Student, Zoology, Indiana University. Zoology. Wilson, Mrs. Etta, 1044 Congress Ave., Indianapolis, Ind. Botany and Zoology. Wilson, Guy West, Assistant Professor Mycology and Plant Pathology, State University, Iowa City, Ia. Wissler, W. A., Bloomington. Chemistry.
40
Wood, Harry W., 84 North Ritter Ave., Indianapolis. Teacher, Manual Training High School.
Wood, Harvey Geer, West Lafayette, Ind.
Physics.
Woodburn, Wm. L., 902 Asbury Ave.. Evanston. IIL Instructor in Botany, Northwestern University. Botany and Bacteriology.
Woodhams, John H., care Houghton Mifflin Co., Chicago, Ill. Traveling Salesman.
Mathematics.
Wootery, Ruth, Bloomington, Ind.
Yocum, H. B., Crawfordsville.
Young, Gilbert A.. 725 Highland Ave., Lafayette.
Head of Department of Mechanical Engineering, Purdue University.
Zehring, William Arthur, 303 Russell St., West Lafayette. Assistant Professor of Mathematics, Purdue University. Mathematies.
Zeleny, Charles, University of Illinois, Urbana, IIl. Associate Professor of Zoology.
Zoology. Zufall, C. J., Indianapolis, Ind.
1 1 fe CT ee aL eR ge PhONa SONNE ey. Rink, es hai sO Members, Aetive...........- eet tds tute oo Se ee 277 IMethiers) Mer resident oc: (22: S28 ti one ct ee eee eee 29
4]
MINUTES OF THE SPRING MEETING
OF THE
INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCKH.
BioominetTon, INDIANA, THURSDAY—SatTuRDAY, May 20-22, 1915.
The Spring meeting of the Indiana Academy of Science was held at Bloomington, Thursday to Saturday, May 20-22, 1915.
The first session was held in the Physics Lecture room in Science Hall at 8 o'clock P. M. May 20th to listen to a lecture on Electrical Discharges by Dr. A. L. Foley, Head of the Department of Physics in Indiana University It was fully illustrated. It was very interesting and instructive and greatly appreciated by the crowded house. After this lecture, the Faculty Club of the University entertained the Academy with a ““Get-Acquainted Hour” which was very pleasant.
The annual tramp had been planned for eight o’clock the next morning, but on account of a heavy rain we could not start until ten o’clock. The remainder of the day was beautiful. The route was up Rocky Branch to Griffey Creek, then up that creek and one of its branches to the University Reservoir. Examining the reservoir and pumping station was full of inter- est.
A special committee of the University Faculty arrived in advance with a picnic lunch. The meat was roasted over the blazing fires. The fifty-one persons present testified to the superior quality of this picnic dinner.
After lunch, the Academy was met by automobiles which took them to the stone district south of Bloomington. Visiting some of the quarries and mills was particularly instructive.
At seven o’clock the members had a complimentary dinner at the Com- mons. The members lingered till a late hour telling stories and making speeches.
On Saturday morning a number of the members took the train at 6:20 for Cave farm near Mitchell. On arriving at Mitchell, they encountered a severe rain-storm which continued until noon. This prevented them from going to the farm. ANDREW J. BIGNey,
Secretary.
43
Minutes or tHe Tuirty—First ANNUAL MEETING INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCH,
CiaypooLt Horen, INDIANAPOLIS, IND., December 3, 1915
The executive committee of the Indiana Academy of Science met in the Moorish Room of the Claypool Hotel and was called to order by the President, W. A. Cogshall. The following members were present: W. A. Cogshall, W. A. McBeth, A. W. Butler, Glenn Culbertson, Stanley Coulter, A. L. Foley, Severance Burrage, R. W. McBride, Will Scott, F. B. Wade, W. M. Blanchard, C. R. Dryer, J.S. Wright and A. J. Bigney. The minutes of the ~ executive committee meeting of 1914 were read and approved.
The President called for reports from the standing committees:
Program—Will Seott, chairman, reported work performed as indicated by printed program.
On motion, $100 was appropriated for the services and traveling ex- penses of Dr. C. B. Davenport of Cold Spring Harbor, New York, the princi- pal speaker at the evening session.
Treasurer—W. M. Blanchard reported as follows:
Received from Treasurer of 1914....................$241.02 GOWleG ted TOM ete ies iin 8 ore eb I eens Uni mb ec meges 225.00 AT ital lies te Nee bres aha mi eh es sro as LOE eS a ee CR $466.02 Hxpenditures=-UOW ae ee 4 no. ee oe ne ae 139.02 Iallancerrceeas tarts ihe e uquboh bie 2 sk Caen Eee 327.00 $466.02
State Library—A. W. Butler reporting—Some progress had been made toward binding exchanges. Two hundred fifty copies of the Proceedings go to Libraries. Many copies had to be returned. On motion, the committee was ordered to go over the list of applications for Proceedings so as to ascer-
+4
tain those who are in good standing, and such could receive copies. F. B. Wade reported a set of Chemical Journals at City Library. After much discussion, on motion, the committee decided that as far
as possible the Proceedings should be sent only to those who pay their dues.
Biological Survey—No report.
Distribution of Proceedings—A. J. Bigney reporting. The copies were in the hands of the State Librarian and would be mailed in a few days. Copies would be sent to the meeting so the members present could receive them.
Membership—Report to be made at general session.
Auditing—No report.
No report. Relation of the Academy to the State—R. W. McBride reporting. The appropriation of $1,200 had been made by the State.
Restriction of Weeds and Diseases
Publication of Proceedings—Editor was not present. Dr. C. R. Dryer reported that the work had been done and that they were ready for distribu- tion. On motion, it was decided that no paper should be received for publi- cation after February 1st.
Attention was called to the Pan-American Scientific Congress that would be held by the U. S. Government in Washington beginning December 29, 1915.
The incoming president, later, appointed C. H. Eigenmann of Blooming- ton as delegate, and A. W. Butler of Indianapolis as alternate.
GENERAL SESSION—1:30.
ASSEMBLY Hatt, CLuAyeoot Horen, December 3, 1915.
The Indiana Academy of Science met for its regular program, W. A. Cogshall, President, in the chair.
The minutes of the Executive Committee were read and approved. Dr. H. E. Barnard, Editor, reported that the Proceedings for 1914 had been pub- lished. He stated the great difficulty of securing the papers from the members.
On motion of A. W. Butler, the following resolution was adopted:
Wuereas, the Scientific investigations and accurate records kept by representatives of the United States Fish Commission, concerning Lake Maxinkuckee, Ind., in our opinion make the report that has been made by
45
Dr. B. W. Evermann one of the most valuable compilations that has been prepared, and
Wuerpas, we learn that the Commission is unable to publish it out of its funds, therefore
Bez IT RESOLVED, By the Indiana Academy of Science, in regular session, that we express our belief in the great value of this work, in its importance to scientific students, not only in America, but throughout the world, and in the desirability of having it published at an early date so as to be accessible, and
Br If FURTHER RESOLVED, That a committee of five (5) members be appointed to represent the Academy in an endeavor to secure the early pub- lication of this report.
On motion, the Academy appointed the following Committee: Amos W. Butler, Dr. Charles B. Stoltz, C. C. Deam, D. M. Mottier, and Glenn Culbertson.
The General Papers were then called for; “1” to “‘6’’ responded, after which the Academy went into Sectional Meetings as follows:
Section A.—Chemistry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics. W. A. Cogs- hall, Chairman, A. J. Bigney, Secretary.
Section B.—Anatomy, Bacteriology, Botany, Zoology. Stanley Coulter, Chairman, H. BH. Enders, Secretary.
Adjourned at 5:30 for dinner at the Claypool at 6:15 at which the Pres- ident’s address was read on the “Origin of the Universe.”
9:00 A. M. December 4. GENERAL SESSION.
Business—
On motion of W. M. Blanchard the following resolutions was adopted:
RESOLVED, as the sense of the Indiana Academy of Science that the Commission having in charge the matter of adequate and proper celebration of the State’s Centennial, could do no more fitting and practical thing in the way of a permanent memorial of the one hundredth anniversary of the State’s admission to the Union, than to inaugurate at this time and carry to consummation a plan to purchase, through action by the General Assembly several tracts of land in Indiana for public park purposes for the people.
On motion the following committee was appointed to carry out the pro-
46
visions of the resolution: Stanley Coulter, W. W. Woolen, and R. W. Me- Bride.
As the Historical Commission was in session in the State House, the Committee at once presented the resolution to the Commission, also to the County Chairmen of the Commission, which was also in session. It was heartily endorsed by both bodies and the Academy thanked for its interest in the proposed Centennial celebration.
A copy of this resolution to be mailed to Mr. Harlow Lindley, Depart- ment of Archives and History, Indiana State Library.
Prof. L. F. Bennett, of Valparaiso College, extended an invitation to the Academy to hold the Spring meeting of 1916 at Valparaiso. On motion, the invitation was unanimously accepted.
On motion of A. W. Butler the Academy urged that all members and all organizations with which they are connected, use their influence to prevent any legislation for changing our present Fish and Game Laws.
The Membership Committee reported the following new members:
Dr. John Merton Aldrich, S. Grant St., W. Lafayette, Ind., Zoology and Entomology.
Russell Baldwin, Richmond, Ind.. Physics.
Colonzo C. Balls, Russiaville, Ind., Botany.
Guy Richard Bisby, Lafayette, Ind.. Botany.
Joseph Blose, Culerville, Ind., Physics.
Eugene Butler, Richmond, Ind., Physics and Mathematics.
Charles Crampton, Bloomington, Ind., Psychology.
A. B. Davis, Eli Lilly & Co., Indianapolis, Ind. Chemistry.
Elizabeth Downhour, 2307 Talbott Ave., Indianapolis, Ind., Geology and Botany.
Jesse Lyle Essex, 523 Russell St., W. Lafayette, Ind., Chemistry.
Leonard L. Huber, Hanover, Ind., Zoology.
Cloyd C. Hurd, Crawfordsville, Ind., Zoology.
H. Kremers, Wabash College, Crawfordsville, Ind., Chemistry.
John F. McBride. 340 S. Ritter Ave., Indianapolis, Ind., Chemistry.
Burr N. Prentice, 216 Sheetz, W. Lafayette, Forestry.
Charles C. Rees, 225 Sylvia St., W. Lafayette, Ind., Botany.
Robert G. Schaeffer, 508 E. Third St., Bloomington, Ind., Chemistry and Botany.
Ralph W. Showalter, Eli Lilly & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., Biology.
Rex Anthony Whiting, 118 Marsteller St., W. Lafayette, Ind., Veterinary.
47
Mrs. Etta Wilson, 1044 Congress Ave., Indianapolis, Ind., Botany and Zoology.
Herbert Spencer Jackson, 127 Waldron St., Lafayette, Ind., Botany.
Emory Hutchison, Atwater St., Bloomington, Ind., Zoology.
Harvey Geer Wood, West Lafayette, Ind., Physics.
Floyd R. Carter, Frankfort, Ind., Botany.
Irene Graybook, New Albany, Ind., Botany.
Paul Harmon, Bloomington, Ind., Physiology.
Mildred Hoge, Kirkwood, Bloomington, Ind., Zoology.
On motion they were elected.
The Committee on the nomination of officers, Severance Burrage, Chair-
man, reported as follows:
President—Andrew J. Bigney, Moores Hill College, Moores Hill.
Vice-President—Amos W. Butler, Indianapolis, Ind.
Secretary—Howard HE. Enders, Purdue University, West Lafayette.
Assistant Secretary—E. B. Williamson, Bluffton.
Treasurer—W. M. Blanchard, Greencastle.
Press Secretary—F. B. Wade, Indianapolis, Ind.
Editor—H. E. Barnard.
On motion the report was adopted and the officers elected.
On motion of Prof. John M. Aldrich the following resolution was adopted:
Wuereas, Thomas Say was one of the great entomologists of the world in his time, prominent among the men who made New Harmony, Ind., the scientific center of the United States about 1825, his grave at that place is one of the shrines of Indiana history, the Indiana Academy of Science there- fore feels an especial interest in the project to establish a memorial to Say’s name in the form of a publishing foundation for works in entomology. It is an ideal memorial to an unselfish and deserving scientific man, and at the same time promises great value in the cause of entomology for the present and future.
THEREFORE BE IT RESOLVED, That we commend the plan of the Say Foundation to the consideration of the people of Indiana as especially worthy of consummation in the Centennial year of our state.
Sections A and B then continued their programs until they were com-
leted. W. A. CoGsHALL,
President.
Adjourned.
A. J. BIGNEy, Secretary.
is re bis wd jade in? ey RMT itn Sits i at Es ; Ad, i side a te ae
49
Preoeat oF THE THirtTY—-First ANNUAL MEETING INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE,
CLAYPOOL HOTEL—INDIANAPOLIS FRIDAY AND SATURDAY
4
DECEMBER 3 AND 4, 1915
GENERAL PROGRAM.
FRIDAY MEETING oF THE HxecutTtveE COMMITTEN.................... 10:30 a. Mm. (GRIN RYAUT OSGI OIN Seen cath benoli gs) easly weld teem yaar UP Mis SIs eka 1:30 P. mM. SOCIO MPA, IMBITINGS. donc ous oon eed eerbeseohace cans ee 3:45 P. M. TiN OIRVEARE: MON NEI eel MOU Lee No, SekeOn Acker i hr he fA CML ne aNip ea) |e maa niet ae 6:00 P. mM. SAGE SIMU ON a lel NEED Wands tay Ponsa ocean ait alae ANON op ly Stacy pepe 8:00 P. Mu SATURDAY (GHENT AT eS SSILO INN act haere las aun Solon ne tena Deanserutay we Neel BD WA Li eae ge 9:00 a. M. SIEY@ ZT OINGAUID Ne VL EE TTT GSpot 8 0 Sura eet aM cu eats tn Nt poe ye WE cipal EE sary 9:45 A. M.
THE PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS
The address of the retiring president, Winpur A. CoqsHatu, will be delivered at the informal dinner.
THE SYMPOSIUM ON HEREDITY
A Resumé of the Work on Heredity. Dr. C. H. Ergenmann, Dean of the Graduate School, Indiana University.
Fifteen years of Mendelism; Mendelism, the Key to the Architecture of The Germ-plasm. Dr. Roscoz R. Hype, Professor of Zoology, Indiana State Normal School.
Heredity in Man. Dr. Cuartes B. Davenrort, Director of the Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, New York.
50844,
—
PAPERS TO BE READ
GENERAL A Memoir of Donaldson Bodine.................... H. W. ANDERSON . Memoir of Josiah T. Seovel, 20 min............. CHARLES R. DryER
. Twelve of Nature’s Beauty Spots in Indiana, 45 min., lantern,
EpwarpD BARRETT
4. Concerning the Report of the Survey of Lake Maxinkuckee, LO PT > FS See Stes ee et Seek ee Amos W. BuTLeR 5. A Field Trip in General Science, 15 min............ B. H. ScHocKeEL 6. The Tobacco Problem (abstract) 20 min............ RosBertT HESSLER ANATOMY
~]
(9.4)
. Histological Changes in Testes of Vasectomized Animals,
Oem. * ACen hes eps n eee OE Oe Burton D. Myers
BaAcTERIOLOGY
. The Minimum Lethal Infecting Dose of Trypanosomes,
DE NAT ea eo ee WEE. Ga eee en ae aig ae C. A. BEHRENS Tolerance of Soil Bacteria to Media Variations, 20 min...H. A. Noyes
Botany
. Some Methods for the Study of Plastids in Higher Plants,
NO srITY AL ee a i eo Le ee D. M. Mortrer . The Morphology of Riccia fluitans,5 min.............. FrED DoNaGHY . Plants not Hitherto Reported from Indiana. VI.
Sp STII eel aie os a Re ey eee atc eee SR RN gen Cuas. C. DEaAw » Indiana, Wunew: MS - 5omint... -:. 6 4. eee dL nN or:
. The Second Blooming of Magnolia soulangiana, 5 min..D. M. Morrier . Additional Notes on Rate of Tree Growth, 10 min. .STaNLEY COULTER . The Effect of Centrifugal Force on Plants, 15 min...... F. M. ANDREWS . Some Preliminary Notes on the Stem Analyses of White Oak,
Onn eS Se Pe ee se oe emer Bee Burr N. PRENTICE . Botanic vs. Biologic Gardens. Illustrated by Specimens, LO sreira 5 See kb. ee ies 1 ae eres a Pe RoBert HESSLER CHEMISTRY
. Soluble Salts of Aluminum in Water from an Indiana Coal
Ming. bynnin® che one. atic Per eee eee pee eee ae S. D. CoNnNER
ol.
32.
33.
36.
37.
51
. Detection of Nickel in Cobalt Salts, 8 min.,
A. R. Mippueron and H. L. Miniter
. The Use of the Spectrophotometer in Chemical Analysis,
IQ) erea rats Gh sre meee aN Fae nO ee GEORGE SpiTzeR and D. C. Duncan
. The Different Methods of Estimating Protein in Milk. .GrorGe Spritzer
GEOLOGY
. A New Cave Near Versailles, 5 min.................. A. J. BIGNnny . Loess Deposits in Vigo County, Indiana, 10 min....Wm. A. McBrru . Volume of the Glacial Wabash River, 10 min...... Wm. A. McBreru . A Geologic Map of the Terre Haute Region, 5 min....B. H. ScHockEL
. A Bibliography of Geographical Material, 10 min...... B. H. Schocken . Settlement and Development of the Lead and Zine Mining Region
of the Upper Mississippi, 20 min................ B. H. SHocken . A Few Science Wonders of the Cement Age, 15 min.,
Ian @ Teta Wr: Eee oC aetna om, Se cca oats ae nce oA ML F. W. Gorriies . The Fauna of the Trenton and Black River Series of New
IVGOTE Kernen iat noni Mery Iitslee wenrin NN or iene» ane Versi AU ie Ciaea, H. N. Coryeuu
MarTuEmatics
Gamma Coefficients with Applications to the Solution of Dif- ference Equations and Determination of Symmetric Func- tions of the Roots of an Equation in the Terms of the Coonnieienis, BA mM... ¢54ecece0cavrosane eos ARTHURS. HaTHAWAY Some Determinants Connected with the Bernoulli Numbers, K. P. WiLiramMs Some Relations of Plane to Spheric Geometry, HOTA TTT keer cn ented lie NOE eR Rer Dane Sia Gone eM aE oaE Davin A. RotHrRocK
PuHysics
. Some Notes on the Mechanism of Light and Heat Radiations,
iL penne et eee beim ey a Ney Nye viene ay ais PARTIE Siar oe pV VAY CAUINET?
. A Standard for the Measurement of High Voltages,
LG) aera ira easy ae ee ae eae 8 ie eg Ne ier eae C. Francts HARDING Ionization Produced by Different Thicknesses of Uranium
Oatley ag tains Tot te ate nee Le PERMA ou icky Cav RN Epwin Morrison Radioactivity of Richmond Water, 5 min.......... Epwin Morrison
. A Student Photographic Spectometer, 5 min.,
lantern: 260 4. el ee ee eee eee Epwin Morrison
. An Experimental Determination of the Velocity of Sound
Waves of Different Intensities, 10 min., lantern..ArTHUR L. FoLtey
. A Simple Method of Harmonizing Leyden Jar Discharges,
Spin; lantern fs e320. ee eee ee eee ArTHur L. FoLtey
. An Electroscope for Measuring the Radioacticity of Soils,
LOcunmn. lantern .327- See een ee eee R. R. Ramsey
. Some Photographs of Explesions in a Gas, 10 min.,
lantern 130): 72 SOR Sse se eee eee Joun B. DutcHer
3. The Cause of the Variation in the Emanation Content of Spring
Water; 10smint®. “lanteri=. 26 42455 ee ee ee R. R. Ramsey
. A Standard Condenser of Small Capacity, 10 min.,
lantern 2) 5 shut ot cee oe Be en eo ee R. R. Ramsey
. A Comparison of Calculated and Experimental Radii of the
Ring System by Diffraction and an Extension of Lommel’s
Work in Diffraction, 10 min., lantern.......-.- Mason E. Hturrorp SoLs . Rate of Humification of Manures. 15 mim.....-........-- R. H. Carr ZooLocy 7
. An Instance of Division by Constriction in the Sea-Anemone,
Sargartia lucie: © 5. min. eee eee Donatp W. Davis
. Data on the Food of Nestling Birds, 15 min.
Witt Scorr and H. E. Enpers
. Two New Mutations and Their Bearing on the Question of
Multiple Allelomorphs, 5 min................ Roscor R. Hyrve
. A Study of the Oxygenless Region of Center Lake, 10 min
Wut Scorr and H. G. Ine.
. The Lakes of the Tippecanoe Basin..................-.- Wit Scorr
me 53
ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT.
Witsur A. CoGsHALL
The question of Evolution has long occupied the attention of scientists. Especially has this been true in biological lines, and we are apt to think of the probable (or certain) changes that have taken place, either in plants or animals, in connection with the word evolution. As soon as _ biological investigation had proceeded to a point where significant differences and likenesses were well established among certain forms, the laws underlying the changes were sought, and are being sought. We have now a more or less satisfactory theory built up based on certain fundamentals, though it contains in part some elements of the speculative and the probable. One of these truths that seems established is that some organisms have existed in the very remote past, in a quite different form from what they now have, and that it is very probable, if not certain, that they will change their forms, habits, ete., still more as time goes on.
In a little broader way we may say that evolutionary changes are just as certain in the earth as a whole, or in the entire system of plenatary bodies, or for that matter, in the whole visible universe. This conclusion 1s based on several physical laws which man has discovered and believes to be true. If the law of conservation of energy is true, then we have no alternative but to believe that the continued radiation of heat from the sun and the earth will eventually result in these bodies coming to a lower temperature, and that the sun will at some future date become dark, cold and dense. We must also believe that its power to radiate heat and light was very different in the remote past from what it is now. In as much as the sun is not essen- tially different from a million other stars in the sky, it seems very probable that the whole visible universe has undergone very great changes in past time, and will undergo changes just as great in the future.
There is really no more reason to suppose that the stars and the moon have always been as we see them now, than to suppose that because an oak tree has stood for a year without sensible change it has always been that way and will continue so indefinitely. The oak goes through its life history, or certain phases of it, in so short a time that we can see its whole history in less than a life time, but the changes in the tree while faster, are no more certain than those in the sun or earth.
54
There have been many attempts to formulate a theory of evolution for the earth, the solar system, and indeed the whole siderial universe. Un- fortunately, most of these were based on comparatively little scientific data and any actual proofs of reliability or truth were lacking. Most of them might better be called speculations, pure and simple, and were produced largely from analogy. For example, we have known for some three hundred years that the planets circulate about the sun in nearly the same plane, the ones near the sun moving faster than those farther away. The visible universe is apparently arranged more or less in one plane or at least is very much extended in the plane of the Milky Way, the solid figure that would enclose the solar system not being greatly different, except in size, from the one which would enclose all the stars. What would be more matural then than to suppose that the whole universe was built up on a large scale much as the planetary system, the sun being in revolution with many others about some distant center. These, in turn, perhaps, revolving about another center till the whole Universe is accounted for. Some such idea was advanced by Kant who had only the Law of Gravitation upon which to base his speculations. Unfortunately he knew nothing of the distances of the stars. At that time no one knew from actual observation that the stars had any real motions of their own through space.
We know little enough of these things now, but a few facts have been established with certainty in the last hundred years, indeed most of our accurate knowledge of the stars being attained in much more modern times. It was not till 1839 that we knew the distance of a single star in the whole sky, and only in the last fifty years has it been possible to measure their motions in any very precise way.
Following the above general theory it was supposed for a while that the central point about which the whole siderial system revolved had been lo- cated in Alcyone, the brightest of the Pleiades. It is sufficient to say that there is not a particle of evidence to sustain this conclusion, or the conclusion that the stars, as a whole, revolve about any center whatever. As far as we know the stars move in all sorts of directions and with all sorts of veloci- ties. We are lacking now as much as a thousand years ago any theory of the evolution of the system of the stars, which is based upon observed changes in the stars themselves. The theories and speculations regarding the origin and history of the planetary system are more numerous and in some cases as improbable and impossible as those regarding the universe, The best
979)
known of these and the one which has had the most influence on philosophic thought is known as the Nebular Hypothesis of La Place. It was first announced about a hundred years ago and has been accepted as probably representing planetary evolution until recent years although based largely on assumptions. La Place was one of the greatest of astronomers and mathematicians since the time of Newton and doubtless his name alone car- ried conviction where a little independent investigation and reasoning would have been more profitable. It is quite evident that La Place never regarded this theory as seriously as it was regarded by others after his death.
You are all familiar with the main outlines of the theory. It assumes that the matter now composing the sun, the planets and their satellites was once diffused though a sphere perhaps as large as the present orbit of Nep- tune, that in some way (unknown) the mass started to revolve and therefore to flatten at the poles and extent at the equator, and that with the radiation of heat and consequent shrinkage in volume, the revolution had been has- tened and soon a point had been reached where the gravitational force at the equator was balanced by the centrifugal force due to the revolution. At this point, according to the theory, a more or less broad ring was abandoned by the revolving mass. It went on shrinking, and increasing its velocity of motion till the same process was repeated. Each ring was then supposed to collect into a sphere and go through the same process in a small way, thus accounting for satellite systems of the various planets, although there was no investigation to establish the way in which this was done, or even to show that it was -possible. No doubt this whole scheme was suggested by the planet Saturn which shows a ring system very much as La Place supposed existed around the sun, but which we now know differs very materially from any of his hypothetical rings.
As stated above, this theory implies that the planets should all be very nearly, if not exactly, in one plane, that they should travel in the same direction around the sun, that the satellites of each planet should all go in the same direction and in one plane, and that the periods of revolution of the satellites should be longer than the rotation periods of their primaries. These conditions seemed nearly fulfilled at the time of La Place, but since then we have had the discovery of Neptune with its satellite very much inclined to the orbit of the planet, and revolving backward at that, we have had the discovery of the satellites of Uranus also revolving retrograde and very much out of the planet’s plane of revolution. We have had, moreover,
56
the discovery of the two satellites of Mars, one of which revolves very much faster than Mars rotates on its axis.
‘A theory that perfectly explains all the known facts may get a hearing and acceptance without any great amount of demonstration, but when many important facts appear at variance with a theory it becomes necessary to show how these facts may be accounted for by the theory, or to look with suspicion on the theory as a whole.
There are many other facts than those just mentioned which cause distrust. Take for example the probable density of the ring that is supposed to have formed Neptune. If all the matter now in the Solar system were expanded till it formed a sphere the size of the orbit of this planet its average density would be about STepOG ODIO the present density of the sun. The density at the center would probably be many times that at the equator, which would make the density of the abandoned ring much less than
516.000 WOM th of the present density of the sun. This would be many times as rare as the best vacuum yet obtained. To suppose that any such mass of matter, spread out in a ring whose diameter must have been at least thirty times the diameter of the earth’s orbit, ever collected in one place to form Neptune is a very great tax on the imagination. As a matter of fact it can be shown that this is physically impossible. This process involves long intervals of time and would make the outer planets much older than the earth, and other nearer planets. There is no observational data to support this idea; all that there are directly contradict it. On the supposi- tion that the sun has radiated heat in the past as it does now, and that the shrinkage of the sun is responsible for the development of its energy, it is possible to tell how many years ago the sun was large enough to fill the orbit of the earth. The earth must therefore be younger than this. All evi- dences in the earth itself point to an age of a least sixty million years, and on the above assumptions upon which the theory of La Place rests, the sun, sixty million years ago, was much larger than the earth’s orbit. The prob- ability is then that the assumptions are wrong. Other more technical ob- jections, some of which are even more conclusive, | must pass over. Another theory of Evolution based on tidal relations among sun, planets and satellites has been elaborated in more recent years, and either by itself or in connection with the foregoing has been used to explain our present system. The application of this theory to the Earth—Moon system has
been elaborated by Professor George Darwin. He supposes that the earth
57
and moon were originally one fluid mass, that oscillations set up in the mass by the tidal effects of the sun resulted in the separation of the mass into two parts, that the two parts raised tides each in the other and that the friction of these large tidal waves resulted in the separation of the two bodies to their present distance and the lengthening of their rotation periods to their present values.
It is, no doubt, true that tidal friction does tend to lengthen the period of rotation of the earth, and, if the fundamentals of mechanics are to be trustea, this effect must result in an increased distance between the two bodies. Some observational data in support of this theory appears in the fact that the period of revolution of the moon about the earth coincides with its period of rotation, and that probably the two planets nearest the sun _ keep the same face to the sun. On the other hand we know that tidal fric- tion or any other force has failed to change the length of our day by one-tenth of a second in five thousand years. There has more recently come into gen- eral favor another and a totally different theory, from Professors Chamber- lain and Moulton, of the Departments of Geology and Astronomy, of Chicago University.
They suppose that the solar system took its form from a nebula, but from a spiral and not from a spherical or spherodial nebula. Observationally this supposition is sound. There is not in the sky, as far as I know, a nebula of the sort assumed by La Place. There are thousands, perhaps hundreds of thousands of the spiral sort. Of all the nebulae that have any regular shape the spirals outnumber all others. There are a few so called planetary nebulae which in the telescope look spherical, but which in a long exposure photo- graph show some other form. Some of them may be hollow spheres, but none appears as La Place’s nebula was supposed to be. There are a few in the form of a ring with a star at the center, but again it must be remarked that this form in not the required form.
In a spiral nebula the matter forming the arms of the spiral is usually the smaller part of the whole mass, the greater part being at or near the center. If the law of gravitation holds among them, and we have never found an - exception to it, then the particles in the arms of the spiral must be in motion in elliptical orbits about the central mass, the parts nearer the center moving faster than the more remote parts. This means that the arms must with time become more closely wrapped about the central mass and that any one
38
particle is, in time, bound to come close to many others, and eventually to collide with many.
If any one particle were large enough to start with, it would therefore erow by collision with other particles, and the more it grew the more power of erowing it would have by reason of its increasing mass. It seems likely then, that loose, widely extended nebulae of this sort must eventually come into a system of small bodies revolving about a large central mass. It can be shown that a mass revolving in this way and suffering collision with other masses must move in an orbit whose eccentricity is continually diminishing. We should therefore expect to find, if our system has been formed in this way, that the more massive planets have the least eccentric orbits and that the smaller ones have the greatest eccentricity. As a matter of fact all of the large outer planets have low eccentricity and the smaller planets a higher amount. The greatest eccentricity is found among the planetoids, or asteroids, many of which are only a few miles in diameter.
It has also been shown that a close approach of two masses in the arms of the spiral might not result in collision, but under conditions which might easily arise, the smaller might be made to revolve in an elliptical orbit about the larger, thus giving rise to a satellite or system of satellites, and these satellites might revolve in one direction as easily as another. We can therefore account for the retrograde motion of the satellite of Neptune, those of Uranus, for the fact that Jupiter has some going in one direction and others in the reverse direction, for the widely scattered zone of the Asteroids and even for the very rapid motion of the inner satellite of Mars.
These, and many other features are not speculations as to what may have happened. They have all been made the subject of rigorous mathematical calculations, and with the supposed initial conditions are all entirely possible.
As to whether these initial conditions that we have supposed, actually existed or not—whether or not our earth and the other bodies revolving about the sun ever developed from a spiral nebula, we ean not be so sure. Here it is a question of what is most probable. We are practically certain that it did not come about as La Place supposed. There are too many things mathematically impossible about that. By this theory, the develop- ment into the present system was entirely possible, and certainly no more probable evolution has been proposed.
La Place did not and could not account for his nebula. On this plan we ean. I have said that the spirals far outnumber any other class in the sky.
59
It has been shown that it is entirely possible for a spiral to be formed and that it is probable that more spirals would be formed than any other kind. Here we approach the speculative a little closer and I would remind you that we have no record of any permanent form of nebula ever being formed. Of course the time over which we have any accurate record of the nebulae is very short, only the last few years in fact. Very few of these objects can be recognized in the telescope, and it is only since the invention of the rapid photographie dry plate, and the perfection of the large reflecting telescopes, that their true form and number have been found. Even with our present equipment and resources if one should be recorded on a plate ‘tonight it’ might be impossible to say that it was there a year ago, or that it was not, unless it should be exceptionally bright.
With this class of objects then we will not expect much observational confirmation. From mathematical investigation we know that it is possible for a spiral nebula to be formed from the close approach of two stars. We know of about two hundred million stars in the sky and there are probably many more that we can get no direct evidence of. We know that they are all in motion with velocities ranging up to 300 or even 400 miles per second. Under these conditions we will at times have collisions. These will be relatively rare because the average distance between stars is large, thickly as they seem to be sown in the heavens. A close approach without actual contact will be much more frequent, and it is from such an enzounter that a spiral nebula might easily arise.
The moon with only = the mass of the earth and at a mean distance of over a quarter of a million miles has enough attraction for the earth to cause a distortion of figure, the liquid surface showing the effect of course more easily than the solid parts. Under the action of the moon there are twe tides raised in the earth, one of which tends to stay directly below the moon and the other at the opposite side. That is to say, the moon causes the earth to assume an ellipsoidal form, the long axis of which would point - toward the moon if it were not for the rapid rotation of the earth. What would this effect be if the moon were as massive as the earth, or perhaps twenty times as massive? If, in addition to this increased mass, we should decrease the distance between the bodies to a few thousand miles, the tides would be many times as great as they are now.
When we remember that the stars for the most part are gaseous, in many cases with an average density less than that of air at sea level, and at the
60
same time have very large diameters, it will be evident that the near approach of another massive body would be sufficient to cause great disturbance. The attraction of the foreign body would cause the star to elongate, the eravitational attraction at the ends of the longer axis would be decreased and the highly compressed gases of the interior would cause great eruptions toward the disturbing body and away from it. Even with the slight dis- turbanees to which our sun is subjected we have these outbursts of materiaf from the interior, by which material is thrown out at times, to distances of a hundred thousand miles.
If another star were to come within a few hundred thousand miles of our sun this effect would be produced on a scale many times greater. While the star was a considerable distance away these ejections of matter would be less violent, increasing in violence as the distance decreased, and, what 1s just as much to the point, they would be in a slightly different direction as time went on. The first masses ejected would be drawn out of a straight line and would eventually fail back toward the sun, some of them striking the surface and some of the 1 so far drawn to one side as to miss the surface as they came back, in which case they would continue to revolve in elliptical orbits about the sun. Those masses, thrown off a little later, would travel farther and in slightly different directions, and would be diverted still more and move in longer orbits. After a maximum disturbance was reached the same process would go on with decreasing violence as the disturbing body retreated into space. It has been shown that the masses thrown off which did not go back to form part of the sun again, might under these conditions form themselves into two spiral arms, the whole, of course, being in one plane, as the motion of the two stars would be in a plane. That material which did fall back into the sun would give to the part where it fell a certain velocity of rotation, and we find in the sun a higher rate of rotation for the equator than for any other part. The direction of motion of the matter composing the arms of the spiral is not along the arms but across them, each particle moving in an ellipse around the central mass. If masses of different sizes were ejected, the large ones would tend to annex the smaller ones in the immediate neighborhood, and the process before deseribed would result in a system of planets and satellites much as we have in the solar system.
We have this process still going on in a small way. The Earth attracts to itself several million small particles every day and occasionally there is a
61
larger one. Many of these, perhaps most of them, are in all probability matter which left the sun when the rest did and which are now for the first time brought near enough the earth to be permanently annexed. In a region where no large masses existed, the matter would continue to revolve in a finely divided state, such as we actually find in the zone of the minor planets. This zone lies between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter. In it have been found some 800 planets large enough to make a record on a photographic plate, and there is little reason to doubt that the whole number is many times greater aid the size of most of them so small that we can never see them except as they collectively make a faint band of hght across the sky. In this zone we find what we should expect with small sizes—that is, very elliptical orbits and very high inclinations. One of these planets has an orbit of such eccen- tricity that while its mean distance is considerably greater than that of Mars, yet in one point in its orbit it comes much closer to the earth than any body, except the moon, and two others have perihelion distances less than that of Mars.
Thus it is entirely possible that our planetary system resulted from a spiral nebula, and it is entirely possible that spirals may result from close approaches of two stars and we iay even say that it is all probable, at least more probable than any other plan yet proposed.
There are still some difficulties. We must say that if our system resulted from a spiral, this spiral was not at all on the scale observed among the spirals in the sky. Such a nebula, having a radius equal to that of Nep- tune’s orbit, were it no farther away than the nearest star, would be a very insignificant object and might fail of detection entirely. At the probable distance of most of these objects it would certainly be invisible. We can see how a star might be torn apart so as to scatter material over a space the size of Neptune’s orbit, but the case is different when we consider some of the large spirals in the sky. The largest is known as the Great Nebula of Andromeda. It covers an are of over a degree in the sky. Assuming a parallax of 0’’.1, which is probably larger than the real value, this nebula from end to end must extend over a space more than 1,800 times the size of Neptune’s orbit, or 54,000 times the size of the Earth’s orbit.
We have never determined accurately the distance of a single nebula and so do not know the real size of any one of them, compared to the solar system, but there is no reason to suppose they are nearer than many of the faint stars. If this is true, their volumns are vast beyond comprehension and their density an inconceivably small fraction of the density of our best vacuum. It has
62
been computed that if the Andromeda nebula had a density sama oon that of the sun it would have mass enough to attract the earth as strongly as the sun does. It attracts the earth not at all. Nor does it attract any other body as far as we know, many of them being much closer to it then we we are.
We do not know the chemical composition of the nebulae, except that it see 1s to be different from every thing else in the sky. Not one has ever been seen to change its shape, size ot brightness. We have always assumed that stars result from the contraction of nebulae and this is based on the idea that the nebulae radiate heat. It is not at all certain that these rare gases shine because of their heat. A mass of gas of such extreme rarity would have a comparatively small amount of heat and it would seem that this ought to be radiated into space very rapidly, and could not be miantained without rapid contraction. It is quite possible that nebular matter instead of being the raw material of stars and planets is matter in some final form after having gone through its life history. We have no observational data either way and will probably not have any for many centuries to come. There does not seem to be any very good reasonifor believing that matter is not being created now as much as it ever was nor for thinking that it must always endure in some of the forms we now know.
We think of space as infinite in extent. Whether or not matter, in the forms we know, is to be found in all parts of space, we do not know. That is to say we are not yet sure whether the universe is finite or infinite. There are some reasons for thinking that the system of the stars is as infinite as space itself, but it may also be possible that what we call matter is some mani- festation peculiar to this part of space. The mere appearance or disappear- ance of matter in space would in itself be no more remarkable than the precipitation and evaporation of water would be if we knew nothing of the atmosphere, and perhaps not as remarkable as the production of water from two invisible and unknown gases would seem to people who know nothing of chemistry.
The most probable source of information it seems to me, will be the researches of the physicists and chemists on the real nature of matter. When they shall have told us what matter really is, what all of its possible forms may be and what all the sources of energy are, then we may be able to state with certainty what the life history of a star is, what relation the nebulae have to other bodies, and what in reality has been the past history of our planet and other planets.
63
A Memoir or DONALDSON BODINE.
H. W. ANDERSON
To those of us who knew Professor Donaldson Bodine the news last August of his sudden death was a terrible shock. We knew him as a man of great activity and rugged constitution, one who never seemed to be troubled with physical weakness. His taking was so sudden that the shock seemed all the greater, yet those who knew him best realized that it was as he wished, for he had often expressed a desire to have life end suddenly, without pain, prolonged illness, or weakening of mental faculties. So all was well with him.
Donaldson Bodine was born in Richboro, Pennsylvania on December 13, 1866. His father, a Presbyterian minister, died at an early age, leaving the young son to support his widowed mother and a sister. After graduat- ing from a preparatory academy, he entered Cornell University and received his A. B. degree from this institution in 1887. For several years following graduation he was principal of the Academy at Gouverneur, New York. Returning to Cornell on a Fellowship he secured a Doctor of Science degree in the spring of 1895. His major was in the subject of Entomology, his first minor in Zoology and second minor in Botany. His thesis, presented in the spring of 1895, was entitled, “‘The Taxanomic Value of the Antennae of Lepidoptera’. ~
Professor Bodine came to Wabash in the fall of 1895 to fill the chair of Zoology and Geology which was established at that time. This chair he occupied during the remainder of his life. Thus he had given, at the time of his death, twenty years of loyal and efficient service to this Institution.
As a student of Professor Bodine’s I can speak with some authority when J say he was a wonderfully inspiring teacher. He had a very clear and interesting manner of presenting his subject and this, combined with an unusually pleasant voice, made the presentation of his lectures all that could be desired. It was a real pleasure to listen to him. The students were always loyal to him and they were especially impressed with his perfect fairness. He did not make his subject difficult but he expected his students to make an earnest effort to get that which was presented.
64
As a man, I cannot better express the opinion of all who knew him than give you the words of appreciation of one of his former students, ‘‘ Professor Bodine was a man among men, a teacher among teachers seldom, if ever, equalled. He was a true gentleman who would be classified as ‘One who earefully avoided whatever may have caused a jar or jolt in the minds of those with whom he was cast; who avoided all clashings of opinion or colli- sion of feeling or restraint, or suspicion of gloom, or resentment, his great concern being to make everyone at his ease and at home. He was tender toward the bashful, gentle towards the distant and merciful towards the absurd; he guarded against unseasonable allusions or topics which irritated and was seldom prominent in conversation—and never wearisome. He made light of favors while he did them and seemed to be receiving when conferring. He never spoke of himself except when compelled, had no ear for slander or gossip, was scrupulous in imputing motives to those who inter-
fered with him and interpreted everything for the best.’ ”’
Professor Bodine published little—not from lack of ability to do research work or unfamiliarity with his subject, but because he was primarily a teacher and believed in giving all there was in him to his students. He was unusually well informed on all subjects whether or not connected with his work. His sense of fairness and his desire for accuracy and truth were so acute that to those who were given to the expression of opinions hastily formed, he seemed at times over eritical; but he was equally sincere in his enthusiastic praise of work well done.
Professor Bodine was a lover of music and always took an active interest in the development of this art in the college and in the community. He also interested himself in the civic welfare of the city of Crawfordsville and stood for everything that was best regardless of political or other affiliations. Although for many years an officer in the Presbyterian church he was not “orthodox” in the narrower sense of the term. In this as in other affairs of life he followed the apostolic injunction, ‘‘Prove all things; hold fast that
bi)
which is good.”’ He believed thoroughly in the rule of Reason and would not accept any statement unless supported by and based upon facts, scien- tifically established. He was especially desirous of eliminating from relig- ious teaching all superstitions and traditions. At the same time he was deeply religious by nature and was a thorough believer in the Church as an
institution.
65
The members of this Society will remember with what great pleasure Professor Bodine attended the spring meeting. He was a lover of nature and delighted in the open air meeting held by the Society, not only because of the long tramps over the hills, but also because of the chance for compan- ionship and discussion with his fellow scientists. He has often told me that his chief interest in the Society was the fellowship it afforded and his cordial hearty greetings are well remembered by all the older members of this Society.
As a scientist and a student of science he was recognized throughout the country. He was a Fellow both of the American Association and of the Indiana Academy and served as the president of the latter organization during the year 1913. His presidential address was one of unusual interest.
In 1914 Professor Bodine was married to Mrs. Emma Clugston of Craw- fordsville. In the early days of August of the past summer they went to north- ern Michigan to plan a summer home. They selected a site for their cottage and on the day when the fatal end came had been busily engaged with their final plans. In the evening while visiting some friends and in the midst of a lively conversation death came without the slightest warning.
H. W. ANDERSON.
67
Memoir or JosIAH THOMAS SCOVELL. Cuarues R. Dryer.
Josiah Thomas Scovell was born at Vermontville, Mich., July 29, 1841. His parents, Stephen D. and Caroline (Parker) Scovell were of New England stock dating from the 17th century. He was educated first at Olivet College and later at Oberlin, graduating A. B. in the class of 1866 and M. A. in 1875. While at Olivet he went home to spend a week-end, and in his determination to get back to college for Monday morning, forded a swollen river with his clothes tied in a bundle on his head. In 1864 he served one hundred days in Company K, 150th Ohio National Guards. His comrades speak highly of his services as company cook. During the defense of Fort Stevens at Washington against the attack of General Early, he was given command of a gun. President Lincoln stood on the parapet beside Scovell’s gun to watch the progress of the battle, and was dislodged only by the command of General Wright. Visits to an uncle living at Lewiston, N. Y., were occasions for a study of Niagara Falls and gorge. A fellow student at Oberlin, now Professor Ve 1B Todd of the University of Kansas, tells how he and Scovell were overtaken by nightfall in the gorge and compelled to escape by climbing a pine tree and a pole reaching from its top to the edge of the cliff. He had field work in geology at Oberlin with Professor Allen, and in 1867 was one of a party which accompanied Professor Alexander Winchell from Ann Arbor to the mines of Marquette, Houghton and Hancock. He was boss of the crew which secured and shipped the famous boulder of jasper con- glomerate from Marquette to the University campus at Ann Arbor. In 1866-7 he took a special course in chemistry and mineralogy in the Medical Department of the University of Michigan and was graduated M. D. from Rush Medical College, Chicago, in 1868. He practiced medicine a year or two at Central City, Colo., then a lumber camp near Middle Park, He found the Garden of the Gods, the over blow of snow from the Pacific slope, the sound of running water under summer snows, the milky glacial streams, a storm in Platte Cafion seen from above, a flood in Cherry Creek, and the phenomena of mountains and forest more instructive than anything at college. In 1871-2 he was instructor in Chemistry at Olivet College, and in
68
1872 e2me to the Indiana State Normal School at Terre Haute as head of the Department of Natural Science. He at first taught only physiology and geography. The woman who had been teaching geography had spent four- teen weeks on the Great Western Plains using them as an instrument for teaching pedegcgy, “the law in the mind” heing illustrated by “‘the fact in the thing.” Scovell had actually seen the Great Plains and was able to arouse greater interest in the facts in the thing. The use he made of pictures and specimens was an innovation and they had to be shown outside the regu- lar class period. With the permission of the President, he introduced some instruction in physics, chiefly in meteorology. using home made apparatus. He also vsed the Wabash in field lessons on rivers, and his advent at Terre Hau’‘e markcd one of the early inoculations of the Indiana schools with the scientific virus.
In 1873 he joined Todd at Portland, Me., as a volunteer assistant with the U. S. Fish Commission and visited Nova Scotia to study the tides. In 1880 he visited Cuba and Mexico to familiarize himself with tropical nature, corals and Aztec civilization.
He was married in 1876 to Joanna Jameson of Lafayette, who survives him. In 1881 he res'g icd from the Normal School and during the next ten years was engaged in the business of abstractor of titles at Terre Haute. During this period he acted as friend, companion and guide to a succession of younger men who came to teach and study science in the schools of the city. Among these Jenkins, Evermann, Rettger, Blatchley, Cox and Dryer are well known members of this Academy. Dr. Scovell’s buckboard and horse, ‘“‘Jim’’ were always ready for a Saturday and Sunday excursion anywhere within fifty miles. Every one of his proteges can testify to the genial, enthusiastic and scientific spirit with which he was thus introduced to the features and problems of the Terre Haute field.
In the summer of 1891 Scovell organized a party for the ascent and scien- tific study of the voleano, Orizaba, in Mexico. It consisted of H. M. Seaton, botanist, U. O. Cox, ornithologist, A. J. Woodman, ichthyologist, and W. 5. Blatchley. entomologist, while Scovell acted as director, topographer, geolo- gist and geographer. The general expenses were paid from his own pocket, but railroad transportation in the United States was otherwise secured. He was abetted and perhaps financially assisted by Dr. F. C. Mendenhall, then Superintendent cf the U. S. Coast and Geodetie Survey. On Orizaba
spirit levels were extended from the railroad up to 14,000 feet, whence
69
aneroid readings to the summit made the height 18,179 feet. Considerable ‘collections were made by the naturalists of the party and reported in various journals. In April, 1892, Scovell returned to Orizaba, and by triangulation from the 13,000 feet level, determined its height to be 18,314, which was accepted by the Coast and Geodetic Survey. A rather full general report of results was published in Science of May 12, 1893.
In the autumn of 1891, Scovell joined Hvermann, then of the U. S. Fish Commission, in a study of the rivers of Texas. In 1894 he was sent by the Commission to study the whitefish of Lake Huron, and later assisted Ever- mann ina study of the spawning habits of salmon in the mountain streams of Idaho. About this time he did some work on the geological survey of Arkansas under Eranner.
In 1894 Scovell returned to teaching as the head of the science depart- ment of the Terre Hautte High School, a position which he held until his death twenty-one vears later.
In 1895 he contributed an elaborate report on the geo!ozy of Vigo County to the 21st Report of the Indiana Geological Survey, the result of twenty years of study in that field. He assisted Ashley in his report on the coal deposits of Indiana, published in 1898, and in 1905 made a report on the Roads and Road Materials of Western Indiana.
In 1899 he began his work in cooperation with Evermann on the physical and biological survey of Lake Maxinkuckee, which was carried on for fifteen successive seasons. His best work was done at home in Vigo County and at his summer cottage on Maxinkuckee. He never wearied of the features and problems of his home field and returned to them with fresh interest whenever any one started a new question. The writer was surprised to note after twenty years of study of the Terre Haute field how little he could add to what Seovell had shown him at the beginning.
I can best sum up the estimates of Dr. Scovell contributed by all his intimate colleagues and pupils, among whom I am glad to enroll myself, by saying that he was a naturalist rather than a speclalist in any one depart- ment of science. He was more deeply interested in botany than in zoology and his interest in plants was more ecological than taxonomic. He had the most complete and beautiful collection ever made of the mussels of the Wabash River, representing forty-seven species. He gave considerable attention to the Indian mounds of western Indiana, and in 1912 sent his notes and collections to the Bureau of Ethnology, which accepted them as
70
material for a projected Handbook of Aboriginal Remains. The catholicity of his taste was indicated by the collection of minerals, fossils, corals, shells, ferns and implements in his house and the pile of rare glacial boulders in his yard, both of which were well worth going to see. He was most of all interested in topography, land forms and the weather. I should classify him as primarily a geographer of broad sympathies. He was always at his best in the field. ‘‘His mind,’ says one of his most intimate associates, “was essentially analytical and judicial. He was not apt to reach conclusions hastily. After having arrived at a tentative conclusion, he was always dis- posed to try to discover objections, which he would examine critically and modify his conclusions accordingly. He was a keen observer and his com- ments on what he saw were always interesting and illuminating. A day spent with him in the field was sure to be a day filled with interest and profit.” “In disposition,’ says another, “he was genial and kindly, and gave freely to his companions of the varied store of knowledge which he had accumulated during his life time of study of the great out-of-doors.”
He was a charter member of this academy and at its first meeting gave a resumé of geographical studies in Indiana. He contributed to the pro- grams twenty-two titles, of which ten papers were published in the Proceed- ings. .
In 1874 he published Lessons in Geography which were re-written and re- issued as a Commercial Geography in 1910, and in 1879, Lessons in Physiology, all of which had more than local use as text-books. In 1894, he contributed Practical Lessons in Science to the Werner series. In 1912 he prepared an account of Fort Harrison in 1812 for the centennial celebration. He was a student to the last, making credits at the University of Chicago in 1909. .
Dr. Scovell’s death from pneumonia on May 8, 1915 removes perhaps the last survivor of those who could be called pioneers of science in Indiana. He was one of the “old guard,’ whose place can never be filled, but whose memory
“Smells sweet and blossoms in the dust”.
Bibliography. 1874. Lessons in Geography. 1879. Lessons in Physiology. 1890. An Old Channel of the Niagara River, Proceedings Am. Asse. for Advancement of Science, Vol. 39, p. 245.
1893. Mount Orizaba or Citlaltepetl, Science, Vol. 21, pp. 253-7.
1894. Practical Lessons in Science, p. 399, The Werner Co.
1895. In Proceedings of Ind. Acad. of Science. Some Minor Eroding Agencies, p. 54.
Kettle Holes in Lake Maxinkuckee, p. 55.
The Fishes of the Missouri River Basin. Evermann & Scovell, pp. 126-30.
Recent Investigations Concerning the Redfish, Oncorhyncus nerka, at its Spawning Grounds in Idaho, Evermann & Scovell, pp. 131-4.
1895-8 The Mound Builders. Inland Educator, Vol. 1, pp. 81, 159, 294, Vol. 2, p. 199.
1896. The Geology of Vigo County, Indiana. Indiana Department of Geology and Natural Resources, 21st Report, pp. 507-76.
1897. Lake Maxinkuckee Soundings. Proceed. Ind. Acad. of Sei., pp. 56-9.
1898. Lake Maxinkuckee. Proceed. Ind. Acad. of Sci., p. 70. Ter- races of the Lower Wabash, zbid. pp. 274-7.
1900. The Flora of Lake Maxinkuckee, ibid. pp. 124-31.
1905. The Roads and Road Materials of a Portion of Western Indiana. Ind. Dept. of Geol. and Natl. Res. 30th An. Rep. pp. 571-655.
1908. The Headwaters of the Tippecanoe River. Proceed. Ind. Acad. of Sei. pp. 167-74.
The Indiana Academy of Science. ibid. p. 209.
1910. A Commercial Geography for Use in High Schools.
1912. Fort Harrison in 1812.
72
Terre Haute
73
THe Tospacco PROBLEM. (Abstract)
Rospert. HESSLER.
In going over a large mass of notes on the Tobaeco Problem, I arranged them for convenience of classification into periods of my own life. After 1900 notes are grouped under papers published since, such papers forming
b)
“nest eggs,’ so to speak. In practically every paper I have had before this Academy during the last fifteen years the tobacco problem can be read between the lines. Here I intend to go over the subject very briefly in the
light of observations and work done, merely a note here and there.
As a boy I saw others smoke and tried it myself, with the usual result— an acute tobaccosis. Should a teacher use tobacco and set a bad example? Practically all my boy friends smoked and a few years later I became a pipe smoker—influence of example. At the age of seventeen years there was a change of environment; I came in contact with boys and young men who did not smoke, and so I quit and bought books: Again influence of example.
Then came a year in the southern mountains in which I saw many things; others I did not see then but “‘saw”’ that is, understood, later. For instance, why the mountaineer can use tobacco and alcohol with seeming impunity. Hé takes these in pure air, without an admixture of infection of all kinds.
Next came college days. At that time few of the instructors set a “horrible example’? by smoking. Students with few exceptions, did not use tobacco.
Then came medical college days in a large city under horribly bad air conditions, due to the many sick and diseased who visited the clinics. Here for the first time I saw the vicious circle that exists between bad air and tobacco, and, I might add, aleohol and sedatives and narcotics generally. The building was gloomy and dirty; artificial light was used all day long. Patients spat on the floor; students reacted more or less; they got relief by the use of tobacco, and in turn spat on the floor and thereby set a bad example to the patients who did not hesitate to add their catarrhal and tubercular
74
sputum. The students reacted still more and chewed and smoked more; more filth meant less care on the part of the patients. And so on, you can readily see this vicious circle.
I myself soon reacted, I felt bad; fellow-students advised the use of tobacco. Instead I frequently bolted lectures and took open air vacations. While sitting on the benches I formulated a theory regarding my own ills and of those about me; I thought I saw why I felt bad and why I felt so well in the mountains a few years before, without having usual winter colds. I saw too why the mountaineers are so healthy and live long in spite of alcohol and tobacco. In the course of time this theory was elaborated; a brief ac- count was given before this Academy in my paper on Coniosis, in 1911.
The following year was spent in a smaller and comparatively clean medical college, and I got along very well. Next came observations on hospital and dispensary cases, noting the influence of enviornment: How poor people taken from the heart of the city promptly recover under good sanitary surroundings. I clearly saw that in order to reduce the ills of a city more hospitals was not the remedy—clean up and stay clean.
Then came one or two minor periods, followed by a prolonged period of observation among the insane, especially at the Northern Indiana Hospital for Insane. Did time permit I should like to tell of efforts made to keep buildings and wards in good sanitary condition. Even the insane with few exceptions can be taught not to spit on the floor. When you see a man so ereedy for a chew of tobacco that he will take a quid out of a cuspidor and rechew it with a relish you begin to realize what a hold tobacco has. The same may be said regarding alcohol when you consider the stories of English sailors draming the casks in which bodies of dead English sailors and soldiers were sent home. In cities gutter snipes can be seen picking up stubs, and there are women who apparently inhale tobacco smoke of others with pleas- ure, at least they make no objection. Suppose Aristotle, Plato, Socrates, or old Hippocrates came back and could see our men smoking and meeting under bad air conditions, what would they say? Has the world gone tobacco mad? Should a hospital physician smoke and set a bad example?
During a year in Hurope | acquired a stock of comparative data. It was a surprise not to see any tobacco juice on sidewalks. The only time I saw a splotch in Continental Europe was in front of the medical school at
(65)
evidently some American student had left his mark.* Moreover
Vienna men smoked slowly and in moderation and spat very little. Any of you who have travelled in the Old World know the difference in cleanliness between European cities and our own. On getting back home I saw things I never really had noticed before, especially the sort of air we breathe habitually.
In 1900 I took up a systematic study of dusty air and prevalent ill health, and gradually enlarged the scope of inquiry to the domestication and urbanization of man. What this means can in a general way be seen from my various papers before the Academy. This period from 1900 to 1915 may be divided into subperiods:
The period from 1900 to 1906 may be characterized as one of disgust and contempt for the tobacco user, in the light of the harm he does to others, especially to women and children. I held to the old belief that men smoked (and drank) because they wanted to. But I found that to neglect the tobacco users means to get little data, and beginning with 1906 I gave some men and boys considerable attention, trying to find out why tobacco had such a hold and why some could readily discontinue the habit and others only with the greatest difficulty, if at all. Naturally one is apt to pity the man who sees the harm the tobacco habit does to others and yet can not quit, to whom tobacco is a sedative. Some of these men found that by using it ‘“‘medici- nally’’ a very small quantity sufficed. I believe if there were a high tax on tobacco it would be used very sparingly; old habitues could get along with a small quantity.
Up to the close of 1905 I had been accustomed to call patients who reacted to bad air Dust Victims. Then a bright woman said, ‘““Why not call them Tobacco Victims? The tobacco user is the one who is responsible for air pollution, directly or indirectly.’’ I kept a record for the year 1906 and at least every other patient was what may be called a Tobacco Victim. This included those dust victims who used tobacco, who had ill health on account of infected air. I trust you see the distinction.
In time one gets all sorts of data and all sorts of reasons why a man uses
*How do you know it was an American student? I was asked after the paper was read. I did not know; I omy inferred, for I had not seen a single continental medical student chew and spit. A few days later I spoke to an observant German physician about this. The moment I mentionea ‘‘in front of the medical school,’’ he interrupted, “Some American student dia that; German students don’t chew tobacco; the man who would chew and spit_woula be ostracized.’’ He thus confirmed my own opinion.
76
tobacco. In such a study there is the eternal Where, When and Why. Ifa man says he feels better through the use of tobacco, then the question arises, Why do you feel bad? Why do you feel bad in the winter time, during the closed door season, and feel comparatively well in the summer? Why do you feel well when you leave the city and go on a vacation to the country or spend a winter in the South, where you do not care for sedatives, neither tobacco nor alcohol and can readily do without them?
Where a man smokes and drinks, and one might say eats, is an important question. One realizes it after keeping individuals under observation for a long series of years, particularly men and women who are willing to keep a daily record.
As long as tobacco is used sparingly and produces no evil results, neither in the user nor in those about him, there is no occasion to speak of a Tobacco Problem; the same is true of alcohol. Men who drink sparingly and “can leave it alone’ do not create an alcohol problem. But the man who uses tobacco or alcohol sparingly may still be setting a bad example to those who can not use them, that is, in moderation and without injury to themselves and others.
I shall now briefly comment on some of my papers presented before this Academy. This is not a medical paper; remarks will be along the line of Coniosis.
MOSQUITOES AND MALARIA. 1900. The chief reason for writing that paper was to clear the field of work of an affection frequently confounded with malaria, an affection very common in our State, under various names, such as False Malaria, Atypical Malaria, Latent Malaria, a Touch of Ma- laria, Mal-aria, and others, including “‘bilious attacks’’ and ‘‘auto-intoxica- tion’’.
This paper could be re-written, by one who has access to all the old litera- ture, under the title, Indiana: A Redemption from Malaria. It would be appropriate for the Centennial next year. As a companion volume the man with ample leisure could write a volume on False Malaria, that is, dust in- fection.
Real malaria, that is malarial fever, is transmitted through the bite of the anopheles mosquito; false malaria, or Coniosis, is transmitted through infected dust. The proper season for malaria is late summer and autumn; that of false malaria from autumn through the winter to late in spring,
an
in other words, throughout the closed door season. In early days malaria dominated everything; there was comparatively little other sickness. Agri- cultural communities as a rule were healthy if there was no malaria about. Today false malaria dominates wherever people are massed, as indicated in my eases for 1906. The student who desires to study malaria will find little opportunity in Indiana today. I have not seen a case for about thirteen years. But for material for a study of False Malaria Indiana can not be excelled.
Just as malaria has disappeared by cleaning up the breeding places of the rural anopheles mosquito, so false malaria will also disappear when we begin to clean up generally, when we get clean air to breathe. When once an overgrown town begins to bezone a real ety by putt ng in sewers, paved streets, getting fltezed water and a clean high school, a sot of civie center, you can readily see why people become less tolerant of the chewer and spitter and in time of the smoker. The smoker, it should be noted, is usually also a spitter.
If I had time I should like to review briefly several medical papers in which I developed the theory of dust infection or coniosis, and show how one ean distinguish between other affections and diseases. One can treat the subject from two viewpoints, medical and biological. Medically, coniosis can be considered as a disease; biologically, coniosis is a reaction. Regard it as a disease and at once there come to mind treatment, medicine, remedy, cure. Regard it as a reaction, then naturally there comes to mind preven- tion. From the physicians’ standpoint, there are two classes of people, those who Take Something and those who Do Something. Some when feeling bad will take all sorts of drugs, including tobacco and aleohol. Others will take a change of environment, of occupation, or of residence. The latter are the wise; there will be more of these when the relationship of cause and effect is once properly understood.
The second viewpoint, the biological, is to regard coniosis or false malaria as a reaction. Now how can a reaction be cured in the constant presence of a cause? Why are there so many isms and pathies, so many pseudo remedies and new ones constantly arising? Looked at in this light you knock the props out from under the patent medicine man and the symptom- preseribing doctor and quack.
COLD AND COLDS. 1903. It is scarcely necessary fo comment
78
on this paper because the tobacco factor stands out all over.* The inhala- tion of tobacco smoke, especially in those wholly unaccustomed to it, pro- duces a depressed circulation; it may be expressed as “‘reduced vitality,” allowing the germs of infection, of colds and various inflammations, to take hold.
CITY DUST, CAUSE AND EFFECT. 1904. This paper was aimed to bring out the relationship between infected dust and the size and number of patent medicine ads. in newspapers, how the number and size of these depend on the amount of infected dust in the community. Such ads are - indicators. In the light of later observations, the list of “‘dust ads’’ should be enlarged to include other ads, notably health food ads and ads relating to teeth and skin, similarly tobacco ads.
Tobacco along with alcohol must be considered a sedative. Both give ease. The Chinese get ease through opium; the East Indian through hasheesh. People the world over use certain drugs for ills that accompany life under unsanitary house and town conditions. They are pseudo remedies. The proper remedy is to cleanup. This can not be over-emphasized.
Did time permit here should come a review of tobacco ads, how they ean be classified. It is interesting to study these. Some are sensible, they are worth studying; on the other hand some are downright drivel, evidently written by old men in their dotage. Which are ‘‘the best’’ tobaccos, cigars and cigarettes? Men who must use tobacco find less need for smoking or chewing constantly if strong brands are used. I could tell how men who used two-for-a-quarter cigars and smoked constantly changed to “‘tufers’’ and smoked less, and at a greatly reduced cost.
I could tell of men who “came back,’’ men who had Jost health, perhaps not so much by the use of tobacco itself as through the infected air they inhaled while using it. I have in mind men whom J advised to get ease by the use of good air rather than attempt to get ease through tobacco. In other words, offset bad air by good air and reduce the reaction and thus reduce ills. (Tables to show how this works out were given in my paper on The Alcohol Problem, last year.)
*Those desiring further details can be referred to a number of my papers, such as the Anti-Spitting Ordinance, in the Bulletin Indiana State Board of Health. (August, 1901.) Dust, A Neglected Factor in Il] Health, in the Proceedings of the Indiana State Medical Association for 1904, and to Atypical Cases and Dust Infection in American Medicine for October, 1904.
79
On the other hand I could tell of women who did not object to the hus- band smoking, in fact enjoyed tobacco. When you consider under what conditions some women spend their time, perhaps in a flat with bad air, with visits down town, to theatres or clubs or shopping, living under “‘high tension’, which often though not necessarily means a high blood pressure, you can readily see why they get ease from inhaling the smoke of others. It is only one step further for them to take up smoking. Such homes are usually childless; if there is a child the physician may be ealled late at night to find an acute attack of tobaccosis, especially after a friend has visited the father and they have “‘smoked up” and filled the house, to which those not accustomed react acutely. The anaphrodisiae effect of tobacco and its influence on divorcee and on race suicide can not here be discussed.
THE CHRONIC ILL HEALTH OF DARWIN, HUXLEY, SPENCER AND GEORGE ELLIOT. 1905. This was an attempt to interpret, through their biographies, the ill health of those no longer living, in the light of a study of living people who seemed to have similar ill health. What can the living learn from the lives of the dead? I shall refer to this again.
Parenthetically I might refer to a paper, vintage of 1905, on NEURAS- THENOID CONDITIONS, in other words, American Nervousness, pre- sented before the American Medical Association, at Portland, Oregon. On that trip I saw all sorts of people and noted the environment under which they lived, from the simple Indian in the open air to John Chinaman in Chinatown. The Indian in former days, and still in isolation and away from the white man, uses tobacco sparingly. People living under slum conditions use sedatives to excess. John Chinaman at home smoked opium, but since occidental pressure has practically forced him out of that, he has taken up tobacco. From the standpoint of coniosis, that is worse, for the tobacco user is a greater germ distributor than the opium smoker.
1906. At this place I would have to review my Presidential Address on the EVOLUTION OF MEDICINE IN INDIANA. I could amplify the five pages on Malaria into many chapters and similarly the five pages on Tuberculosis. The tobacco habit and the chewing habit are referred to but I did not like to mention these too frequently; it rather grates on the ear. Malaria has practically disappeared from Indiana by cleaning up the breed- ing places of the anopheles mosquito. Tuberculosis will disappear when our cities are clean. Today one in every seven or eight of us dies of tuber- culosis. This rate should be enormously reduced, not by erecting more
SO
hospitals and putting them in charge of doctors who chew and smoke. but by teaching the people the necessity, the importance, of clean air.
The ills of civilization call for more civilization. The man who is con- stantly seen with a cigar in his mouth or whose clothes reek with tobacco surely does not represent the highest type. The people have suffered much at the hands of the tobacco using doctor, usually a robust individual who uses tobacco because he gets ease. He does not understand the ills of his patients, and so they apply elsewhere; as a consequence he has all sorts of competitors. There are all sorts of isms and pathies, with new ones spring- ing up.
Here should come a review of several papers relating to high blood pres- sure, a very interesting subject, especially in the light of coniosis. What causes a rise in blood pressure, and how can it be reduced? Why doseemingly robust men drop off suddenly and prematurely? I have at times discussed these things with physicians who smoke and who in their ignorance advised me also to smoke or to become accustomed to bad air conditions, to become acclimated, or, to put it in still another way, to develop an antitoxin, an antitoxin that will enable one to live under unsanitary conditions.
A physician constantly speaks of Case Reports.* In the course of time some of my own shert case reports have developed into biographies. They cover a series of years. At first one may be greatly in doubt as to inter- preting facts, but in time one sees the reason. For instance, I] have in mind a physician who for a number of years practised in a small country town; he made long drives; he had perfect health; he did not use tobacco nor alcohol, had no desire for either. Then he removed to the heart of a medium sized city, that means he exchanged good air for bad air. He began to feel bad; the symptoms of dust infection appeared, finally to such an extent that he was almost disabled. I advised him to get out; others advised him to stay and become accustomed, become adapted. We use the term adaptation to a great extent, but if you look at it properly adaptation comes about in the race, phylogenetically, not ontogenetically. The unadapted are constantly killed off. This doctor concluded to follow the advice of the many rather
than of the one. In time he did develop an ‘‘anti-toxin.”” He even took
*To quote illustrative case reports in a short paper is not satisfactory; one cannot go into details and there is a danger of a reader drawing wrong conclusions in the absence of details. Often brief case reports are worse than none, and one may hesitate to give any at all.
sl
up smoking and enjoyed a roomful of tobacco smoke. He did not know until I examined that he had developed a high blood pressure. When I tell you that my own pressure under good air conditions runs from 100 to 110 m. m. while his under bad air runs about 200, you will realize that the life of such a man hangs on a mere thread and that at any time he may break a blood vessel, resulting in an apoplexy, or, if that does not occur, the kidneys will give out. Such men die suddenly as a rule and prematurely.
But the most interesting phase of the subject is the mental reactions, especially such as go under the terms irritability, nervousness and overwork. The efforts some men make to feel better are pathetic. For instance, I have in mind a captain of industry who did his planning in the early morning hours, usually from four to five, in bed. He saw things very clearly at that time. Then he would go down town and soon begin to feel dull and irritable, but would feel better by smoking, and he smoked one cigar after another. The single evening cigar and the postprandial cigar in time increased in number (as the blood pressure went up) until he wanted to smoke all the time. If alcohol were not taboo he would of course use that. When I examined I found he had a blood pressure of nearly 200 m. m. 1 pointed out that his pressure was due to the life down town, and that if he would reduce that to a minimum, and offset bad air by good air, likely he would have twenty-four hours a day for mental work, so to speak, rather than only one or two hours in the early morning, and that instead of tobacco being a stimulant to him during the day, which enab'ed him to think, it really did nothing of the sort; what it did was to lower the tension and the mind no longer ran riot. It enables him to pick out thoughts and ideas that he had seen very clearly in the early morning, after he had had no tobacco at all for a number cf hours.
The newspaper cartoons, suzh as of ‘“‘Abe Martin” and “Roger Bean,” are interesting. The one might represent the low pressure type in the country with a family of children; he is seen only occasionally with a cigar. |The other, Roger Bean, might represent the high pressure city man, with a cigar in his mouth almost constantly and usually childless. Race suicide and the use of tobacco under crowded conditions go hand in hand.
In early days Uncle Sam was represented as a lean, lank country man. The cartocnists nowadays are filling him out, in other words, making a hearty, robust Uncle, one is almost inclined to say grandfather. To the initiated he
”
is a ‘high blood pressure ease,’’ with attendant ills, including race suicide.
5084—6
ye S82
THE INFLUENCE OF ENVIRONMENT. 1907. This paper ap- peared in a brief abstract; it took up in detail some of the things here men- tioned. I repeatedly refer to John Chinaman who is adapted to live under slum conditions, who thrives in large city slums where even the white man can not live. Now if we look at it from the proper angle, we may conclude that our educators are reducing us to the condition of John Chinaman. They give no attention to the air conditions under which children live and meet. Instead of having teachers who react and who can tell by their own senses whether air conditions are good or bad, who are living barometers or ther- mometers, our schools are supplied with teachers of the robust kind (but who nevertheless react and readily use tobacco, as a sedative, to get ease, to feel less irritable). Under unsanitary conditions the susceptible are constantly weeded out, killed off, and what remains? In the end the John Chinaman type survives, a type which thrives bodily but at the expense of mentality; all the energy being required to ward off infection, leaving nothing for the brain.
Indiana today is stationary in population, as I attempted to show a year ago. Itis due mainly to bad air conditions which lead to the use of sedatives and narcotics. As long as a country is thinly settled, alcohol and tobacco can be used with impunity, but under massed conditions these become racial poisons. The individual who reacts wants a sedative and (as I attempt- ed to show a year ago) there are many that can be used. The most univer- sally used today is tobacco. Tobacco leads to the spitting habit, alcohol not.
Here I shall not take up the statistics of our sedative and narcotic bill, the cost of tobacco and alcohol, and opium and patent medicines, and the various expenses that accompany life under unsanitary conditions, including needless doctor bills, the increased expense for fuel required to feel comfort- able under bad air conditions, the desire for ‘“‘overheated’’ houses, public buildings, railway coaches and trolleys, etc. It must suffice to say the cost runs into the billions of dollars annually in our country.
FLORA OF CASS COUNTY. 1908. I mentioned in the beginning that the tobacco factor can be traced into practically every paper I have given before this Academy. Does that apply to the flora of a particular region? People who feel bad want ease, they want relief from distressing symptoms; they will experiment, they will try anything and everything. An old belief was that every plant has a use, particularly a medicinal use, if we could only discover it. Today we know this is not true, that very few
83
have any medicinal properties at all, and that practically none cure; at best they can give but transient relief. Relieving is not curing. Our native plants are chiefly remarkable in what they will not cure. The man who gets the most benefit is the one who gathers them. Some of you may recall O. Henry’s story.
BIOGRAPHY AND THE INFLUENCE OF ENVIRONMENT. 1908. Short case reports there cited have been continued into biographies. ~ You will readily understand that the longer a history, a biography, is con- tinued the more valid the conclusions that can be drawn. Two of the individuals mentioned have since died, and died just as predicted, not to them however. The value of a theory is in enabling one to predict. By the way, Case 3 was a man who could not do without tobacco. He had used it all his life. He readily saw my reasoning, how, if he did not harm himself, he at least harmed others. He attempted to quit but found it impossible; he had to use a little tobacco, shall one say medicinally?*
THOUGHT STIMULATION. 1909. The reference to tobacco is very brief, but there is a relatively long mention of high blood pressure. This is a very interesting phase of the tobacco problem, especially to those who use their brains rather than their hands to make a living. Under what conditions can a man work at his best and when is he disabled? What will tide him over? I have already referred to this.
Years ago I had a discussion with a physician who did more or less surgery. He was a warm advocate of tobacco; even advised me to use it—the old story of ““Take Something” in place of ““‘Do Something.’”’ Whenever he did work under high tension tobacco soothed him, he said. When he had . an unusual case he would be under high tension, very nervous, and tobacco would steady his nerves, he asserted, or, in other words, steady his hand when he operated. On investigating I found this state of affairs:
Ordinarily he was not under ‘‘high tension,” but this was produced when he locked himself in a small room full of dusty books for several hours, looking over the latest literature regarding such operations, and at the same time filling himself with infected dust. Then his mind would run riot during the
night, he was sleepless, of course thinking about the operation in the morning.
*Coming down on the interurban with me was an old patient. We had a discussion of dust victims ana tobacco victims. Heis alow pressure man. His observations bore out my own. The advantage of discussion over a printed paper is that one can answer questions and make obscure points clear.
S4
He would be practically unfitted for work but for the steadying effect of tokazeo. It acted as a sedative. Why not prevent the reaction and make the use of tobacco unnecessary? When you point out these things you knock the props from under the tobacco argument. Doctors are notorious smokers. When they meet, especially at a banquet, the air is usually full of smoke, so full that you can not see across the room. Naturally those who do not
‘
smoke stay away, as they do from other “smokers.”
In a general way in youth and up to middle age individuals may be grouped under three classes according to the blood pressure—low, medium or high, under unsanitary city conditions. At middle age and after there are really only two groups, those with a low pressure and those with a high pressure. Ordinarily we speak of the action of tobacco on man; in reality it is the reaction of man to tobacco. When the low pressure individual is exposed to tobacco smoke his pressure declines still more, his pulse may be- come imperceptible, he feels bad, and he gets out: He is a victim of tobaceco- sis. On the other hand is the high blood pressure individual: To him tobacco smoke may act as a sedative, it lowers the tension, be feels better.
‘
He is the one who attends “‘smokers;”’ he does not object to tobacco. But as a rule he does not realize the significance of high blood pressure and the danger he is in, how his very life hangs on a thread.*
Moreover mental changes are marked. The low pressure man is stupefied by tobacco smoke, he can not think. The bright things he might have said come to him the next day. On the other hand the high blood pressure man whose mind is constantly running riot is steadied. Such a statement taken without the context might be considered as a plea for the use of tobacco!
How do these two classes, the high and the low pressure, react from the standpoint of coniosis under infected dust conditions and without tobacco effects, say in the poorly ventilated church, as during the closed door season when some leave early because they feel bad? As a general rule those who leave deathly pale” are low pressure with the pressure still further reduced, while those who go out with flushed face are high pressure, with the pressure
heightened. We thus see the two-sided effect of bad air, air with infected dust.
*In my searen for original data 1 have questioned many physicians, including both smokers and non-smokers, as well as an occasional chewer. Strange to relate | have met men whom I suspected to have a high blood pressure who refused to bave the pressure taken; they preferred to live on in ignorance and smoke. The average phy- sician knows as little about the effect of tobacco as the man on the street who has no education and in whom one does not expect any matured opinion.
85
The subject of thought stimulation is intimately connected with the subject of the Air of Places, a subject on which Hippocrates wrote 2,500 years ago, but that was long before the days of bacteriology. The old chemical standard for purity of the air was based on the amount of carbonic acid gas. From the standpoint of coniosis it is the amount of infection in the air that counts. Need | again refer to the role of the tobacco chewer and spitter and smoker?
PLANTS AND MAN. 1910. This was a paper made up largely of analogies, tracing living conditions between plants and their “ills and dis- eases’’ and of man and his ills and diseases, and the need of clean air, need of placing a man under good surroundings.
Today we hear much of eugenics, of the influence of heredity. It is a very important subject. But still more important is eutheniecs, the influence of environment, because we have little control over heredity but we have a far reaching influence over our environment. If a man does not feel well, is ill at ease under a given environment, he should change it; instead of getting drugs, or advice about the use of drugs, he should under- stand the situation so he ean Do Something rather than Take Something. But because people are unwilling to pay a doctor for his time but are willing to pay for his medicine, you readily see the result. The less a physician tells his community about unsanitary conditions, the smoother his sailing. and the better for his purse. (Naturally when a physician offends and antagon- izes chewers and spitters they stay away, ditto the man who smokes and drinks; when they do apply they may be so far advanced in actual disease that the student of ill health can do little for them, he may have in mind the opinion or verdict of the mechanical engineer: Not worth while, consign to the serap heap; but he does not say that aloud.)
Where the medical man keeps still and says nothing, the newspaper reporter is apt to run wild. From simple statements “The health of the city is good,” there soon appear claims, at a time when there are few cases of “contagious disease’’ and few deaths, of ‘The healthiest city in the State.”
At the same time a city may be ‘‘full of ill health,” of people who complain, who are neither actually sick and yet are not at all well. The newspaper itself may be full of patent medicine ads, for ills that are indicators of un- sanitary city conditions. Patent medicine men are shrewd, they advertise only where there is a demand for their wares, for their nostrums.
To the physician and especially to the student of prevalent ill health there
86
are all sorts of symptoms of diagnostic import: Does an applicant for professional service use sedatives and narcotics (alcohol, tobacco, opium, ete.) and use them to excess, or, on the other hand, does he use stimulants (notably coffee and tea)? What does such use indicate? The statement is sometimes made that tobacco is the poor man’s friend, that after a hard day’s work he enjoys his pipe; it calms him. But when you study the poor man and the conditions under which he works, you can see that the great trusts may well make an effort to keep tobacco as cheap as possible. Offering Mr. Common People a cigar, especially one with a colored band, only too often makes him tolerate what are really intolerable conditions. Men working for some of the great trusts twelve hours a day, seven days a week, may be even too tired to smoke. Tobacco is also a great solace to the soldier in the trenches; it makes him contented, it dulls his mind and keeps him from thinking.
CONIOSIS. 1911. As already mentioned, this paper is a general state- ment of the dust theory. My time limit is running to a close and I must refer you to the paper itself, which among other things treats our Triad of American Diseases (catarrh, dyspepsia, and nervous prostration) as reactions, similarly regarding blood pressure changes. The term disease at once brings to mind treatment, medicine, while reaction brings to mind pre- vention.
CONIOLOGY. 1912. This paper was a plea for a new science and the need for an institution for working out problems. The dust particles emitted by the tobacco smoker are included.
In 1913 I was unable to present my paper on RACE SUICIDE, in which the subject was also traced into the schools. There I asked, as this paper has already asked, regarding the use of tobacco by the teacher: Is he justified in using it? If he feels cross and irritable, shall he take something or do something—seek better air conditions, the proper construction of school buildings and proper ventilation and general cleanliness? Child mortality today is enormous. It should be greatly reduced, many bright children who now die could be saved to a life of usefulness. There is much truth in the old saying, The good die young.
THE ALCOHOL PROBLEM IN THE LIGHT OF CONIOSIS. In my paper for 1914 the Tobacco Problem comes up on every page, and I believe after the remarks I have made you will readily see it. I mentioned how on entering medical school I found horribly bad air conditions. The drinking water was equally bad; it was raw muddy river water. A number
87
of students contracted typhoid fever. Some who had never used beer resorted to clean beer; which is the greater evil?
The first duty of the prohibitionist should be to give the people clean water; it is useless to argue with people who are compelled to drink muddy water. The next step is to give people clean air. That takes away the craving for a sedative, be that tobacco or alcohol or opium.
This paper properly should close with a questionnaire, asking for more data, especially from men who lead a mental life. Why do you use tobacco? Why do you not use it? Under what conditions do you demand it? When do you not care for it? Are you keeping down a high blood pressure by the excessive use of tobacco? Can you stop long enough, under bad air condi- tions, to find out what your real pressure is?
‘It is diffieult to get good data; observations should cover at least one year. Iam not inclined to draw conclusions from case reports which cover a period of less than a year, and as already mentioned, the longer the series
of years, the more valuable data become.
89
TOLERANCE OF Soi Micro OrcGAnisms TO MEDIA CHANGES.
H. A. Noyes.
Our text books all give space to the discussion of the food requirements of bacteria. The discussion, although general, is liable to lead us to believe that most organisms may not grow if we change the composition of media slightly. Just what is the minimum ration for most bacteria is not known. Our knowledge of the effects of modifying the composition of culture media is meager, especially when environmental factors are considered.
The Horticultural Research Chemistry and Bacteriology Laboratories, of the Purdue Agricultural Experiment Station have been investigating media for the platings and subsequent culturing of soil bacteria. This paper reports a part of this investigation.
Sort USED.
Two types of soil were used in this work, silty clay from the Experimental orchard at Laurel, Indiana, and brown loam from the Station orchard where a cover crop investigation is under way. All samples reported on in this paper contained from 16 to 20 per cent. of moisture at time of sampling. The method of sampling was by means of Noyes’ sampler for soil bacteriologists. Samples were taken of the upper nine inches of soil.
, Mepta UseEp.
Lipman and Brown “‘synthetic”’ agar.
15 gms. best agar.
10 gms. Dextrose. .05 gms. Witte Peptone.
.2 gms. Magnesium sulphate.
.) gms. Di potassium hydrogen phosphate.
Trace Ferrous sulphate. 1,000 ce. Distilled water.
H. J. Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar. 15 gms. best agar (used instead of 12}.
90
1 em. Sodium asparaginate. 1 gm. Dextrose. .2 gm. Magnesium sulphate. 1.5 gm. (NH4H2PO,) ammonium biphosphate. .1 gm. Calcium chloride. .1 gm. Potassium chloride. Trace Ferrous chloride. 1,000 ee. Distilled water.
Som Extract (UNHEATED).
15 grams of best agar dissolved in 1,000 ce. of solution made as follows:
Two kilos of the brown loam soil were placed in a glass bottle, and 5 liters of distilled water added, the bottle was shaken at intervals and at end of 16 hours the mixture was filtered. One thousand ce. of the filtrate was used in place of distilled water in making up this media.
Sorr Extract (AUTOCLAVED).
Fifteen grams ot best agar dissolved in 1,000 ce. of solution made the same as the soil extract (unheated), except that the two kilos of soil were wet well and heated under 25 lbs. pressure in the autoclave for three hours.
Soil and agar, leaf extract and agar, and wheat straw extract.
These three media were made as follows: To 15 gms. of the best agar were added 10 gms. of the material desired and 1,000 ce. distilled water. The mixture was heated in a double boiler until the agar was dissolved. After making up to volume the media was filtered and tubed.
OTHER Mepta.
To 15 gms. of best agar was added 1 gm. per liter of chemicals appearing as part of the name of the media and 1,000 ce. of distilled water.
Figure 1 expresses graphically the acidity of the various media. The procedure in titrating was as follows: To about 125 ce. of distilled water that has been boiling about 3 minutes in a Jena erlenmeyer flask was added 50 ec. of the media by means of a tall 50 ce. graduate (of small cross-section). Two drops of phenolpthalein solution was added and titration made with tenth normal sodium hydroxide. The only media neutralized at all was H. J. Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar, and this was done with half normal soda,
using a pipette graduated to one-twentieth of a ce.
91
TUBE Mepia Test ll;
Sample of 6/14, 1915.
Sample from Tree XIII—13 Plot F.
Laurel.
One ce. portions of the 1—400,000 dilution of the sample were plated on the following media:
Lipman and Brown agar. Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar.
Agar alone. Soil and agar (Purdue soil).
Soil extract (autoclaved) and agar. Soil extract (unheated) and agar.
(15 gms. agar in all media.) Transfers were made from best colonies on each media to slants of other
media. Tables give results of growth on these agar slants at end of 5 and 14 days’ incubation at 22° C.
& Colonies from L and B agar to
5 Days. 14 Days.
(8 g.* 8 g. AAAS DAS ATA IS Huei ak ah eos ew Men TU oe aa d
0 — 0 — we (6g 7g SONee xtra (UME CAUCE) fens ue ee ene Cae eet ogous cae eet chews 4
{2 — i at Dy 5 g. SOMME tam (CHUELO GLA VIE) Sesser hos eeicd nt es ec, Sov tetera ss conhers 4
3 — 3 —
5) (eae 5 g. PDI MALO C eee ean te, eat TE oy nieces, By ic ole ALA eee
(3 = 3—
4g. 5¢g ANSP By aye SOSA Ore ce ee ee te aa ee any ae eee
4 — 3 —
*8 =growth. — =no growth unless otherwise specified.
8 Colonies from Na. asp. agar to
. 5 Days. | 14 Days. | / 1 7 &. LOBED W i Pa PBSC og: Ream es ae, UD OMe taal, Sa SE ER ME ST at De : | 1— 1— Se: (Ke Somext, .(Unheated)) accel. cee eet ae eee tere Sane een eae ‘ 3 — 1 — (5 ¢ 7g Soiliext. (antocla ved). oe, cei seie nae ye ee tices tae ees +: 3— 1 — | We ee: (Agar alone tre matey sie en ere oe ACE eee on oe Lee | : | 1 — 1 — (6g Le ASarandisOll: x. stn oe hs Sie he So a SRN Se ea es | ‘ | 2— 1 — | 3 Colonies from Soil Extract (unheated) to 5 Days 14 Days. ae iss Ligeia (6 bel Bite ere) ee te ae Ut cl ey att Os eee ne eS ee ae 3 g. 3 g. {2 s- } IN Bi AS DRAG Te eaes ar one Ne REE aa) GRO OnE Ege oer 4 Sipe \1 == SOUKEXt-. (AUTO CLEAVER) ic abso, eete ane yo one ee 3¢g 3g Acaralones 5-25 scene ee eR eo hie eter ee Ose See 3 g. AO AT AT OES OL eee Peis eee Pe SE nS Se 3¢g 3g 3 Colonies from Soil Extract (autoclaved) to 5 Days 5 Days uals ee a Ean GOB Boar chs cess Re ARs RES ee eT Sue | 3¢ INGAAS) SAaCar hee. Se eee os A Oe Eee eres Si fe. 3 g. Soilext: (unheated)® .42- Bee oa ee ae 3 g. g. IAAT MONG ie 22 Pet Roney OEE Re EES Poe IRE SONG BSE eye 3 g. (2¢ 2 ASAT ANG SOUS a avs mye dees Bae Arora Ree ee ee en cree ‘ {1 — 1 —
93
3 Colonies from Agar Alone to
5 Days 14 Days. | Tee, GOTT TESS a Oca ae A aN a rn a i Wee eR ae ' 3¢ 3g In ibe, GO es EE Ss tein ae ee e te CREM ne MC etate Eeli tease NLR ae | 3 | 3¢g | | (2 s. 2g. SOMsexb- (UMNeACER) a 25 8 TN ae Se Seine aheeneie See settee 1 | ‘1— i= = | } NONeX ton (aU LOGIAVEGd): |. sear tam See et cee ee ae a eee 3¢ | 3¢ (Soke wee Dope = | i OAL ATIC SSO es ay etch a & eens, Gicen Shae eme Maes eke Bue Sey nets eNsriersays | —_— | = 3 Colonies from Agar and Soil to | 5 Days 14 Days. (2 = 2¢. ATIC MESA AS cere ee oc meee nts Eee ee |S ee eh dere =v 4 | i— 1— | (2s. | 2¢ ESI IGS DR ELEY Es a th eM ag a aes ae Rea tea Ll coma yal == b= (2g. Dae SOMERS (UNNEALE) 5-255 kos s elec SOs Sa Seana | 1— 1— | (2s. 2g NORM EX EM (AMUOGIAVEG) sce <a ie ane Se aie etieae Sen eae 1 { i — 1 — é 2s. 2¢ Pewee ge CEe So he Aer ARS oh wae veecue, 21) ee mare ae een | { aS. | i= Summary 5 Day Results. 2H) CERT RS eS La 0 al Bp a |e ae Be Re lean yee (GMa. a cada eos 18 made growth. ORAM STC SiC) Nase AS DMO aM ote oe bey yh ever i Ie ey Sep ae ee 18 made growth. Ur Sters TO NOM ext (amneabed jie ie oo re ek oe ee ee eee a 18 made growth. PObAnSLers GO) SOMExt. (AULOSIA Ved). .-2 525 oe) ee a ie oe oe 18 made growth. PSU ALISTCESNLOL AS Al AIOMEr: Sesh Aare cect Sie autos ee homer 20 made growth. MULAN SCCES COP ASAT I SOUS oes oe = a oS «Suge a eee Se ee 17 made growth. Summary 14 Days PRUE ARSFeErSybOL Ui anGuts ASAP esky ear oe ENE ois SS ee 18 made growth. ORUR AT SECES UO LING ASP A AOATE Ns oto ein earn cian eo ec eta ee Reno oiete 19 made growth.
PUAN Sters) tO; SOU ext. (UNHEALEG)).ac2 250.26 les se ke. ea em oe Oe 21 made growth.
94
25 transfers to Soil ext. (autoclaved)..................-. -+eeeeee- 20 Made growth.
ZOD ULANSLOEVS CO TA CAL AlOWMOs ci sess apie ee shal oes cove aiear) ulsiie ete ...++...20 made growth.
25 cransfers’toVAgaranadiSOul. 2 s.cc meats Lee che en etn ie ene 19 made growth. Noles.
When tubes of organisms grown originally on same media were put side by side the following differences were noted.
(1) Agar alone supported very poor growths.
(2) Agar and soil supported fully as poor growths as agar alone.
(3) The two extracts acted about the same, although the heated extract erew the organisms originally grown on Na. asp. agar a little the best.
(4) L. and B. agar and Na. asp. agar supported good growths.
(5) From any macroscopic test the growths on the L. and B. agar were
far superior to those on the Na. asp. agar.
Tuse Mepia Test II.
Samples of 6/14, 1915.
Samples from Tree VI—24. Plot C.
Laurel.
One ee. portions of the 1—-400,000 dilution of the sample were plated on the following media:
Lipman and Brown agar.
Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar. Agar alone.
Soil and agar (Purdue soil).
Soil extract (unheated) and agar. Soil extract (autoclaved) and agar. (15 gms. agar in all media.)
Transfers were made from best colonies on each media to slants of other media. Tables give results of growth on these agar slants at end of 5 and 14 days’ incubation at 22° C.
§ Colonies from L and B agar to
95
5 Days. 14 Days 7g ise IN[ERS ES) ORE EPA easaeeerats: Girt Sia Mee aarti aan iEMS een Om ital aa CP ve il — 1— ‘ 6¢g 5 g. Soil ext. (unheated)......... Po one etes tothe deter PMS oR eLENS TARA ASR 2— 3 — F 5 g. 6 g. Soilvextin(awboclawedirc... wees o ccn steals saw usnene eae 3 — 2— 4g. 6g PAS UTR] OVC Me eee wok eth hes ee Pee Rn ere oy Reis, Eh ance ae 4 — 2— 4g. 4g AAPL WSO age we ee ome Nod be Tem oak at mceape data k tele altar cine An Aye 4 — 4 & Colonies from Na. asp. agar to 5 Days. 14 Days. HTSp eh TN CLES MA ATE ee Arie pacans vata MIN nyc PPS EME, ee PPatccline BRS HERD tan as 8 g. 8 g. 7¢ 6 g. Soilvextss(unheated) ie ce ees ks oc he ee aes 1 — 2— Soiltextas(autoclawedi iss. ects eis ey cmt eee 8 g. 8¢g Alo aTeALOM Ct west an teecechal cs AVR ee Ao Dott c Lal etn a eels toe ee 8 g. 8g : (8g 6g PAI ATRATN CYS Ol tenets ay ase ae apt eee acy CMe AAIG eg) Wa te eSB. eee l 2— Summary 5 Days.
SHUrAnSheLs) LO musa CDRA SAT nko ene eres Aces he ee oan Se jn pee ke peaane 8 made growth. SECLANSTErS COM NAHAS D mA Sa chs Lets ork ais Sete tc eee ee Cee eat 7 made growth. 16 transfers to Soil ext. (unheated).............................. 13 made growth. 16 transfers to Soil ext. (autoclaved)............................. 13 made growth. loxtransfersnto Acarvalon@sy. a5 | as aaicicts Gaetan cee eo ha. cle eens 12 made growth. GktranstersstoeNearianGdssoileis. seo ciyeis a tie een Sevan. cs A aeolian 12 made growth. Summary 14 Days.
SmuLANSfersmOn Rane bvaGaleamcciy tcc ees tas gate eer oa oie ue alse ee 8 made growth. SMURANSTCES sbOMN aa ASD steele sale a ei ehed tere aa ee pe ere oan clan eens 7 made growth. osuransters tons olsext.)qumlaeaved))in seas. a eens ences = ciel see enei nen ane 11 made growth. UG DRAM ES io) Sor @xeiig Cuno) s aso sono cence soos s sno cosunsaoe 14 made growth. MGSorAaSTeLSEbO eA ama OME: .- 9-0. 4) cchoh ake ca ne che ce eke cence ciate 14 made growth.
16 transfers to Agar and soil.......
.....10 made growth.
Noles.
When tubes of organisms grown originally on same media were put side by side the following differences were noted:
(1) Agar alone supported very poor growths.
(2) Agar and soil supported fully as poor growths as agar alone.
(3) The two extracts acted about the same, although the heated extract grew the organisms originally grown on Na. asp. agar a little the best.
(4) L. and B. agar and Na. asp. agar supported good growths.
(5) #rom any macroscopic test the growths on the L. and B. agar were
far superior to those on the Na. asp. agar.
Tuse Mepis Test III.
Samples of 6/25, 1915. Sample No. 6. Rye Plot. Cover Crop Investigations. One ce. portions of the 1 to 400,000 dilution of this sample were plated on the following media:
Lipman and Brown agar.
Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar.
Agar alone.
Soil and agar (Purdue soil).
Soil extract (unheated) and agar.
Soil extract (autoclaved) and agar.
(15 gms. agar in all media.) Colonies developing well on first two media listed were put on other
media and growth noted at end of 5, 11, and 15 days’ incubation at 22° C.
From 4 Colonies on L and B agar to
5 Days. 11 Days. fells Days. 5: (3 g. 4g 4g NA aASD RAGA Mitts gars conse als otisee Ae ees ; : {1 Sy ah (2g pe) oar Solvext. (unheated) hens see eens 2 2) a ‘ (3g 3g 3g RU a ta Say Ke) Read Joe eSNG SDA ae 4 : {1 — 1 — 1 —
Si
From 4 Colonies on Na. asp. agar to
5 Days. | 11 Days. 15 Days. |
Hepa MB Na Parte wpa ever tein es eens ees 4g. | 4g 4g |
(2 g. 3g 4¢g Solve stay (UNHEALER) alan tee eels Ae the Sew oe 4 | , 2 | 1— |
(32 | Bees Il 3¢2 TPT, RR Ar see Oo ree Sys ee Pee fs eine de meh { | |
i= || 1— | 1 —
AMULANSLELSHUOR GANGS r ALANS oo eee a rede betas ope eee ee Saki 4 made growth.
ASUEANSLEES LOM NaS ASD Vat aka wen ts te aoe ees See 2S Madessrowitls 8 transfers to Soil ext. (unheated)...... 2 mal O RENE cept he & aot ek aerate 4 made growth. Satna SLELS FOE ASAT BION Cie Gels yet gies ie Emery Sich ong ose ee eee eee 6 made growth.
ROL SLeLS at Omir ail CEs Ae aie Newer cn srrsne Alen anys eed eerily Way en iepead 4 made growth.
ASG ATSLELSS COL NAL ASD bal ae yew neh Mee hte te aha ey ale li See hanes pei ep Ol 4 made growth.
SRUELESECES CONS OUe kts (UMHEAtEH) = saute eee oa See ee ee 7 made growth.
SHUELMSECLS 1LOPAC AT alONCte: cee nee See em es eam oe alsa ek ops et eae 6 made growth. Notes.
When tubes of different media containing the same organism from the same original colony were put side by side, the following was noted:
(1) The growth on agar alone, soil and agar or on soil extract (unheated) was small.
(2) The soil éxtract carried a better growth than the soil alone.
(3) L. and B. agar and Na. asp. agar carried a good growth.
(4) There was more development of distinguishing characteristics-as to form of streaks and chromogenisis present, with the L and B agar.
Tose Mepia Test IV.
Samples of 6/25, 1915. Sample No. 7. Clean Culture Plot. Cover Crop Investigation. One cc. portions of the 1 to 400,000 dilution of this sample were plated on the following media: Lipman and Brown agar. Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar. 5084—7
98
Agar alone.
Soil and agar (Purdue soil).
Soil extract (unheated) and agar.
Soi] extract (autoclaved) and agar.
(15 gms. agar in all media.) :
Colonies developing well on each media were transferred to slants of other
media. Tables give results of growth on these agar slants at end of 5. 11, and 15 days. Incubation at 22° C.
From 4 Colonies on L and B agar to
i | Shown in | 5 Days. | 11 Days. | 15 Days. Plate SS SSS SSS SSS IN ec AS rr eae, fay ne one | — | — — : | 3 gr. 3 gr 3 gr AAR AlOUC Fan yp ate ao eas | Wen | ia es 2er. | 3er. | 3 er. Soil ext. (unheated).......... : 2— | 1— | 1 — : i i From 4 Colonies on Na. asp. agar to 5 | 5 Days. 11 Days. 15 Days. | Plate. SSS SS Se / iiand Baran. eee ee | 4g. 4g. 4g. ) II | (3 g. 3 g. | 3g. Arar alOne:, <3 ters eee + | ' li— =| = | 1 — 3.79, gfe en ele aie SH eee Soil ext. (unheated)..........- } | } 1 kz / t i | From 3 Colonies on Plain Agar to J | | 5 Days. | 11 Days. | 15 Days. | | (2g | 2 Z¢E Brand BR agarie sic. oP poe. ee cea } | | 1— | 1 — 1— (2Q¢ 2 g. 2¢ Nas asp arar’ 6s ge es See eS ae ee } i | i— | a 1 — 2-8. eae 25 Soilexts (inheatedye. -o.o40. Leelee + i1— 1— 1 —
99
From 8 Colonies on Soil and Agar to
5 Days. 11 Days. 15 Days. 2¢ 2g 2g Ra CES Tae ae eat. hice ena carey o usbeb see 1— 1 — 1 — 2¢ 3 g. 3g IN aes ASD a CALM eee PR fs CANCE Le aeoe tatroe sities i Soil ext. (unheated)..................... @ Bo 3 g. 3g. 2¢ 3g 3g IANS AjTE ral OIE Mews oy: eels nes epee MAP oe UN ciate gabe : From 3 Colonies on Soil Extract (unheated) to 5 Days. 11 Days. 15 Days. PAN GAB waa evens sheet GV Nae ein ence vue 3g. 3g. 3 g. IN A aS Me Salers) Orie eae ad aoa h eye te usasnaeeh @} 3 g. 3 g. IN SATH ADL OM Cesta tay sone tahic enatesnkenatesie \etrar eit ati 3 g. 3g. 3 g. From 8 Colonies on Soil Extract (autoclaved) to 5 Days. 11 Days. 15 Days. ERAT CEB AS aE a ene eee ee bg Sy mae oat 3} Bs 3g. 3 g. INAS DAS ray eee eT Meee dts asaya ee aT acs 3} (35 3} (Se 3 g. 5 2 g. 2 ¢. 2 g. Ne ANAL ONMEN sista Maeno ee ee a ele eres (il — — — Soil ext.) (unheated))2. 785600. .0..52..02- 3 g. 3g. 3 &. Summary (5 Days Results). LG: WEESES WO Wy QiaGl IB GRUP poo een ecnohoanceadcnveweroucauasoe 14 made growth. HGxtransterstovNias asp: sA@ar Gace! hoes ithe Sens etl) ans, eae ee aha 12 made growth. i7 transfers to Plain agar.................-- Medghos cures conc ude 13 made growth. IL7/ WRENS KEES WO) SKonll IOeah, (WimMlsSAHeCl)>oo5acco.055es6n0ecusooesnccas 13 made growth. Summary (15 Day Results). RGEtranstersstor Mande B raga socal tothe SaNelre <iok Qeiaes ate 14 made growth. HGRLEANSTELSECO Naas SAL aris eter ase. lacs enone suee ceeeaue Gon ace mebacchen eee 13 made growth. imbbanStersnbOpelaincagwarh, ero oe Choe eee, ec sa he Behn ats) oth chides, Samhita 14 made growth.
_ 1? transfers to Soil ext. (unheated)..........................%... 15 made growth.
100
General Notes.
When tubes of different media containing the same organism from the
same original colony are put side by side, the following is noted:
(1) The growth on agar alone, soil and agar or on soil extract (unheated)
is small.
(2) The soil extract carries a better growth than the soil alone.
(3) L. and B. agar and Na. asp. agar carry a good growth.
(4) There is more development of distinguishing characteristics as to
form of streaks and chromogenisis present, with the L. and B. agar.
TusE Mepia Test V.
Sample of 7/16, 1915. Sample No. 8. Millet Plot. Cover Crop Investigations.
One ce. portions of the 1 to 400,000 dilution of this sample were plated
on the following media:
DN.
~ a Ww
oS
Hae eo
Wheat straw extract. Leaf extract.
. Starch.
Agar alone.
Ammonium nitrate.
Conn’s sodium asparaginate. Soil.
Soil and starch.
Lipman and Brown agar. Ammonium nitrate and starch.
(15 ems. agar is basis of all media.)
Colonies developing well on each media, plates III and IV, were transferred
to slants of other media. Tables give results of growth on these slants at
end of 6, 10 and 14 days’ incubation at 22° Centigrade.
4 Colonies from L and B agar to
101
Wheat Straw Ext
Leaf Ext
SHE THO Teds gt A so oe re ator eet ne eae FNC ArtaLON GE eter eR a eae i wee
AMMO Mis NTE he oe see elon eee
Na. asp. agar
Soil and Starch
L and B agar
Ammonium Nitrate and Starch
Soil and Ammonium Nitrate...........
Soil Extract (unheated)
6 Days 10 Days. | 14 Days. a eee (3 g. 3 g. 3 g. V ive 1 — 1 —
(lg 1g. Wes
eee 3 = j=
4¢ 4g 4g. VI (3 g. 4g 4g. Vil ved
4¢ 4g. 4g. Vill 3g 3g: 4B. 1x = 1—
(3 g. 3 g. 3 g. x ee 1— 1 —
(2 g. 2¢. Dees
p= Pisa pea
4g ag 4g. XI {3g 3) fs 4g.
pe —_—
(2 2. 2 £- 3g:
lo 2— | 1 —
2¢. 3¢ | 4g
pe 1
102
4, Colonies from Na. asp. agar to
MV nsehin SGI 1Bpding jo doosame pe opon toe GCA LEH ARU SARA an ca Shier ace Gee nore et ekone
Sain Ch aan ne heuer a ieeecel ccm pels tyres ears vse NG ATHALOMEC) Sire seh sind sents) ok Seeasteceonarckouakis
Ammonium Nitrate..................
PGaM ABV aS are oe ere ue ane eMac
Ammonium Nitrate and Starch....... Soil and Ammonium Nitrate...........
Sol Wai, (hiMlNeRIUEC))o cock boosnsoc oboe e
Days. Plate.
6 Days. 10 Days. 14 4g. 4g. Ace ne V {3 g. 3) Rs ues (rte if iP 4g. 4g. 4¢ Vi 4g. 4 2g. 4g Vil a (So 4 g. 4e VIII 4g. Age aS Ix 4g 4g, 4¢ x 4g. 4g. 4g. 4g. 4g Ag. XI Ange 4g. 4g. (3 g. 3 g. 4 2, } (1 — 1— 4¢g 4g. 4g.
4. Colonies from Starch to
105
6 Days. 14 Days. Dw. 22. AVEC ata Gravy HuXbs tn 2n as ee cate, bel cian ei (2 — 2— Ih {een 1g. TLS DB Tepe ae ioe i ea ae WI eo Sg 13 — 3 — a) fe 4g. SGan Ghiwesh wagner Mitten, oe Been mya amend teas eins — (3 ¢g 3 2. PRE ect OME: yess) ine l baa teel hau 2) ape oti eas i= 1 /NiaTuaMOreniioa, INMUENTES Goce eek edo oes eee oe g. 4¢ IN era SD Lea Sales piece a tea aG ahs! Ghee 4g 4g. 3g SO ar nee ie A oe te go ere a ate Ae ane 4g. —— 2¢g 2s Sonll ghevel Stieirele 6g 66 6454 ne cle Bison meee ane e= 7 RANGE RAC aR teat. Reta en Sees a edge es eel oe chs 4¢g 4g. ; ‘ (3g 3 g. Ammonium Nitrate and Starch........... i= T= Soil and Ammonium Nitrate............. 4g 4¢ (3 ¢2 4g. Soushxt-nqumheated))). a5 ince se oe Se | ; ee 4 Colonies from Agar alone to Shown 6 Days. in Plate. SUL CHER erh ahs tie eae On 5, SU ws yes ules ae XII INTB a EIST Cit RS, Snell ine a a aaa te uu ie XII 1Ly GUO RI Beye H Ose, eas ee ae mies Renee
104
4 Colonies from Ammonium Nitrate to
6 Days. 10 Days. 14 Days. Shown a Plate Ds TN ES A Ye ant hogs ei Pees cae 4g. 4g. 4g. XII IN ay ASD WAP AN crs lene cet eres 1 NOEs Oe 4g. 4g. 4g. XII SS UAT CIS sot C10) tals | Seg ON AN eon 4g. 4g. 4g. 4, Colonies from Soil and Starch to 6 Days. 10 Days. 14 Days. Te ANOUBVAZAL Coe tate ait eee ee ete nes 4g. 4g. IN aA ASD MAG AL cess tek bee actors a) 4g. 4g. 4g. (2 ¢g. De 2 g. SATIRE, SST chet de Pie os ch ee np meh net 4 2 — 2— 2— 4 Colonies from Soil alone to 6 Days. 10 Days 14 Days | (3 g. 3 g. 4g. Laan GUBVAP ars fis ee tere che: Les ee eta 4 (1 — 1— INAS AS Diao alae ict et eee hed eee 4g. 4g 4g. SS Gaur bn, alares rene: copy fese fir eee ta See tye See 4g. 4g 4g. Soilandtstarchitwe ti cee ee ee ee 4g. 4g. 4g. ‘\ 4 Colonies from Ammonium Nitrate and Starch to a eS 6 Days.= | 10 Days. 14 Days. 222. Latarnide BEa gars he yore cee ae an ey op ea heme 4g g. 4g. (3g 4g 4g. IN AAS Dt Alar Ae SA Se tee Sells eater sie { \1 — | SGanehic Mase treed oer aie tenes AOR ec ae 4¢ 4¢. 4 g. | (3 g. 32g 3¢ SOlvand Star Charro eee tke tee aes) Aer ee of ‘1— 1 — 1 —
105
Summary 6 Days.
12 UiewORES Wo) \NIMEEIN SUT IDs co cou su dhab ooo uodeoeoN bHooeboes 9 made growth. i 2BtraANSLErs LOM Cath Xtysceeer cheesy oleae ude Re pees sore ae eRe te el. bara see 5 made growth. SF) HRMS WO SWARM so. oscosobooagonnebnebbuce oa tcails Whur eanee sere senha 27 made growth. H2ECLANSTETSEFO LAS ARiAlOME cia ial chins ats lpn le ece we Gili nes ne ke casi siaue, Gauita suey 10 made growth. 12 transfers to Ammonium Nitrate.............................. 12 made growth. 32 transfers to Na. asp. agar......................................28 made growth. PPEGFANSLErSONS Ole srk seen pee va eae ane nein ta lee eee ID Ray eel) of an 10 made growth. PAO) {HARIRI WO) sOrlleyaGl ShipRO NG. oe oe soe se sou oones be oerseua oes 15 made growth. SomULANSLELS) LOM AMM B TAC Aas yeah Mora esa nthe Neck siete loca hier ee ees 30 made growth. 12) URETOSIETES HO) INSbINIOR GAG Siges Soo y bio coeslupsosoucsonoucooe doe 10 made growth. 12 transfers to Soil and NHiNO3............... So) RIN Sy uo cals beh 9 made growth. MA RGRAM SLERSWUOMS OLAX ti yyy ae poe SR Me st pony ses eal an een aE 5 SRD ons 12 made growth. PZ mtVAMSTERS hada aen ena are aA nave etna een Commence recites Meno atm eaten ATES eigenen 177 made growth.
Summary 14 Days.
12) transfers to Wheat Straw Ext...................1)............. 9 made growth. asbranstersnctowbieat Hts ese ue aye eee an aap ee cles cri aollnnseee ee ree ecko bees 5 made growth. SMTA STOESHCONS LAL lee aastey) corpse cae tu Tween rau ey ats on ite ea Sy cee tS epeen= 28 made growth. 2 transfersyvor Agar: alomens ie sey ei. ie pullacce cic, 8 Pascoe egrets als 11 made growth. 12 transfers to Ammonium INDICA eer cae es enter e? ERS) a ane cnet 12 made growth. SOMeLANSTELS VO Nias ASP Mad Sales ee eccrine alkenes dltce eels a euee ene 31 made growth. OPC rANSTEESHCOUS OLA \ scuacernecu nee ssn eat NU SapraAmyube Ns seleirg eM il as ac A le 10 made growth. PAO) (HRNNSTSES WO) Soll Aral SEWN, soo 5 os ko oe a coe oc once och oon soesuce 15 made growth. 32 transfers to Land B agar..................,..................32 made growth. 12 transfers to NaNO; and St:...... 003. ..0. 2. Melek degen es 11 made growth. 12 ENTS ETES WO) SOUL Bin! IN elINIOH. oc oeoesuscnoeceoceoccsuonsssoe 11 made growth. UD, WES ES WO SOW WEA, coacacdacgobousunbocunsoscacccoonbo occu om mele SROVTHM PALO ME ATASEELS recy aces emte ila sok nim t histe Ais aT SRNR, Sola RCW a alos eis ce grat ae 187 made erowth. Notes.
(1) In this set of tests, as in those run previously, there was very little erowth on the agar alone, the soil, and the soil extract slants. Practically all the organisms tested made some growth on these media.
(2) Ammonium nitrate furnishing nitrogen both in NH, and NO, did not grow better cultures than agar alone. This latter is from observations made after fourteen days’ incubation.
(3) Wheat straw extract grew but little better cultures than the soil extract, while leaf extract was a total failure as a media.
(4) Starch furnishing sources of energy, and being capable of being
106
split in many ways by enzymatic action, grew good cultures both alone and in combination with other materials.
(5) As noted in all other tests the Lipman and Brown agar grew the best cultures and apparently developed their distinguishing chromogenic characteristics much better than the sodium asparaginate agar.
(6) From macroscopic comparisons the starch media seemed to be the real competitor of the Lipman and Brown agar.
Tuse Mepia Test VI. Testing Organisms from Laurel Soils.
Plated on Lipman and Brown Agar.
When transferred to slants of different media.
Samples taken 7/27/1915.
Description of colonies from which transfers were made:
No. 1. Round, curled edge, wrinkled in structure, green in color, a mold 1.5 em. in diameter.
No. 2. Elliptical, curled edge, wrinkled in structure, green in color, a mold 1.5 em. long.
No. 3. Round, lobate edge, wrinkled structure, brown (pale) in color, a mold 1 cm. in diameter.
No. 4. Round, entire edge, granular structure. White raised center with brown ring outside, apparently a mold about .5 cm. in diameter.
No. 5. Discoid, crenate edge, smooth structure, milk white in color, .) em. in diameter, a mold.
No. 6. Round, entire edge, smooth structure, salmon red in color, 3 mm. in diameter.
No. 7. Round, ciliate edge, granular structure. Yellow in color, deep yellow at center, about 1 cm. in diameter.
No. 8. Round, ciliate edge, granular center and fibrant outer portion describes structure. Center dark green, border light green, about 4mm. in
diameter. No.9. Round, plain edge, smooth in structure, salmon red with yellowish
outside ring, produces yellow pigment soluble in media, about 4 mm. in
diameter. No. 10. Round though dented, crenate edge, spotted structure, white
in color, about 8 mm. in diameter.
107:
No. 11. Discoid, lobate edge, spotted structure, white in color with heavy black center, about 6 mm. in diameter.
No. 12. Round, entire edge, granular structure, heavy center, milk white in color, about 1 cm. in diameter.
No. 13. Round, entire edge, smooth structure, yellow in color, about 3 mim. in diameter.
No. 14. Round, entire edge, smooth structure, dark red in color, about 4 mm. in diameter.
No. 15. Round, entire edge, spotted structure, white with brown center, about 8 mm. in diameter.
No. 16. Discoid, lobate edge, wrinkled structure, yellowish white in eolor, about S mm. in diameter.
Observations of Growth and Relative Growth were made at end of 5th, 7th, and 15th days. Temperature of incubation, 22° to 23° C. on following media:
Lipman and Brown agar.
Conn’s sodium asparaginate agar. Ammonium nitrate agar.
Starch agar.
Ammonium nitrate and starch agar.
108
Observations of Growth and Ranking 5 Days.
No Land B Na. asp. NHiNOsz Starch | NH«NO; and . agar. agar. agar. agar. Starch.
ets Feeney = 5% * 1 * 4 * 3 *2
PAU la tot Bs eR * 4 ay if ats. ae, -— 5
Se chan Mores — 5 23 — 5 * 20s * 2 or 3
AN ercowint, sae — 5 3 at th Ey ED,
Eh ace ee ener * 5 * 7 E30 =— 5 aD
(ah A pent nee: ns OY “A ne * 4 mie
Tee See see was aan) — 5 De, * 4
OTA BEA ote eee cat dD) * 4 ach raley
CE eek aas ces ee cael - 4 2 15) ear
IQ) gad ekstotel eats onl. * 4 ae 2 2 — 5
Wate ne oes a a ee coe ES — 5 ce, — 5
2 EW erates Es il et ct eat 2 sil
ikea Seite Oe ccusy 2, 28 BS * 4 Edit
1 ie: le Eee een nS * 7 * 4 “ot t5) atey = 2,
FL pak eet ono ors * 4 is) EO) £42, soi!
Oe AA ee * 2, oil 23 83 | — 5 * 4
DA Vice clita eye 2.94 1.87 3.69 3.16 PAP LN
Atve, G=ll Gee ee 2.10 2.10 3.91 3.00 3.10
Ba
(%) No growth, ranked lowest so that a
= Growth. = No growth.
relative general average may be made.
LO9
Observations of Growth and Ranking 7 Days.
! | i No Land B | Na. asp. | NH:NO; | Starch NH:NO; and yas } agar. agar. -| agar. agar. Starch Agar. | | Mies st eh ie | —~ 5% | #1 sat a2 * 4 eee Ape i +3 #2 eas * J 5, Sener oe eee Pr | #1 ee age | Sede pl 3g Aenean ce etien ie i x4 | * J | #5 * 3 * 2 Fray een | = § x2 * 4] a * 3 Hier ake eet x5 x 4 x2 x 1 * 3 Tote Sha fel 1 | x2 = 5 * 3 * 4 ant Hyena * 2 | x] * 4 * 3 * 5 ome aban ene rant | * 2 = E + 4 * 3 RO Nae lea *] | * 2 = zis =: Tee ea et | #2 | =] ary 4. * 3 Daye wets] * 1 | *2 | * J * 1 * J [Boe peers aaems| * J] | x2 #5 * 4 *3 (ei ore tea | =] * 4 #5 * 3 * 2 NS tee ae ee * 1 or 2| * 1 or 2! = 5 | = 4 * 3 GER eet aes * 9 * ] = 4 = & | * 3 | | Avg Bile So pe | 2.50 | 1.81 3.76 | 3.00 3.25 Ay (G68. 85. 1.64 | 2.00. 3.72 | 3.18 3.18 | j |
* = Growth. — = No Growth. (%) No growth, ranked lowest so that a relative general average may be made.
110
Observations of Growth, Color of Growth and Ranking 15 Days.
| se | LandB | Na. asp. NH«iNO; | Starch | NHsNO; and y agar. agar. agar. agar. \starch Agar. De ae — 5 ~h * 4 #2 ' *3 BI. Br. Gr. White Li. Green | BI. Gr. lh ee rae: #1 * 3 #4 *2 *5 | Bl. Gr. Li. than 2 | Li. than 1 | 2 1 an ee —-5 | tie i al a +3 Green Green | Wh.-Gr. Aen Pia ee #4 *] *3 5 ) *2 i Cream White i White | Li.-Gr. D.-Brown See en ee aa Pl ae | +3 be *2 | Heavy Wh. | White White | White Gis eas See #4 #3 #5 #1 *2 Red Red White Red | White Pee Me es +1 arg 2 4] +5 | +4 +2 | Y¥.-White | Green | White | Y.-Green | Yellow SAS tee c= Be #1 * 4 * 3 | £5 Green Green White | Y¥.-Green | White i ober e a aa A, #5 See) ee Y.-Red R.-Yell. White | Y.-White | Y.-White 10S, oe ee | #1 3 #4 | #2 = 5 White White White White iF Oe ee a * 3 #1 #5 4 *2 Brown | Brown White White White 12 * 4 #5 #3 *2 * 1 | Br-Wh. | White | Br-Wh. | Br-Wh. | Br-Wh. US oa chan aee ! ay! tae | a ee Fa5y tw a +2 P.-Gr. | P.-Gr. | P.-Gr. } P.-Gr. P.-Gr. ae Se #1 #4 #5 #3 #2 Red Cream Dewi. A Red Red 15 ee see Ae | #1 : #2 : #5 * 4 *3 | Br-Wh. | D.-Wh. D.-Wh. Br.-Wh. Br.-Wh. 16. Re zo ft #3 si +4 ae 7% Br-Wh. | .Y.-Wh. | .Br-Wh. | Br.-Wh = z _ Ave allc dc | 2.56 | 2.50 4 Sig 306 2.56 | . i LE 7. eats as | 1.91 | 3.00 4_55 3.09 245
* = Growth. — = No growth.
iba
Summary.
Average All Sixteen Organisms.
Land B Na. asp. NHiNOsz Starch NHiNO; and agar. agar. agar. agar. Starch Agar. 5 days....... 2.94 1.87 3.69 3.16 2.97 7 GANS; so6066 2.50 1.81 3.76 3.00 83 5 PAD) NG GENS. cease 2.56 2.50 AW ll 3.06 2.56 Summary.
Average Organisms 6 to 16 Inc.
Land B Na. asp. NHiNOz Starch NHsNOz and agar. agar. agar. agar. Starch Agar. 5) GANS oo 6 006 2.10 2.10 3.91 3.00 3.10 W GEMINI Sso cabo 1.64 2.00 3.82 3.18 3.18 15 days....... 1.91 3.00 4.55 3.09 2.45 Noles.
(1) The comparisons between the growth of an organism on the different media were practically as marked at 5 days as they were at 15.
(2) The five molds Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, were more easily transferred to sodium asparaginate agar than to some of the media.
(3) Where molds are included the greatest number of failures of growth occurred on Lipman and Brown agar.
(4) Studying Nos. 6 to 16 inclusive, it was found that the Lipman and Brown and the Sodium asparaginate agar were about alike in amount of growths produced on slants, and that the ammonium nitrate agar was the poorest media considered.
(5) When chromogenesis is considered, Starch alone and in combination with the Ammonium nitrate brought out as much chromogenesis as the Lipman and Brown agar.
Summary of Investigation.
This paper gives the results of tests made on agar slants where the two media most commonly used for plating soils are compared. The results
112
of comparisons between these media, and comparisons of them—with agar alone, with soil, wheat and leaf extract media, with ammonium nitrate and starch media, both alone and in combination—showed that organisms once grown on media will generally grow when transferred to other media.
The rate of development seemed more important than the fact that the organism grew. Comparisons of growth at end of different periods of in- cubation were usually the same. Where growth was good it developed slowly enough so that it could not be termed a flash growth. Where growth was poor, distinguishing characteristics peculiar to the organism were rarely apparent.
The explanation of the tolerance observed is not that those organisms growing when soil is plated on inferior media are probably the same organisms that yield the best colonies on better media. Picking out organisms plated on the best media and growing them on poorer media supports the above statement. Chromogenesis was augmented by the presence of carbohydrate in the media.
Comment.
Many expect that soil biology will explain results for which chemical and physical causes have not been found. Many look to the control of plant growth through the application of principles of microbiology.
Soils with their large or small amounts of decaying organic matter, of both plant and animal origin, must be a possible medium for the growth of all kinds of bacteria. One reason why the number of bacteria in our prairie soils has not been found to vary with the crop-producing power of the soil may be the tolerance of many kinds of bacteria to all present chemical and physical differences between types of prairie soil. In sandy and poor soils some believe that there is a relationship between the number of bacteria and the crop-producing power of the soil. The factors of temperature, aeration and moisture are more constant in the rich soil, and for this reason the changes in soil moisture, the variation in soil temperature, and the movement of soil gases must exert a more marked influence on the presence of and the activities of certain micro-organisms than the food factor does.
113
FIGURE /
Acidity of media used
Per Cert o 0:1 02 OF O4 ds o6 oF o8
8% Pe ao era. te es Na asp. agar
: Ses Soil and NH,NO,
> SSeS Ammonium nitrate mc | Ammonum nitrate and starch 7; Lipman and Brown agar
( Soil extract (unheated) mi | Soil extract (autoclaved) mm | Wheat straw extract
ma | - Leot extract
oo Starch.
oof il Agar alone
00% Agar and soil.
5084—S8
114
PLATE I. 4 Colonies from L. and B. agar on Na. asp. agar.
PuatTe II. 4 Colonies from Na. Asp. agar on L. and B. agar
116
Puare IT.
Some of the plates from which organisms were obtained for tube media test V.
7,
Puate IV. Some of plates from which organisms were obtained for tube media test V.
118
PLATE WV.
4 organisms from L. and B. agar to wheat straw extract agar. 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to wheat straw extract agar.
119
PLATE VI.
At left: 4 organisms from L. and B. agar to starch agar. At right: 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to starch agar.
120
Piate VII.
organisms from L. and B. agar to agar alone. 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to agar alone.
{21
Puate VIII.
At left: 4 organisms from L. and B. agar to ammonium nitrate agar. At right: 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to ammonium nitrate agar.
— ; = | ——— ~J Hort, Chem i. 2 S ve f tar & ¢ 3 pce p. Sta ° } 2
Hort. Ch
PLATE IX.
At left: 4 organisms from L. and B. agar to Na. asp. agar. At right: 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to Na. asp. agar.
PuLaTEeE X.
At left: 4 organisms from L. and B. agar to soil and agar. At right: 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to soil and agar.
1
9
ed
PEATE SEE.
At left: 4 organisms from L. and B. agar to L. and B. aga At right: 4 organisms from Na. asp. agar to L. & B. agar
r
“IUVSU G NY JT uO aese ase “ey WioOuy SUISTURSIO F 1A SLI 9UlOIDXY “av5e “dsv ‘VN uo ivse “dse -eN Wor SWISTURSIO F :1909U9D JILSIY OUOTR IVSV Woods SUISIURSIO F :109U90 YJa'T :4jJo] 9UTOI19X
N uO OUOTL IVSe OI SUISIURSI0 F
“TIX LV
“Ivse ‘dsv -v
ayo HOH
ae
127
Some MetTHops FOR THE STUDY OF PLASTIDS IN HiGHER PLANTS.
D. M. Morrter.
The following methods have been found to be satisfactory in the study of the primordia of chloroplasts, leucoplasts, and other apparently similar bodies in cells of liverworts and higher plants that are known under the
name of chondriosmes. FIXING.
Chrom-osmie acid is the fixing agent chiefly used, and in the following
proportions: (Glonmaranivene yore ls ACA enn ee a cot oN tee gta 17 ce. Osi eracl MeO meray ares oe eee RR eh eae iar ees na 3 ce. Glacialeaceticra cide ra arae a are ener 3 drops
The specimens remain in this fluid from 36 to 48 hours, after which they are washed 12 to 24 hours in flowing water, or in several changes of water if flowing water is not available.
After careful dehydration the specimens are brought into paraffin, using chloroform as the solvent. Sections from 3 to 5 microns in thickness are cut, depending upon the nature of the tissue under consideration, and stained in the well-known iron-alum-haematoxylin stain. As a counter stain orange G dissolved in clove oil is sometimes very desirable.
PROCEDURE WITH THE [RON-HAEMATOXYLIN.
After the preparations have been freed from paraffin and from the solvent used in removing the paraffin (turpentine or xylol) by means of absolute al- cohol, they are allowed to stand in the mordant from two hours to over night. As a mordant a 3 per cent. aqueous solution of the double iron salt is used (ferric ammonium sulphate (NH). Fe(SO,.), 24 H,O. The preparations are now poured off with water and stained over night in a 2 per cent. aqueous solution of haematoxylin. From the stain they are again poured off with water and destained with the above iron salt. The destaining is watched
under the microscope. After the desired stain has been reached, and this
128
is determined by trial, the preparations are washed for about 15 minutes in gently flowing water. They are now dehydrated by treating with absolute alcohol, after which they may be counter stained with clove oil orange G or merely cleared in clove oil and cedar oil and mounted in balsam.
In case counter staining is desired, the process should be watched in order to avoid over-staining with the orange. In some cases the clove oil orange G need remain on the sections but half a minute. This stain may be removed by xylol. cedar oil, or pure clove oil, when the preparation is ready to be mounted in balsam.
By this method the primordia of chloroplasts and leucoplasts and other similar bodies are stained black or a blue-black.
The foregoing is much simpler than Benda’s procedure, and it gives results that are as satisfactory. However, since it is desirable in cytological studies to check up one method with another, the procedure devised by Benda is recommended, although it is more tedious and time-consuming. The follow- ing modification of Benda’s method has been used with excellent results:
1. Fix in chrom-osmic acid of the above-mentioned composition 24 to
48 hours.
. Wash in water 1 to 2 hours. . Treat objects with equal parts pyroligneous acid (rectified) and 1 per
a)
cent. chromic acid 24 hours. . Treat with 2 per cent. solution bichromate of potassium 24 hours. Wash in water 24 hours. Bring into paraffin and section in case sections are to be made. . Treat with the iron mordant 12 to 24 hours. . Pour off with water and treat 10 to 20 minutes with alizarin.
OND oF
v=)
. Pour off with water and let dry in the air.
et i]
. Stain now with Benda’s crystal violet by warming gently to the point of forming vapor. Allow the preparation to cool for 5 to 10 minutes, after which pour off with water and let the preparation dry in air, standing the slide on end.
11. Destain with 5 per cent. acetic acid under microscopic control. This
requires from a few seconds to a minute.
12. When the desired stain is reached, pour off with water, dehydrate with
absolute alcohol. and counter stain, if desirable, with clove oil
orange G. This stain is now removed with xylol or cedar oil, and the preparation is mounted in balsam.
———————
a, a a FT
129
As a result, the chloroplasts, chondrisomes, ete., are stained a deep blue, the cytoplasm a light orange or almost colorless, and the cell walls varying intensities of orange.
The writer has never been able to see the use of the treatment with alizarin, and this part of the process may be omitted. However, Benda’s solution of alizarin is made as follows: Make a saturated solution of Kahl- baum’s alizarin-sulfo-saurem Natron (mono.) in 70 per cent. alcohol. One ce. of this solution is added to 80 to 100 ee. of water.
Benda’s erystal violet solution is made as follows:
Saturated solution erystal violet in 70% alcohol ............1 part. 1% hydrochloric acid in 70% aleohol..................... 1 part.
PNT TTP en GS Tenet ser ease ede soe obey Me Mead el RD eT a oO ded RTA 2 parts.
5084—5
131
THe Morrpnoruoey or Riccta Fuuitans L. Frep DoNnaGnHy.
Since 1835 the Riccias have received more or less attention by the botan- ists. Bischoff, Lindenburg, Hoffmeister, Leibgeb, Garber, Lewis, Campbell, Black and Atwell, have in turn made many valuable contributions to our knowledge of this group. Still many problems ‘of morphology and ecology confronts us. Several species common to Indiana remain almost unstudied as to detail. Among these none seem more interesting than the study of R. fluitans.
This species is widely distributed over the temperate zone and over glaciated Indiana. Botanists recognize two forms, an aquatic and a terrestrial type. The aquatic form is very abundant around Angola, Fort Wayne, Logansport and Terre Haute. During the summer and autumn mats of aquatic R. fluitans can be found floating in the ponds and sluggish streams. In winter these mats sink to the bottom of the ponds and remain there till spriag. The continued cold does not seem to injure the plants which lie below the ice, but those plants which are frozen in the ice are much winter- killed, the apical ends alone remaining green. During the warm spring these plants make rapid growth, and by summer patches of thalli again dot the ponds and streams, showing that under favorable weather conditions the thalli reproduce vegetatively very rapidly.
Aquatic R. fluitans is sterile, branches dichotomously, the sprouts diverg- ing widely, and often become recurved. The apical ends are deeply notched, and truneate. Both dorsal and ventral surfaces bear chlorophyll. Rhizcids and ventral scales are absent.
When evaporation is excessive and the ponds are low, the narrow thalli widen at their apical ends somewhat, and lose some of their characteristic color. This is especizlly noticeable in those plants which grew in unshaded ponds. The thalli which grew in ponds bordered by forest trees did not show a marked change in width and color, due no doubt to the protection afforded by the overhanging boughs and leaves. When single thalli are washed ashore they generally die. More often, mats of plants are washed upon the wet edges of the ponds. In favored places the thalli coming in con-
132
tact with the wet soil develop rhizoids, ventral scales, and open air chambers, while those whose apical ends do not touch the soil dry and soon die, giving some shade to the delicate plants below. My observations have not been conducted over a sufficient period of time to determine fully whether these plants produce sex organs and fruit as some observers would have us think actually occurred. In the Deming ponds east of the city limits of Terre Haute aquatic R. flwitans grows abundantly. During the summer and autumn of 1913 these loess encircled ponds became dry due to the long continued drought; however, many thalli remained alive in wet shaded places throughout the dry season. These plants remained in contact with the earth sufficiently long to fruit, judging from experiments made upon other Riecia, however, no sporophytes were found. When weather conditions were more favorable for hepatic growth searches were made for rosettes and thalli typical of terrestrial R. fluitans but none were found, indicating that spores had not been produced or had not had time to germinate. Weather conditions of 1914 were similar to those of the fall of 1913. At intervals during the autumn frequent observations were made but yielded no satis- factory evidence. Again in 1915 careful searching was done, without gaining additional results. Similar observations were made at Rosedale in the “Niggar Lake’’ region, no rosettes or thalli on the mud were found. Judging from these observations it seeius very doubtful if the aquatic form ever changes into the terrestrial form or fruits but reproduces vegetatively only. It is very doubtful if the so-called terrestrial R. flwitans and the aquatic R. fluitans belong to the same species.
The terrestrial R. fluitans is not common in this region; however, it occurs in small patches on mud flats and wet fields during the autumn. It generally grows in rosettes due to the fact that the spores are not scattered but held within the archeground pit, and that the sporophyte is generally buried in the mud. The thalli are about one-quarter inch long and less than an eighth of an inch wide. The plants have a characteristic green which is tinged with purple late in the autumn. Numerous rhizoids develop from the ventral side. A single row of scale leaves which split into two rows grow just beneath the apical cell. The most prominent ventral mark of identification is the protruding sporophyte. The dorsal surface is cut by a furrow which deepens at the apical end into which the pores of the alternating sex organs open, and down which the sperms are carried by moisture. Above the fertilized egg develops a tongue-like projection which covers the mouth of the arche-
gonial pore, much the same as a similar structure does in Pellia. Stoma each being surrounded by four cells open into deep air chambers.
The thallus develops from one or more apical cells as do other Riccias described. This is a large triangular cell in longitudinal section, situated at the forward end of the growing thallus. The thallus is only three or four cells thick beneath the dorsal furrow. In section air chambers appear very large and numerous. They develop probably in three ways: (1) by internal splitting; (2) by the parting of cell rows for long distances; and (3) by the process so well described by Leibgeb for the hepaties.
The sex organs develop in general in the same way as described for other liverworts. The mature archegonium consists of two base cells, ventral and neck cells, four cover cells, four neck canal cells, ventral canal cell and an egg. The funnel-shaped mouth of a mature archegonium opens often just below the pore of a mature antheridium or recurves away from the growing point. This is a fine adaptation to catch the sperm as they come from the antheridium.
The antheridium consists of a stalk, a sterile coat of tabular cells, and a mass of deeply staining cubical cells. It never protrudes above the surface of the thallus but les buried deeply in the thalloid tissue.
The sporophyte develops rapidly. In its early stages it is oval but as it matures it becomes spheroid. The sporogenous tissue round off and tetrads are produced in the usual manner. The mature spore varies much in size, being 75-90 microns wide. Its outer surface is deeply areolate, the other faces being less areolate. Three distinct walls can be seen in cross-section, an inner wall that does not stain well, a middle deeply-staining wall, and an outer which seems to separate readily. The nucleus containing a distinct nucleolus is small. Starch and oil are stored throughout cytoplasm.
CONCLUSIONS.
Botanists recognize two distinct forms of R. fluitans, a terrestrial and an aquatic form. It seems very doubtful if the aquatic ever changes into the terrestrial and fruits as observers have portrayed, but always reproduces vegetatively.
The thallus, sex organs, and sporophytes develop in general as described for other liverworts. The spores remain within the archegoniai pit, are not generally scattered by the elements, and vary much in size.
te
, ‘ ,
ue
na
x
oe
Prants Nor HirxHerro RerortTep rrom InpiANA. VI. Cah Dine
The following plants have not been recognized as members of the Indiana flora. Specimens of the species reported are in the writer’s herbarium. The species in Rubus and Viola were determined by Ezra Brainard. The Part- henocissus and Vitis were determined by C. S. Sargent. The Gramineae were determined by Agnes Chase. The determination of the remaining species was checked by the Gray Herbarium. The species in Rubus and Viola have been made possible by the breaking up of aggregates and the recognition of hybrids.
Paspalum pubescens Muhl.
Martin county, July 11, 1915. No. 17,161. In a woods pasture about three miles north of Shoals near Cedar Bluffs along White River. In Sullivan county, August 25, 1915. No. 18,229. On the border of a woods road in a beech woods about three miles northeast of Grayville.
Sorbus Aucuparia L.
Laporte county, May 2, 1911. No. 7,992. In a sandy black oak woods about three miles north of Laporte. This tree upon my authority was re- ported by J. A. Nieuwland in the Midland Naturalist, Vol. 4, 175, 1915, as
Sorbus americana Marsh.
Prunus Mahaleb L.
Jefferson county, September 9, 1915. No. 18,862. In a woods pasture along Thrifty Creek about one mile above Clifty Falls. Martin county, August 31, 1915. No. 18,403. Several trees about four inches in diameter along the roadside about half a mile north of Loogootee. Ripley county, June 18, 1915. No. 16,129. A tree six incles in diameter on the rocky wooded slope of Laugherty Creek just east of Versailles.
Rubus allegheniensis Porter. Allen county, June 8, 1906. No. 1,051. .Wooded bank of the St. Joe River near Robison Park. Fountain county, June 4, 1905. In a woods
just west of Veedersbure. Lagrange county, June 6, 1915. No. 15,946.
156
In sandy soil along the road on the east side of Pretty Lake. Steuben county, June 12, 1904. Ina woods near Clear Lake. Wells county, May 21,
1903. Along a rail fence about two miles east of Bluffton.
Rubus allegheniensis x argulus.
Lagrange county, June 6, 1915. No. 15,883. On the low border of a marsh which is just south of Twin Lakes which are about two miles northwest of Howe.
Rubus argutus Link.
Clarke county, July 30, 1909. In a fallow field on the Forest Reserve. Decatur county, May 26, 1912. No. 10,777. Wooded slope along Flat Rock River about a half mile north of St. Paul. Dubois county, July 6, 1912. No. 11,621. Roadside bordering a woods a half mile north of Birdseye. Greene county, May 26, 1911. No. 10,711. In an open woods one mile southeast of Bushrod. MHarrison county, June 24, 1915. No. 16,365. In a sandy woods about three miles east of Ehzabeth. Marion county, May 30, 1913. No. 8,513. Along the C. H. & D. Railroad near Irvington. Monroe county, July 17, 1915. No. 17,471. Roadside five miles south of Blooming- ton. Perry county, July 4, 1912. No. 11,501. Along a rail fence about six miles west of Derby. Pike county, July 7, 1915. No. 16,967. Ina beech woods one mile east of Union. Posey county, May 23, 1911. No. 8,277. Roadside bordering a woods three miles west of Hovey Lake. Ripley county, June 19, 1915. No. 16,136. Ina beech and sugar maple woods two miles northwest of Cross Plains. Shelby county, June 29, 1912. No. 11,537. Taken by Mrs. Chas. C. Deam in a woods southwest of Morristown. Spencer county, June 28, 1915. No. 16,588. Roadside one mile south of St. Meinard. Wells county, July 26, 1914. No. 14,468. In a beech woods eleven miles northeast of Bluffton.
Rubus argutus x invisus.
Hendricks county, June 1, 1912. No. 10,825. Taken by Mrs. Chas. Cf Deam on the flood plain bank of Little Walnut Creek about two and a hal. miles south of North Salem.
Rubus argutus x procumbens.
Decatur county, July 15, 1911. No. 9,210. Wooded bank of Flat Rock River about a half mile north of St. Paul.
137
Rubus invisus Bailey.
Brown county, June 16, 1912. No. 11,144. Along the road between Helmsburg and Nashville about one mile from Helmsburg. Clarke county, July 30, 1909. No. 5,418A. In a fallow field on the Forest Reserve.
Rubus procumbens Muhll.
Allen county, June 3, 1906. No. 994. Ina sandy clearing about two miles south of Fort Wayne. Greene county, May 26, 1911. Frequent in fields and along the railroad near Bushrod. Perry county, July 4, 1912. No. 11,499. Roadside about six miles west of Derby. Ripley county, May 19, 1912. No. 10,611. Common in fields south of Morris. Steuben county, May 28, 1905. In a low thicket on the east side of Clear Lake.
Rubus recurvans Blanchard.
Elkhart county, June 4, 1912. No. 10,935. In an open woods two miles northwest of Middlebury. Lagrange county, June 5, 1915. No. 15,981. In a dry sandy clearing along Pigeon River about ten miles northeast of Lagrange. Whitley county, July 19, 1914. No. 14,426. On the wooded bank of the south side of Round Lake.
Stylosanthes biflora var. hispidissima (Michz.): Pollard & Ball. Knox county, July 8, 1915. No. 17,068. In the Knox sand along the railroad about three miles south of Vincennes.
Tragia macrocarpa Willd.
Crawford county, September 4, 1915. No. 18,583. Roadside at the base of the Ohio River Bluffs a quarter of mile west of Leavenworth. Orange county, July 14, 1915. No. 17,387. Rocky bluff along Lick Creek about two miles west of Paoli. This species was noted in other Ohio River counties but no specimens were taken.
Huphorbia Peplus L.
Wells county, August 5, 1915. No. 17,918. Abundant in the side ditch and in the yard of E. Y. Sturgis at the north end of Johnson street in Bluffton. It has been established here several years.
Vitis cinerea Engelm.
Bartholomew county, September 15, 1912. No. 12,412. On the wooded
border of a gravel pit three miles north of Columbus. Gibson county, Sep-
158
tember 4, 1911. No. 9,945. Wooded bank of White River about five miles northwest of Patoka. Johnson county, September 15, 1915. No. 19,081. Dry sandy bank along the roadside three miles north of Edinburg. Marion county, September 5, 1911. No. 10,058. Wooded bank of White River near Buzzard’s Roost. Seott county, June 22,1915. No. 16,303. Ina clear- ing one mile south of Scottsburg. Shelby county, July 14, 1912. No. 11,666. Taken by Mrs. Chas. C. Deam along Brandywine Creek one mile east of Fairland. Vermillion county, September 29, 1912. No. 12,469. In an open woods two miles west of Hillsdale. Also along the Wabash River two miles south of Hillsdale.
Parthenocissus vitacea Hitch.
Blackford county, July 9, 1910. No. 7,032. Along a fence two miles northeast of Hartford City. Miami county, July 23, 1915. No. 17,903. Limestone ledge of the Mississinewa River about five miles southeast of Peru. Porter county, August 22,1915. No. 18,043. On top of a wooded dune bordering Lake Michigan at a point five miles north of Chesterton. Steuben county, July 5, 1914. No. 14,384. On a roadside fence about two miles northwest of Pleasant Lake. Tippecanoe county, July 22, 1915. No. 17,742. Roadside fence seven miles north of Battle Ground. Wayne county, July 3, 1913. No. 13,548. In a woods one and a half miles west of Centerville. Wells county, June 24, 1906. No. 1,127. On a rail fence
forty rods east of Bluffton.
Viola affinis LeConte.
Allen county, May 2, 1915. No. 15,569. In a sandy clearing on the Godfrey Reserve about three miles south of Fort Wayne. Grant county, May 22,1915. No. 15,760. Low border of a lake about five miles northeast of Fairmount. Lagrange county, May 17,1915. No. 15,641. Ina tamarack swamp three miles east of Howe. Noble county, May 17, 1915. No. 15,675. In a wooded swamp about one mile southwest of Rome City. Wells county, May 12, 1915. No. 15,633. In sphagnum on the south side of the lake in Jackson Township.
Viola affinis x triloba.
Clarke county, May 25, 1910. No. 6,460. In a woods just west of Tract thirty-three on the Forest Reserve.
139
Viola cucullata «x sororia.
Lagrange county, June 5, 1915. No. 15,998. Growing in sphagnum in a low woods bordering Pigeon River about four miles east of Mongo. My numbers 15,881, 15,915, 15,993 and 16,002 are the same species and taken in different parts of the same county.
Viola incognita var. Forbesii Brainard.
Allen county, May 9, 1915. No. 15,606. In an old tamarack swamp on the south side of Lake Everett about ten miles northwest of Fort Wayne. Lagrange county, May 17, 1915. No. 15,650. In a tamarack swamp about three miles east of Howe. Wells county, May 12, 1915. No. 15,619. In the low border of the small lake in Jackson Township associated with Acer saccharinum and Populus tremuloides.
Viola nephrophylla Greene.
Grant county, May 22, 1915. No. 15,745. In a boggy ereek bottom near the bridge over the Mississinewa River about four miles southeast of Gas City. Noble county, May 17, 1915. No. 15,674. In the low marl border of Deep Lake one mile south of Wolf Lake.
Viola papilionacea x triloba- Brainard.
Clay county, May 4, 1913. No. 12,613. Frequent along the bank of Croy Creek about one mile east of Harmony.
Viola pedatifida x sororia Brainard.
Wells county, May 12, 1915. No. 15,626. In rather dry soil on the shaded bank of the lake in Jackson Township.
Viola sagittata x triloba Brainard.
Whitley county, May 17, 1915. No. 15,682. In a white oak woods about four miles east of Columbia City.
Viola triloba Schwein.
Clarke county, May 11, 1910. No. 5,882. In a wooded ravine at the base of the ‘‘knobs”’ on the Forest Reserve. Decatur county, May 5, 1912. No. 10,459. Taken by Mrs. Chas. C. Deam on a wooded slope along Flat Rock River about a half mile north of St. Paul. Hancock county, May 14, 1912. No. 10,517. Taken by Mrs. Chas. C. Deam in a wet woods one and
140
a half miles southeast of Juliette. Henry county, May 10, 1911. No. 8,117. In a moist rich woods one mile northeast of Spiceland. Jefferson county, September 9, 1915. No. 18,855. In a woods one mile west of Chelsea. Johnson county, May 8, 1910. No. 5,782. Wooded hillside about three miles south of Franklin. Lagrange county, June 6, 1915. No. 15,865. In a woods on the north side of Cogg Lake about four miles south of Lagrange. Ver- million county, May 8, 1910. No. 5,840. Wooded hillside one mile north- west of Hillsdale. Whitley county, August 23, 1914. No. 14,543. Ina
white oak woods about four miles east of Columbia City.
Verbena bracteosa Michx. x urticaefolia L. Lawrence county, July 13, 1915. No. 17,287. In sandy soil along the
roadside about a half mile north of Lawrenceport.
Bacopa rotundifolia (Michx.) Wetts.
Orange county, July 14, 1915. No. 17,376. Ina pond near the Washing- ton county line along the Paoli and Salem road one and a half miles south of Bromer. Also noted in a pond near the road about three miles south of Orleans. Washington county, September 12, 1915. No. 18,983. In a pool in a pasture field about six miles west of Pekin. Also noted in a pond about four miles west of Salem.
Solidago erecta Pursh.
Clarke county, September 11, 1915. No. 18,946. On a Quereus Prinus Ridge about two miles southwest of Borden. Harrison county, September 6, 1915. No. 18,720. On a Quereus Prinus ridge about a half mile west of Stewart’s Landing, which is three miles east of Elizabeth. Washington county, September 12, 1915. No. 19,000. On a Quercus Prinus ridge about ten miles north of Salem, and about one mile south of the Muscatatuclk River. In all the locations where this species was noted it was growing
in sterile soil, associated with Solidago bicolor.
141
INDIANA Funcer—lIII. J. M. Van Hoox.
The fungi recorded in the following list, were for the most part collected from 1911 to 1914. Two of these years (1913 and 1914) were so dry that the collecting of certain groups of fungi was practically abandoned. The year 1915 was a record one for the growth of all kinds of fungi and large collections were made for future study.
A limited number of fungi already recorded occur herein, as these have been found on new hosts.
Great care has been exercised in determining the host species, a thing too much neglected by collectors in the past.
Most of the species have been collected in Monroe county. Where the name of the county is not given, it is understood that the specimen was found in Monroe county. All collections were made by myself unless other- wise specified.
PHYCOMYCETES.
Albugo bliti (Biv.) O. Kuntze. On living leaves of Amaranthus retro- flexus. Common. Monroe county, September, 1915.
Albugo ipomoea-panduratae (Schw.) Swingle. On leaves and stems of Ipomoea hederacea. Monroe county, August 2, 1915.
Chaetocladium jonesii Fresenius. Parasitic on Mucor in culture, in the greenhouse. December 28, 1912. C. E. O’Neal.
Piptocephahs freseniana De Bary. On Mucor. Greenhouse, December 28, 1912. O’Neal.
Phycomyees nitens (Ag.) Kze. On horse dung brought into greenhouse, January 7, 1913. O’Neal.
Plasmopara viticola (B. & C.) Berl. & DeToni. On leaves of Vitis cordi- folia. July, 1915. Very destructive.
Thamnidium elegans Link. On dung in greenhouse, December 22, 1912.
BASIDIOMYCETES. USTILAGINEAE.
Ustilago neglecta (Niessl.) Rab. On Chaetochloa, Montgomery county, 1913. Flora Anderson.
Ustilago rabenhorstiana (Kuehn.) Hedw. On Syntherisma sanguinale. Montgomery county, 1913. Anderson.
TILLETIINEAE.
Entyloma lobeliae. Farlow. On living leaves of Lobelia inflata. October 16, 1915. Forms discolored (light yellow) spots on the upper surface of the leaves.
Uroeystis anemones (Pers.) Wint. On Hepatica acutiloba. Brown county. May 16, 1915. Donaghy. University Farm, Lawrence county, June, 1915.
POLYPORCEAE.
Spongipellis occidentalis Murr. On dead oak log. Helmsburg, Brown county, May 16, 1915. Donaghy.
Spongipellis unicolor (Schw.) Murr. On Acer, Cascades, fall of 1914. Donaghy.
AGARICACEAE.
Crepidotus fulvotomentosus Pk. On decayed log, Brown county, October 24, 1914.
LYCOPERDINEAE.
Bovistella ohiensis Morg. On the ground in an open field. November. 16, 1914. Donaghy.
ASCOMYCETES. HELVELLINEAE. Helvella elastica Bull. On the ground. University Water Works, May 19, 1915. Harvey Stork. PEZIZINEAE.
Pseudopeziza medicaginis (Lib.) Sace. On alfalfa. Autumn of 1912. Sarcoscypha occidentalis Schw. On buried sticks. University Water Works, May 19, 1915. Stork.
HYSTERIINEAE.
Hysteriographium gloniopsis Gerard. On dead wood of Acer sacchari- num. Huckleberry Hill, November 25, 1910.
Hysteriographium mori (Schw.) Rehm. On rails of Liriodendron tulinif- era and Juglans nigra, Hast campus, October 26, 1915.
PYRENOMYCETINEAE. PERISPORIALES.
Krysiphe cichoracearum D. C. On living leaves of Plantago rugelii. Vernonia noveboracensis, Ambrosia trifida and Solidago. Summer of 1911. Sutton.
Microsphaera alni (D. C.) Wint. On leaves of Platanus occidentalis. Summer of 1912. Sutton.
Microsphaera elevata Burr. On leaves of Catalpa speciosa. Autumn of 1911. Sutton.
Phyllactinia corylea (Pers.) Karst. On Fraxinus sambucifolia, Ladoga, Montgomery county, September 16, 1913. Anderson.
Sphaerotheca castagnei Lev. On living leaves of Taraxicum officinale, 1911. Sutton.
Uneinula necator (Schw.) Burr. On cultivated grapes. September, 1912.
Unecinula adunea Levy. On leaves of Salix nigra, autumn of 1911. Sutton.
HYPOCREALES.
Gibberella saubinetii (Mont.) Sace. On wheat, 1911.
SPHAERIALES.
Hypoxylon annulatum (Schw.) Mont. On Fraxinus americana. January 17, 1914. Ramsey.
Hypoxylon effusum Nitschke. On Fagus ferruginea, March 4, 1909; Quercus, November 20, 1913. Ramsey.
Hypoxylon perforatum (Sehw.) Fr. On Juglans nigra. January 17, 1914. Ramsey.
Massaria inquinans (Tode) Fr. On Acer. December 8, 1911.
Rosellinia aquila (Fr.) DeNot. On Acer. March 6, 1902. Mutchler; on Juglans, Unionville, 1911; on Ostrya, November 20, 1913, and on Fagus ferruginea, December 16, 1913. Ramsey.
144
Rosellinia glandiformis E. & E. On Liriodendron tulipifera, 1907; on Juglans, November 20, 1913; and on Fraxinus, Boone county, January 17, 1914. Ramsey.
Rosellinia ligniaria (Grev.) Nke. On Ostrya virginica, January 28, 1914, J. M. V. & Ramsey; on Fraxinus, Boone county, March 28, 1914. Ramsey.
Rosellinia medullaris (Wallr.) Ces. & DeNot. On Cercis canadensis, February 4, 1911; on Juglans cinerea, 1914. Ramsey.
Rosellinia mutans (Cke. & Pk.) Sace. On Juglans, 1914. Ramsey.
Rosellinia pulveracea (Ehr.) Feckl. On Carpinus caroliniana and Platanus occidentalis, November 20, 1913; on the same hosts in Boone county, De- cember 18, 1913. Ramsey.
Rosellinia subiculata (Schw.) Sacc. On Liriodendron tulipifera, 1911. On Quereus, 1914, J. M. V. & Ramsey.
Venturia pomi (Fr.) Wint. On leaves and fruit of Pyrus malus, July 19, 1912. Common.
Xylaria corniformis Fr. On rotten Acer. Harrodsburg, August 7, 1915.
FUNGI IMPERFECTI. SPHAEROPSIDALES.
Ascochyta mali E. & E. On living leaves of Pyrus malus, 1911. Sutton.
Ascochyta rhei E. & E. On living leaves of Rheum rhaponticum. Sep- tember, 1912.
Cicinobolus cesatii DeBary. Parasitic on Erysiphe cichoracearum on leaves of Rudbeckia or Helianthus. Campus, October 5, 1915.
Darluca filum (Biv.) Cast. Parasitic on Phragmidium potentillae and Uredo biglowii, 1911. Sutton.
Phoma limbalis Passer. On leaf veins of Platanus occidentalis, 1912.
Phyllosticta celtidis Ell. & Kell. On leaves of Celtis occidentalis, October 5, 1915. These leaves were also affected with a leaf mite. Spores of fungus, bacteria-like, 2 to 3 by 1 micron.
Phyllosticta fraxini Ell. & Mart. On leaves of Cornus florida, autumn of 1912. Spores, 4 by 9.5 microns. On leaves of Fraxinus americana, Unionville, October 3, 1914. J. M. V. & Paul Weatherwax.
Phyllosticta grossulariae Sacc. On leaves of Ribes cynosbati, October 3, 1914. J. M. V. & P. W.
Phyllosticta hammamelidis Pk. On living leaves of Hammamelis vir-
145
giniana, Campus, October 5, 1915. Associated with Pestalozzia funerea Desm. Peck reports Phyllosticta consocia Pk. as being associated with this Pestalozzia and describes the spot as the same and the Phyllosticta as the cause. However, P. consocia is described as having six cells with four middle ones colored and as being 30 to 35 microns long; setae, 22.5 to 27.5 long. Our spores are about 25 microns long with short setae. Spores, five- celled, the three inner being colored. This Phyllosticta is very similar if not identical with P. sphaeropsidea E. & EK. (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 1883, p. 97.) Reported on Aesculus hippocastanum.
Phyllosticta kalmicola (Sechw.) E. & E. On living leaves of Kalmia latifolia, one-half mile northeast of Borden, Clark county, February 20, 1915.
Phyllosticta linderae E. & EK. On Lindera benzoin, Brown county, July, PLO:
Phyllosticta sambuci Desm. On leaves of Sambucus canadensis, Campus, October 5, 1915. The pyenidia are described as being very minute. In our specimens, they measure from 90 to 200 microns with spores 4 to 7 by 2 to 23 microns.
Phyllosticta sambucicola Kalehbr. On the same host as the above and associated with it as was also Cercospora sambucina and a Septoria. The pyenidia are 50 to 90 microns and spores 25 to 5 microns. The spores are subglobose. Kalchbrenner describes them as being very minute.
Septoria evonymi Rabh. On Evonymus atropurpurius, Campus, October 5, 1915. Our. species is undoubtedly identical with the one described by Rabenhorst, though differing somewhat. The following is a description of our fungus: Spots epiphyllous, 3 to 10 microns in diameter or by confluence, covering large areas, irregular in shape, often limited by veins making them angular in outline, olive brown, bounded by a dark purplish line, lighter colored on the lower surface of the leaf; pyenidia 75 to 125 microns in diam- eter, black, protruding and with a large irregular opening; spores 15 to 30 by 2 to 3 microns, for the most part one-septate, straight, crescent-shaped or irregularly curved.
Septoria helianthi Ell. & Kell. On Helianthus annuus, autumn of 1912.
Septoria lactueae Pass. Common on Lactuea seariola, Harrodsburg, August 7, 1915. Spores filiform, 20 to 35 by 14 to 2 microns.
Septoria mimuli Wint. On leaves of Mimulus alatus, summer of 1911. Sutton.
5084—10
146
Septoria oenothera Wesl. On Oenothera biennis, Harrodsburg, August Pls ARS
Septoria polygonorum Desm. On Polygonum persicaria, July 29, 1915. This fungus was very common and very destructive to its host throughout the summer. It varies slightly from the deseription as follows: Spots 2to3mm.in diameter. Leaf fades to yellow, curls, dries on the plant or falls to the ground. Some spores exceed 25 microns in length.
Septoria rubi West. On cultivated raspberries. September, 1912. Also common on blackberries.
Septoria scrophulariae Pk. On Secrophularia nodosa or marylandiea. Summer of 1911. Sutton.
Septoria verbascicola B. & C. On Verbascum blattaria, autumn of 1912.
Sphaeropsis asiminae E. & E. On dead twigs of Asimina triloba, Boone
county, December, 1913. Ramsey.
MELANCONIALES.
Cylindrosporium capsellae E. & E. On leaves of Capsella bursa-pastoris, 1911. Sutton.
Cylindrosporium padi Karst. On Prunus serotina, summer of 1911. Sutton.
Gloeosporium caryae Ell. & Dear. Common on leaves of Carya alba, Harrodsburg, August 7, 1915.
Gloeosporium intermedium Sacc., var. poinsettiae Sacc. On dead stems of Poinsettia pulcherrima, greenhouse, March 16, 1915. Plants grown from Florida stock.
Marsonia juglandis (Lib.) Sace. On leaves of Juglans cinerea, Helmsburg, Brown county, July, 1912; Unionville, Monroe county, October 3, 1914. On leaves of Juglans nigra, Unionville, October 3, 1914. On leaves of Juglans sieboldiana, Campus, October 5, 1915.
Marsonia martini Sacc. & Ell. On leaves of Quercus acuminata, Harrods- burg, July 7, 1915.
Pestalozzia funerea Desm. On leaves of Hammamelis virginiana, Campus, October 5, 1915.
HyPHOMYCETES.
Cercospora ampelopsidis Pk. On living leaves of Ampelopsis quinque- folia, October 5, 1915. The conidiophores of this fungus measure 30 to 112 by 5 to 6 microns and are 2 to 4 septate; the spores are 25 to 125 by 6 to 8
147
microns and are 4 to 9 septate. There seems to be no doubt as to the identity of the fungus as the remainder of the deseription corresponds admirably.
Cercospora bartholomaei Hll. & Kell. On living leaves of Rhus glabra, summer of 1911. Sutton.
Cercospora condensata Ell. & Kell. Summer of 1911. Sutton.
Cercospora elongata Pk. On Dipsacus sylvestris, Harrodsburg. July 7, 1915. Spores attain a length of 275 microns. Peck gives 50 to 150 microns.
Cereospora kellermani Bubak. On leaves of Althaea rosea, October 5, 1915. This species seems too closely related to C. malvarum Sace. and to C. althaeina Sace. Conidiophores to 110 microns long and spores from 20 to 152 microns.
Cereospora plantaginis Sace. On leaves of Plantago rugelii, Campus, October 5, 1915. Very common. Forms brown spots. Conidiophores as much as 250 microns long. Spores, 75 to 175 microns long.
Cercospora rhoina E. & E. On leaves of Rhus glabra, Unionville, October 3, 1914. J. M. V. & P. W.
Cereospora ribis Karle. On cultivated Ribes rubrum, autumn of 1912. Very severe on its host.
Cereospora rosicola Pass. On Rosa carolina, Campus, October 26, 1915. The description of this species gives the measurement of the conidiophores 20 to 40 by 3 to 5 microns and spores, 30 to 50 by 33 to 5 and 2 to 4-septate. Our conidiophores are 20 to 75 by 4 to 5 and spores 30 to 80 by 5 to 7 microns and are mostly 3-septate. The very dark hemispherical base from which the conidiophores arise, is very characteristic of this species.
Cerecospora sambucina Ell. & Kell. On leaves of Sambucus canadensis, Campus, October, 1915. -
Cereospora septorioides E. & E. On leaves of Rubus villosus, Harrods- burg, August 7, 1915. This species has many characters which place it near C. rubi Sace., C. rubicola Thuem. and C. rosicola Pass. The spots are very characteristic and the resemblance of the spores to those of a Septoria Is very striking.
Cereospora toxicodendri (Curt.) E. & E. On leaves of Rhus toxicoden- dron, Harrodsburg, August 7, 1915.
Haplographium apiculatum Pk. On leaves of Hammamelis virginiana, Griffey Creek, October 3, 1914.
Macrosporium catalpae Ell. & Mart. On leaves of, Catalpa speciosa,
148
Campus, 1911 and 1912. Common. This fungus seems to follow the injury
a very characteristic brown spot.
produced by an insect
Macrosporium sarciniaeforme Cay. On Trifolium pratense, Campus, October 6, 1915. The swollen nodes of these conidiophores somewhat re- semble those of Polythrincium trifolii so common on clover.
Macrosporium solani Ell. & Mart. Common on Datura stramonium, Griffey Creek and Harrodsburg, July and August, 1915.
Piricularia grisea (Cke.) Sace. On leaves of Panicum sanguinale, autumn of 1915. Very common every year.
Tubercularia vulgaris (Tode.) Meckl. On twigs of Asimina triloba, Boone county, December, 1913. Ramsey.
(In conforming with the original plan, the following Myxomycetes are here appended, though out of the sphere of fungi.)
MY XOMYCETES.
Areyria incarnata Pers. On rotten wood, Griffey Creek, October 29, 1914. Donaghy.
Diderma crustaceum Pk. On dead leaves, Brown county, October 24, 1914. Donaghy.
Enteridium splendens Morg. On rotten wood, Brown county, October 24, 1914.
Lycogola flavo-fuseum (Khr.) Rost. On sawed end of maple log, Novem- ber 16, 1914. Donaghy.
Mucilago spongioa (Leyss.) Morg. On stems of living weeds, November 12, 1914. Donaghy.
Physarum cinereum (Batsch.) Pers. On living grass, Campus, June 4, 1915. Mottier.
Stemonitis caroliniana Macbr. On rotten wood, 1915.
Stemonitis morgani Pk. On rotten wood. Griffey Creek, October 29, 1914. Donaghy. Also on dead maple log, Campus, June 1, 1915. Donaghy.
Stemonitis nigrescens Rex. Greenhouse under bottom of palm tub. Sporangia on the sand. May 20, 1915.
Tilmadoche polycephala (Sehw.) Maebr. On bark of fallen elm. Run- ning over moss and bark. Griffey Creek, June 5, 1915, Indiana University,
January, 1916.
A SEgconp BLOOMING OF MAGNOLIA SOULANGIANA.
D. M. Morrier.
This note is to call attention to the fact of a second blooming in the same year of a purple variety of Magnolia Soulangiana. On the campus of Indiana University a group of thrifty magnolias is cultivated. Among these there are two varieties of M. Soulangiana, one with pink flowers and the other bearing blossoms of a deep purple color. Last spring at the usual time all trees of the two varieties bloomed profusely and, from a number of the flowers, fruits and seeds were developed. In midsummer (July 25 to August 10) three trees of the purple variety bore each two or three fine large flowers, which were normal in every respect. No flowers were seen on the variety bearing pink blossoms. This is the first time the writer has observed the occurrence of a second crop of blossoms on a magnolia. It has been learned through acquaintances that the purple variety bloomed a second time this year in one of the eastern states.
As the blossoms were removed from the trees by children or by un- scrupulous admirers, it was impossible to know whether such flowers would develop fruits.
151
Tur HErrect oF CENTRIFUGAL ForRcE ON OSCILLATORIA. Frank M. ANDREWS.
Filaments of Oscillatoria were centrifuged in order to ascertain if it were possible to displace the contents to any extent. First I used a force of 1,738 gravities. This force did not change the position of the contents in any respect, although the plants were centrifuged two days and four hours. The growth of the filaments also had not ceased and the movements so characteristic of the plant had not been interrupted. The filaments were not harmed in any way by such centrifugal action as a comparison with control specimens showed.
In a second experiment the filaments were subjected to 4,400 gravities for two hours and later to 5,843 gravities for three hours, but no displace- ment of the contents was caused.
In a third experiment 13,467 gravities were used transversely on the filaments for one hour with no change in the position of the contents; neither cessation of the growth nor of the usual movements. When Oscillatoria was centrifuged between the slide and cover-glass the filaments were usually broken, yet very short pieces consisting of a few cells often withstood a force of 1,738 gravities. For the use of very high centrifugal forces, as indicated above, it was necessary to place the filaments directly on the bottom of the glass cylinders and centrifuge them transversely as stated above. The filaments were then broken apart into their disk-like cells and observed from the end, but no displacement of the contents could be seen. The amount of resistance of such delicately constructed plants is rather surprising. It is also interesting to note that in all the experiments with centrifugal force on Oscillatoria, the characteristic movements were not stopped or apparently retarded by a force varying from 1,738 gravities to as much as 13,467 gravities. _This was shown by specimens of Oscillatoria which were placed directly on the bottom of the glass cylinders on the outside of which was fastened a graduated scale. The machine was stopped in a few seconds and by ob- servation it could be seen that the specimens that had been centrifuged for one hour or more and with any amount of centrifugal force had moved or radiated as far as the control specimens had in the same time. These movements
may therefore be carried out under great difficulty and against great re- sistance, at least of certain kinds such as centrifugal force when applied laterally. In the first experiment on the study of movements when 1,738 eravities were used for one hour, the centrifuged filaments during that time moved or radiated away from the center of the small mass of filaments equally in all directions. Actual measurements showed that the filaments had moved out in the usual way to a distance of 5mm. The control specimens had also moved 5 mm. during the same time. There was absolutely no differ- ence between the centrifuged specimens and the controls as to the general arrangement or appearance of the filaments which had, in each case, radiated from the very small central mass. In all cases the only requisite was the presence of a very shallow film of water about the specimens.
When the specimens were centrifuged for one hour with a force of 5,000 eravities instead of 1,738 gravities, the amount of movement in both centri- fuged and control specimens was exactly the same. Both moved away in a radiating direction from the small central mass 5 mm. during the one hour of experimentation. This shows the amount of movement to be as great, as far as could be determined, in the presence of a force of 5,000 gravities as when 1,738 gravities was used. Longer periods of time than one hour, using 5,000 gravities, were not used, and it has not yet been investigated what effect, if any, this might have on the movements.
In the third experiment, where 13,467 gravities were used, both the centrifuged specimens of Oscillatoria and the controls moved 2 mm. during the half-hour of centrifuging. So far then as experiments have been per- formed, it has not been found possible to stop, or apparently retard, the amount or kind of movements of Oscillatoria princeps by centrifugal force. Indiana University.
155
SOME HLEMENTARY NoTES ON STEM ANALYSES OF WHITE Oak.
Burr N. PRENTICE.
In the fall of 1915 I had the opportunity to gather some facts concerning the growth of White Oak (Quercus alba). The opportunity was in the form of a small logging operation which took place in a woodlot of mature White Oak belonging to Mr. George Justice, in Tippecanoe county, Indiana, about seven miles north of Lafayette. The woodlot is located on rolling to flat land only a short distance from the Wabash river. The soil is typical of that region, being a sandy loam underlain with gravel. The cutting was not a large one, only covering about thirty trees, but the majority of the trees were old and fully mature, so that a good idea of the life history and growth of White Oak on similar situations in Indiana could be ganied by a study of their stems.
Complete stem analyses of the trees were taken. These included the following measurements on each bole; the diameter at the stump, together with the distance from the center to each tenth ring, counting from the out- side in, and similar measurements at each of the other crossecuts on the tree, thus getting the diameter of each section at any decade throughout the life of the tree. The diameter at breast height, i.e., four and one-half feet from the ground, was taken in each case. The following height measurements were also included; height of stump, length of each section above the stump, length of tip above the last section, and the length and width of crown. Care- ful record was kept of the number of rings in decades at each section since by these are determined the various periods of growth.
From this data was worked out the mean annual volume growth of the average tree of the stand for the entire period of its life. The method out- lined by Mlodjianski, as modified by Graves, was followed. This requires the construction of a height growth table showing the average time required for the trees to grow from the ground to the various crosseuts. The accom- panying curve drawn from plotting height in feet against age in years shows how such a table was obtained. This height table is given as a part of table three.
The next step is the determination of the average stump height. By averaging the heights of the stumps of the entire plot, this height was de- termined as one and one-half feet.
AHeltght 1m feeTr gar [OR
~ o&
Eee
1 cht
Y
’ OF/
euboak wt ab | i
(OI
car
8
Curve based on age and total height of White Oak (Quercus alba), showing time required to grow to any specified height. Based on measurement of thirty trees. A eurve based on diameter and age at the stump was then drawn, to show the average diameter growth at the stump for cach decade. This curve
smoothed out any irregularities in growth at the stump for the entire number
a
of trees measured. A similar curve was drawn for each of the other cross- cuts above the stump. It has already been noted that the average stump height was one and one-half feet. Therefore the curve for the top of the first twelve-foot log represents the diameter growth at a point thirteen and one-half feet above the ground. The same is, of course, true for the other curves as well.
These curves were then all transferred to one sheet in such a manner that the growth at the respective crosscuts was shown on the basis of total age, 1.e., each curve begins as many years to the right of the intersection of the two axes as it took the tree to grow to the height of the crosseut in question. These points are determined from the height growth table.
These curves represent the diameter growth at their respective distances above the ground, on the basis of total age (age at the ground), and not on the basis of the age at the respective crosseuts. We are able to get from this series of curves, for any age, the average total height and the dimensions of the trees inside the bark at various points along the bole.
A diameter breast height curve was also constructed in the following manner. On the same sheet with the stump curve a second curve was drawn, letting the ordinate represent diameter breast height values instead of diam- eter inside the bark at the stump. Since there were but a small number of trees, all of uniformly large diameter, it was impossible, as yet, to continue this curve into the early age of the trees. But when the curves for the other points on the bole were also transferred thus to a single sheet, the diameter breast height height curve was prolonged by a process of interpolation to the
younger ages of the trees.
156
Diameter aside The bark fn l7ches th, mM
i
ai
Y
eiaod ul 2b
Tao
I i TAA awe wi
a 1 a COC i f BRR ER DEE PERE eee
Cod Hee i asnteeeeeebeeseeeeesees Coco BERGE EGe T Ti EC GREOSEo Ceo CoEooeooeoReeeoee DEGREES PEPER Pee Bree Titsseee wae a ITI
rrr | iow ERE E PRR Rees Pees Pe SERED Pee Pe ich GEREEPRESEREEEE SEEEEEE _ oe ERLE R ERO Es PE Pes Pe Pee eee EES SERRE Pee 1 jp wi ee es EEEESEREES
Series of curves based on age at the ground and diameters at various cross cuts. showing time required for the tree to grow from the ground to any specified diameter at various points up the bole. Based on the measurement of thirty White Oak trees.
an
From this series of curves Table No. 1 was taken. The cubic contents (Table 2) of the average tree at ten year periods throughout its life, was computed according to the Schiffel formula, which is (.16B + .66b)h = V, in which B represents the area of cross section at breast height, b represents the area of cross section at mid-height, h represents the total height of the tree, and V represents the volume.
TABLE I.—Diameters at various points along the bole for every decade throughout the life of the tree; white oak.
AGE IN YEARS. Height of | | | | | | Section 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60 70 | 80 | 90 | 100 110] 120 | 130 j | Above Ground, | | | | in Feet. Diameter inside the bark, in inches. | | H (Stump) 1s. Ue@)| 22 3.3) 4.5] 5.8] 6.9] 8.2] 9.5/10.7/12.0/13.2 14.5)15.9 DBRS tA a 1.0] 2.0) 3.2) 4.3) 5.4) 6.5] 7.5) 8.6 9.8/10.9)12.2/13.4 Wie ete eS 1.0] 2.2| 3.4] 4.3] 5.3) 6.5) 7.5) 8.6) 9.8/10.7/11.8 DET par oes | -9| 2.0) 3.0] 4.2] 5.3] 6.3) 7.4) 8.5) 9.6/10.6 Sites eee ae -4| 1.4) 2.5) 3.4) 4.6] 5.7 6.7) 7.8) 8.9 AL Th A tes) GES) 583) Oat Wee 1 aot ie or oeal (eusceec| leaeics ce eres il | aicaohen Raters fed [iSneeries! lor anes Geib ce TAS ZeSinoe Olona TABLE I—Continued. AGE IN YEARS. Height of | | | | | Section 140 | 150 | 160 | 170 | 180 | 190 | 200 | 210 | 220 | 230 | 240 Above Ground. in Feet. Diameter inside the bark, in inches. (Stump) 14..... 17.4] 18.8 20.3! 22.0 23.8) 25.4] 27.2 29.0) 30.7) 32.7) 35.0 iD BsHS Ae aa 1456) 16-0) 17-24) 18-7) 2022) 2125) 23-0) 2455) 2620] 27-6) 2923 Oe eee 13.0) 14.0] 15.2) 16.3, 17.4] 18.4] 19.4} 20.5 21.5} 221 G| 2). 0 Dies eles else Olt OW Gs Ol igen Ss 2h Sle ON eles O: 355. - 10.0] 11-0) 12-2) 13.2; 14.2) 15-3) 163) 27.4) 18274) 19-5] 20-5 413. S30)| 2G 10.6) 16 ei tse 14.8} 15.8) 16.9] 17.9) 19.0 BTU ae 6.0 ia S23] Ors ONS eile 4 Oe Se lA > SG lone |
158
TABLE II.—Total height and *cubic volume of white oak for each decade of the life of the tree.
Height, | Volume, | : | Height, | Volume, Age, Years. Feet. | Cu. Ft. | Age, Years. Feet. | Cu. Ft. | —_—— | — —: i VS Bee ete: tOe0o i= eos" Weta ae aye | 61.6 | 29.691 Dine ss en ae 18.2 ORAL MPID oto) 7 ee ee | 63.2 36.846 BOY crasitirbntic Sea: 25.5 S18 (tek Ns STU ais ees cll | 65.0 45.330 AOE Se ee ces 31.8 SOG See tL GUS ree Pie Oe 66.5 | 54.397 BO ance ae 37.4 ite st Joos Fase, 0) eA eee | 67.9 | ~ 63-082 GON oars Mie ee 41.8 2.590 TSO SR ae coi | 69.0 75.348 YAO Mea ersres ene By reo 45.6 4.332 TOO a More tate 70.0 87.220 2308 Gece See oe eR ae 49.2 6.494 PUD aentdce ohn see eee F220 100.678 DOU ie siegaei ee es SPAN i ie WEEE |i Re als Sete oe 71/8. 4) (2 Seas LOOT A ee ee 54.8 13.481 DOI iti ns see ie oe 72.4 128.076 EOE hee. ere ens Si 20.821 ZOE dae Vaio 146.037 LQ Uae ase etx 59.4 PAs ie tas AC) >, 3 ec ase 73.0 156.658 *Volumes computed according to Schiffel: V = (.16B .66b)h, where,
V = Volume.
B = Basal area of cross section at breast height. b = Area of cross section at middle height.
h = Total height of tree.
TABLE III.—Volume in board feet of Merchantable stem for even decades.
l
Volume, Volume, Volume,
Age, Years. B. M. Age, Years. B.M. | Age, Years. B. M.
| | |
“(ORO eae te 10 13020 ean eee | T7Oe oN TOON etcca se 535 RO oe et ee 15 11) Bh oan | BORN ia a a ela ls (s 630 DOke eens eee 20. SetsO | ne Rese | Daee.| SHO as. Ama: 725 LOO k Meee e ae ah 65 160 6%. 335. ep 220Men on 830 AAOre Mabe g ale 100 Lose Gee. | 4050 8 230 eee 955 1209.2 Oe aie 140 180. Bsn = | 460 | DAD ie GP eins 1,095
It must be remembered that these figures are based on trees growing under an entire absence of management. Proper management should easily materially increase the rate of growth shown here. Even among these trees there were many that were above the average rate here given. A curve drawn for the maximum growth in diameter at the stump showed the follow-
ing comparison:
Age at. Average Maximum. — Age at Average Maximum
Stump. ID, Wo IB, IDs Ul, 1832 Stump. ID Ws 1B, IDs I, 183.
20 2.5 3G is 140 18.0 21.5 40 5.0 5.8 160 AO» PEO 60 “0 8.0 180 24.4 28.8 80 10.0 Lil 5@ 200 28.0 By 5) 100 12.4 15.0 220 31.4 36.4 120 15.0 SZ 240 . 3D 2 40.6
It will be noticed that there is a difference of approximately 20 per cent. in diameter for any given age, between the average maximum growth and the average growth. Allowing for a proportionate increase throughout the stem, this would give a maximum volume for table three as follows:
Volume Volume Volume
Age 1B}, IMI. Age B. M. Age B. M. Years. (Maxi- Years. (Maxi- Years. (Maxi- mum). mum). mum),
70 12 150 205 190 642 SO 18 140 270 200 756 90 48 150 330 210 870 100 78 160 402 220 996 110 120 170 486 230 1,146 120 168 180 552 240 1,314
This 20 per cent. increase could hardly be regarded as reliable, how- ever. when applied to later life of the tree. Artificial plantations both at home and abroad show that it is not at all out of proportion with what may be expected during the early life of well managed plantations.
A study of the crowns of this plot showed the average width of crown to be forty feet. This would allow in a fully stocked stand, about forty mature trees to the acre. During the extremely early years of the stand, an acre would bear upwards of one thousand trees. *Mr. Earl Frothingham, Forest Assistant in the Forest Service, shows that from observed plots an acre in
able to support seven hundred and twenty-four oak trees to the age of forty-
*Second Growth Hardwoods in Connecticut, Bulletin 96, U. S. Forest Service by Earl H. Frothingham,. Forest Assistant.
160
five. Our analyses show that the trees in the present study did not attain a diameter breast height of six inches until they were seventy years of age. If we allow approximately one-half of the seven hundred and twenty-four,
or three hundred and fifty, to remain at the age of seventy, and reduce
this number by a series of intermediate acceleration thinnings, to the final forty at the age of one hundred and fifty, we get the following result:
Number Number Number Number Trees Age, Feet Trees Age, Feet Per Acre. Years. B. M. Per Acre. Years. B. M. (70 3,900 Thinning. 300 4 80 5,250 160 13 ,400 90 14,000 | 170 16,200 | 180 18 ,400 Thinning. 3 190 21,400 ‘100 11,375 40 - 200 25,200 175 < 110 17,500 210 29 000 l 120 24 500 220 33 , 200 | 230 38,200 Thinning. 240 43 , 800 130 14,450 85 “ 140 19,125 _150 23 375
While the problem of reforestation with oak is somewhat more difficult than that connected with coniferous plantations, nevertheless these figures look interesting, to say the least. It is true that there is little material that is actually merchantable that can be looked for under one hundred years. There are many poor plots of land, however, on nearly every farm in Indiana which at present detract from the value of the whole property. If these plots were planted with even so slow growing a tree as the white oak the result would be an increase in the value of the entire property many years before the trees themselves actually attained merchantable size.
ee
161
ANALYSIS OF WATER CONTAINING ALUMINUM SALTS AND FREE SULPHURIC ACID FROM AN INDIANA Coat MINE.
S. D. ConneER.
Within the past year the writer was called upon to test some drainage water from a coal mine for the Vandalia Coal Company of Terre Haute with a view of determining whether such water could be used for irrigation pur- poses.
A qualitative examination indicated only a trace of chlorides and nitrates. but an abundance of sulphates.
The following substances were quantitatively estimated:
Ale (SOR) se Nats et en SSE ee oe .016 per cent. CASO per that ere 8 eae et ee dog .141 per cent. IVES Opens een Sea is eo see ay ne .O74 per cent. HIP eGUEIS S Op Samii ne tea wee Sh cen.) een) .005 per cent.
Rotaljsolds 2:02 Seer tomes oe .42 per cent.
Contrary to expectations, no soluble iron was found, although a slight flocculent precipitate of iron (probably basic ferric sulphate) was noted in the bottom of the bottle, indicating that originally some iron had been in solution.
In the mining of coal more or less iron pyrites (FeS2) is exposed to the air. This pyrites in the presence of oxygen and moisture is oxidized, forming ferrous sulphate and sulphuric acid. The sulphuric acid coming in contact with clay, shale, ete., would dissolve calcium, magnesium, aluminum and other basic elements which might be present. Upon continued exposure to air the ferrous sulphate (Fe SO.) in solution would be oxidized to basic ferric sulphate (Fe(OH)SO.) and precipitated.
Water such as the writer analyzed is acid in reaction, due to the presence of free sulphuric acid and also to the hydrolysis of the aluminum sulphate. Such water would be injurious to vegetation and consequently unfit for irrigation purposes.
5084—11
162
The presence of soluble aluminum instead of soluble iron is a condition similar to that found in the acid soil of the Wanatah experiment field in Laporte county (as reported by Abbott, Conner and Smalley in Bul. 170 of the Ind. Exp. Station).
There is little danger of soluble salts of iron being present in well-drained and aerated soils or in irrigation water which has been exposed to the air for any length of time. This is due to the fact that soluble salts of iron readily oxidize and are precipitated on exposure to air. Soluble salts of aluminum are not readily precipitated and there is danger of these being present in injurious amount in acid soils either drained or undrained and in mine waters. .
On the Wanatah field it was necessary to apply some form of lime to neutralize the acidity before crops could be grown. It was also found that aluminum nitrate was just as injurious to corn grown in water cultures as was an equivalent amount of nitric acid. It would undoubtedly be necessary to neutralize the acidity of the coal mine water with some form of lime before it could be utilized for irrigation purposes.
163
DETECTION OF NICKEL IN COBALT SALTS.
A. R. MippLeton anp H. L. Miner.
The use of dimethylglyoxime as a reagent for the detection and determina- tion of nickel, discovered by Tschugaev! in 1905 and developed by Brunk,? has become a general practice. For simplicity of manipulation and freedom from interference this reagent is unrivalled; the brilliant scarlet color and extreme insolubility of the nickel glyoximine renders possible the detection of one part of nickel ion in at least 350,000 parts of water. By a modified method of applying the reagent, which was developed in the course of this investigation, we found it possible to detect one part of nickel ion in more than 4,000,000 parts of water.
For detection of traces of nickel in cobalt salts this reagent, hitherto, has not been very satisfactory. Cobalt combines with dimethylglyoxime to form an extremely soluble compound of brown color. Either because the nickel salt is soluble in this compound, or, as is much more probable, because the cobalt appropriates most of the reagent, no nickel is precipitated by ordinary amounts of reagent from cobalt salt solutions, even though a con- siderable amount is present. The object of this investigation was to devise a method by which the cobalt ion should be suppressed, thus permitting the reagent to react with nickel only thus avoiding the necessity for large amounts of reagent. Treadwell,’ following a suggestion of Tschugaev, accomplishes this result by transforming the cobalt salt into a cobaltic ammin by strong ammonia and hydrogen peroxide before adding dimethylglyoxime. We shall show that this method is unsatisfactory and fails when much cobalt is present. |
The most striking differences in the chemical behavior of nickel and cobalt are (1) the greater readiness of oxidation to the trivalent condition and (2) the greater stability of the complex ions, both positive and negative, of cobalt. Of the various complex ions formed by cobalt the most stable are the complex cyanides, that of trivalent cobalt being decidedly more stable than that of bivalent cobalt. Nickel forms soluble complex cyanides of a
1Ber. 38, 2520.
2Z. angew, Chem., 20, 3444. 3Analyt. Chem., Vol. I. 151. (7te Aufl.)
164
different type, resembling those of bivalent copper, whereas the cobalt cyanides are analogous to the iron cyanides. In the classic method of Liebig* for detecting nickel in cobalt salts, the inferior stability of nickelo- cyanide ion together with the ready oxidizability of cobaltocyanide to cobalti- eyanide ion has long been used to effect a separation. For a solution con- taining cobalticyanide, nickelocyanide and cyanide ions the following equilib-
ria are involved:
[Co |} x [CN’]® = Kimnst. x [Co(CN) ,« ] and [Ni] x [CN’]4 = K inst. x [Ni(CN) , ].
The values of the instability constants are not accurately known, but it is certain that that of cobalticyanide ion is extremely small and that of nickelo- eyanide 1on much larger. Any reduction of the concentration of cyani de ion in the solution must result in decomposition of the nickelocyanide ion and considerable increase of nickel ion concentration while the much more stable cobalticyanide ion is less affected. In Liebig’s method as modified by Gauhe,’ cyanide ion is removed by oxidation with alkaline hypobromite or hypochlorite, the nickelous ion being simultaneously oxidized and pre- cipitated as Ni (OH);. This method is not altogether satisfactory, first, because, owing to the necessity of adding an excess of the oxidizing agent, cobaltic hydroxide is also precipitated invariably so that the appearance of a brown precipitate is not per se, proof of the presence of nickel; second, because the manipulation, particularly the amounts of reagents, requires experience and care.
Nickel glyoximine is decomposed by cyanide ion. Our problem, then, was to remove the cyanide ion so gradually that the cobalticyanide ion should remain practically unaffected. For this purpose we made use of the great stability of complex silver cyanide ions, together with the high insolubility of silver argenticyanide, Ag Ag(CN):, 0.0004 g. per liter® at 20°. For argenticyanide ion, [Ag] x [CN]? = »—! x [Ag(CN). ]. The comparative insolubility of silver cobalticyanide, Ag;Co(CN),., accurate data for which are lacking, should also tend to prevent decomposition of cobalticyanide ion. When dimethylglyoxime is added to very dilute solutions of nickel salts,
4Ann., 65, 244 (1848); 87, 128 (1853). 5Z. analyt. Chem., 5, 75 (1866). 6Bredig, Z. physik. Chem., 46, 602.
165
a yellow color at once develops and the red precipitate flocculates after a brief interval. At extreme dilutions where no precipitate forms, a yellow tint is observable. This was suspected to be due to colloidal glyoximine which should be fiocculated by another precipitate, in which case, since both silver cyanide and silver cobalticyanide are white, the red nickel glyoximine would be readily detectable and the delicacy of the test in- creased. The correctness of this view seems to be confirmed by the ex- perimental results detailed below.
EXPERIMENTAL.
Solutions and Reagents. NiSO, solution, approx. 0.05 molar, from Kahlbaum’s “‘Kobalt-frei’”’ salt, was standardized by electrolysis (0.05008 molar) and by precipitation and weighing as nickel glyoximine (0.0496 molar). The discrepancy is due probably to a trace of iron which was detected, the removal of which appeared unnecessary for our purpose. The more dilute solutions used were prepared from this by accurate dilution.
7) Bodlander, Z. anorg. Chem, 39, 227.
CoSO,, approx. O. 1 molar, was prepared by working up residues from cobaltammin salts. Nickel was removed by dimethylglyoxime according to the method we have developed and the solution as used gave no evidence of nickel by any of the tests applied. Electrolysis showed this solution to be 0.0921 molar. Potassium cyanide, 10 per cent. solution. Dimethylgly- oxime, | per cent. solution in alcohol. Silver nitrate, 1 per cent. solution.
SENSITIVENESS OF DIMETHYLGLYOXIME AS A REAGENT FOR NICKEL IN PRESENCE AND IN ABSENCE OF CYANIDE [oN.
Ten ec. of NiSO; solution of molarity stated in the table below was warmed to about 80° and | ce. of the reagent added and a drop or two of dilute ammonia. To the same volume of each NiSO, solution two or three drops of KCN were added. At these high dilutions no precipitate was formed. The solution was warmed to 80°, | ce. of reagent added and then the AgNO; solution dropwise until a permanent white or pink precipitate formed. The more concentrated solutions gave at once a pink precipitate; the more dilute ones a white precipitate which turned pink on standing. In those so- lutions which required more than one hour to form a precipitate the exact
166
time required for the pink precipitate to appear was not recorded. The samples were observed after standing 24 hours. From the results tabulated below it is apparent that the test is at least as delicate in the presence as in the absence of cyanide and that the results are obtainable much more quickly from the complex than from the simple ion. In the extreme dilutions of the simple ion the precipitate was frequently a single red crystal very
minute and difficult to see.
TABLE I. TIME. Molarity. Es Meg. Ni per cc. Ratio Ni : H:O | NiSO, | K:Ni(CN).
0.0005 Immediate | Immediate | 0.02934 1: 34,000 00005 lhour | 3 min. 002934 1: 340,000 .00001 24 hours | 5 min. _O00587 1 : 1,700,000 .000009 24 hours 10 min. .000528 1 : 1,900,000 000008 24 hours | 20 min. .000470 i tke 2,130,000 .O000007 24 hours 30 min. .000411 1 : 2,430,000 _000006 24 hours 1 hour 000352 | 2 *22340-000 .000005 24 hours | 24 hours | _000293 1 : 3,400,000 000004 No ppt. | 24 hours | 000235 | 1 :4,260,000 .000003 | No ppt. | No pink color | _000176 1 : 5,700,000 000002 No ppt. | No pink color | 000117 |
3. OXIDATION OF COBALTOCYANIDE JON TO COBALTICYANIDE ION.
When KCN is added to a solution of cobalt salt, brown-red Co(CN): is first precipitated and then redissolved to a brown solution of KysCo(CN),. On heating this soon changes to a pale yellow and the color change is generally assumed in manuals of analysis to indicate the completion of oxidation to cobalticyanide. We at first proceeded upon this assumption, but when the first drops of AgNO; were added to some of our complex cyanide solutions, soon after the color change took place, the solution darkened and addition of more AgNO; produced a dark-gray precipitate while solutions which had stood for several hours did not darken and gave a pure white precipitate. When one of the darkened solutions became distinctly opalescent, we sus- pected that colloidal silver had been formed. This was explainable by the assumption that AgNO; had been reduced by cobaltocyanide which was still present according to K,;Co(CN),; + AgNO; = K;Co(CN), + Ag + KNOs3.
* hanes |
167
By adding AgNO; to freshly prepared solutions of cobaltocyanide we found that this reaction takes place very slowly in cold but rapidly in hot solutions. When the AgNO; was added dropwise, the hot solutions first became lighter in color, then gradually turned orange and darkened until a gray precipitate was formed. If the addition of AgNO; was stopped when the orange tint appeared, no precipitate formed, but the solution darkened on standing and became opalescent, showing that colloidal silver had formed. We found that this phenomenon was regularly reproducible in solutions of cobaltoeyanide not less than 0.005 molar. These experiments clearly show that the oxidation . of cobaltocyanide is by no means complete when the color change takes place. We next investigated the time required to complete the oxidation, taking the failure to form metallic silver as evidence that the oxidation was essen- tially complete.
10 ce. of 0.1 molar CoSO, solution was treated in a casserole with just enough KCN to dissolve the Co(CN)2, the solution heated nearly to boiling and continuously rotated in the casserole for a definite. time to promote oxidation. The solution was then diluted to 100 ce. with water at 85° and
AgNO; added dropwise with vigorous stirring. Results are given below.
TABLE It. Ce. 0.1 molar CoSO: Time Heated. Result. NOR r ier 2 non ee SO: eS ee ee Zemin ale OllordallpAce Ions Sootctelsenic tae Sone wean eee eee 3 min.........| Orange soln.; gray ppt. HOE eens crneiee ake ae TO Mh ten lle OAM eeySOlms-* eran iD Db ViCO)S 3 Se pea Sy aie Sener cele 5 min.........| No darkening of soln.; ppt. white.
These results show that heating with constant agitation must be con- tinued for some time after the change of color. Presumably the time re- quired increases with the amount of cobalt present.
Detection or NICKEL IN CoBALT SALTS.
We next determined the minimum amount of nickel that could be de- tected in varying amounts of cobalt by our silver method and, for com- parison, by Treadwell’s and the modified Liebig.
A. Tue Sinver METHOD.
Definite volumes of solutions of NiSO, and CoSO, of known concentration were measured from burets into a casserole, KCN added until the precipitate just dissolved, and the solution heated and rotated until complete oxidation was effected. The solution was then diluted with water at 85° to 50 ce., 1 ee. of dimethylglyoxime solution added, and then AgNO; dropwise with vigorous stirring until a permanent precipitate was produced. The time required for the pink color of nickel glyoximine to appear was observed. In cases where the time exceeded one hour, observations were made at the end of 24 hours. The results are given below.
TABLE IV.
In each expt. 10 cc. CoSO, 0.0921 molar, equivalent to 54.31 mg. Co, was used.
rs
NiSO.4
EE Lees Se es Ratio Ratio
Vol. Conec.molar| Mg. Ni. Ni : Co. Ni: HO Results. 2 cc....| 0.0005 0.0587 1 : 925 1 852,000 | Ppt. pink immediate. 1.5 ce¢....} 0.0005 .0440 1 : 1234 | 1:1,140,000 | Ppt. pink 4 min. 1.0 ce....}| 0.0005 .0293 1 :1851 | 1:1,707,000 | Ppt. pink 6 min. AR 5 aC CAE 0001 .0264 1 : 2054 | 1 :1,894,000 | Ppt. pink 10 min. 4.0 ce¢.... .0001 .0235 1 : 2314 Ppt. pink 20 min. 33.8) COs o< .0001 .0205 1 : 2644 | 1 : 2,440,000 | Ppt. pink 30 min. SP ONCC ae .0001 .0176 1 : 3085 Ppt. pink 24 hours. 25) COs 5 - .0001 .9137 1 : 3702 | 1 :3,650,000 | Ppt. pink 24 hours.
Taking the minimum amount of nickel that could be detected in cobalt in 30 minutes, 0.0205 mg., we observed the effect of larger proportions of cobalt. The procedure and final total volume of solution were the same as
in the preceding experiments.
TABLE V.
CoSO, 0.0921 molar Meg. Co. Ratio Ni : Co Results. USCC oa aN oat selon Bouse eet a 81.47 1 : 3966 Ppt. pink 30 min. ZOKCClsnee Sie Se ea teehee ee 108.62 1 : 5288 Ppt. pink 30 min. 2D | CCS sagen i5 uisue eis bere orehe? eens 135.78 1 : 6610 Ppt. pink 30 min. SOKCC ey eek ee co Senco 162.93 1 : 7932 Ppt. pink 30 min.
169
These results show that the sensitiveness of the test is not impaired by the presence of large amounts of cobalt.
B. Tue TscHuGarv-TREADWELL Meruop.
10 ce. portions of 0.0921 molar CoSO,, equivalent to 54.31 mg. Co., with varying small amounts of NiSO, were heated with ammonia until a clear solution was obtained, hydrogen peroxide added and the solutions heated till excess of peroxide and ammonia was removed, diluted to 50 ec., 1 ce. of dimethylglyoxime solution added and the time required for the red pre- cipitate to appear was observed. Results below.
TABLE VI. NiSO, Vol. Conc. molar Meg. Ni. Ratio Ni : Co. Results.
10 ce 0.0005 0.2934 1: 185 Red ppt. 1 hour. 9 cc. 0.0005 . 2641 1 : 206 Red ppt. 1 hour.
8 cc. 0.0005 . 2347 TL 2 23 Red ppc. 1 hour.
7 ce 0.0005 . 2052 1 : 264 Red ppt. 24 hours. 6 ce. 0.0005 . 1760 1 : 309 Red ppt. 24 hours. 5 cc. 0.0005 . 1467 1 : 370 Red ppt. 24 hours. 4 ce. 0.0005 .1172 1 : 462 Red ppt. 24 hcurs.
Taking the minimum amount of nickel that could be detected in 1 hour, 0.2347 mg., we observed the effect of larger proportions of cobalt. The procedure and final volume were the same as in the experiments recorded In Table VI.
TABLE VII. CoSO,4 0.0921 molar Mg. Co Ratio Ni: CO Results. MOE COM iin cesta nrs eee e 54.31 il 2 2B Red ppt. after 1 hr. ESCO rien cal Weee hse Oo Releae = 81.47 1 : 346 No ppt. after 1 hr. PAV MK etn See ape aes Oates eee e 108.62 1 : 462 No ppt. after 1 hr. DAS Gertie tet atte fo ROR Once ORE ESTEE 135.78 1S BY No ppt. after 1 hr. 3 ONC Cees Mires aero ees heute 162.93 1 : 693 No ppt. after 1 hr.
170
These results indicate that this method is not very sensitive and fails when much cobalt is present.
C. Tue Liesic-GatHEeE METHOD.
10 ce. portions of CoSO:, 0.09621 molar, with varying amounts of NiSOs were treated with a slight excess of KCN over that required to dissolve the precipitate, and heated and rotated until complete oxidation of the cobalto- cyanide had taken place. They were then diluted to 50 ce. and freshly pre- pared sodium hypobromite added. After the precipitate had flocculated, it was filtered off, washed, dissolved in dilute HCl], neutralized with ammonia and tested for Ni with dimethylglvoxime. Results below.
TABLE VIII. NiSO« | 0.C005 molar Mg. Ni. | Ratio Ni : Co |Ratio Ni : H-0) Results.
|
| | 9 ce Si OsSEd ter | mer eoae peel | Blk. ppt. Ni confirmed Gece eee eee | .1760 1 : 309 | BIk. ppt. Ni confirmed 4 ce.. H Sil 1 : 462 Blk. ppt. Ni confirmed 3 cc.. | OSS80 1: 617 1 : 568.000 | Blk. ppt. Ni confirmed B. Careers Bd ek | 0587 1 : 925 1: 852,000 | Blk. ppt. No Ni WiCELeeee ee oe } .0293 1 : 1850 | Blk. ppt. No Ni INONe= Se. ees None | | Blk. ppt. No Ni
This method is shown to be capable of detecting 0.1 mg. nickel in a volume of 50 cc., Lut a confirmatory test must in every case be applied as the ppt. contains Co(OH):.
Comparing the results of the three methods, the minimum amount of nickel] detectable within one hour in a volume of 50 ce. is found to be:
Silver ucts. Sos ee aes Me ee ne, is ae eae te 0.02 mg schur2eve tread well tes vn ee he oe ee .23 mg. dhnebie-Gauher 2 tee he oh ae ee eee .09 mg.
These figures do not adequately convey the relative merits of the three methods, for it should be noted in addition that the Liebig method requires a confirmatory test to make the result trustworthy; the Treadwell method failed to show the stated minimum amount of nickel when so little as 231 times as much cobalt as nickel was present, while the silver method appears
ileal
to retain its full sensitiveness in presence of any amount of cobalt; and that it has been shown to increase the effectiveness of dimethylglyoxime about eight times and to be able to detect within 24 hours less than 0.002 mg. of nickel in a volume of 50 ee.
SUMMARY.
1. A modified method of using dimethylglyoxime for detecting traces of nickel in cobalt salts is proposed which (1) avoids the use of large amounts of the reagent; (2) makes possible the detection of considerably smaller quantities of nickel than has been possible heretofore.
2. The sensitiveness of the test is shown to be unaffected by the presence of cobalt even in large quantities. The proposed method increases the ordin- ary sensitiveness of dimethylglyoxime about eight times and is capable of detecting about one-fifth the amount of nickel detectable by any of the pre- viously known methods.
Chemical Laboratory, Purdue University.
THe DIFFERENT MetTHops or ESTIMATING PROTEIN IN MILK.
GEORGE SPITZER.
It is often desirable to estimate the proteids in milk other than the official method. This is especially true in cheese factories where it is desirable to know the percent of casein in milk, since it is the casein in milk that gives it its nutritive value, as far as the proteins are concerned. It is frequently desirable to know the protein content in milk for infant and invalid feeding. With the present method of determining the fat by the Babcock method, which is quite accurate and can be done in all creameries, a rapid method for estimating the percent of casein and fat in milk gives us the necessary data to control the ratio of casein to fat in milk for feeding. Frequently a chemist is requested to determine the fat and casein in human milk where a physician has reason to beleve that there exists an unbalanced ratio of fats and proteids.
There are three methods for rapid estimation of casein or proteids in milk, all of which possess merits worthy of consideration and could be used in a great many laboratories that are equipped with the apparatus necessary to determine the proteids by the official method. Although such equipment is at hand, when only a few determinations are to be made, the methods reviewed in this paper save time and the results obtained are sufficiently accurate. For the volumetric estimations of milk proteids, two standard volumetric solutions are required, besides a few beakers and flasks, apparatus found in any laboratory, or if one wishes to fit up for this purpose only, the expense is quite nominal. ;
In discussing the different methods, the order in which they are taken up, is no indication of their priority. Since 1892 various attempts have been made in devising a volumetric method for the estimation of casein in milk, but most were unsatisfactory, either owing to the extensive equipment or to the complicated indirect methods used. The main characteristics that a method should possess are: first, it should be accurate; second, it should require only a short time in making an estimation; third, the apparatus should be simple; fourth, materials and apparatus used should be easily obtainable.
174
L. L. Van Slyke and A. W. Bosworth in 1909 published their volumetric method (Technical Bulletin, N. Y. Ag. Exp. St.). The method worked out in their publication mentioned is briefly as follows: “‘A given amount of milk, diluted with water, is made neutral to phenolphthalein by the addition of a solution of sodium hydroxide. The casein is then completely pre- cipitated by the addition of standard acetic acid, the volume is then made up to 200 ce. by the addition of distilled water and then filtered. Into 100cc. of the filtrate a standard solution of sodium hydroxide is run until neutral to — phenolphthalein. These solutions are so standardized that 1 ce. is equivalent to 1 per cent. casein, when a definite amount of milk is used. Therefore, the number of cubic centimeters of standard acid used, divided by 2 less the amount of standard alkali used in the last titration gives the percentage of casein in the milk.”’
This method is based on the well known facts in chemistry and shows quite clearly the casein molecule has a constant molecular weight. First, uncombined casein is insoluble in milk serum, water or very dilute acids. Second, it has properties of an acid and combines with alkalies to form definite chemical compounds, neutral to phenolphthalein. ,
Now, if we know the molecular weight of casein or its equivalent in terms of a standard alkali, we can at once devise a definite method for estim- ating the casein by titration. Casein exists in milk in a colloidal condition combined with bases, upon addition of an acid sufficient to combine with salts In combination with casein, free casein is formed, insoluble in the serum (it must be remembered that casein and other albuminoids are soluble in excess of acids, the solubility depends on the kind of acid and tempera- ture). There exists a definite relation between the amount of acid required to form free casein and the amount of casein present. It has been found that
N sodium hydroxide, or
one gram of free casein neutralizes 8.8378 cc. of 5%
N 1 ce. of 2h
sodium hydroxide neutralizes .11315 grams of casein. From this data the molecular weight of casein can be calculated.
From the above facts it is easy to determine the quantity of milk re- quired, so that each ce. of iN acid used shall correspond to percents or fraction of a percent. Since 1 ec. of NaOH neutralizes .11315 grams of casein, it must require an equivalent amount of acid to set free the casein from its original combination in milk. If we wish to know the quantity of milk to be taken so that 1 ce. of acid used to separate the casein from its combinaion
shall equal 1 per cent. of casein, we make use of the above equivalent, i.e.
by fea,
1 ce. Bs acid = .11315 grams casein, or in other words .11315 grams of casein is capable of neutralizing as much alkali as | ce. of a acid, so if we take 11.315 grams of milk we see from the relation above that every ce. of acid used equals 1 per cent. casein. By using different quantities of milk we need only change the normality of our acid.
If by using 11.315 grams of milk (or 11 ce.) where each ce. of NY acid corresponds to 1 per cent., by using a greater or larger quantity of mill: the normality would have to be correspondingly less or greater. When we use 8.75 ee. or 9 grams of milk the normality would not be ‘ but 795 ce.
10 ~ acid plus water to make 1,000 ce. which equals Upon the above
N 12.56 +. facts the volumetric method of Van Slyke and Bosworth is based.
Procedure in carrying out in detail the volumetric estimation of casein: ‘‘A given amount of milk, diluted with water, is made neutral to phenolpthalein by the addition of a solution of sodium hydroxide. The casein is then completely precipitated by the addition of the standardized acetic acid; the volume of the mixture is then made up to 200 cc. by the addition of water, thoroughly shaken and then filtered. Into 100 cc. of the filtrate a standard solution of sodium hydroxide is run until neutral to phenolpthalein. The solutions are so stand- ardized that 1 ce. is equivalent to 1 per cent. of casein when a definite amount of milk is used. The number of cc. standard acid used, divided by two (since only 100 cc. of the 200 ce. is used), less the standard alkali used in the last titration gives the percentage of casein in the milk examined.’ When 17.5 or 18 grams of milk are used the strength of acetic acid and alkali are made by diluting 795 ce. of =! to 1,000 cc. The same normality as was derived above. Since only 100 ce. of the 200 cc. were titrated this then represents the acid required to liberate the casein in 8.75 ce. or 9 grams of milk. Like- wise by using 22 cc. cr 22.6 grams of milk treated as above, then 1 ce. of N acid equals 1 per cent of casein. By the use of a factor any con- venient quantity can be used. Example, by the use of 20 ce. of milk and nv solution, adjustment is made by multiplying the final result by 1.0964.
Apparatus and reagents necessary to carry on the volumetric estimation of casein in milk are, first, two 50 cc. burettes, graduated to 1/10 ce. or better 1/20 ce., these must be accurate. One of the burettes should be supplied with a glass stop cock for the acid, and one with a pinch cock for the alkaline solution. Second, flasks, volumetric, holding 200 ce. At least two of these are needed and where a number of estimations are to be made more are
required to do rapid work; ten to twelve are necessary for rapid work. The
176
necks of these flasks should have an internal diameter of at least three- fourths of an inch. The reason for this diameter is necessary if the milk is neutralized in the flask. This neutralization can be done in the beaker into which the milk is weighed, if weights are taken. Third, pipettes, a Babeock milk pipette accurately graduated to deliver 17.5 ec. of milk, when 17.5 ec. or 18 grams of milk are used. When 22 ce. or 22.6 grams of milk are used it will be necessary to have a volume pipette graduated to deliver the above amounts or a 25 ec. Mohr pipette graduated into 1/10 ee. will be required. Fourth, one 100 ce. pipette or a volumetric flask graduated to hold 100 ce. Fifth, beakers of convenient sizes holding at least 200 ce. Sixth, if standard solutions are to be made, measuring cylinders or volu- metric flasks holding 1,000 cc. are needed.
In regard to the making of the solutions it is best to prepare both the so- dium hydroxide and the acetic acid as tenth normal. The accuracy of the succeeding work depends primarily on the correctness of the standard alkali and acetic acid. When it is desirable to make dilutions for different quantities of milk it can be made from the tenth normal stock solution. The phenolpthalein solution is prepared by dissolving one gram of phenol- pthalein powder in 100 ce. of 50 per cent. aleohol. This should be neutralized by the use of a few drops of za NaOH to a very slight pink color.
Carrying out the operation. Weigh out 22.66 grams of milk, or measure out 22 ec., neutralize in the beaker in which the weighing has been made, using only enough alkali to give a very faint pink, then transfer to a 200 ce. flask and wash out beaker with 75 to 80 ce. of distilled water, free from carbon dioxide, shake and warm to 22° to 25° C. At this point observe
the color of the diluted milk. Frequently on dilution the pink color becomes
N 10
quite pronounced; if so, add a few drops of acetic acid to a light pink.
Run in from a burette 25 ce. of a N acetic acid, frequently shaking, for milk
10 rich in casein it would require 30 to 40 cc. of acid. Then fill up to the 200 ce. mark, insert stopper and shake thoroughly. After standing for 5 or 10 minutes, filter, after filtration pipette or measure 100 ce. of the filtrate into a 250 ec. or 300 ce. beaker and titrate to a permanent faint pink color, record the ce. used. Since 25 ec. were added to the total volume and only one-half titrated, we only take 12.5 ec. into consideration. From what has been said a portion of the 25 ec. N acetic acid has been used in forming free casein, therefore the difference between 12.5 ce. and the amount of
N NaOH used to neutralize the acid in the 100 ce. filtrate equals the number
177
of ee. acid used in liberating the casein. Since a quantity of milk has been taken so that each cc. of acid used equals 1 per cent. casein, then each ce. represents 1 per cent. of casein in the sample of milk. For example, it required 9.4 cc. to neutralize 100 cc. of the filtrate, and since it represented 12.5 ce. of the acid added to the 200 cc. of the diluted milk, we have 12.5- N 9.4 = 3.10 per cent. casein.
Below are some of Van Slyke’s results obtained by this method in com-
parison with the official method.
PERCENT CASEIN.
Voh metric Method
(Van Slyke-Bosworth). Official Method. 3.00 3.00 3.40 3.36 3.30 32 3.20 3.16 2.90 BOS Bei) 2.60
The second volumetric method which I wish to consider is that of E. B. Hart, of the University of Wisconsin, published in Research Bulletin, No. 10, 1910. For speed and accuracy this method offers no advantage over that of Van Slyke’s and Bosworth’s, just mentioned. However, the method is unique and sound in principle. The fact that free casein has the properties of an acid and can combine with an alkali in a definite proportion, it seems rational that if we dissolve casein in excess of alkali and the uncombined alkali is estimated by titration, using phenolpthalein as an indicator, we are in a position to calculate the casein equivalent per ec. of standard alkali used. This is true, and upon this principle rests Hart’s volumetric method. Hart found the casein equivalent for each 1 ce. ‘, KOH to be .108 grams. Therefore, if we titrate the casein obtained from 10.8 grams of milk, we see that each ce. of alkali used must represent 1 per cent. of casein.
Details of the method. Measure 10.5 ec. or weigh 10.8 grams of milk into a 200 cc. Erlenmeyer flask, add 75 ce. of distilled water at room tem- perature and add to this 1 to 1.5 ce. of a 10 per cent. solution of acetic acid. The flask is given a quick rotary motion, usually 1.5 ce. of acetic acid gives
5084—12
178
a clear and fast filtering separation, but if the milk is low in casein a little less acetic acid should be used. The separated precipitate is now filtered through a filter (9-11 cm. filter), the flask rinsed out thoroughly and poured on the filter, preferably cold. If a strong stream of water is directed against the filter, the casein washing is facilitated. About 250 to 300 cc. of water should pass through the filter to insure the removal of all traces of acetic acid. The precipitate, together with the filter paper, is now returned to the Erlenmeyer flask in which the precipitation was made. To this is now added 75 ce. of distilled water. free from carbon dioxide, and then a few drops of phenol- pthalein and 10 ce. of et potassium hydroxide. A rubber stopper is placed in the flask and the contents shaken vigorously. Complete solution is easily indicated by the disappearance of the white casein particles. After solution the stopper is rinsed off into the flask with carbon dioxide free water and immediately titrated with ia acid to the disappearance of the red color. It is necessary that a blank be run parallel with the determination. For example, suppose it required 7.20 cc. of acid to make the pink color just disappear and the blank amounted to .2 cc., the percent of casein would be 10 — 7.4 = 2.60 per cent. casein. Precatuions necessary. First, water free from carbon dioxide, must be used. Second, the titration should be made as soon as solution of casein has taken place. This will be from half an hour to an hour after adding the alkali. Repeated shaking hastens solution.
10
Results obtained by Hart as compared with the offidal method.
PERCENT CASEIN.
Volumetric Method
Official Method. (Hart). 3.78 3.75 Si? 3.05 2187 : 2.85 1.90 1.85 2.30 2.25 237 2.30
The next volumetric method to be considered is the Formol titration method. This is perhaps the most rapid method of the three volumetric methods, for estimating the proteids in milk. It was pointed out in 1900 by Hugo Schiff that when formaldehyde was added to amino acids, the acid
Lew)
properties of the acid were developed and could be titrated as any organic acid.
S. P. L. Sorensen worked out the details and made it possible to estimate amino acids quantitatively by means of formaldehyde. It is well known that amino acids, such as are formed by the hydrolysis of proteins, especially milk proteids, are neutral to phenolpthalein, have both an acidic group, earboxyl and a basic (amino) group. These exist in the same molecule and being the alpha amino acids neutralize each other, or in other words we have an amphoteric molecule, but as soon as formaldehyde is added, it reacts with the alkaline or basic group forming a methylene compound and leaving
the acid group free to act.
-For example:
{NH; fOS| == (Clas CHl, — CH + HCOH = CH; — CH. + H.0 COOH COOH (Alazine) (Formaldehyde) (st = (Ole [ie CH CH: — CH. + KOH = CH; — CH. . +09 COOH COOK
From Emil Fisher’s researches on protein and polypeptids there is no doubt that the protein molecule is conposed of amino acid units. The carboxyl group (—COOH) of one amino acid is combined with the amino group (—NH.) of another amino acid, forming peptids, di, tri, etc., to poly- peptids. For example, glycyl-glycine composed of two units of gylcine.
CH: — COQH\ CH, — COOH CII. CO — CH, — COOH |
| = | [ake + HjO HUN HY— N -—H HN NH (Glycine) (Glycine) (Glyeil-G!scine)
Likewise different units may combine, as example, alanyl-glycyl-tyrosine From which we see that each peptid has one carboxyl; group (—COOH) 2 a rj 5 £
acidic and one amino group (—NH.) basic. Now if the protein molecule
is built up from amino acids, we can expect it to split up into simpler mole-
180
cules, by hyroloysis either with an acid or ferment into peptones, ete. Then we would expect the formol number to increase, double, if each protein molecule were split into two simpler ones. This is true, so formol] titration gives a measure of the hydrolytic cleavage. We know that the proteids of milk are neutral to indicators, but on the addition of the formaldehyde become decidedly acid to these indicators.
Now if we can determine a factor or equivalent of the acidity produced on the addition of the formaldehyde to milk proteids, we can at once deter- mine the percent of proteids in milk by titrating the acidity with a standard alkali. f .
In 1912, E. Holl Miller, of England, worked out a method for estimating the proteids in butter, and the same method is used in determining the proteids in milk.
Directions for estimating the proteids in butter. Weigh into a tared beaker exactly 10 grams of butter, which is placed in a water bath at 60° to 70° C. until the butter is completely melted. Twenty-five cc. of carbon dioxide free water is then added at about 60° C. and 1 cc. of phenolpthalein solution. The contents are well agitated. Run in X NaOH until a faint permanent pink color is formed. It is found that the end point is masked by the yellow color of butter fat, the contents of the beaker should be allowed to settle and the bottom aqueous layer observed, and the addition of alkali continued until the pink tint is obtained. Five cc. of formaldehyde (40 per cent.) is added. The formaldehyde must either be neutralized before addition or its acidity equivalent for 5 ce. obtained and afterwards deducted. After the formaldehyde has been added the beaker is well shaken and again se NaOH run in until a permanent faint pink color is produced in the aqueous layer. The number of cc.X alkali used in the second titration less the amount equivalent to the acidity of the formaldehyde. No deduction is necessary if the formaldehyde was neutralized before being added to the butter. Now the number of cc. X alkali used to neutralize the acidity produced on the addition of the formaldehyde is proportional to the protein present. One ee. of wv alkali is equivalent to .01355 grams of protein nitrogen or .0864 grams milk protein, assuming a definite proportion of casein and albumen.
0864 X100 Xce.
Then to calculate the percent of protein we have a, ee
cent protein if 10 grams of butter were taken.
181
The following table shows the percent protein in butter by the Formol titration and official method:
Official Method. Formaldehyde.
65 59 48 AT 46 .42 48 .50 .60 .68 45 .42 42 40
41 41 49 52
Procedure to estimate the protein in milk. To estimate the proteids in milk, weigh out 10 or 20 grams, preferably 20 grams, in a tared beaker, about 150 to 200 ce. capacity. Add 1 ce. of phenolpthalein solution, then run in from a burette X NaOH until decided pink color is produced, a little practice will enable one to carry the shade of color in mind. Then add 10 ee. of neutralized formaldehyde, stir with a glass rod, when well mixed add ane NaOH until the same shade of pink is produced as that before the form- aldehyde was added (note this last addition of alkali). For example, if 7 ce.
. NaOH were required to neutralize the acidity produced on addition
oN of formaldehyde to 20 ec. of milk, then as in the case of butter: .9864 X 100 X7 20 If we wish to estimate the casein alone and assuming the casein and
= percent protein = 3.024
albumen are in proportion of 3 per cent. casein and .5 per cent. albumen,
then by using the equivalent of .075, we have as above: 075 X 100 X7
20 The following table gives the results of the three volumetric methods
compared with the official methods on the same sample of milk:
= percent casein = 2.62
182
PERCENT CASEIN.
Official. Van Slyke-Bosworth. | Hart. Formol Titration. | |
2.98 3.05 2.95 2.99 2.96 3.05 2.90 2.98 2.45 2.45 2.40 2.50 2.40 2.40 2.35 2.48 1.79 (d) 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.77 (d) 1.75 1.85 1.83 3.28 3.25 Byori 3.18 3.29 3.20 3.15 3.20 2.46 2.49 2.40 2.46 Beit 3.80 3.65 3.70 2.90 2.90 2.80 2.96 2.47 2.50 | 2.45 2.48 Seal 3.70 3.70 3.74 2.85 2.85 2.85 | 3.01 2.80 2.74 2.70 2.76 2.89 2.85 2.90 2.91
Note.—The two samples marked (d) were diluted milk. Samples were taken on different days from the same source.
The above table shows the relative accuracy of the different methods. For the estimation of casein in milk the choice of the methods mentioned depends on the purpose for which the analysis is made. If total proteids are to be estimated, the Van Slyke-Bosworth and Hart methods must be excluded, unless an assumption is made as to the average amount of albumen in milk. This could be done on the same basis as that for the formol method and which would introduce only a slight error for normal milk and from a mixed herd.
In reviewing these methods and considering speed, and ease of carrying out the work, the formol titration method is to be preferred. In all three volumetric methods it is very essential that the water used for dilution should be free from carbon dioxide. Very little distilled water found in laboratories is free from carbon dioxide. This factor alone may introduce errors to vitiate the results. Titration after the addition of the formaldehyde should be carried to a sharp pink color and remain so for at least five minutes.
GEORGE SPITZER,
Purdue University.
183 New Cave Near VERSAILLES. ANDREW J. BIGNEY.
It is known as the cave of Dr. Jim Sale of Dillsboro. It is situated one mile northeast of Versailles. It is located near the top of a high hill overlooking Laughery valley. The view from this position is most pictur- esque. The lover of nature is enchanted by the richness of the scenery. The climb up the hill from the Fallen Timber creek to the mouth of the cave is most exhilarating.
The entrance is guarded by an iron gate. Excavations have been made and walls built, so as to open a passage to the cave proper, thus making it convenient for the visitor. A stream of water had been passing through ‘the cave. Now a pipe carries off the water. About thirty feet from the mouth of the cave is the main room, which is very beautiful because of the numerous pillars, stalactites and stalagmites. The ceiling is high enough for the tallest man to walk in freely, and in some places could not touch the ceiling with outstretched arms. Some of the pillars are four to five feet in height. The ceiling is decorated artistically with stalactites in great numbers and in various sizes, with many corresponding stalagmites. Passing to the right there is a smaller room also covered with typical cave formations. A passage extends about thirty feet beyond in the clay and limestone rocks with only a few stalactites. Extending from the main room is a narrow passage about seventy feet long where there is a spring from which flows a moderate stream in rainy weather. The ceiling and crevices above are like- wise decorated with the stalactites. Undoubtedly there must be other rooms, but they have been naturally filled up with dirt and stone. Even outcropping on the side of the hill are large formations of stalactites and stalagmites. It is certainly a very interesting place.
The region round about Versailles has many caves, but this is the only one that has the cave formations. While it is not a large cave like the Marengo and Wyandotte, yet its geological structures are just as typical and interesting as in the larger caves. It is instructive, for it is near the margin of the cave region of southern Indiana and northern Kentucky. Geologically speaking, it is in the lower Silurian or Ordovician formation. It will be instructive for the schools to visit the cave so as to get some accurate
information of cave structures. The entire region is most fascinating.
~~"
= oa
Logss. AND SAND Dutune Deposits In Vigo County, INDIANA.
Won. A. McBertu. Loess deposits are mentioned in various places as occurring along the
bluffs of the lower Wabash river. Dr. J. T. Scovell, who in the twenty-first annual report of the State Geologist has given the most extended and de-
tailed description of the geography and geology of Vigo county yet published,
7
Looking west along National Road from upland along east side of Wabash Valley.
mentions in a single sentence that ‘‘Along the eastern margin of the main valley there are extensive areas of dune sand and at some localities in the eastern bluffs there are thick beds of loess.’’ So far as I have observed shght reference has been made to the distribution, appearance and extent of the loess or loess-like deposits of the lower Wabash valley. The loess is so involved with sandy material that it is difficult to distinguish between the two and interstratified clay. The inclination in examining these materials is to consider them but different phases of the same thing. The interstratified clay does not contain boulders and may be weathered or chemically decom- posed loess, while the sandy covering may be due to wind assortment.
IS6
Occasional gasteropod shells of very small size are found. The deposits
occur in ridges and dunes usually within less than a mile from the crest of
Dune in Highland Lawn Cemetery. North side National Road. Note ridge beyond building at left and opposite a cross roads at right.
Dunes south of National Road } mile. Looking west from level upland. The valley is just beyond.
the east bluff and often within a few rods. Sometimes a single continuous
ridge of uniform height and width crowns the bluff. In places there are
187
successive ridges two or three and in instances four. In still other places the topography takes the form of dunes, low domes with no characteristic order or grouping. The gradients of the ridges on the leeward or east side if often remarkably steep. The height of the ridges is in a few cases as much as twenty-five feet. In most instances the height is not more than half the figure stated. An interesting observation is that the dunes and ridges extend along the north sides of tributary valleys still keeping a north-south direction in the ridges, which in some places are arranged in etchelon. This is noticed on the north side of Honey creek. The surface on the north side of Otter creek valley appears as one long wave after another, cloaking the bluff front
Blake Hill. A sand dune north side National Road.
and crest. This arrangement of ridges along the re-entrant valleys indicates that the valleys were made before the deposits. The direction of the bluffs has evidently influenced the deposition of the material as a section of the river bluffs running directly east-west on the south side of Honey creek shows no dunes or ridges. The deposits also show a marked relation to the terrace area in the valley. Where a broad stretch of terrace lies below the bluffs the ridges and dunes are more strongly developed. Where flood plains approach the bluffs the deposits on the crest and bordering uplands decrease or disappear. Conclusions as to the cause of the deposits and their source seems to be amply justified by the evidence that the deposits are wind
ISS
blown, the materials, including the shells being collected from the terrace surface from the silts deposited by the valley-wide stream. This deposition probably occurred soon after the stream abandoned the terrace level and withdrew to the present deeper third of the valley width. The work was done mainly before the invasion by vegetation of the terrace, bluff front and upland border, after the retreat of the ice sheet from the region. The loess may be a wind deposit from the bare valley at the close of the Illinoisan ice invasion. This dust may have weathered through a long interglacial period of time to be covered with later deposits of dust and fine sand swept over the valley from the border of the Late Wisconsin ice which did not reach the present site of Terre Haute, but whose strong moraine lies fifteen or twenty miles upstream near Clinton and Rockville.
189
VOLUME OF THE ANCIENT WABASH RIVER. Wm. A. McBeru.
The Wabash valley at Terre Haute has a width of five to six miles. One- third this width has a depth of approximately one hundred feet, embracing a flood plain tract through which the river meanders in a channel averaging one thousand feet wide and twenty feet deep. The remaining half is a terrace about half the depth of the deeper part. The whole valley bottom shows the effects of stream deposition, the pre-glacial trench of two hundred to two hundred and fifty feet in depth being half-full of sand and gravel. <A point
Miles
Jeneralized profile across Wabash Valley of Jerre Haute.
of interest in connection with the stream and valley is the question of volume of water by which various phases of the work was done. The size and weight of pebbles in the gravel indicate a volume and velocity much greater than that of the present stream either in average volume or flood. Some suggestion as to the width and depth of the stream at its stage of greatest flow is furn- ished by features of the terrace surface consisting of sandbars and delta deposits. This terrace surface is marked with numerous shallow current lines or channels. The bars form ridges of greater length than width, often many times longer. They trend northeast, southwest, the direction of the valley and have the characteristic stratified structure of such features, the layers of finer or coarser sand dipping steeply down stream. Extensive areas of the terrace surface lie at an elevation of four hundred and ninety feet a.t.l. Some places are five feet lower while some of the ridge tops rise to the five hundred and thirty foot level. Low water in the present stream is four hundred and forty-five feet. Points in sections 3, 23 and 24 and a bluff side delta of a brook crossed by Fruitridge avenue at the south edge of Section 24, Town 12 N. Range 9 W., rise to nearly the five hundred thirty foot level. Sandbars and deltas are built under water and the surface of the stream in which these deposits were made must have been a few inches and possibly several feet above the ridge and delta tops when they were
190
completed. The range of elevation four hundred ninety to five hundred thirty equals forty feet over large areas with places of forty-five feet or more. A eross profile from bluff to bluff shows these ridge tops to be the highest points between bluffs. Water covering these ridges must have covered the valley from side to side making a stream of from five to six miles wide and forty to fifty feet deep. Just how much of the year or for how long periods the water maintained such a volume it would seem impossible to say, but probably the maximum volume was reached in summer and main- tained through the summer months, declining as winter came on. The assumption is that the largest volume of water was produced by the summer melting of the Great Ice Sheet that formerly overspread the Northern United States and much of Canada. Whether the west deeper side of the valley was then lower than the terrace portion cannot be stated certainly, deeper water probably covered the part of the valley that now shows the ereatest depth. A depth of twenty feet of water is shown for the highest parts of the site of Terre Haute.
191
A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF GEOGRAPHIC LITERATURE CONCERN-~ ING FOREIGN COUNTRIES.
Taken from Non-geographical Magazines 1900-1914; Govermnent Documents; ‘ and Geographical Magazines.
B. H. ScHockeEt.
INTRODUCTION.
This bibliography is submitted in the hope that it will be of some value to teachers of geography below the University, even though it is incomplete, and loosely organized. Each article has at least been briefly seanned. There are included many articles not written from a geographic standpoint, but it is thought that these also will be of some value to the geography teacher.
The accompanying key is employed to save space. The first reference under South America, for example, according to the key is Bulletin of tne Pan American Union, volume 32, pages 240 to 251.
Acknowledgement is due to C. O. McFarland and Mrs. E. E. Rullmau for assistance In preparing the bibliography.
KEY.
J. American Journal of Archaeology. II. American Journal of Science. Ill. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science. IV. Atlantic Monthly. V. Bookman. VI. Bulletin of the American Geographical Society (Journal). VII. Bulletin of the Pan American Union. VIII. Bulletin of the Geographical Society of Philadelphia. IX. Bureau of American Republics. (Pan American Union.) X. Century Magazine. XI. Chautauqua. XII. Engineering. XIII. Everybody’s Magazine.
XIV. Forum. XV. Geographical Journal. XVI. Harper’s Magazine. XVII. MHarper’s Weekly. XVIII. Harvard Graduate’s Magazine. XIX. Independent. XX. Johns Hopkins University Studies. XXI. Journal of Geography. (Journal of School Geography.) XXII. Journal of Geology. XXIII. National Geographic Magazine. XXIV. New England Magazine. XXV. North American Review. XXVI. Popular Science Monthly. (Scientific Monthly.) XXVII. Records of the Past. XXVIII. Review of Reviews. XXIX. Science. XXX. Scientific American Supplement. XXXI. Seribner’s Magazine.
XXXII. Scottish Geographical Magazine. XXXIII. Smithsonian Institute Reports. XXXIV. The Trend.
XXXV. University of Chicago Magazine. XXXVI. Westminster Review.
XXXVII. World Today. XXXVIII. World’s Work. XXIX. Yale Review. XL. Yearbook Department of Agriculture. XLI. Bay View Magazine. XLII. Journal of School Geography. XLIIf. Journal of Political Economy. XLIV. Geographical Teacher.
SOUTH AMERICA. Sears, J. H.: Trade and Diplomacy between Latin America and the United States.—VII; 32; 240-51. Baralt, B.: The literature of Spanish America.—VII; 36; 30-37.
193
Chandler, C. L.: World race for the rich South American trade.—X X XVIII; 25; 314-22.
Freeman, L. R.: Hydro-electric operations in South America.—VII; 37: 633-56.
Reid, W. A.: Railways of South America.—VII; 37; 165-191.
Latin American foreign trade in 1911—general survey.—VII;. 36; 225-244.
Ward, R: D.: Climate of South America.—VI1; 351; 353-60.
Posey, C. J.: Points in the geography of South America.—X XI; 12; 65.
Pepper, M.: South America fifty years hence-—X XIII; 17; 427-32.
Barrett, J.: Our manufacturers’ greatest opportunity.—II1; 34; 520-531.
Sears, A. F.: German influence in Latin America.—X XVI; 72; 140-52.
What the Latin-Americans think of, and why United States should en- courage the Pan-American conferences.—X XIII; 17; 474-9; 497-80.
Ogg, F. A.: German interests and tendencies in South America.—X X XVIII; 5; 3169-3170.
_ Bowman, J.: Geographical aspects of the new Madeira-Mamoré railroad.— VI; 45; 275-81.
Rice, H.: Further exploration in the Northwest Amazon basin.—XV; 44; 137-64.
Furlong, C. W.: South America’s first transcontinental xX XXVIII; 20; 13535-55.
Humphrey, W. H.: Shipping facilities between the United States and South America.—III; 38; 621-637.
Bowman, I.: Physiography of the central Andes.—I1; 178; 197-373.
Bulfin, W.: United States in Latin America.—X X XVIII; 4; 2533-2550.
Denuci, J.: The discovery of the north coast of South America according to an anonymous map in the British Museum.—X/V; 36; 65-80.
Smith, J. R.: Western South America and its relation to American trade.— III; 18; 446-468.
Emory, F.: Causes of our failure to develop South American trade.—II]I; 22; 153-156.
Tower, W.8S.: Notes on the commercial geography of South America.—VI; 45; 881-901.
The quest of Kl Dorado.—VII; 34; 55-66; 165-176; 317-27; 447-58; 607-621; 732-43.
South America: Its general geographic features and opportunities.—VIIT, 8; 47-53.
5084—13
194
Fortescue, G.: South American trade hints.—VII; 32; 261-69.
Bulletins of the International Bureau of American Republic.—House Doc.; 267; Vol. 68-72; 58 Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial Nos. 4847-50.
Ibid: House Doe. Vol. 75-76; 56th Cong., Ist Sess.; Serial Nos. 3972-3.
Ibid: House Doe. Vol. 86-89; 59th Cong., Ist Sess.; Serial Nos. 5026-29; 49; 49-54.
Dr. Koch: Griinberg’s explorations in the Northern Amazon basin and the Guiana Highlands (map).—VI; 45; 664-66.
Dunn, A. W.: Beef from South America and Australia——XXVIII; 49; 49-54.
Hammond, J. H.: The expansion of our Latin American trade.—XIX; 80; 406.
Brown, C. M.: Cocoa-nuts in the Americas.—VIIT; 32; 17:39.
Tin mining in the Americas.—VII; 31; 983-94.
Millward, R. H.: Petroleum in the Americas.—VII; 31; 756-78.
Cacao of the world.—VII; 34; 75-85.
Church, G. E.: Aborigines ef South America.—VII; 38; 360-69.
Savage-Landor, A. H.: Across unknown South America.—VIJ; 38; 204-13.
Reid, W. A.: Coca, the wonder plant of the Andes.—VII; 38; 640-56.
-A commercial traveler in South America.—VII; 38; 37-53; 183-203; 329-47; 516-35; 657-78; 810-830.
Wight, W.:F.: South American fruit production.—VII; 38; 9-26.
Reid, W. A.: Furs in the Americas.—VII; 38; 157-169.
Bowman, I.: Results of an expedition to the Central Andes.—V1; 46; 161-83.
ARGENTINE REPUBLIC.
Argentine Republic—VIT; 31; 2-26.
Brandon, E. E.: Argentine universities —VII; 34; 223-230.
Commerce of Argentine Republic—VII: 36; 445-49.
Attwell, J. S.: Argentine and its capital—XLI; Jan., 1913.
Argentine plains and andine glaciers. with a description of the South American locust.—VIT; 33; 1082-94.
Hale, A.: Crossing the Andes by aero and auto.—VIJI; 38; 313-21.
Cultivation of cotton in Argentia.—VII; 33; 751-59.
The Argentine Republic.—VII; 33; 9-46.
Albes, E.: The strait of Magellan, Pinita, Arenas, and the Tierra del Fuegiaus.—V II; 35; 989-1002.
195
Albes, E.: Buenos Aires and vicinity.—VII; 35; 816-335.
Chandler, C. L.: The Argentine southward moyement.—VI1; 38; 489-98.
Townsend, C. H.: Naturalist in Straits of Magellan.—X XVI; 77; 1-18.
Wheat supply.— XLIII; 12; 5-35.
Indian corn in Argentina.— XLII]; 12; 255.
Tower, W.S.: A journey through Argentina.—VIII; 12; 89-113.
Kuezywski, R. R.: Wheat growing in Argentina.—XLIII; 10; 266-281.
Wilcox, M.: Argentine Patagonia: A land of the future.—VI; 42; 903.
Grubb, W. B.: The chaco-boreal: The land and its people—XX XII; 16; 418-429.
Smith, J. R.: The economic geography of the Argentine Republic.—VI; 35; 130-148.
O’Driseoll, F.: A journey to the north of the Argentine Republic.—xXV; 24; 384-408.
Smith, W. G.: A visit to Patagonia.—X X XII; 28; 456-75.
Wellington, C. W.: Among the titans of the Patagonian pampas.—XVI; 122; 813-827.
Bowman, I.: Northern Patagonia.—V1I; 45; 357-59.
Corthell, E. L.: Two years in Argentine as the consulting engineer of national public works.—V1; 35; 489-471.
Albes, E.: Across the pampas of Argentina; a day in Mendoza, and over the Andes; VII; 35; 506-21.
Hirst, W. A.: Argentine —X X XI; 1911.
Furlong, C. W.: Vanishing people of the land of fire —XVI; 120; 217-29. Report on trade conditions in Argentina, Paraguay, and Uruguay.—United States Commerce and Labor; Miscellaneous Reports, Vol. 2, article 5. Hatcher, J. B.: Some geographic features of Southern Patagonia, with a
discussion of their origin.—X XIII; 11; 41-55. Steffen, H.: The Patagonian cordillera and its main rivers.—XV; 16; 14-39; 185-211. Willis, B.: Recent surveys in Northern Patagonia.—XV; 40; 607-15. Holdich, Sir T. H.: The Patagonian Andes.—XV; 23; 153-76. Barrett: Argentina, Uruguay and Paraguay.—X1X; 66; 88-96.
196
BOLIVIA. Bo.ivia.
Brandon, E. E.: Higher education in Bolivia.—VIT; 33; 1124-30.
Bolivia.—VI1; 33; 206-224.
Picturesque La Paz, the capital of Bolivia—VII; 37; 209-19.
Bowman, I|.: The distribution of people in Bolivia.—VIII; 8; 74-93; 159-84.
Explorations in Bolivia.—XV; 35; 513-532.
Horn, R. C.:_ The historic foundations of Colcha, in Bolivia——XXVII: 12; 116-22.
Further explorations in Bolivia: The River Heath —XV; 37: 377-398.
Bolivia: VII; 31; 27-41.
Adams, H. C.: Liberation of Bolivia-—X XVIII; Jan., 1913.
The geography and natural resources of Bolivia — XX XII; 27; 6-13.
Hoek, Dr. H.: Explorations in Bolivia.—XV; 25; 498-513.
Hill, A. W.: Notes on a journey in Bolivia and Peru around Lake Titicaca.— XXXII; 21; 249-260.
Adams, C.: Kaleidoscopic view of La Paz—X XIII; 20; 119-42.
Calderon, S. Y.: A country without a debt—X XIII; 18; 573-86.
Bowman, J.: Trade routes in the economic geography of Bolivia.—VI: 42-22-90-180.
Handbook of Bolivia.—House Doc.. No. 145, V. 67; 51 Cong., 3rd Session; Serial No. 4846.
Riviere, A. De: Explorations in the rubber districts of Bolivia—VI; 32;
432-440. eas
Bingham, H.: Potosi—vVI; 43; 1-13.
Travels on the boundary of Bolivia and Argentina.— XV; 21; 510-25.
Evans, J. W.: Expeditions to Bolivia.—XV; 22; 601-46.
Barrett: The western republics of South America.— XIX; 66; 515-23.
Commerce of Bolivia for 1912.—VII; 38; 110-117.
BRAZIL.
Ward, D.: The economic climatology of the coffee district of Sao Paulo, Brazil.—V1I; 43; 428-445.
Branner, J. C.: The geography of northeastern Bahia.—XV; 38; 139-152; 256-269.
Brazil.—VII; 33; 47-80.
197
All-rail route between Montevideo and Rio De Janeiro.—VII; 33; 1095- 1114.
Astimead, P. H.: Madeiro-Mamore railway.—VIJ; 32; 432-52.
Tron ores of Brazil.—VII; 32; 652-65.
Brazil. VII; 31; 42-73.
Hale, A.: Developing the Amazon valley.—VII; 36; 38-47.
Wright, M. R.: The mighty Amazon.—XLI; Feb., 1913.
Hale, A.: A trip through Brazil.—XLI; Feb., 1913.
Sugar in Brazil.—VII; 34; 205-211.
Albe, E.: The beautiful capital of Brazil and its environment.—VII; 36; 1-26.
Albes, E.: Bahia and Papa, two great ports of Brazil— VII; 36; 165-182.
Post, C. J.: From frontier to frontier through the rubber country.—X; 83; 352-64.
Brandon, E. E.: Higher education in Brazil.—VII; 34; 636-45.
- Peniambico: Sao Paulo and Santos, in eighty days with the Bluecher party.— VII; 35; 55-72.
Hale, A.: The port of Para.—VII; 35; 682-98.
Col. Roosevelt’s exploration of a tributory of the Madeira.—VI; 46; 512-19.
Hale, A.: Madeiro-Mamore railway company.—VII; 35; 1124-41.
Hale, A.: Valley of the river Amazon.—VII; 35; 1116-24.
Post, C. J.: Shooting the canons of the Eastern Andes.—X; 83; 273-84.
Danson, T. C.: The Caueasian in Brazil— X XVI; 64; 550-56.
Keller, A. J.: Portuguese colonization in Brazil— XX XIX; 14; 374-410.
Branner, J. C.: Palm trees of Brazil—X XVI; 60; 387-412.
Furniss, H. W.: Diamonds and carbons of Brazil—X XVI; 69; 272-280.
Lome, H. M.: An American sanitary triumph in Brazil—X XXVIII; 20; 12951-56. ;
Ward, R. D.: A visit to the coffee country of Brazil.—X XII]; 22; 908-31.
Ward, R. D.: The southern campos of Brazil.—V1I; 40; 652.
Cobb, D. A.: Tales from Brazil.—X XIII; 20; 917-21.
A trip up the lower Amazon.—X X XII; 45; 881-901.
Koettlitz, R.: From Para to Manaos: A trip up the lower Amazon.— XXXII; 17; 11-30.
Ruhl, A.: Where the coffee comes from.—X XX]; 43; 739.
Roosevelt, T.: A hunter naturalist in the Brazilian wilderness. — XX XI; 55; 407-539-667.
198
Hutchinson: Trade conditions in Brazil.—Senate Doc. 164; 59th Cong., Ist Sess.; Serial No. 4912. Brazil.—House Doe. 557; 57th Cong., 1st Sess.; Serial No. 4357.
CHILE.
Smith, J. R.: The economic geography of Chile.—VI; 36; 1-21.
Gibson, H.: The boundary dispute between Chile and Argentina.—X XXII; 18; 87-90.
Tower, W.S.: Nitrate fields of Chile-—X XVI; 83; 209-230.
Argentina-Chile boundary dispute.—X XIII; 13; 27-28.
Bertrand, A.: Methods of survey employed by the Chilean boundary com- missions.—XV; 16; 329-45.
Ward, R.: Climatic control of occupation in Chile-——xXLII; 1; 289-92.
Gormaz, T. V.: Depressions and elevations of the southern archipelagoes of Chile—X XXII; 18; 14-24.
Young, KE. C.: A journey among the highlands of Chile-—XV; 26; 307-18.
Bowman, I.: The regional population groups of Atacama.—X XXII; 26; 1-9; 57-67; also VI; 41; 142-93.
Van Dyke, H. W. V.: Chile.—XIJ; 66; 54-79.
Albes, E.: Santiago and Valparaiso.—VII; 35; 703-21.
Brandon, HE. E.: University of Chile-—VII; 34; 67-74.
Hale, A.: The city of Valparaiso, Chile-—VII; 36; 653-667.
Chile.—VII; 31; 74-96.
Bituminous coal of Chile.—VII; 32; 684-88.
Chile.—VII; 33; 421-53.
Tower, W. S.: The economic resources of Chile-—VII; 36; 207-224.
Ross, W. H.: Origin of nitrate deposits —X XVI; 85; 1384-45.
Barrett: The western republics of South America.—XIX; 66; 515-23.
Linking the ends of Chile.—VII; 38; 27-36.
CoLoMBIA.
Colombia.—VII; 33; 224-245.
Colombia.—VII; 31; 97-115.
Coal on the Pacific coast of Colombia.—VII; 37; 97.
Alexander, T.S.: Colombia: The government; the people, and the country. XXXVIII; 7; 4836-4343.
199
Barrett: The northern republics of South America.—XI1X; 66; 789-96. The emerald mines of Colombia.—VII; 38; 839-44. Pearse, A. S.: Tropical nature in Colombia.—X XVI; 84; 290-305.
EcuabDor.
Ecuador.—VII; 31; 166-88.
Commerce of Ecuador.—VII; 36; 92-97. Bennett, F. W.: Guayaquil and Quito railway. Ecuador.—VII; 33; 246-67.
Lee, J.: Beautiful Ecuador—xX XIII; 18; 81-91.
Barrett: The northern republics of South America.—X1X; 66; 789-96. Handbook of Ecuador.—IX; Bulletin 64.
Commerce of Ecuador for 1911.—VII; 38; 259-64.
Moore, C. H.: Railway construction in Keuador.—VII; 38; 170-82.
VI; 55; 361-364.
; GUIANA.
Percival, J. B.: Resourees of Dutch Guiana.—VII; 37; 818-26.
Villers, J. A. J. de: The foundation and development of British Guiana.— XV; 38; 8-26.
Heilprin, A.: An impression of the Guiana wilderness.—X XIII; 18; 373-85.
Kigenmann, C. H.: Notes from a naturalist’s experiences in Guiana.— XXIII; 22; 859-70.
Rodway, J.: The forest problem in British Guiana.—V1; 34; 211-16; 283-94.
Furlong, C. W.: Through the heart of the Surinam Jungle-——XVI; 128: 327-39.
PARAGUAY.
Paraguay.—VII; 31; 294-306.
Paraguay in prospect.—VII; 36; 785-802.
Grubb, W. B.: An unknown people in an unknown land.—VI1; 36; 532-44.
Fitzhugh, E.: Paraguay and the Paraguayans.—X1LI; Jan., 1913.
Paraguay.—VII; 33; 356-76. ;
Bibliography of Paraguay.— House Document, Vol. 65, No. 145; 58th Cong. 3rd Session; Serial No. 4844.
Hale, A.: Yerba Mate: Paraguayan tea.—VII; 32; 469-87.
Barrett: Argentina, Uruguay, and Paraguay.—X1X; 66; 88-96.
PERU.
Howland, S. S.: Cuzco, the sacred city of the Jucos.—XX XI; 51; 205-19.
Peru.—VII; 33; 454-77.
Gregory, H. E.: A geographical sketch of Titicaca, the island of the sun.— VI; 45; 561-575.
Brandon, E. E.: Technical schools of Lima, Peru.—VII; 33; 942-46.
The ancient ruins of Tiahuanacu.—VIT; 37; 513-32.
Todd, M. L.: Ancient temples and cities of the new world.—VII; 31; 967-77.
Todd, M. L.: The Cordillera of Peru.—XIV; 51; 119-23.
Peru.— VII; 31; 307-24.
Commerce of Peru for 1911.—VII; 36; 113-122.
Peixotto: Down the west coast of Lima.—X X XI; 53; 421-88.
Commerce of Peru for 1912.—VII; 38; 265-273.
Beasley, W.: Remarkable civilization of the ancient Incas.— XL]; Jan., 1913.
Peixotto, E.: The land of the Incas.—X XX]; 53; 699-713.
Guiness, G.: Descendants of the Incas.—XLI; Jan., 1913
Barrett: The western republics of South America.—XIX; 66; 515-23.
Bowman, I.: Buried walls at Cuzco and its relation to the question of a pre- Inea race.—II; 184; 497-509.
Bingham, H.: Prehistoric human remains, investigation of, found near Cuzco.—II; 186; 1-5.
Vernier, W.: Chan-Chan, the ruined Chimu eapital.—V II; 38; 348-359.
Wilson, L. L. W.: Climate and man in Peru.—VILI; 8; 79-97.
Adams, H. C.: Cuzco, America’s ancient meeea.—X XIII; 19; 669-94.
Hardy, O.: Cuzeo and Apurimac.—VI; 46; 500-12.
Bingham, H.: In the wonder land of Peru.—X XIII; 24; 386-573; 23; 417-23.
Hall, F. M.: Ancient and modern Peru.—X XXIV; Nov., 1913, p. 303.
Adams, H. C.: Along the old Inca highway.—X XIII; 19; 231-50.
Bailey, S.: A new Peruvian route to the plains of the Amazon.—XXIII; 17; 332-49.
The new boundary between Bolivia and Peru.—V1; 42; 485-437.
Post, C. J.: Across South America.—X; 83; 41-53.
Markham, Sir C. R.: The land of the Incas.—XV; 36; 381-401.
URUGUAY. Uruguay.—VII; 33; 167-184. Uruguay.—VII; 31; 357-72.
201
Albes, K.: The republic east of the Uruguay and its fine capital, Monti- video.—VI]; 35; 1142-58.
Brandon, HK. E.: University instruction in Uruguay.—VII; 34; 512-19.
Barrett: Argentina, Uruguay, and Paraguay.—XIX; 66; 88-96.
VENEZUELA.
Venezuela.—VI]; 33; 185-202.
Manning, J. A.: La Guaira, the picturesque.—VI1; 31; 642-50.
Venezuela.—VII; 31; 373-89.
Brandon, HK. E.: Education in Venezuela.—VII; 34; 759-66.
Totten, R. J.: Lake and city of Marocailo.—VII; 34; 361-75.
Austin, J. B.: Venezuela’s territorial claims.—VIIT; 2; 2-20.
Lyle, EK. P.: Venezuela and the problems it presents.—X XXVIII; 2; 6943-54.
Notes on Venezuela.—X XIII; 14; 17-21.
Handbook of Venezuela.—House Doe., V. 65; 58th Cong., 3rd Session; Serial No. 4844.
Furlong, C. W.: Across the Venezuela Llanos.—X VI; 128; 813-25.
Barrett: The northern republics of South America.—XIX; 66; 789-96.
Lafferts, W.: The cattle industry of the Llanos.—V1; 45; 180-87.
CENTRAL AMERICA.
Notes on Central America.—X XII]; 18; 272-80.
Seffer, H. O.: Isthmus of Tehuantepee.—X XIII; 21; 991-1002.
Foster, J. W.: The Latin-American constitution and revolution.—X XII]; 12; 169-176.
Showalter, W. J.: Countries of the Caribbean.—X XIII; 24; 227-49.
Map of Central America.—X XIII; 24; 256.
Costa Rica.
General sketch.—VIT; 31; 116-134.
Brandon, H. H.: Education in Costa Rica.—VII; 35; 45-54.
General sketch.—VIJ; 33; 81-99.
Methods of obtaining salt in Costa Rica.—X XIII; 19; 28-35.
Rittier, H.: Costa Rica, Vulean’s smithy (A treatment of volcanoes).— XXITI; 21; 494-525.
202
GUATEMALA.
Tisdell, T.: Guatemala, the country of the future-—X XIII; 21; 596-624.
Sands, W. F.: Prehistoric ruins of Guatemala.—X XIII; 24; 325-61.
Risen, G.: Notes during a journey in Guatemala (includes climate).—VI; 1903; 231-252.
General sketch, 1910.—VII; 31; 189-202.
Commerce of Guatemala.—VII; 35; 404-17.
Brandon, EK. E.: Education in Guatemala.—VIT; 35; 535-41.
General sketch, 1910.—VII; 33; 268-80.
Cutter, V. M.: Ancient temples and cities of the new world.—VII; 32; 40- 55.
Tisdell, E. T.: Lakes of Gautemala.—VII; 31; 651-63.
HonpDvuRAS.
Commerce of Honduras for 1911.—VII; 36; 101-106.
Avery, M. L.: British Honduras.—V1]; 32; 331-333.
General sketch, 1910.—VII, 33; 298-315.
General sketch, 1910.—VII; 31; 221-36.
MacClintock, L.: Resources and industries of Honduras.—VIIJ; 11; 224- 39.
MacClintock, L.: Honduras.—VIII; 10; 177-84.
Handbook of Honduras.—House Doc. No. 145, Vol. 66; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4845.
NICARAGUA.
Commerce of Nicaragua.—VIJ; 36; 107-112.
Davis, A. P.: The water supply for the Nicaragua canal.—XXIII; 11; 363-6.
The Nicaragua Canal (map and discussion of proposed route).—XXIII; 12; 28-32.
Davis, A. P.: Location of the boundary between Nicaragua and Costa Rica.— XXIII; 12; 22-28.
Turbulent Nicaragua.—X XIII; 20; 1103-1117.
General sketch, 1910.—VII; 33; 316-34.
General sketch.—VII; 31; 267-78.
Nicaragua commerce for 1912.—VIT; 38; 424.
PANAMA.
Page, J.: The sailing ship and the Panama Canal X XIII; 15; 167-176.
Pittier, H.: Little known parts of Panama.—X XII1; 23; 627-62.
Burr, W. H.: The Republic of Panama.—X XIII; 15; 57-74.
Panama Canal: Its construction and its effect on commerce.—VI; 45; 241-254.
Goethals, G. W.: The Panama Canal.—X XII]; 20; 334-56.
Johnson, E. R.: Comparison of distances by the Isthmian Canal and other routes.—VI; 35; 163-17€.
Kirkaldy, A. W.: Some of the economic effects of the Panama Canal.— XXXII; 29; 585-97.
Harrison: The Panama Canal in construction. (Good pictures.)—XX XI: 54; 20-37.
Vose, E. N.: How Panama will alter trade-—XX XVIII; 24; 418.
General sketch, 1910.—VII; 33; 335-355.
Latone, J.: The Panama Canal and Latin America.—II]; 54; 84-91.
Downie, E. M.: A visit to the Panama Canal and Cuba.—X X XI; 30; 404- 12:
Collins: Agricultural development in Panama.—VII; 37; 469-77.
Lindsay, F.: The timber lands of Panama.—VII; 36; 499-510.
General sketch, 1910.—VIJ; 31; 279-93.
Hill, D. J.: Supremacy in the Panama Canal.—X XVIII; 49; 722-25.
Davis, A. P.: The Isthmian Canal——VI; 34; 132-138.
Morison, G. S.: The Panama Canal.—V1; 35; 24-48.
Haeselbarth, A. C.: Culebra Island.—VI; 35; 125-130.
Chester, C. M.: The Panama Canal.—X XII]; 16; 445-67.
Notes on Panama and Colombia.—X XIII; 14; 458-67.
Showalter, W. J.: Panama Canal.—X XIII; 23; 195-205.
Hazlett, D. M.: Farming on the Isthmus of Panama.—X XIII; 17; 229-36.
Weir, H. C.: The romance of Panama.—X LI; October, 1912.
Showalter, W. J.: Battling with the Panama slides—X XIII; 25; 133-55.
Cornish, V.: Condition and prospects of the Panama Canal.—XV; 44; 189-203.
Sibert, W. L.: The Panama Canal.—X XII]; 25; 153-183.
Map of Panama Canal (‘‘Bird’s-eye view’’)—X XIII; 23; 104.
Johnson, E. R.: What the canal will accomplish X XX]; 54; 37-43.
204
Balboa and the Panama celebration.—VII; 38; 477-88.
Panama’s new railway.—VII; 38; 683.
Commerce of Panama for 1912.—VIT; 38; 118.
Going through the Panama Canal.—X XVIII; 49; 718-21.
The attitude of the United States towards an interoceanic canal— XX XIX; 9; 419.
Nelson, L.: The practical side of the Panama Canal.—X X XVI]; 20; 670-76.
NORTH AMERICA. (Except the United States.)
Dryer, C. R.: The North America of today and tomorrow and Indiana’s place in it.—Proceedings Indiana Academy of Science; 1911.
Huntington, E.: The fluctuating climate of North America—XV; 40; 264- 80; 392-94.
Nansen, F.: Norsemen in America.—XV; 38; 557-80.
Unstead, J. F.: The climatic limits of wheat cultivation, with special refer- ence to North America.—XV; 39; 347-366; 422-46.
Macdougal, D. T.: North American deserts.—XV; 39; 105-123.
Hubbard: Influence of precious metals in America.—VI; 44; 97-112.
Hahn, W. L.: The future of North American fauna.—X XVI; 83; 169-77.
Penck, A.: North America and Europe: A geographic comparison.—X X XII; 25; 337-46.
Jefferson, M.: The anthropography of North America.—V1; 45; 161-80.
Trotter, S.: The Atlantic forest regions of North America: A study in influences.—X XVI; 75; 370-92.
Commercial America in 1905. Showing commerce, production, transporta- tion, finances, area, and population, of each of the countries of North, South, and Central America and the West Indies.—U. S. Bureau of Census; Bulletin 2 to 4; pages 1 to 117.
Harper, R. M.: The coniferous forests of Eastern North America——X XVI; $5; 338-61.
Marvin, J.: The greater America.—X X XVIII; 28; 22-31.
CANADA.
Bryant, H. G.: A journey to the grand falls of Labrador.—VIII; 1; 33-80. MeFarland, R.: Beyond the heights of land.—VIII; 9; 23-33.
205
Bryant, H. G.: An exploration in S. E.—VPIP* 11; 1-16.
The possibilities of the Hudson Bay country.— X XIII; 18; 209-13.
Wilcox, W. D.: Recent explorations in the Canadian Rockies.—X XIII; 13; 151-69; 185-200.
Wolcott, C. D.: The monarch of the Canadian Rockies.—X XIII; 24; 626-40.
Lant: The Twentieth Century is Canada’s—X XXVIII; 13; 8499-8517.
Russell, I. C.: Geography of the Laurentian: basin.—V1I; 30; 226-54.
Paynd, A. M.: Halifax, Nova Scotia.—X XIV; 35; 356-375.
Weaver, E. P.: What Arcadia owed to. New*Frigland—X XIV; 30; 423-434.
Laurier, W.: The forests of Canada.—X XII1;-17; 504-9.
Forests of Canada.—X XIII; 14; 106-109.
Hughes, James L.: Toronto.—X XIV; 23; 305-322
Stewart, G.: Quebec.—X XIV; 21; 33-51>
Oxley, J. M.: Ottawa, the capital of Canada.—X XIV; 24; 181-200.
Goode, R. U.: The northwestern boundary between the United States and Canada.—VI; 32; 465-470. .
Vreeland, F. R.: Notes on the sources of the Peace River, British Columbia.— VI; 46; 1-24. -’ :
Whitlock, R. H.: A geographical study of Nova Scotia.—V1; 46; 413-19.
Cadell, H. M.: The new city of Prince Rupert—X XXII; 30; 237-50.
MeGrath, P. T.: Canada in 1914.—X XVIII; 49; 594-98.
Smith, C.S.: What will become of Canada?—XIV; 51; 855-65.
Leith, C. K.: Iron ore reserves —X XX; 65; 162-163.
Ibid.—X XXII; 1906; 207-214. 7 ey
Lumsden, H. D.: Canada’s new transcontinental railroad—_X X XI; 40; 73g
The Canadian climate—House Doc., Vol. III, p. 294; 58th Cong., 3rt” Sess.; Serial No. 4890. ‘
Map of Labrador.— XV; 37; 476. (See also 407-20.)
Lant: Hudson Bay Fur Company and the raiders of’ 1670-97. —XVI; iLPee 768-79.
Duncan, N.: The codfishes of Newfoundland. =~ XXXVI: 6: 3617- 3638.
Twenhofel, W. H.: Physiography of Newfoundland.—H];-183; 1-24.
McGrath, P. T.: The first American colony, Newfoundland.—X XIV; 27; 617-632. arama
Willey, D. A.: Newfoundland of today.—X XIV; 29; 462-771.
Cross, A. L.: Newfoundland.—X XXII; 22; 147-158.
_%
=
206
Semple, E. C.: The influence of geographic environment on the Lower St. Lawrence.—V1I; 36; 449-466.
Burpee, L. J.: How Canada is solving the transportation problem.—X XVI; 67; 455-464.
The Hudson Bay route; a new outlet for Canadian wheat.—XX XIX; 20; 438-452.
White, A. S.: Newfoundland: <A study in regional geography.—X XXII; 30; 1135-28.
The Georgian Bay ship canal.—X X XII; 26; 25-30.
Bell, R.: The Hudson Bay route to Europe.—X X XII; 26; 67-77.
Parkin, Dr. G. R.: The railway development of Canada.—X XXII; 25; 225-250.
Stupart: The climate of Canada.—X X XI]; 14; 73-80.
Wadsworth, M. H.: The mineral wealth of Canada.—X XIX; 37; 839-841.
Walcote, C. D.: A geologist’s paradise.—X XII]; 22; 509-37.
Montgomery, R. H.: Our industrial invasion of Canada.—X XXVIII; 5; 2978-2998.
The new administration in Canada.—X X XIX; 6; 151-168.
Osborne, J. B.: Commercial relations of the United States with Canada. III; 32; 330-340.
Curwood, J. O.: Effect of American invasion.—X XXVIII; 10; 6607-13.
Why Canada rejected reciprocity.— X X XIX; 20; 173-187.
Skelton, O. and others: Canada and reciprocity.— X LITT; 19; 550; 411; 527; 513; 542; 726.
Trade combinations in Canada.— XLII]; 14; 427.
Hanbury, D. T.: Through the barren ground of N. E. Canada and the Arctic coast.—XV; 22; 178-191.
Grenfell, Sir T.: A land of eternal warring —X XIII; 21; 665-690.
Hubbard, M. B.: Labrador, my explorations in unknown.—XVI; 112; $13- 823.
Through trackless Labrador.—X X XII; 28; 265-268.
MacFairsh, N.: East and West in Canada.—X X XVI; 179; 597-603.
White, A.: The Dominion of Canada: A study in regional geography.— XXXIT; 29; 524-548; 566-80.
Grant, W. L.: Geographical conditions affecting the development of Canada. —XV; 38; 362-381.
Tupper: The economic development of Canada.— XXXII; 11; 1-16.
Bell: The geographical distribution of forest trees In Canada.—X XXII: 13; 281-295.
Across the Canadian border.—X X XVIII; 4; 2394-2412.
Henshaw, Mrs.: A new Alpine area in British Columbia.—X XXII; 30; 128-32. :
Ruddick, J. H.: Dairying and fruit-growing industries in Canada.—X XT; 11; 241-245.
Honeyman, H. A.: Lumbering industry of Canada.—X XI; 11; 246-250.
Dresser, J. H.: Clay belt of Northern Ontario and Quebec.—X XI; 11; 250-255.
Brittain: Geographical infiuences in the location of leading Canadian cities.— XXI; 11; 256-260.
Green: Canadian commerce.—X XI; 11; 260-262.
Cooke, H. C.: The mineral industries of Canada.—X XI; 11; 262-265.
O’Neil: Canadian railway development.—X XI; 11; 265-267.
Uglow: Canadian fisheries —X XI; 11; 267-269.
Allan: Resources and development of British Columbia.—X XI; 11; 269- 274.
The Canadian Boundary.—X XII]; 14; 85-91.
Donald, W. J. A.: The growth and distribution of Canadian population.— XLIIT; 21; 296-312.
Butman, C. H.: The pinnacle of the Canadian Alps.—X XX; 78; 183-85.
Longstaff, Dr. T. G.: Across the Purcell range of British Columbia.—XV; 37; 589-600.
Palmer, H.: Tramp across the glaciers ‘and snowfields of British Columbia.— XXIII; 21; 457-487.
Palmer, H.: Explorations about Mt. Sir Sanford, British Columbia.— XV; 37; 170-179.
Talbot, F. A.: Economic prospects of new British Columbia.—VI; 44; 167- 183.
Knappen, T. M.: Winning the Canadian West—XXXVIII; 10; 6595- 6606.
Ogg, F. A.: Vast undeveloped regions— XX XVIII; 12; 8078-8082.
The colonization of Western Canada.—X X XI]; 27; 196-200.
Kast and West in Canada.—X X XVJ; 179; 597-603.
Bishop: Development of wheat production in Canada.—VI; 44; 10-16.
D., W. M.: Tides in the Bay of Fundy— X XIII; 16; 71-76. _
208
Mexico.
Lumholtz, C.: The Sonora Desert.—XV; 40; 503-518.
Darton, N. H.: Mexico, the treasure house of the world.—X XIII; 18; 493- 519.
Collins & Doyle: Notes on South Mexico.—X XIII; 22; 301-21.
Map of Mexico.—X XIII; 22; 410-11.
Birkinbine, J.: Our neighbor, Mexico.—X XIII; 22; 475-509.
Foster: The new Mexico.—X XIII; 13; 1-24.
Huntington, E.: The shifting of climatic zones as illustrated in Mexico.— VI; 45; 1-12; 107-116.
Navarro: Mexico of today.—X XIII; 12; 152-157; 176-179; 235-238.
Barrett, J.: A general sketch —VII; 1911.
Foster, J. W.: The new Mexico.—X XIII; 13; 1-25.
Mexico: a geographical sketch, 1910.— VII; 31; 237-266.
Brandon, E. E.: University education in Mexico.—VI1; 36; 48-56.
Mexico:—a general sketch, 1910.-—VII; 33; 119-149.
Seffer, P. O.: Agriculture possibilities in tropical Mexico.—X XITJ; 21; 1021-40.
Thompson, E. H.: Henequen (The Yucatan Fiber) —X XIII; 14; 150-158.
Rubber plantations in Mexico and Central America XXIII; 14; 409-14.
Janvier, T. A.: A little Mexican town.— XVI; 113; 500-513.
Paul, G. F.: Vera Cruz, past and present X XIV; 31; 722-727.
Zimmerman, J.: Hewers of stone.—X XIII; 21; 1002-1020.
Paul, G. F.: Ruins of Mitla, Mexico.—X XIV; 33; 73-79.
Paul, G. F.: The Mexican hacienda; its place and people-—X XIV; 30; 1982=96.
Galloway, A. C.: An interesting visit to the ancient pyramids of San Juan Teotihuagan.—X XIII; 21; 1041-50.
A winter expedition in Southern Mexico.— X XIII; 15; 341-356.
Some Mexican transportation scenes ——X XIII; 21; 985-91.
The oil treasure of Mexico — XXIII; 19; 803-5.
Lyle, E. P.: Mexico at high tide —XXXVIII; 14; 9179-9196.
Lumholtz, C.: The Huichol Indians of Mexico.—VI; 35; 79-93.
Scenes in the byways of Southern Mexico.—X XIII; 25; 359-64.
Lyle, E. P.: The American influence in Mexico — XX XVIII; 6; 3843-60.
Nelson, E. W.: A day’s work of a naturalist —X XXVIII; 1; 372-380.
209
Copan, the mother of the Mayas.—VII; 32; 863-879.
Kirkwood, J. E.: A Mexican hacienda.—X XIII; 25; 563-584.
Kirkwood, J. E.: Desert scenes in Zacatecas.—X XVI; 75; 485-51.
Howarth, O. H.: The Cordillera of Mexico and its inhabitants—X XXII; 16; 342-352.
Unknown Mexico.—X XXII; 19; 291-297.
Cadell, H. M.: Some old Mexican voleanoes.—X XXII; 23; 281-312.
The voleanoes of Mexico.—X X XI]; 23: 25-28. ~
The greatest voleanoes of Mexico —X XIII; 21: 741-760.
Dandberg, H. O.: Ancient temples and cities of the new world: Palenque.— VII; 34; 345-360.
Ayme, L. H.: Ancient temples and ruins of the new world: Mitla.—VII;
33; 548-567.
Thompson, E. H.: The home of a forgotten race: Mysterious Chicken Itza, in Yucatan, Mexico.—X XIII; 25; 585-648.
Palmer, F.: Mexico.—XIII; 30; 806-820.
Mason, A. B.: Mexico and her people.—II1; 54; 186-190.
Huntington, E.: The mystery of the Yucatan ruins—XVI; 128; 755-66.
Lloyd: The story of Guayule.—VII; 34; 177-195. .
Laut, A. C.: Taos, an ancinet American capitol—Travel; February and March, 1913.
Showalter, W. J.: Mexico and Mexicans.
Romero. M.: Mexico.—Jr. Am. Geog. Soc.; 28; 327.
Handbook of Mexico.—House Doc. No. 145, Vol. 66; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4845.
Physical Geography of Mexico.—House Doce., Vol. 111, p. 765; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4890.
Dunn, H. H.: How the Aztecs fought.—Illustrated World and Recreation; Jan., 1913.
Huntington, E.: The peninsula of Yucatan.—VI; 44; 801-822.
Colf, L. J.: The caverns and peoples of Northern Yucatan— VI; 42; 321.
Geology and topography of Mexico.—Am. Geologist; 8; 133-44.
Bain: A sketch of the geology of Mexico— XXII; 5; 384-90.
Wilson: Topography of Mexico.—Jr. Am. Geog. Soe.; 29; 249-260.
5084—14
210
EUROPE.
Geikie, Jas.: The architecture and origin of the Alps—XXXII; 27; 393- 417.
Garwood, E. J.: Features of Alpine scenery due to glacial protection. XV; 36; 310-39.
Geikie, J.: The Alps during the glacial period.—V1; 42; 192-205.
Fischer, T.: The Mediterranean peoples.—X X XIII; 1907; 497-521.
Peddie, H. J.: The development of the inland waterways of Central Europe. —X XXII; 26; 293-298.
Plant distribution in Europe and its relation to the glacial period —X XXII; 19; 302-311.
Myers, J. L.: The Alpine races in Europe.—XYV; 28; 537-560.
Price, H. C.: How European agriculture is financed —X XVI; 82; 252-263.
European grain trade.—Bull. 69, U. S. Dept. of Ag., Bureau of Statistics.
Cereal production in Europe——Bull. 68, U. S. Dept. of Ag., Bureau of Statistics.
Penck, A.: The valleys and lakes of the Alps——House Doce., Serial No. 4890.
Bray, F. C.: The classic Mediterranean basin.—XI1; 72; 3-12.
Brooks, S.: The new Europe-—XXYV; 200; 663-667.
Austin, O. P.: The remarkable growth of Europe during forty years of peace.—X XIII; 26; 272-275.
Statistics of populations, armies and navies of Europe—XXIII; 26; 191- 193.
War-words of Europe and their meaning.—Literary Digest; March 20, 1915.
AUSTRIA-HUNGARY.
Townley, Fullman C.: Magyar origins —XX XVI; 176; 52-60.
The ancient geography of Galacia.—X X XII; 22; 205-208.
Koch, F. J.: In quaint, curious Croatia —— XXIII; 19; 809-832.
Richardson, Ralph: The ethnology of Austria-Hungary —XXXII; 22; 1-9.
Iddings, D. W. & A. S.: The land of contrast: Austria-Hungary.—X XIII; 23; 1188-1219.
Conditions of agriculture in Bohemia.—XLIII; 8; 491.
Townley, F. C.: Hungary: A land of shepherd kings —XXIII; 26; 311-93.
BALKANS AND TURKEY.
Hogarth, D. C.: The Balkan peninsula.—XV; 41; 324-340.
Moore, F.: The changing map in the Balkans.—X XIII; 24; 199-227.
Moore, F.: Rumania and her ambitions.—X XIII; 24; 1057-1086.
Kastern Turkey in Asia and Armenia.—X X XJ1; 12; 225-241.
Grosvenor, H. A.: Constantinople-—XLII; 90; 673-685.
Richardson, R.: New railway projects in the Balkan peninsula.—X X XII; 24; 254-259.
Map of Bulgaria, Servia, and Macedonia.—X XIII; August, 1914; p. 1153.
Territorial changes in the Balkans.—X XJ; 12; 156.
Warner, A. H.: A country where going to America is an industry.—X XII]; 20; 1063-1103.
Damon, T. J.: Albanians.—X XIII; 23; 1090-1103.
Bourchier, J. D.: The rise of Bulgaria. X XIII; 23; 1105-1118.
Villari, L.: Races and religions of Macedonia.—X XIII; 23; 1118-32. Bryce, J.: Two possible solutions for the eastern problem.—X XIII; 23; 1149- 1158.
Notes on Rumania.—X XIII; 23; 1219-25.
Notes on Macedonia.—X XIII; 19; 799-802.
Servia and Montenegro.—X XIII; 19; 774-90.
Coffin, M. C.: When east meets west.—X XIII; 19; 309-44.
Low, D. H.: Kingdom of Serbia: Her people and her history.—X X XI]; 31; 303-15.
MeKenzie, K.: East of the Adriatie-—X XIII; 23; 1159-1188.
Bulgaria, the peasant state—X XIII; 19; 760-773.
Hitchens, R.: Skirting the Balkan peninsula.—X; 85; 643-657; 884-898.
Bosnia-Herzegovina.—X X XII; 25; 71-84.
Bray, F. C.: Before and after the Balkan war—XI; 72; 163-73.
Moore, F.: The changing map in the Balkans.—X XIII; 24; 199-226.
Newbigin, M. I.: The Balkan peninsula: Its peoples and its problems.— XXXII; 31; 281-303.
Joerg, W. L. J.: The new boundaries of the Balkan states and their sig- nificance.—V1; 45; 819-830.
Dominian, L.: The Balkan peninsula—V1; 45; 576-84.
Pears, Sir E.: Grass never grows where the Turkish hoof has trod.—X XIII; 23; 1132-49.
Curtis, W. E.: The great Turk and his lost provinces—X XIII; 14; 45-61.
Chester, C. M.: The young Turk.—X XIII; 23; 43-89.
Dominian, L.: Geographical influences in the determination of spheres of foreign interests in Asiatic Turkey.—VIII; 12; 165-77.
Bray, F. C.: Constantinople: Imagination and fact.—XI; 72; 595-606.
Dwight, H. G.: Life in Constantinople-—X XIII; 26; 521-546.
Constantinople—V III; 11; 45-50.
Symons, A.: Constantinople: An impression—XVI; 106; 863-570.
BELGIUM.
George, W. L.: Problems of modern Belgium.—X X XVI; 177; 597-606,
Gregmore, H.: Antwerp, the hub of Europe-—XXIV; 35; 67-73.
Showalter, W. J.: Belgium, the inrocent bystander——XXIII; 26; 223- 265.
Antwerp, the water side of —X X XI; 50; 257
DENMARK. Flux, A. W.: Denmark and its aged poor—X X XIX; 7; 454-448. Webhrwein, G. S.: The message of Denmark—X XI]; 12; 58-60. Horvgaard, W.: How planting trees saved Jutland: Xcxouv LL» 20; 12967-69.
FRANCE. Greely, A. W.: The france of today—X XIII; 26; 193-223. Economic life of France -—X XVI; 58; 287-95.
Welch, D.: Marseilles—XVI; ide jee
Lanson, G.: France of today.—X XV; 195; 456-475
Bosson, Mrs. Geo. C., Jr.: Notes on oe tes ee sean? 21; 775-782. Hyde, W. W.: Ascent of Mt. Blane-——X XIII; 24; 861-942.
Life in French upland region —X X X11; 28; 532-537.
Housing of the working classes in France —X X XIX; 8; 233-254. Bracq, J. C.: The colonial expansion of France-——X XIII; 11; 225-259. O’Laughlin, J. C.: Industrial life in France-—XXXVIII; 9; 5969-5972. Arnold: The population of France-——X XIX; 30; 171.
Agricultural education in France-—XL; 1900; 115 Norman, Sir H.: The Alpine Road of France. _XXXI; 55; 137-59. The city of the Seine-—X1I; 72; 75.
Gallienne, R. L.: Avignon, legendary and real——XVI; 129; 277-284.
GERMANY.
The German nation XXIII; 26; 275-311.
Lazenby, W. R.: Forests and forestry of Gremany,— X XVI; 83; 590-98.
Muensterburg, Hugo: Germans at school X XVI]; 79; 602-614.
Clapp, E. J.: Rhine and Mississippi river terminals —XX XIX; 19; 392-7.
The industrial capacity of the German.—XLIII; 13; 462.
Geiser, K. F.: Forestry results in Germany.—X XXVIII; 13; 8642-50.
Bernstorff, Count J. H. Von: The foundation of the German Empire.— XX XV; 3; 261-272.
The story of the Bagdad railway—Nineteenth Century Magazine; 75; ti: (2p ;
Germany’s world-war for trade—Literary Digest, July 11, 1914; p. 57.
Agricultural imports of Germany.—Department of Agriculture; Div. of Foreign Markets; Bulletin No. 30.
Traffic policy of Germany.—X X XIX; 1; 10-34.
Colonial policy of the Germans.—X X XIX; 11; 57-82.
Spencer, C. E.: Waterways—X XI]; 12; 1-14.
Haldane, Lord: Great Britain and Germany.—XI1X; 71; 1382-1386.
Buxton, B. H.: A corner of old Wurttemburg——X XII]; 22; 931-47.
Campbell, J. A.: In a Prussian school— XIX; 68; 810-813.
Rhone—Saone Valley —X XI; 12; 80.
Geiser, K. F.: Peasant life in the Black Forest.—X XIII; 19; 635-49.
The industrial progress of Germany.—X X XIX; 14; 6-17; 134-154.
Lotz, W.: The present significance of German inland waterways.—lIII; 31; 246-261.
German school system in Germany.—House Doc., No. 243, V. 57; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4836.
Rise and development of German colonial possessions.—House Doe., Vol. III; p. 823; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4890.
Howe, F. C.: City building in Germany.—X XX]; 47; 601.
Forestry in all lands.—U. 8S. Forest Service; Cireular 140.
Making rivers work.—XIII; 20; 443-53.
Davis, W. M.: The Rhine gorge and the Bosphorus.—X XJ; 11; 207-15.
GREECE.
Campbell, O. D.: From Messina to Tyndris.—X XIV; 40; 413-421.
Zaborowski, S.: Ancient Greece and its slave population —X XXIII; 1912; 597-608.
Young, C. H.: Peloponnesian journeys.—V1I; 32; 151-157.
Moses, G. H.: Greece and Montenegro.—X XIII; 24; 281-310.
Wace, A. J. B. & Thompson, M. S.: The distribution of early civilization in Northern Greece.— XV; 37; 631-642.
Hall, E.: Archaeological research in Greece —XIX; 69; 1143-48.
Richardson, R.: Athens: Notes on a recent visit—X XXII; 23; 422427.
Chamberlayne, L. R.: A visit to Euboea.—XI; 72; 151-2.
Corinth and her citizens —XI; 72; 635.
Dingelstedt, V.: The Greeks and Hellenism.—X XXII; 30; 412-27.
Ho.buanpD.
Matthes, G. H.: The dikes of Holland—X XIII; 12; 219-235.
Gore, Jas. H.: Holland as seen from a Dutch window.— XXIII; 19; 619- 634.
Smith, H. M.: A north Holland cheese market—X XIII; 21; 1051-66.
Agricultural imports of Holland—U. S. Department of Agricultural; Bureau of Statistics, Bull. 72.
Griffis, Wm. E.: The heaths and hollows of Holland——VI; 32; 308-21.
Tray.
Mayer, A. E.: Gems of the Italian lakes —X XIII; 24; 943-956;
Carr, J. F.: The Italian in the United States XX XVIII; 8; 5593-5404. Wright, C. W.: The world’s most cruel earthquake—X XIII; 20; 373-396. Van Vorst, M.: Naples — XVI; 121; 489-504.
Symons, A.: Verona.—XVI; 108; 876-881.
Cortesi, S.: The eampanile of Venice-—X1X; 68; 922-927.
Willis, V. B.: The roads that lead to Rome.—XI; 71; 191-192.
Seenes in Italy.— XXIII; 21; 321-33.
Norway. Howe, J. L.: Notes on Norwegian industry —X XVI; 80; 36-50. Brigham, A. P.: A Norwegian landslip.—VIII; 4; 292-296.
2M
On
Barrett, R. L.: The Sundal drainage system in central Norway.—VI; 32: 199-219.
Brigham, A. P.: The fiords of Norway.—V1; 38; 337-348.
A chapter on Norway.—X XIV; 22; 233-243.
A new industrial nation.—X XI; 12; 24-24; Sept., 1913.
A comparison of Norway and Sweden.—X XIII; 16; 429-432.
Jefferson, N.: Man in West Norway.—X XI; 7; 86-96.
PORTUGAL.
Crawfurd, Oswald: The greatness of little Portugal—xX XIII; 21; 867-894.
RUSSIA.
Greely, A. W.: The land of promise.—X XIII; 23; 1078-90.
Sarolea, C.: Geographical foundations of Russian politics——XX XII; 22; 194-205.
Mockinder: The geographical pivot of history — XV; 23; 421-444.
Hovey, EH. O.: Southern Russian and the Caucasian Mountains.—V1; 36; 327-341.
Grosvenor, G. H.: Young Russia: The land of unlimited possibilities — XXIII; 26; 423-521.
Hourwich, I. A.: Russia as seen in its farmers. X X XVIII; 13; 8679-8686.
Dingelstedt, V.: The riviera of Russia.—X X XII; 20; 285-306.
Dingelstedt, V.: A little-known Russian people; the Setukesed on Hsths of Pskov.—X X XII; 22; 490-493.
Curtis, Wm. H.: The revolution in Russia.—X XIII; 18; 302-17.
Grosvenor, EH. A.: Evolution of the Russian government.—X XIII; 16; 309- 300.
Nansen, F.: Sea route to Siberia.—XV; 43; 481-98.
The black republic—X XIII; 18; 334-48.
Smith, C. H.: Russia.— XXIV; 32; 114-123.
Packard, L. O.: Russia, her expansion and struggle for open ports.—X X1; 12; 33-39.
Windt, H. D.: Through Siberia to Bering Strait— XVI; 105; 821-831.
Korff, A.: Where women vote.—X XIII; 21; 487-494.
The Russian Tibet expedition.— XV; 19; 576-98.
O’ Laughlin, J. C.: Industrial life in Russia.—X XXVIII; 4915-18.
216
Gibbon, P.: The church’s blight on Russia.-—X XXVIII; 10; 6243-54.
Markov, E.: The sea of Aral.— XV; 38; 515-519.
The territory of Anadyr.—V1; 32; 260-263.
Grosvenor: Siberia.—X XIII; 12; 317-24.
Hill, E. J.: A trip through Siberia. —X XIII; 13; 37-55.
Smith, C. E.: Russia.—X XIII; 16; 55-63.
Hourwich, I. A.: The crisis of Russian agriculture-—X X XIX; 1; 411-33.
Hornburg, F.: Village towns and cities of Russia. —X XI; 10; 13-15.
Wright, H. O. S.: Russian village life—XX XVI; 173; 79-85.
Grosvenor, Edw. A.: The growth of Russia.—X XIII; 11; 169-186.
Chapin, Wm.: Glimpses of the Russian empire.—X XIII; 23; 1043-78.
Greely, A. W.: Russia in recent literature—X XIII; 16; 564-8.
Hsdlicka, A.: Recent explorations in Siberia.—X XIX; 37; 13-14.
Siberia: A review.—X X XII; 21; 652-659.
Dingelstedt, V.: The mussulman subjects of Russia.—X XXII; 19; 4-20.
Mumford, J. K.: Conquest of Asia.—XX XVIII; 2; 704-719.
Simpson, J. Y.: The new Siberia.—X X XII; 16; 17-29.
Wheat growing in Russia.—XLIIT; 12; 256.
Dingelstedt, V.: Cossacks and Cossackdom.—X X XII; 23; 239-261.
Barnaby, C. W.: Russian absorption of Asia .— XX XVIII; 7; 4118-25.
Brudno, E. S.: The emigrant Jews at home-—XX XVIII; 7; 4471-4479.
Makaroff, Vice-Admiral: The yermak ice breaker.—XV; 15; 32-46.
Hourwich, I. A.: Situation in Finland.—XLIII; 11; 290-99.
Scott, Leroy: Russia as seen in its workingmen.—X XXVIII; 13; 8557- 8567.
Whelpley, D. W.: The rise of Russia.— XIX; 79; 407-8.
Huntingdon, E.: Life in the great desert —XIII; 20; 749-61.
Mavor, J.: The economic history of Russia.—X X XII; 30; 518-27.
Richardson, R.: Modern Russia.—X X XII; 30; 624-31.
SPAIN.
Riggs, A. S.: The commerce of Spain.—X; 81; 257-270.
Howells, W. D.: First days in Seville-—XVI; 126; 568-581.
A little-known mountain pass in the Pyrenees.— XX XI1; 22; 545-546. Clark, C. U.: Romantic Spain.—X XIII; 21; 187-215.
Guijarro, L. G.: Spain since 1898.—X X XIX; 18; 6-20.
Guijarro, L. G.: The religious question in Spain —— XX XIX; 19; 226-34.
Super, C. W.: The Spaniard and his peninsula— XX XVI; 175; 418-434.
Jones, C. L.: Madrid: Its government and municipal services.—III; 27; 120-131.
Ardzrooni, L.: Commerce and industry in Spain during ancient and mediaeval times.—X LIT; 21; 432-53.
SWEDEN.
Andrews, M. C.: Sweden vally ice mine and its explanation— X XVI; 82; 280-288.
Winslow, E. D.: The Lapps of Sweden.—V]; 32; 430-431.
Hitcheock, F. H.: Our trade with Scandinavia, 1890-1900.—U. S. Dept. of Ag.; Bull. No. 22.
SWITZERLAND.
A study of a Swiss valley —X X XII; 22; 648-653.
Newbigin, M.I.: The Swiss Valais: A study in regional geography. —_ X X XII; 23; 169-192; 225-239.
Murray, L.: In Valais (Switzerland).—X XIII; 21; 249-69.
Avebury, Lord: The scenery of Switzerland —X X XII; 25; 1-12.
Avebury, Lord: The scenery of Switzerland.—X X XII; 24; 617-627.
Stoddard, F. W.: Winter sports in Switzerland and Tyrol.—XIX; 72; 559-63.
Dingelstedt, V: The republic and canton of Geneva.—X XXII; 24; 225- 238; 281-291.
The fauna of Switzerland in relation to the glacial period —XXXII; 18; 236-243.
The Swiss banking law.—X LIII; 18; 309.
Henry, O. H.: The problem of sick to accident insurances in Switzerland.— XXXIX; 19; 235-54.
Dingelstedt, V.: The Swiss abroad —X XXII; 25; 126-37.
Transfigured Switzerland.—XI; 72; 140.
Seenes in Switzerland.—X XIII; 21; 249-69.
Howe: The white coal of Switzerland —Outlook; 94; 151-48.
218
Unitep KInGpoM
Usher, R. G.: England: The oldest nation of Europe.—X XIII; 26; 393-423.
Forbes, U. A.: The inland waterways of Great Britain.—III; 31; 228-245.
Smith, Dr. W. G.: The origin and development of heather moorland.— XXXII; 18; 587-597.
Cunningham, W.: Cambridgeshire rivers.—XV; 35; 700-705.
Mill, H. R.: A fragment of the geography of England.—xXV; 15; 205-27; 353-78.
Moss, C. E.: Peat moors of the Pennines, their age, origin, and use.— XV; 23; 660-71.
Grierson, R.: Ireland before the Union.—XX XVI; 179; 666-75.
Crawford, O. G. S.: The distribution of early bronze age settlements in Britain. XV; 40; 184-203.
Shippard, T.: Changes on the east coast of England within the historical period.— XV; 34; 500-514.
Whelpley, J. D.: Commercial strength of Great Britain.—X; 82; 159-174.
Yeats, J. S.: Ireland to be saved by intellect —XIX; 72; 191-94.
Knowles, Harry: Bristol and the land of Pokanoket.—X XIV; 35; 609-628.
Bridgman, S. E.: Northampton. X XIV; 21; 581-604.
Holden, S. C.: Old Boston in England.—X XIV; 21; 387-406.
Watt: Climate of British Isles —X X XII; 24; 169-187.
MacManus, S.: A new Ireland —X XXVIII; 8; 5279-5286.
Johnson, C.: Life on the Irish boglands —X XIV; 24; 259-268.
Mill, H. R.: England and Wales viewed geographically —XV; 24; 621-36.
Mead, E. D.: The expansion of England.—X XIII; 11; 249-264.
Johnson, E. R.: A study of London.—VIII; 5; 15-29.
The unrest of English farmers——X X XIX; 2; 54-63.
The tower of London.—XI]; 72; 43.
Lennie, A. B.: Geographical description of the county of Sutherland.— XXXII; 27; 18-34; 128-142; 188-196.
Peddie, H. J.: The development of the inland waterways of the United Kingdom.—X X XII; 26; 544-548.
Wallace, B. C.: Nottinghamshire in the 19th Century.—XV;; 43; 34-61.
McFarlane, J.: The port of Manchester: The influence of a great canal.— XV; 32; 496-503.
Allen, W. H.: Rural sanitation in England— XX XIX; 8; 483-19.
219
Parritt, E.: The Manchester ship canal— XX XIX; 3; 295-310.
Meyer, H. R.: Municipal ownership in Great Britain.—XLIII; 13; 481: 14; 257.
Howells, W. D.: Kentish neighborhoods including Canterbury.—XVI; 113; 550-63.
Cossar, J.: Notes on the geography of the Edinburg district —X X XII; 27; 574-600; 643-654.
Richardson, R.: The port of London: A French review.—X XXII; 20: 196-202.
Brooks, S.: London and New York.—XVI; 104; 295-303.
A history of Scotland —XX XIT; 16; 657-661.
M. Paul Private-Deschmel: The influence of geography on the distribution of population of Scotland.—X X XII; 18; 577-587.
Geikie, A.: The history of the geography of Scotland.—X X XII; 22; 117-34.
Saunders, L. J.: A geographical description of Fife, Kinross, and Clack- mannon.—X X XI; 29; 67-87; 133-48.
Kermack, W. R.: The making of Scotland: An essay in historical geog- raphy.—X X XII; 28; 295-306.
Edinburg.— X1; 71; 217.
Kermack, W. R.: A geographical factor in Scottish independence-—X X XII; 28; 31-35.
Cossar, J.: The distribution of the towns and villages of Scotland —X X XIT; 26; 183-192; 298-318.
Steven, T. M.: A geographical description of the county of Ayr—XXXIT; 28; 393-414.
Tarr, R. S.: Glacial erosion in the Scottish highland—X X XIT; 24; 575-588.
Cadill, H. M.: The industrial development of the Forth Valley.—X XXII; 20; 66-85.
Botanical survey in Yorkshire-—X X XII; 19; 417-422.
Murray, Sir John: A bathymetrical survey of the lochs of Scotland.— XV; 15; 309-53.
Scotland and her educational institutions —X X XVI; 178; 573-582; 667-676.
Chisholm, G. G.: Density of population, Scotland, 1911.—X X XII; 27; 466- 470.
Chisholm, G. G.: The development of the industrial Edinburgh and the Edinburgh district —X X XI]; 30; 312-21.
220
Hinxman, L. W.: The rivers of Scotland: The Beanly and Conon.—X XXII; 23; 192-202.
Richardson, R.: The physiography of Edinburgh.—X XXII; 18; 337-358.
Mort, F.: The southern highlands from Gourock.—X XXII; 22; 435-438.
Frew, J., and T. Mort: The southern highlands from Dungoyn.—X XXII; 22; 322-24.
Bathymetrical survey of the fresh water lochs of Scotland.—XX XII; 22; 355-65; 407-423; 459-473.
Hardy, M.: Botanical survey of Scotland.—X XXII; 22; 229-241.
Frew, J., and Mort, F.: The southern highlands from Glasgow.—X X XIT; 23; 367-372.
Bathymetrical survey of the fresh water lochs of Scotland.——X XXII; 23; 346-360.
Gregory, J. W.: The Loch Morar basin and the tectonic associations of the Scottish sea lochs.—X XXII; 30; 251-59.
Murray, Sir J.: Bathymetrical survey of the fresh water lochs in Scotland.— XXXII; 19; 449-480; 21; 20; 1-47; 169-96; 235; 247; 449-460; 628-640.
History of the highlands.—X X XII; 17; 40-48.
Niven, W. N.: On the distribution of certain forest trees in Scotland, as shown by the investigation of post glacial deposits —X X XI]; 18; 24-30.
Geddes, P.: Edinburgh and its region, geographic and historical XX XII; 18; 302-312.
Fortune, EK. C.: A royal Scottish burgh.— XVI; 121; 661-669.
Smith, W. G.: Botanical survey of Scotland— XXXII; 21; 4-24; 57-84: 117-126; 20; 617-628.
Richardson, R.: Scottish place-names and Scottish saints—XXXII; 21; 352-361.
Richardson, R.: The influence of the nautral features and Geology of Seot- land on the Scottish people-—X X XII; 24; 449-464.
Ewing, C. M.: A geographical description of East Lothian.—X XXII; 29; 23-35.
ASIA. The uttermost Hast.—X X XII; 20; 247-253. Davis, W. M.: A summer in Turkestan.—V1; 36; 217-228.
Warner, L.: Narrative of a perilous journey over the Kara Kum sands of Asia.—X; 73; 1-18.
bo i) —
Capenny, S. H. F.: An Indo-European highway.—X X XII; 16; 523-534.
Rickmers, W. R.: Bokhara, Asia-—X XXII; 16; 357-368.
McGee, W. J.: Asia, the cradle of humanity — X XIII; 12; 281-91.
Neve, A.: The ranges of the Karakoram.—XV; 36; 571-577.
Stein, M. A.: Explorations in Central Asia.— XV; 34; 5-36; 242-271.
Bruce, C. D.: A journey across Asia from Leh to Peking.—XV; 29; 597-626.
Kropotkin, P.: Geology and botany of Asia.—X XV]; 65; 68-73.
Huntingdon, E.: Beyond the Dead Sea.—XVI; 120; 419-430.
Huntingdon, E.: Life in the great desert of Central Asia — XXIII; 20; 749-61.
Deasy, H. H. P.: Journeys in Central Asia.—XV; 16; 141-64; 501-27.
Stiffe, A. W.: Ancient trading centers of the Persian Gulf —XV; 16; 211-15.
Kozloff, P. K.: Through Eastern Tibet and Kam.—X/YV; 31; 402-15; 522-34. ,
Hedin, S.: Three years’ exploration in Central Asia— XV; 21; 221-260.
Crosby, O. T.: From Tiflis to Tibet.—V1I; 37; 703-716.
Forrest, G.: The land of the crossbow.—X XIII; 21; 132-57.
Williams, T.: The link relations of South-Western Asia.—X XIII; 12; 249- 66; 291-300.
Huntington, E.: Mediaeval tales of the Lop Basin in Central Asia.— XXIII; 19; 289-295.
Brown, A. J.: Economic changes in Asia.—X; 67; 732-737.
Austin, O. P.: Commercial prize of the Orient—XXIII; 16; 400-423.
Huntington, E.: The valley of the Upper Euphrates River and its people — VI; 34; 301-10; 38493.
Binstead, J. C.: Some topographical notes on a journey through Barga and North-East Mongolia——XV; 44; 571-77.
Huntington, E.: Problems in exploration—Central Asia.—XV; 35; 395- 419.
Richardson, R.: The expedition to Lhasa.—XXXI; 21; 246-249.
Chuan, L. H.: Notes on Lhasa, the mecca of the Buddhist faith.—X XIII: 23; 959-66.
Geddes: Three years’ exploration in Central Asia—XXXIT; 19; 115-141.
Dominian, L.: The origin of the Himalaya mountains.—VI; 44; 844-6.
Bryan, J. J.: The paramount problem of the East.—XIV; 51; 535-41.
Bray, F. C.: Islam: Races and religion XI; 72; 83-92.
Sherwood, E.: Asia awake and arising —XX XVIII; 28; 401-13.
apap
Workman, F. B.: The exploration of the Sinchem, or Rose Glacier, Eastern Karakoram.—XV; 43; 117-48.
Ward, F. K.: Wanderings of a naturalist in Tibet and Western China.— XXXII; 29; 341-350.
ARABIA.
Forder, A.: Arabia, the desert of the sea.—X XIII; 1039-63.
A new map of Arabia.—VI; 42; 362.
Zwemer, S. M.: Oman and eastern Arabia.—V1I; 39; 597-607.
Leachaman, G. I.: A journey in Northeastern Arabia.—XV; 37; 265-274.
Leachaman, G. H.: <A journey through Central Arabia.—XYV; 43; 500-12.
Fairchild, D. G.: Travels in Arabia and along the Persian gulf.—X XIII; 15; 139-151.
Miles, 8. B.: On the border of the great desert: A journey in Oman.— XV; 36; 159-178; 405-425.
Carruthers, D.: A journey in Northwestern Arabia.—XV; 35; 225-248.
Huntington, E.: The Arabian desert and human character.—X XI; 10; 169-76.
Asia MInor.
Huntington, E.: The fringe of verdure around Asia Minor.—X XII]; 21; 761-75.
Huntington, E.: The Karst country of Southern Asia Minor.—VI1; 43; 91-106.
Huntington, H.: The lost wealth of the kings of Midas.—XXIII; 21; 831-46.
Trowbridge, S.: Impressions of Asiatic Turkey.—X XIII; 26; 598-609.
Dodd, I. F.: An ancient capital. X XII]; 21; 111-25.
Harris, H. L.: Some ruined eities of Asia Minor.—X XIII; 19; 833-58.
Harris, E. L.: The buried cities of Asia Minor.—X XIIT1; 20; 1-18.
Harris, E. L.: The ruined cities of Asia Minor.—X XIII; 19; 741-60.
Dingelstedt, V.: The Armenians or Haikans: An ethmographical sketeh.— XX XIT; 29; 413-29.
Scenes in Asia Minor.—X XIII; 20; 173-94.
The most historic spot on earth.—X XIII; 26; 615.
Dominian, L.: Geographical influences in the determination of spheres of foreign interests in Asiatic Turkey.—VIII; 12; 160-76.
CHINA.
Tsaa, L. Y.: A wedding in South China.—III; 39; 71-73.
Tsaa, L. Y.: The life of a girl in China.—II1; 39; 62-71.
Ho, L. Y.: An interpretation of China.—III; 39; 1-11.
Ling, P.: Causes of Chinese emigration.—II]; 39; 74-83.
Barrett, J:: China, her history and development.—X XIII; 12; 209-19: 266-72.
Blackwelder, E.: The geologic history of China and its influence upon the Chinese people.—X XVI; 82; 105-124.
Bone: The revolution in China.— XIX; 71; 1332-1337.
Hinekley, F. E.: Extra territoriality in China.—II1; 39; 97-109.
Aylward, W. J.: Hong-Kong.—XVI; 121; 392-403.
Stein, M. A.: A journey of geographical and archaeological exploration in Chinese Turkestan.—X X XIII; 1903; 747-74.
Chamberlin, T. C.: China’s educational problem.—XIX; 69; 646-49.
Huntington, H.: Archaeological discoveries in Chinese Turkestan.—VI; 39; 268-272.
Gage, C.: My experiences in the Chinese revolution.— XIX; 72; 129-135.
Sand buried ruins of Khotan.—X X XII; 19; 581-589.
Marburg, T.: The backward nation.—XIX; 72; 1365-1370.
Scidmore, E.: Mukden, the Manchu home, and its Great Art Museum.— XXIII; 21; 289-320.
Edmunds, C. K.: A visit to the Hangchou Bore.-—X XVI; 72; 97-115; 224- 243.
Oblinger, F.: New journalism in China.—X X XVIII; 20; 18529-13534.
Edmunds, C. K.: Science among the Chinese-—X XVI; 79; 521-31.
Edmunds, C. K.: Contents of Chinese education.—X XVI; 68; 29-41.
Roorbach, G. B.: Some significant facts in the geography of China.—XX1; 12; 45-51.
The port of Shangai.— XX]; 12; 51-55.
Martin, Dr. W. A. P.: The siege in Peking: Its causes and consequences.— VI; 33; 19-30.
Suo, Tai-Chi: The Chinese revolution.—III; 39; 11-17.
Read, T. T.: China’s great problem.—X XVI, 81; 457-64.
Boggs, L. P.: The position of woman in China.—X XVI; 82; 71-76.
Chapin. Wm. W.: Glimpses of Korea and China.—X XIIJ; 21; 895-934.
Junor, K. T.: Curious and characteristic customs of China.—X XIII; 21; 791-806.
Little, A.: The irrigation of the Chentu Plateau.—X XXII; 20; 393-405.
Little, A.: Hanoi and Kwang-Chow-Wan: France’s lost acquisition in China.—X X XII; 22; 181-188.
Chew, N. P.: How the Chinese republic was born.—X XXVIII; 24; May- Oct., 1912; p. 108-111.
Fischer, HE. S.: Through thé silk and tea districts of Kiangnan and Chekiang province.—VI; 32; 334-340.
Jones, C. L.: Republican government in China.—III; 39; 26-39.
Rockhill, W. W.: The 1910 census of the population of China.—VI; 44; 668-673.
Ross, J.: Trade routes in Manchuria.—X X XII; 17; 303-310.
The curreney of China.—X X XIX; 5; 403-27.
Harwood, W.S.: The passing of the Chinese—X X XVIII; 9; 5626-31.
Turly, R. T.: Climatic and economic conditions of northern Manchuria.— XV.; 40; 57-59.
Carruthers, D.: Exploration in northwest Mongolia and Dzungaria.—XV; 39; 521-553.
Ryder, C. H. D.: Exploration in western China.—XYV; 21; 109-126.
Brindle, E.: The future of Manchuria.—X X XVIII; 12; 7901-7903.
Carruthers, D.: Exploration in northwest Mongolia.—XY ; 37; 165—170.
Kozloff, P.: The Mongolia-Sze-Chuan expedition of the Imperial Russian Geographic Society.—XV; 34; 384-408.
Carey, F. W.: Journeys in the Chinese Shan states.—XV; 15; 486-517.
Chamberlin: Travel in the interior of China.—X X XV; 2; 150-155.
Scidmore, E. R.: The marvelous bore of Kang-Chan.—X; 59; 852-59.
Weale, P.: The one solution of the Manchurian problem.—III; 39; 39-56.
Ligendre, A. F.: The Lolos of Kientchang, Western China.—X XXIII; 1911; 569-586.
Bainbridge, O.: The Chinese Jews.—X XIII; 18; 621-32.
Lessons from China.—X XIII; 20; 18-29.
Liang-Chang, C.: China and the United States——X XIII; 16; 554-58.
Smith, A. H.: Certain aspects of Chinese reconstruction.—II1; 39; 18-26.
Gammon, C. F.: China in distress.—VI; 44; 348-351.
Anderson, G. E.: The wonderful canals of China.—X XIII; 16; 68-69.
The great wall of China.—V1I; 42; 438-441.
2295
Ross, E. A.: Industrial future—X; 82; 34-39.
Ross, E. A.: A struggle for existence in China.—X; 82; 430-41.
Williams, F. W.: Chinese folklore and some western analogies.—X X XIII; 1900; 575-600.
Edmunds, C. L.: Science among the Chinese-—X XVI; 80; 22-35.
Parsons, Wm. B.: Chinese commerce.—X XVI; 58; 193-207.
Edmunds, C. K.: The college of the White Deer Grotto.—X XVI; 67; 515-27.
Ross, HE. A.: The race fiber of the Chinese—X XVI; 79; 403-08.
Hudson, C. B.: The Chinaman and the foreign devils —X XVI; 71; 258-66.
Edmunds, C. K.: Passing of China’s ancient system of literary examinations. —X XVI; 68; 99-118.
Edmunds, C. K.: China’s Renaissance.—X XVI; 67; 387-98.
Parsons, Wm. B.: China.—X XVI; 58; 69-80.
Tyenaga, T.: China as a republic—X X XVII]; 23; 706-712.
Webster, H.: China and her people.—X XIII; 11; 309-319.
Bent, T.: Explorations in the Yafei and Fadhli countries.—XV; 12; 41-63.
Hazard, S. T.: New China in the making.—Munsey Magazine, Oct., 1914; 72-82.
McCormick, F.: The open door.—III; 39; 56-61.
Pott, T. L. H.: China’s method of revising her educational system.—II1; 39; 83-96.
Edwards, D. W.: The Chinese Y. M. C. A.—III; 39; 109-23.
Cadbury, W. W.: Medicine as practiced by the Chinese.—II1; 39; 124-29.
Roorbach, C. B.: China: Geography and resources.—II1; 39; 130-153.
Munro, D. C.: American commercial interests in Manchuria.—III; 39; 154-68. ;
Amderson, M. P.: Notes on the mammals of economic value in China.— III; 39; 167-178.
Chinese pigeon whistles —X XIII; 24; 715-16.
Wilson, E. H.: The kingdom of flowers.——X XIII; 22; 1003-35.
Chamberlin, R. T.: Populous and beautiful Szechuan.—X XIII; 22; 109-19.
McCormick, F.: Present conditions in China.—X XIII; 22; 1120-38.
Conner, J. E.: The forgotten ruins of Indo-China.—X XIII; 23; 209-72.
King, F. H.: The wonderful canals of China.—X XIII; 23; 931-958.
McCormick, F.: China’s treasures —X XIII; 23; 996-1042.
Fenneman, M. N.: The geography of Manchuria.— XX]; 4; 6-12.
5084—15
226
hd hem
Cushing, S. W.: The east coast of China.—VI; 45; 81-92.
The independence of China.—XVII; 58; 8.
The rebellion in China.—X VII; 58; 25.
Articles on China.—X XI; 12; 45-58; 5.
Ross, E. A.: Christianity in China.—X; 81; 754-64.
Ross, E. A.: Sociological observations in inner China.—Am. Jr. of Soc.; 16; 721-33.
Ross, E. A.: Young China at school.— XIII; 24; 784-95.
INDIA.
Rose, A.: Chinese frontiers of India.—XV; 39; 193-223.
Bentinck. A.: The abor expedition: Geographical results —XV; 41; 97- 114.
Varley, F. J.: On the water supply of hill forts in western India.—XV; 40; 178-183.
Kellas, A. M.: The mountains of northern Sikkim and Garhwal.—xXYV; 40; 241-263.
The prevention and relief of famine in India.—X X XIX; 6; 123-39.
Curzon, Lord: The future of British India.—X X XVIII; 9; 5589-93.
Zumbro, W. M.: Temples of India— xX XIII; 20; 922-71.
Foreign policy of the government of India.—178-366-371.
Sunderland, J. T.: The cause of Indian famines—X XIV; 23; 56-64.
Ancient and modern Hindu gilds—XX XIX; 7; 24-42; 197-212.
The coal fields of India.—XYV; 44; 82-85.
Bailey, F. M.: Exploration on the Tsangpo, or Upper Brahmaputra; XV: 44; 341-60.
Creighton, C.: Plague in India.—X XXIII; 1905; 309-338.
Zumbro, W. M.: Religious penances and punishments self-inflicted by the Holy men of India.—X XIII; 24; 1257-1314.
Holdich, T. H.: Railway connection with India.—X X XII; 17; 225-39.
Medley, E. J.: India to England via Central Asia and Siberia— XXXII: 17; 281-292.
Huntington, E.: The Vale of Kashmire.—VI; 38; 657-82.
Chandler, J. S.: The Madura temples.—X XIII; 19; 218-222.
Scidmore, E. R.: The bathing and burning Ghats at Benares.—XXIII: 18; 118-29.
A little-known country of Asia, Mepaul (Mepal).—xX; 62; 74-82.
227
Morrison, C.: Some geographical peculiarities of the Indian peninsula.— XXXII; 21; 457-463.
Fee, U. T.: The Parsees and the towers of silence at Bombay.—X XIII; 16: 529-54.
Whie, J. C.: Journeys in Bhutan.—XV.; 35; 18-42.
Munson, A.: Kipling’s India.—V; 39; 30-45; 153-71; 255-68.
Whiting, M.: Behind the shutters of a Kashmir zenana.— XVI; 129; §23-31.
Overland to India.—X XXII; 27; 71-78.
Trade conditions in India.—House Doc. 762; Vol. 53; 59th Cong., 2nd Sess.; Serial No. 5156.
Smith: Pearl fisheries of Ceylon —X XIII; 23; 173-94.
The Indian census.—X XIII; 22; 633.
Banninga, J.: The marriage of the gods——X XIII; 24; 1314-30.
JAPAN.
Latani: Our relations with Japan.—X X XV;; 6; 9-18.
Kaneko, K.: The characteristics of the Japanese people—XXIII; 16; 93-100.
Deforest, J. H.: Why Nik-ko is beautiful xX XIII; 19; 300-08.
Bellows: Agriculture in Japan.—X XIII; 15; 323-6.
Hioka, E.: A chapter from Japanese history —X XIII; 16; 220-29.
Starr, F.: Japanese scenery.—X1X.—71; 1132-1136.
Forest, J. H.: Moral purpose of Japan in Korea.—XIX; 70; 13-17.
Ronin, H.: Religious indifference and anarchism in Japan.—X X XVI; 176; 154-63.
Chapin, W. W.: Glimpses of Japan.—X XIII; 22; 965-1033.
Whelpley, J. D.: Are we honest with Japan?—X; 88; 105-8.
Kawakami, K. K.: Japan and the European war.—IV; 114; 708-13.
Kishimoto, M.: Shinto, the old religion of Japan.—X XVI; 41; 206-16.
Semple, E. C.: Japanese colonial methods.—V1; 45; 255-75.
Lee, C. K.: Glimpses of festal Japan.—VIII; 12; 113-120.
Secidmore, E. R.: Young Japan XXIII; 26; 36-38.
Hitchcock: Our trade with Japan, China, and Hongkong.—U. S. Dept. of Ag., Section of Foreign Markets; Bulletin No. 18.
228
KorRBA.
Scenes and notes from Korea.—X XIII; 19; 498-508.
Andrews, R. C.: The wilderness of northern Korea.—XVI; 126; 828-9. Griffis, W. E.: Korea, the pigmy empire.—X XIV; 26; 455-470.
Hulbert, H. B.: Korea’s geographical significance.—VI; 32; 322-27.
Scenes from the land where everybody dresses in white.-—X ¥ IIT; 19; 871-7. Keir, R. M.: Modern Korea.—VI; 46; 756-69; 817-30.
Smith, F. H.: The resurrection of Korea.—XI1X; 77; 413.
MESOPOTAMIA.
Willcocks, Sir W.: The garden of Eden and its restoration.—XV; 40; 129- 148.
Willcocks, Sir W.: Mesopotamia: Past, present, and future-——xXV; 35; 1-18.
Cadoux, H. W.: Recent changes in the course of the lower EKuphrates.— XV; 28; 266-77.
Willcocks, W.: Mesopotamia: Past, present, and future—X XXIII; 1909; 401-416.
Huntington, E.: Through the great canon of the Euphrates.—XV; 20; 175-201.
Thompson, R. C.: Tavermier’s travels in Mesopotamia.—X XXII; 26; 141-48.
Sunpich, F. & M.: Where Adam and Eve lived.—X XIII; 26; 546-89.
Smith, J. R.: The agriculture of the Garden of Eden.—IV; 114; 256-62.
PALESTINE.
Whiting, J. D.: From Jerusalem to Aleppo.—X XIII; 24; 71-113.
Forder, A.: Damascus, pearl of the desert —X XIII; 22; 62-82.
Prentice, S.: Sunrise and Sunset from Mt. Sinai.—X XIII; 23; 1242-83.
Oberhummer, Dr. E.: The Sinai Problem.—xX X XIII; 669-677.
Huntington, E.: Climate of ancient Palestine—VI; 40; 1908; 513-522; 577-586; 641-652.
Gottheil, R.: Palestine under the new Turkish regime.—XIX; 69; 1369- 1372.
Hichens, R.: From Nazareth to Jerusalem.—X; 80; 2-17.
Hichens, R.: From Jericho to Bethlehem.—X; 80; 231-247.
Hichens, R.: Jerusalem.—X; 80; 558-572.
Hichens, R.: Holy week in Jerusalem.—X; 80; 854-870.
Huntington, E.: Fallen queen of the desert—XVI; 120; 552-63.
Dingelstedt, V.: The people of Israel: Their numbers, distribution, and characteristics.—X X XII; 28; 414-29.
Clapp, ‘H. A.: From Jerusalem to Jericho in ninety minutes.—X XIV; 23; 406-12.
Daly, R. A.: Palestine as illustrating geological and geographical controls.— VI; 31; 444-458; 32; 22-31.
Maunsell, F. R.: One thousand miles of railroad built for pilgrims and not for dividends.—X XIII; 20; 156-73.
Cady, P.: The historical and physical geography of the dead sea region.— VI; 36; 577-589.
Hoskins, F. E.: The route over which Moses led the children out of Egypt.— XXIIT; 20; 1011-1039.
Huntington, E.: Across the Ghor to the land of Og.—XVI; 120; 667-78.
Brown, G. T.: A visit to the Sinai peninsula——X X XII; 20; 591-95.
Spafford, J. H.: Around the dead sea by motor boat.—XV; 39; 37-40.
Messerschmist, L.: The ancient Hittites —X X XIII; 1903; 681-703.
Franck, H. A.: Tramping in Palestine.—X; 79; 434-441.
Maealister, A.: Uncovering a buried city in Palestine.—XVI; 107; 83-88.
Whiting, J. D.: Village life in the Holy Land.—X XIII; 249-314.
PERSIA.
Sykes, P. M.: A fourth journey in Persia.—XV; 19; 121-173.
Sykes, E.: Life and travel in Persia.—X X XII; 20; 403-415.
Dickson, B.: Journeys in Kurdistan.—XV; 35; 357-379.
Huntington, E.: The depression of Sistan in Eastern Persia.—VI; 37; 271- 281.
Cresson, W. P.: Persia: The awakening East (an extract of books by above title by J. B. Lippincott Co., at Philadelphia).—X XIII; 19; 356-86.
Persia, past and present.—X XIII; 18; 91-95.
Sykes, EH. C.: A talk about Persia and its women.—X XIII; 21; 847-66.
Sykes, P. M.: The geography of Southern Persia as affecting its history.— XXXII; 18; 617-626.
Ten thousand miles in Persia.—X X XII; 18; 626-631.
Shedd, W. A.: The Syrians of Persia and Eastern Turkey.—VI; 35; 1-7.
230
Huntington, E.: The Persian frontier.—X XIII; 20; 866-77.
Huntington, E.: The depression of Sistan in Hastern Persia. —XX XII; 21; 379-385.
Gibbons, H. A.: The passing of Persia.—XIX; 70; 614-616.
Yate, A. C.: The proposed trans-Persian railway.—X XXII; 27; 169-180.
Huntington, E.: The Anglo-Russian agreement as to Tibet, Afghanistan. and Persia.—VI; 39; 653-58.
Sykes, P. M.: A sixth journey in Persia.—XV; 37; 1-19; 149-165.
Sykes, P. M.: Twenty years’ travel in Persia.—X XII; 30; 169-91.
SouTHEAST ASIA.
Annandale, N.: The Siamese Malay states.—X X XII; 16; 505-523.
Annandale, N.: The peoples of the Malay peninsula.—X XXII; 20; 337- 348.
The pagan races of the Malay peninsula.—X X XII; 23; 33-39.
Cadell, H. M.: A sail down the Irrawaddy.—X XXII; 17; 239-65.
Barbour, T.: Notes on Burma.—X XIII; 20; 841-66.
Bastlett, C. H.: Untouched Burma.—X XIII; 24; 835-60.
Conner: The forgotten ruins of Indo-China.—X XII]; 23; 207-72.
Pritchard, B. E. A.: A journey from Myitkyina to Sadiva via the M’mai Hka and Hkamti Long.—XYV;; 43; 521-35.
TIBET.
Views of Lhasa.—X XIII; 16; 27-39.
Explorations in Tibet.—X XIII; 14; 353-5.
Younghusband, Sir F.: The geographical results of the Tibet Mission.— XXXII; 21; 229-246.
Central Asia and Tibet.—X X XII; 20; 202-212.
Younghusband, Sir F.: Geographical results of the Tibet Mission.—X X XIIT; 1905; 265-277.
Tsybikoff, G. T.: Lhasa and Central Tibet—X XXIII; 1903; 727-46.
Bailey, F. M.: Journey through a portion of Southeastern Tibet and the Mishmi Hills—X X XII; 28; 189-204.
Hedin, S.: Journeys in Tibet.—X X XIT; 1906-1908; 25; 169-195.
Western Tibet and the British borderland.—X X XII; 23; 28-33.
Williamson, N.: The Lohit-Brahmaputia River between Assam and South- eastern Tibet.—XV; 34; 363-383.
231
Landon, P.: Into Tibet with Younghusband.—X XXVIII; 9: 5907-5925.
Roberts, C.: Into mysterious Tibet——X XXVIII; 8; 5263-5271.
Bailey, F. M.: Journey through a portion of Southeastern Tibet and the Mishmi Hills.—XV; 39; 334-347.
Rose, A.: The reaches of the upper Salween.—XV; 34; 608-613.
AFRICA.
Fock, A.: The economic conquest of Africa by the railroads——X XXIII; 1904; 721-735.
Luder, A. B.: Building American bridges in Africa.—X XXVIII; 6; 3657- 3670.
Behrens, T. T.: Most reliable values of heights of African lakes and moun- tains.—XV; 29; 307-326.
Stanley, H. M.: A great African lake-—X XIII; 13; 169-72.
Hotchkiss, C. W.: Some points to emphasize in the teaching of the geography of Africa.—X XJ; 10; 175-84.
Grogan, E. S.: Through Africa from Cape to Cairo.—XV; 16; 164-85.
Grogan, E. S.: Through Africa from the Cape to Cairo.— XX XIII; 1900; 431-448.
Adams, C. C.: Foundations of economic progress in tropical Africa.—VI; 43; 753-766.
Cannon, W. A.: Recent explorations in the Western Sahara.—VI; 46; 81-99.
Verner, S. P.: White man’s zone in Africa.—X X XVIII; 13; 8227-36.
Map of African railroads.—House Doe., Serial No. 3944; p. 200.
Johnson, F. E.: Here and there in Northern Africa.— XVIII; 25; 1-132.
Johnson, F. E.: The railways of Africa—X X XII; 22; 621-637.
Frederick, A.: A land of giants and pygmies.—X XIII; 23; 369-89.
Akeley, C. E.: Elephant hunting with gun and camera.—X XIII; 23; 779- 810.
Norman, Sir H.: The automobile in Africa.—X XX]; 51; 257-83.
Lander, H. S.: Across wildest Africa.—X XIII; 19; 694-737.
Roberts, C.: A wonderful feat of adventure—X XXVIII; 1; 304-308.
The mysteries of the desert —X XII]; 22; 1856-60.
Bauer, L. A.: The megnetic survey of Africa.—X XIIT; 20; 291-303.
Camera adventures in the wilds of Africa.—X XIII; 21; 385-97.
Rabot, C.: Recent French explorations in Africa.—X XIII; 13; 119-35.
232
The black man’s continent.—X XIII; 20; 312-15.
Cana, F. R.: Problems in exploration.—XV; 38; 457-469.
Roosevelt, T.: Wild man and wild beast in Africa. —X XIII; 22; 1-34.
ireely, A. W.: Recent geographic advances.—X XIII; 22; 383-99.
Oswald, F. G. S.: From the Victoria Nyanza to the Kisii Highlands.—XV; 41; 114-130.
Nevinson, H. W.: Through the African Wilderness.— XVI; 113; 26-36.
The vegetation of Africa.—X X XII; 27; 375-377.
The climatology of Africa.—X X XIT; 17; 582-595.
The vegetation of Africa.—X X XII; 25; 144-146.
Alexander, B.: From the Niger to the Nile-—X X XII; 24; 20-34.
White, S. E.: On the way to Africa.—XVI; 126; 218-230.
Shumway, H. L.: In darkest Africa.—X XIV; 33; 350-355.
Patterson, J. H.: Hunting the rhinoceros and the hippopotamus in Africa. XXXVIII; 17; 11228-11238.
Peddie, H. J.: Amphibious steam navigation for African rivers.—XX XII; 26; 195-198.
Schillings, C. B.: Gun and camera in African wilds.—X X XVIII; 11; 6928- 6942.
Verner, 8S. P.: Africa fifty years hence.—X X XVIII; 13; 8726-37.
Verner, S. P.: A trip through Africa.—X X XVIII; 16; 10768-10773.
Wollaston, A. F. R.: Amid the snow peaks of the equator.—X XIII; 20; 256-78. !
Roosevelt, T.: African game trails—X XII]; 21; 953-62.
Roosevelt, T.: African game trails—X X XI; 47; 1; 129; 257; 385; 515; 641. Also Vol. 48; 1; 142. Also Vol. 46; 385; 513; 652. Also Vol. 54; 279; 430; 580; 681.
ABYSSINIA.
Gwynn, C. W.: A journey in Southern Abyssinia.—XV; 38; 113-139.
A journey to the capital— XVI; 101; 141-152.
At the court of the king of kings.— XVI; 101; 244-254.
Among Central African savages.— XVI; 101; 366-376.
Crosby, C. T.: Abyssinia, the country and the people.—X XIII; 12; 89-103.
Montandon, G.: A journey in southwestern Abyssinia. —XV; 40; 372-391.
Skinner, R. P.: Many pictures—Making a treaty with Menelik.—XXXVILI; 9; 5795-5812.
bo Co =r Os
A journey through Abyssinia to the Nile-—XV; 15; 97-121. Whithouse, W. F.: Through the country of the king of kings—XXXI; 32; 286. ALGERIA.
From Algeria to the French Congo.—XV; 17; 135-50.
Archibald, J. F. J.: In civilized Freneh Africa.—X XIII; 20; 303-12.
Schmidt, N.; The new Latin Africa .— XIX; 71; 1440-1445.
Kearney, T. H.: Country of the ant men.— XXIII; 22; 367-83.
Kearney, T. H.: The date gardens of the Jerid —X XIII; 21; 543-68.
Lessauer, A.: The Kabyles of North Africa.— XX XIII; 1911; 523-38.
Cannon, W. H.: Some features of the physiography and vegetation of the Algerian Sahara.—V1; 45; 481-9.
CENTRAL AFRICA.
Johnston, H.: The protectorates of Great Britain in tropical Africa.— XXXII; 18; 57-76.
Robertson, P.: The commercial possibilities of British Central Africa— XXXIT; 16; 235-46.
Sharpe, A.: Trade and colonization in British Central Africa— XX XII; 17; 129-48.
Angus, H. C.: On the frontier of Western Shire, British Central Africa.— XXX; 23; 72-86.
Capenny, S. H. F.: The Anglo-Portuguese boundary in Central Africa.— XXXII; 21; 440-45.
Bright, R. J. F.: Survey and exploration in the Ruwewzori and lake region.— XV; 34; 128-56.
Woosman, R. B.: Ruwewzori and its life zones.— XV; 30; 616-30.
Congo.
Torday, K.: Land and people of Kasai Basin.—XV; 36; 26-57.
Johnston, H.: The pygmies of the great Congo forest-—XXXIII; 1902; 479-91.
Neave, S. A.: A naturalist’s travels on the Congo.—Zambezi watershed.— XV; 35; 132-146.
Sarolea, C.: The economic expansion of the Congo Free State-——XXXII; 21; 182-197.
254
Lewis, T.: The life and travel among the people of the Congo —XXXII; 18; 358-369.
The northeastern territories of the Congo Free State —X XXII; 22; 315-22.
Verner, S. P.: Belgian rule on the Congo.—XXXVII; 13; 8568-75.
East AFRICA.
Genthe, M. K.: Progress of tropical East Africa.—VI; 44; 682-84.
Davis, A.: British East Africa Protectorate —VI; 44; 1-10.
Parkinson, J.: The east African trough in the neighborhood of the Soda Lakes.— XV; 44; 33-46.
Collie, G. L.: The plateau of British East Africa and its inhabitants——VI; 44; 321-334.
Aylmer, L.: The country between the Juba River and Lake Rudolf.—XYV; 38; 289-296.
Elliott, F.: Jubaland and its inhabitants—XYV; 41; 554-561.
Hardy, R. A.: Somaliland —X X XII; 20; 225-235.
Colonization and immigration in East Africa Protectorate-—XV ; 21; 349-75.
Hobley, C. W.: The alleged desiccation of East Africa — XV; 44; 467-77.
Somaliland.—X X XIT;: 19; 95-97.
An ivory trader in North Kenia.— XXXII; 19; 364-70.
Hunting big game in East Africa —X XIII; 18; 723-31.
Davis, R. H.: Along the east coast of Africa XX XI; 29; 259.
Barrett, O. W.: Impressions and scenes. of Mozambique—xXXIII; 21; 807-30.
Capenny. S. H. F.: The economic development of Nyasaland— XXXII; 20; 371-76.
Henderson, J.: The Nyasa coal bed —X XXII; 19; 311-15.
Moore, J. E. S.: Tanganyika and the countries north of it—XV; 17; 1-37.
The Tanganyika problem.—X X XII; 19; 190-195.
EGyprt.
Baker, B. B.: Nile dams and reservoir—X XVI: 62: 550-61.
The irrigation of Egypt. XX XII; 18; 637-645.
Naville, E.: The origin of Egyptian civilization—XXXIII; 1907; 549-64.
Means, T. H.: The Nile reservoir dam at Assuan— XX XIII; 1902; 531-35.
Wiedeman, A. W.: The excavation of Abusir Egypt—xXXXIII; 1903: 669-780.
235
Milne, A. D.: The dry summer on the upper Nile-—X XXII; 16; 89-92. Erving, W. G.: From Cairo to Khartum.—X; 65; 349-350; 559-577. Moncrieff, Sir C. S.: Egyptian irrigation. — XV; 35; 425-428. Hichens, R.: Old Cairo.—X; 77; 82-95. Baikie, J.: Resurrection of ancient Egypt.—X XIII; 24; 957-1020. Stearns, W. N.: Reconstructing Egypt’s history.—X XIII; 24; 1021-42. Jackal, I.: Sacred cemetery of catacombs.—X XIII; 24: 1042-56. Richardson, R.: Britain’s success in Egypt.—X X XII; 17; 300-303. White, A. S.: The rehabilitation of Egvypt.—X XXII; 20; 348-354. American discoveries in Egypt.—X XIII; 18; 801-811. Czarnomska, M. E. J.: The Assuan dam.—X X XVIII; Nov.-April, 1912-13;
332-37.
LIBERIA.
Wallis, B.: A tour in the Liberian Hinterland.—XV; 35; 285-295.
Johnston, H.: Liberia.-—X XXIII; 1905; 247-264.
Johnston, Sir H.: Liberia.—XV; 26; 131-53.
Collins, G. M.: Dumboy, the national dish of Liberia. —X XIII; 22; 84-89.
Morocco.
Morocco, the land of the extreme west.—X XIII; 17; 117-57.
Furlong, C. W.: The French in North Africa — XX XVIII; 15; 9555-66.
Furlong, W.: The French conquest of Morocco.—X XXVIII; 22; 14989- 15000.
Ogilvie, A. G.: Notes on Moroccan geography.—XV; 41; 230-239.
Ogilvie, A. G.: Morocco and its future.—XV; 39; 554-575.
Edwards, A.: Conflicting interests in Morocco.—XIX; 71; 1121-1126.
Fischer, T.: Morocco.—XX XIII; 1904; 355-372.
Borrks, 8.: The Morocco question.—XIX; 71; 176-181.
Letters from Moroeco.—X X XIT; 21; 37-41; 84-96.
Letters from Morocco.—X X XII; 20; 640-649.
Blayney, T. L.: A journey in Morocco.—X XIII; 22; 750-777.
Harris, W.: The Berbers of Morocco.—X XX]; 36; 353.
Holt, G. E.: Two great Moorish religious dances ——X XIII; 22; 777-85.
236 NIGERIA.
The mineral survey of Southern Nigeria.— X X X11; 27; 34-37.
Kitson, A. E.: Some considerations of its structure, people, and natural history —XV; 41; 16-38.
Lugard, Sir F.: Northern Nigeria.—XV; 23; 1-29.
Talbot, P. A.: The land of the Ekol, Southern Nigeria.—XV: 36; 637-657.
Watt, J.: Southern Nigeria.—X X XII; 22; 173-181.
Temple, C. L.: Northern Nigeria. —XV; 40; 149-165.
Whitlock, G. F. A.: The Yola-Cross River boundary commission, Southern Nigeria.— XV; 36; 426-437.
The tailed people of Nigeria.—X XIII; 21; 1239-42.
Maceallister, D. A.: The Aro country of Southern Nigeria—XXXII; 18: 631-37.
RIvErRs.
Seaman, L. L.: The falls of the Zambesi— X XIII; 22; 561-72.
The Victoria Falls of the Zambezi.—V1I; 37; 213-216.
Lyons, H. G.: Dimensions of the Nile ard its Fasin—XV: 26; 198-201.
Prince, A. T.: Bridging the gorge of the Zambezi —X XXVIII; 12; 7637- 7647.
Hume, W. F.: Notes on the history of the Nile and its valley —XV; 27; 52-60.
Reid, R. L.: The river Aruwimi.— XV; 38; 29-34.
Pearson, H. D.: The Pibar River—XV; 40; 486-501.
Talbot, P. A.: The Macleod Falls on the Mao Kabi, French Equatorial Africa.— XV ; 37; 420-424.
Johnston, Sir H. H.: The Niger basin and Mungo park—XXXII; 25; 58-72.
Lamaire, C.: The Congo-Zambezi water parting.—XV; 19; 173-189.
Battye, H. T.: Above Victoria Falls —X XIII; 24; 193-200.
The snows of the Nile-—XV; 29; 121-148.
RHODESIA.
Melland, F. H.: Bangwenly swamps and the Wa-Unga.—XV; 38; 381-95. Monbray, J. M.: The upper Kafue and Lusenfwa rivers, Northwest Rho- desia.—XV; 34; 166-171.
Zor Larpent, G. de H.: The development and progress of Rhodesia.—X X XIT; 28; 337-361. Heatley, J. T. P.: The development of Rhodesia and its railway system in relation to oceanic highways.—X X XIII; 1905; 279-292. Rhodesia.—X X XII; 16; 92-105. Capenny, S. H. F.: Colonel Harding in the remotest Barotseland.—X X XII; 21; 484-90.
SUDAN.
Bridgman, H. L.: The new British empire of Sudan. X XIII; 17; 241-68.
France and the penetration of the central Sudan.—X XXII; 17; 414-429; 480-492.
Progress in the Sudan; the international map.—XV; 40; 420-430.
Foulkes, C. H.: The new Anglo-French frontier between the Niger and
i Lake Chad.—X XXII; 22; 565-575.
Thompson, F. S.: Among the Shillucks of Southern Sudan.—XIX; 68;
139-47.
Crowfoot, J. W.: Some Red Sea ports in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan.—XV; 37; 523-50.
Lloyd, W.: Notes on the Kordofan province.—XV; 35; 249-67.
Watson, C. M.: The exploration of the Sudan.—X X XII; 28; 505-17.
Pearson, H. D.: Progress of survey in the Egyptian Sudan.—XV; 35; 532- 41.
Breasted, J. H.: The University of Chicago on the Nubian Nile—XXXV; 1; 193-202.
SoutH AFRICA.
Lagden, G.: Basutoland and the Basutos.—X X XII; 17; 347-63.
_ Pearson, H. H. W.: The travels of a botanist in Southwest Africa.—XV; 35; 481-513.
Hamilton, J. S.: Mining diamonds in South Africa——X XXVIII; 12; 7904- 7907.
A former ice age in South Africa.—X X XI]; 17; 57-74.
Watermeyer, F.S.: Geographical notes on South Africa south of Limpopo.— XOXOXIT; 21; 625-37.
Watermeyer, F. S.: Geographical notes on South Africa south of the Lim- popo.— XX XII; 22; 29-38.
238
Simpson, W. A.: Influence of geographical conditions on military operations in South Africa—X XIII; 11; 186-192.
Gibbons, A. St. H.: The transition of British Africa —X X XI]; 23; 122-141.
Sharpe, Sir A.: The geographic and economic development of British Central Africa.— XV; 39; 1-22.
Hilder, F. F.: British South Africa and the Transvaal.—XXIII; 11; $1-97.
McConnell, A. B.: African bush, alone in the-—VIII; 12; 31-39.
Brown, E. W.: With the British association in South Africa.—X XVI; 68; 1-20; 145-160.
Elliott, J. A. G.: Notes and observations on an expedition in Western Cape Colony.—X XXII; 23; 393-422.
Schwarz, E. H. L.: Plains in Cape Colony.—I]; 174; 185.
The history and ethnography of South Africa XX XII; 26; 86-89.
Williams, G. F.: The diamond mines of South Africa.—X XIII; 17; 344-56.
Whigham, H. I.: The Boer war— XXX]; 27; 201; 259; 469; 573.
The climate of Kimberley.—House Doe., Vol. III; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4890; p. 308.
Harvey-Gibson, R. J.: Some aspects of the vegetation of South Africa.— XXXII; 30; 225-37.
TRIPOLI.
Heawood, E.: The commercial resources of tropical Africa— XXXII; 16; 651-657.
Mathnesient, V. De: An expedition to Tripoli—VI; 36; 736-744.
Furlong, C. W.: The taking of Tripoli—xX XXVIII; 23; 165-76.
Furlong, C. W.: The Greek sponge: Divers of Tripoli—XVI; III; 275-284.
Norton, R.: TripoliimXIX; 72; 26-29.
Vischer, A. L.: Tripoli—xXV; 38; 487-494.
Vischer, A. L.: Tripoli, a land of little promise —X XIII; 22; 1035-48.
TUNIS. Johnson, F. E.: The mole men (of Tunisia) —X XIII; 22; 787-846.
Johnson, F. E.: The green bronzes of Tunisia.—X XIII; 23; 89-104. Johnson, F. E.: The sacred city of the sands (Kairgwan).—X XIII; 1061-94.
239
West AFRICA.
From the Niger by Lake Chad to the Nile-—XYV; 30; 119-152.
Angola, the last foothold of slavery —X XIII; 21; 625-30.
Lieut. Boyd Alexander’s expedition in West Africa.—XV; 34; 51-55.
Speak, S. J.: The gold-producing region of West Africa —X X XIT; 18; 30-34.
Morel, E. D.: The economic development of West Africa.—X XXII; 20; 134-1438.
A view of West Africa .— XX XII; 29; 113-133.
Gaunt, M.: A new view of West Africa.— XX XIT; 29; 113-33.
AUSTRALIA.
Rainfall in Australia.—X X XII; 3; 161-173.
Mead, E.: Irrigation in Australia.—XIX; 69; 756-763. :
Thomson, J. P.: The physical geography and geology of Australia— XXXII; 19; 66-80.
The artesian water supply of Australia from a geological standpoint.—XV; 19; 560-76.
MacDonald, R. M.: Some features of the Australian interior.—X X XI; 20: 577-584
The vegetation of Western Australia. X X XI]; 23; 363-67.
Bryant, J.: The making of Australia.—X X XII; 18; 139-142.
MacConald, R. M.: The opal formation of Australia —X X XII; 20; 253-61.
Gregory, J. W.: The flowing wells of Central Australia—— XV; 38; 34-59; 157- 179.
Mr. Canning’s expeditions in Western Australia in 1906-7 and 1908-10.— XV; 38; 26-29.
Taylor, G.: The evolution of a capitol: A physiographic study of the founda- tion of Canberra, Australia.—XV; 43; 378-95; 536-50.
The geographical factors that control the development of Australia—XV; 35; 658-682.
United Australia.—X X XIX; 9; 129-63.
Arbitration in Australia ——XX XIX; 19; 32-54.
The progress of the New South Wales.—X X X11; 22; 539-545.
The dead heart of Australia —X X XII; 23; 19-25.
Dunean, M.: Australian bypaths.—XVI; 128; 123-36; 207-223.
Wallis, B. C.: The rainfall regime of Australia — XXXII; 30; 527-32.
240
The future of Australia. —X XXII; 30; 635-42. Gregory, J. W.: The lake system of Westralia.—XV; 43; 656-64.
ISLANDS.
Bristol, C. L.: Notes on the Bermudas.—VI; 33; 242-248.
Whitefield, C. T.: England’s ‘half-way’? house to Panama.—XXXVIII: 12; 7939-7949.
Greene, J. M.: Bermuda (Somers Island); historical sketech.—VI; 33; 220- 242.
Beebe, M. B.: With the Dyaks of Bornea.—XVI; 124; 264-278.
Hose, C.: In the heart of Borneo.—XYV; 16; 39-63.
Burt, A.: Notes on a journey through British North Borneo.—XX XII; 21; 312-315.
Stigand, I. A.: Some contributions to the physiography and hydrography of Northeast Borneo.—XYV; 37; 31-42.
Quincey, E. 8.: Catalina, the wondrous isle-—X XIV; 31; 283-289.
Smith, H. M.: Pearl fisheries of Ceylon.—X XIII; 28; 173-95.
The Veddas (Ceylon).—X X XII; 27; 426-429.
Cross, A. L.: Ceylon.—X X XII; 29; 397-405.
Cross, A. L.: Ceylon in 1913.—X XXII; 29; 396-405.
Hall, EK. H.: Crete, explorations in—X XIII; 20; 778-88.
Baikie, J.: The sea-kings of Crete —X XIII; 23; 1-25,
Boyd, H. A.: Excavations at Gournia, Crete-—X XXIII; 1904; 559-571.
Lindsay, Forbes: Future farming in Cuba.—VII; 36; 183-192.
Key West and Cuba.—VII; 34; 212-222.
Vaughan, T. W., & Spencer, A. C.: The geography of Cuba.—VI; 34; 105- 116.
Brandon, E. E.: National University of Cuba.—VII; 36; 511-518.
General sketch, 1910 (Cuba).—VII; 31; 135-152.
The great Roque canal of Matanzas, Cuba.—VII; 36; 668-674.
Gannett, H.: Conditions in Cuba, as revealed by the census.—X XIII; 20; 200-8.
Wilcox, W. D.: Among the mahogany forests of Cuba.—X XIII; 19; 485-98.
Lindsay, T.: Cuba, for the man of moderate means.—VII; 37; 32-40.
General sketch, 1910 (Cuba).—VII; 33; 377-409.
General sketch, 1910 (Haiti).— VII; 33; 282-97.
American progress in Habana.—X XIII; 13; 97-108.
Fernow, B. E.: Cuba, the high Sierra Maestra.—V1; 39; 257-268.
Brooko, S.: Some impressions of Cuba.—X XV; 199; 735-45.
Robinson, A. G.: Cuban railways.—X XIII; 13; 108-110.
Cuba, the pearl of the Antilles —X XIII; 17; 535-68.
Immigration to Cuba.—X XIII; 17; 568-9. Dominican Republic.—VII; 33; 118; also Vol. 31; 152-68.
Cyprus of today.—X X XII; 17; 292-300.
Reed, A. C.: Going through Ellis Island.—X XVI; 82; 1-18.
Currie, J.: The Faeroe Islands.—X X XII; 22; 61-76; 134-147.
Palmer, H. R.: Fisher’s Island, a former bit of New England— XXIV; 28; 567-584.
The Island of Formosa.—X XIII; 14; 468-71.
Campbell, W.: Formosa under the Japanese.—XX XII; 18; 561-77.
Fortoseue, G. F.: The Galopagos Islands.—VII; 32; 222-39.
Hovey, E. O.: The Grande Soufriere of Guadeloupe.—V1; 36; 513-30.
Safford, Wm. E.: Our smallest possession.—X XIII; 16; 229-37.
Born, E. J.: Our administration in Guam.—XIX; 71; 636-42.
The Island of Guam.—VI; 35; 475-477.
Cox, L. M.: The Island of Guam.—V1; 36; 385-395.
Safford, W. E.: Guam and its people.-—X X XIII; 1902; 493-508.
Lyle, E. P.: Our mix-up in Santo Domingo.—X X XVIII; 10; 6737-59.
Chester, C. M.: A degenerating island; Haiti past grandeur and present decay.—X XIII; 19; 200-18.
Lyle, E. P.: What shall Haiti’s future be? —X XXVIII; 11; 7151-62.
Packard, W.: Facts about Santo Domingo.—X XIV: 34; 1-16.
Stoddard, T. L.: Santo Domingo; our unruly ward.—X XVIII; 49; 726-31.
General sketch, 1910 (Haiti) —VII; 31; 204-19.
Commerce of Haiti for 1911.—VI1; 36; 98-100.
McCandless, H. H.: The eross-roads of the Pacifie—XX XVIII; 15; 8611- 8628.
Perkins, G. O.: The key to the Pacifie-—X XIII; 19; 295-8.
Agricultural resources and capabilities of Hawaii House Doc., 386; Vol. 43; 56th Cong., 2nd Sess.; Serial No. 4117.
Wood, H. P.: Hawaii for homes.—X XIII; 19; 298-300.
Makenzie, W. C.: Pigmies in the Hebrides: A curious legend.—X XXII; 21; 264-68.
5084—16
‘ L _* —o
Stefansson, J.: Iceland: Its history and inhabitants—XXXIII; 1906; 275-94.
Noyes, P. H.: A visit to lonely Iceland.—X XIII; 18; 731-41.
Russell, W. S. C.: Physiographical features of Iceland.—V1I; 43; 489-500.
Gratacap, L. P.: A trip around Iceland.—X XVI; 72; 79-90.
Gratacap, L. P.: A trip around Iceland—xXXVI; 71; 289-302; 421-32; 560-68.
The Isle of Pines.—X XIII; 17; 105-8.
Baldwin, M.: Jamaica as a summer resort.—X XIV; 30; 449-64; 577-90.
Lyle, E. P.: Gipiin Baker and Jamaica.—X XXVIII; 11; 7295-7308.
Graves, C. M.: The pompeii of America (Jamestown Island).—X XIV; 33; 277-84.
The Dutch in Java.—X X XII; 20; 460-474; 538-548.
Bryant, H. G.: A traveler’s notes on Java.—VIII; 6; 33-47.
Yeld, G.: In the Lipari Islands.—X X XJ1; 21; 347-352.
Oliver, P.: The land of parrots (Madagascar).—X XXII; 16; 1-17; 68-82; 583-597.
Hunt, W. H.: Madagascar.—V1; 32; 297-307.
Lacroix, A.: A trip to Madagasear, the country of Beryls—X XXIII; 1912; 371-82.
Fairchild, D.: Madeira; on the way to Italy.—xX XIII; 18; 751-71.
Richardson, R.: Malta: Notes on a recent visit—X XXII; 22; 365-73.
Eldridge, G. W.: Martha’s Vineyard, the gem of the North Atlantie.— XXIV; 40; 163-179.
Bruce, Sir C.: The evolution of the crown colony of Mauritius.—X X XII; 24; 57-78.
Hoffs, W. H.: The Maltese Islands: A testonietopographic study.—XX XII; A0e leis},
Brown, R. M.: The Mergin Archipelago: Its people and products.—X XXII; 23; 463-84.
Lorentz, H. A.: An expedition to the snow mountains of New Guinea. XV; 37; 477-500.
Rawling, C. G.: Explorations in Dutch New Guinea.—XV; 38
Barbour, T.: Further notes on Dutch Guinea.—X XIII; 19; 52
Smith, M. S.: Explorations in Papua.—XV; 39; 313-334.
Barbour, T.: Notes on a zoological collecting trip to Dutch New Guinea.— XXIII; 19; 469-84.
} 27 -
243
Bell, J. M.: Some New Zealand voleanoes.—X/YV; 40; 8-25.
Kitson, A. EH. and Thiele, EK. O.: The geography of the upper Waitaki Basin, New Zealand.—XV; 36; 537-553.
Ford, A. H.: The tourist in New Zealand.—XIX; 68; 404-409.
Bell, J. M.: A physiographic section through the middle island of New Zealand.—V1; 38; 273-281.
Mossman, R. C.: The South Orkneys in 1907.—X XXII; 24; 348-355.
Warren, M. R.: The Orkney Islands.—X VI; 122; 344-355.
Thompson, G. A.: The smiling isle of Passamaquoddy.—X XIV; 39; 67-78.
Chineh, B. J.: The formation of the Filipino people-—X X XIX; 10; 53-69.
The peoples of the Philippines.—House Doe., Vol. 111; 671; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4890.
Smith, W. D. P.: Geographical work in the Philippines.
Ten years in the Philippines.—X XIII; 19; 141-9.
Vassal, G.: A visit to the Philippines.—X X XII; 27; 57-71. .
Worcester, D. C.: Head hunters of Northern Luzon.—X XIII; 23; 833-931.
Tower, W.S.: The climate of the Philippines.—VI,; 35; 253-60.
Gannett, H.: The Philippine census.—V1; 37; 257-271.
Crandall, R.: The riches of the Philippine forests —X X XVIII; 16; 10228- Bide
Champlin, J. D.: The discoverer of the Philippines.—V!; 43; 587-97.
Barrett, J.: The Philippine Islands and their environment.—X XIII; 11; 1-15.
Grosvenor, G. H.: The revelation of the Filipinos.—X XIII; 16; 1389-192.
Putnam, G. R.: Surveying the Philippine Islands—-X XIII; 14; 437-41.
Gannett, H.: The Philippine Islands and their people-—X XII]; 15; 91-113.
Benguet, the garden of the Philippines.—X XIII; 14; 203-10.
American development of the Philippines.—X XIII; 14; 197-205.
Atkinson, F. A.: An inside view of Philippine life—XX XVIII; 9; 5571- 5589.
The conquest of the bubonic plague in the PhilipplInes.—X XIII; 14; 185- 195.
The Negritos of Zambales.—X X XII; 21; 539-543.
Atlas of Philippine Islands.—Senate Doc. No. 138; Vol. 47; 56th Cong., Ist Sess.; Serial No. 3885.
Worcester, D. C.: The non-Christian peoples of the Philippine Islands.— XXIII; 24; 1157-1255.
XV; 34; 529-544.
244
Worcester, D. C.: Field sports among the wild men of Northern Luzon.— XXIII; 22; 215-67.
Worcester, D. C.: Taal volcano, its recent destructive eruption.—X XIII; 23; 314-67.
Banskett, F. M.: The Philippine cocoanut industry.—X X XVII; 20; 332-39.
Filipino capacity for self-government.—X XV; 199; 65-78.
Adams, H. C.: Snapshots of Philippine America.—X XXVIII; 28; 51-45.
Torbes, E. A.: The United States in Porto Rico.— XXXVIII; 14; 9290- 9311.
Wilson, H. M.: Porto Rico: Its topography and aspects.—VI; 32; 220- 238.
Keye, P. L.: Suffrage and self-government in Porto Rico.—XXXIX; 12; 167-190.
Alexander, W. A.: Porto Rico: Its climate and resources.—VI1; 34; 401- 409.
Osborne, J. B.: The Americanization of Porto Rico —XXXVIII; 8; 4759- 4766.
Larrinaga, T.: The needs of Porto Rico— XIX; 70; 356-59.
Detailed discussion on Porto Rico.— XXIII; 13; 466-70.
Lyle, E. P.: Our experience in Porto Rico—Strategice value of —XXXVIII; 11; 7082-94.
Agricultural resources and capabilities of Porto Rico—House Doc. No. 171; Vol. 48; 56th Cong., 2nd Sess.; Serial No. 4117.
Hulbert, H. B.: The island of Quelpart—V1; 37; 396-408.
Slosson, E. E.: Rarotonga (an island in the Southern Pacifie)—XIX; 72; 1403-1408.
The islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon.—X XXII; 19; 297-302.
Hawes, C. H.: A visit to the island of Sakhalin——XXXII; 19; 183-190.
General sketch, 1910—Salvador.—VII; 31; 325-38.
Chambers, F. T.: American Samoa.—V1; 37; 641-647.
Kellogg, V. L.: American Samoa.—X XI; 5; 18-30.
Churchill, W.: Geographical nomenclature of American Samoa.—VI1; 45; 187-93.
The ruins of Selinus.—X XIII; 20; 117-19.
Bosson, G. C.: Sicily, the battlefield of nations and of nature-——X XIII; 20; 97-117.
Perrine, C. D.: An eclipse observer’s experiences in Sumatra.—X XVI; 67; 289-305.
Chureh, J. W.: Tangier Island.—XVI; 128; 872-82.
Richardson, C.: Trinidad and Bermudez asphalts.—XXVI; 81; 19-35; 170-182.
Keller, A. G.: Notes on the Danish West Indies.—III; 22; 99-110.
Physical history of Windward Islands.—House Doe., Vol. 111; 244; 58th Cong., 3rd Sess.; Serial No. 4890.
Powell, E. A.: In Zanzibar.—XIX; 71; 974-980.
Powers, S.: Floating Islands.—VIII; 12; 1-27.
Powers, S.: Floating Islands.—X XVI; 79; 303-308.
Childs, H. P.: Zanzibar, story of trade, traffic, ete —X XIII; 23; 810-24.
POLAR REGIONS.
Stefansson, V.: Misconceptions about life in the Aretie.—VI; 45; 17-32.
Stefansson, V.: The technique of Arctic winter travel.—VI; 44; 340-347.
Stefansson expedition.—VI; 46; 184-91.
Reid, H. F.: How could an explorer find the pole? X XVI; 76; 89-97.
Chamberlin, T. C.: Topography of Greenland.—VIII; 1; 167-194.
Scenes from Greenland.—X XIII; 20; 877-91.
Talman, C. T.: The outlook in polar explorations.—X XVIII; 49; 179-88.
Researches in the Greenland Sea.—X X XII; 26; 77-80.
Kikkelsen: Expedition to Hast Greenland.—XV; 41; 313-324.
Aspects of the coasts of Northeast Greenland.—VI; 41; 92-94.
Comer: A geographical description of Southampton Island and notes upon the Eskimo.—VI; 42; 84-90.
Mossman: The Greenland Sea: Its summer climate and ice distribution.— OXON 252 23i1-30s
The northeast passage.—VI; 38; 25-27.
Seton, HE. T.: The Arctic prairie—XX XI; 48; 513; 725; also Vol. 49; 61- AV
Amundson’s northwest passage.—VI; 38; 27-9.
Wellman’s polar trip and polar air ship.— X XIII; 17; 205-28.
Fleischman, M.: Seventy-five days in the Arctics—X XIII; 18; 489-46.
The discovery of the pole-—X XIII; 20; 892-6; 896-16.
Keen, D.: Arctic mountaineering by a woman.—X XXII; 52; 64.
Honors to Peary.—X XIII; 18; 49-60.
246
Stone, A. J.: Camp life in Arctic America —X X XI; 34: 61:5.
European tributes to Peary.— X XIII; 21; 536-540.
The discovery of the North Pole-—X XIII; 21; 63-83.
Tarr, R. S.: Human life in the Arctic —X XI; 10; 144-51.
Stokes, F. W.: Aurora Borealis.—X; 65: 488-495.
Discoveries in Arctic regions. animals, ete-~-—X XXVIII: 1; 149-156.
Stone, A. J.: A day’s work of an Arctic hunter—X XXVIII; 1; 85-92.
Stefansson, V.: The distribution of human and animal life m Western Arctic America.—XV; 41: 449-460.
Peary, R. E.: Field work of the Peary Aretic Club.—VIII; 4; 1448.
MaeRitchie, D.: Kayaks of the North Sea— XXXII; 28; 126-133.
Amundsen, R.: The Norwegian South Polar Expedition —X XXII; 29; 1-15.
Evans. E. R.: The British Antarctic Expedition —XX XII; 29; 621-637.
Riggs, T.: Our Arctic boundary —XX XVII: 20; 417-26.
Balch, E. S.: Antaretic names.—VI; 44; 561-581.
Balch, E. S.: Recent Antarctic discoveries——VI; 44: 161-67.
Balch, E. S.: Scott’s second Antarctic Expedition —VI; 44; 270-77.
South Polar exploration —X XIII; 22: 407-9.
Amundsen’s attainment of the South Pole—X XIII; 23: 205-8. “a
Bruce. W. S.: The area of unknown Antarctic regions compared with Australia, unknown Arctic regions and British Isles—X XXII; 22: 373- 374A.
The Amundsen expedition to the magnetic pole —X XXII; 22; 38-42.
Balch, E. D. S.: The heart of the Antaretic——V1; 42: 9-21.
Littlehales. G. W.: The south magnetic pole—VI: 42: 1-8.
Peary, R.: The struggle for the south pole—X XXVIII: 24; 113-16.
Priestley, R. E.: Work and adventures of the northern party of Captain Scott’s Antarctic expedition, 1910-13; XV: 43: 1-14.
Honors for Amundsen.—X XIII; 19; 55-76.
An ice-wrapped continent— XXIII; 18; 95-117.
The scientific results of the National Antarctic expedition-—X XXII; 21: 318-322.
Balch, E. S.: The British Antarctic expedition —VI; 41; 212-14.
Shackleton: Antarctic, the heart of —X XIII; 20; 972-1007.
The south polar expedition —X XIII; 21; 167-170.
Pillsbury. J. E.: Discoveries in Wilkes land—X XIII: 21; 171-3.
Gannett, H.: The great sea barrier—X XIII; 21; 173-4.
247
David, T. W.: Antarctica and some of its problems.—XV; 43; 605-27.
Greely, A.: American discoverers of the Antarctic continent.—X XIII; 23; 298-314.
Mawson, Sir D.: Australasian Antarctic expedition, 1911-14.—XV; 44; 257-86.
Balch, K. S.: Wilkes land.—VI; 38; 30-32.
Nordenskjold, O.: Antarctic nature, illustrated by a description of North- west Antarctic—XYV; 38; 278-289.
Markham, C. R.: Review of the results of twenty years of antarctic work originated by the Royal Geographical Society.—XV; 39; 575-80.
The form of the Antarctic continent.— X X XII; 26; 262-65.
Hoffs, W. H.: Seott’s last expedition.—VI; 46; 281-5.
The German Antarctic expedition.—V1; 45; 423-30.
Amundsen, R.: The Norwegian south polar expedition.—X X XII; 29; 1-1
Bruce, W. S.: Shackleton’s transaretic expedition of 1914—XXX; 7 84-85.
Taylor, J.: Physiography and glacial geology of East Antarctica.—XV; 44; 365-82; 452-67; 553-65.
9
vo. FT v0 ‘5
OCEANS.
Austin: Problems of the Pacific: Commerce of the great ocean.—X XIII; 13; 3038-18.
Damas, D.: The oceanography of the Sea of Greenland.—X X XIII; 1909; 369-383.
Church: Interoceanic communication on the Western Continent.—XV; 19; 313-54.
Murray, J.: Exploring the ocean’s floor —XVI; 541-550.
Cornish: Dimensions of deep sea waves.—XV; 23; 423-44.
Fryer, J. C. F.: The Southwest Indian Ocean.—X/YV; 36; 249-71.
Murray: Articles on oceanography.—XV; 12; 113-37.
Gardiner, J. S.: The Indian Ocean.— XV; 28; 313-333; 454-471.
Murray: The deep sea.—VI; 43; 119-126; also XX XII; 26; 617-24.
Peterson, O.: On the influence of ice-melting upon oceanic circulation.— XV; 24; 285-333.
Kirchoff, A.: The sea in the life of the nations —X X XIII; 1901; 389-400.
Holder, C. F.: The glass bottom boat.—X XIII; 20; 761-78. ;
The pageant of the mastery of the sea— XX XVI; 177; 155-67.
245
Page, J.: Ocean currents in 1902.—X XIII; 13; 135-43.
Thunn, Sir J.: The Western Pacific: Its history and present condition.— XV; 34; 271-89.
Blockman, L. G.: The Pacific, the msot explored and least known region of the globe.—X XIII; 19; 546-63.
Geikie, J.: The ‘“‘deeps” of the Pacific Ocean and their origin XXXII; 28; 113-126.
Murray, Sir J.: Deep sea deposits and their distribution in the Pacific Ocean.—XV; 19; 691-711.
Hepworth, W. W. C.: The Gulf Stream.—XYV; 44; 429-52; 534-48.
Semple, E. C.: Oceans and enclosed seas.—V1; 40; 193-209.
On the importance of an international exploration of the Atlantic Ocean in respect to its physical and biological conditions —X X XII; 25; 23-28.
Temperature on the eastern and western coasts of the North Atlantic Ocean.—X X XII; 24; 171-173.
Semple, [ee Ghia. comparative study of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans— XLIT; 3; 121-29; 172-79.
Putnam, G. R.: Hidden perils of the deep — xX XIII; 20; 822-37.
Thompson, B.: Lost explorers in the Pacific —XV; 44; 12-29.
A StTupY OF THE COLLECTIONS FROM THE TRENTON AND BuAack RiveR ForRMATIONS oF New YORK.*
By H. N. Corye tu.
The Trenton limestone in general is a formation made up of thin bedded, dark bluish gray, compact limestone separated by thin shaly layers, except the upper 25 to 35 feet which consist of a coarse crystalline, thick bedded limestone with thin shaly partings. This formation is everywhere very fos- siliferous.
The type locality for the Trenton limestone is in the southwest part of the Remsen quadrangle. along West Canada creek, at Trenton Falls. A detailed section of the formation shown here is given by Prosser and Cummings, who have measured the entire thickness of 270 feet with great care. The upper portion does not appear in the Trenton Falls section, yet the work of W. J. Miller shows that there is only a few feet omitted, since the crystalline beds are at no place more than 35 feet thick upon which rest the Canajoharie shale.
The bottom of the Trenton formation is not shown in the Trenton Fall gorge, still the dip of the strata and the presence of the Lowville limestone a few miles to the southeast makes it seem very probable that the lowest beds in the gorge are not far from the base of the Trenton formation. Thus allow- ing for the necessary addition to the top and the bottom, the thickness of the complete section is at least 280 to 300 feet. The measurements taken at Rome and at the Globe Woolen Mills at Utica show a greater thickness of the Trenton to the southward and southwestward.
The formations during the early Paleozoic were deposited upon a sink- ing ocean bottom. The coast line receded to the northward. Younger forma- tions overlap the older ones everywhere along the cost line and lay upon the precambrian rocks. The Trenton is 510 feet in the Globe Woolen Mills well at Utica, 575 feet in the Chittenango well, and 435 feet (including the Low- ville) in the wellat Rome. In the vicinity of Trenton Falls it has a maximum thickness of 300 feet. Along the Precambric boundary there are indications
that it is much less. Considering the slope of the Preecambrie floor and differ-
A summary of the literature is given by Prof. E. R. Cummings in the Bulletin of the New York State Museum, No. 34, Vol. 7, May, 1900.
ence of elevation between Bardwell Mill where the upper Trenton is shown, and the mouth of Little Black creek where the Precambrian outcrops, no such great thicknesses can be present. The Trenton at Bardwell Mill is probably not more than 150 feet.
To the south of Trenton Falls there is an increase in the thickness of about 20 feet per mile southwestward. Between the Globe Woolen Mills and Trenton Falls there is a difference in thickness of 210 feet in the distance of 14 miles. In the well at Rome the Trenton is 375 feet, and 20 miles to the north- east it is from 200 to 250 feet. The general fact drawn from these indicates a sloping floor on which the Trenton was deposited, of 6 to 20 feet per mile to the southwestward; the slope being less in the northwestern part.
The narrow gorge cut by the West Canada river extends for two and one- half miles up the river from Trenton Falls to the village of Prospect. Its walls are nearly vertical, varying in height from 100 to 200 feet. Through- out the entire course there are six waterfalls: the Sherman fall, near the southern end of the gorge, is about 30 feet high and a short distance above the power house; High falls is one-fourth mile south of the railroad bridge; it consists of an upper and a lower part with a total of 128 feet; the fall at the dam, just north of the railroad bridge, is about 40 feet high; and the Prospect falls at the upper end of the gorge is 25 or 30 feet high. The total fall of the stream within the two- and one-half miles is about 360 feet, according to the topographic map. In spite of the steep slope of the stream bed the south- ward dip of the strata permits an exposure of only 270 feet of the formation.
Two systems of joints predominate in the Trenton, which are distinctly indicated by the appearance of the walls of the gorge. Nearly everywhere the joints are vertical, at least at a very high angle, and extend in an east- west and a north-south direction. The east-west system can be seen extend- ing across the gorge, especially at the falls, which are caused by the existing joints. When large blocks of stone are removed by the current during high water, a new perpendicular surface is exposed over which the water falls. Thus the falls recede. This is especially seen in the case of Sherman Falls. During high water, the water falls over one joint plane on the east and another on the west, while during low water the entire stream falls over the rear joint on the west. The block of limestone between them will eventually be removed.
The vertical walls of the gorge are maintained by the breaking off of large
blocks of limestone along the north-south joints.
251
In the bed of the Cincinnati creek the joints are enlarged and forms an underground course. The stream disappears for several hundred yards.
The contorted layers in the Trenton Falls section are in two distinct horizons. The lower one is from 4 to 6 feet thick and les at the crest of the lower part of High Fall. It outcrops also in the upper end of the gorge near Prospect.. According to the measurements of Prosser and Cummings it lies 144 feet below the top of the Trenton.
The second layer is from 8 to 15 feet thick and shown along the path oppo- site High Fall and may be traced to Prospect. It hes 65 to 70 feet below the top of the Trenton.
Such contortion of strata does not appear in the outerop of Trenton exposed along Mill Creek.
Vanuxem suggested that as the folded layer was more eyrstalline than the layers above or below, the expansion of crystallization was manifested in the contortion of the crystalizing layer.
T. G. White discovered overturned fold, cross-bedded, channel filling structures that must be explained by other means which would yield a con siderable expansion in excess of the crystallization.
W. J. Miller states that it is thought that the folded structure at Trenton Falls was in reality caused by a differential movement within the mass of the Trenton limestone. That the whole body of the limestone has been moved is clearly demonstrated by the existence of the thrust fault at Prospect. It is easy to see how when the force of compression was brought to bear in the region there would be a tendency for the upper Trenton beds on the upthrow side to move more easily and consequently faster than the lower Trenton beds. A similar explanation would apply to the lower folded zone. The folded zones thus indicate horizons of weakness along which the differential move- ment has taken place. As thus explained it is evident why the strike of the minor folds, the strike of the fault, and the strike of the large low folds of the region should be parallel, and why the contorted strata should be so local in occurrence, because all the phenomena were produced by the same local pressure. The differential movement would also readily account for the rubbed or worn character of the upper and lower sides of the contorted zone.
The topography of the limestone region, underlain by the Trenton, Black river, Tribes Hill and Little Falls dolomite is given by E. R. Cummings, who states in describing the Mohawk valley near Amsterdam, that the lime- stone region is characterized by a low, rolling relief and shallow stream val-
202
leys, except where the streams have been forced to cut new courses through morainic material or because of the obstructions offered by such material have been turned aside to make new rock cuts. The latter is probably the case with the lower courses, at least of the north Chuctanunda and Evaloll, for while they are at present making rock cuts, their banks show deep cuts through boulder clay, and their beds are in no respect those of mature streams, both from the abdundance of water-falls and the irregularity of their slope. The northwestern portion of this region is heavily covered with drift and the topography is more angular on this account. The limestone area is sheard off by the Hoffman ferry fault, along a line running nearly straight from the western central part of Charlton township to a point about one mile south- west of Pattersonville. The topography is also distinctly different upon the adjacent shales (Canajoharie and Schnectady) that abut the entire east face of the fault as shown on the Amsterdam sheet, except at the north where a small area of Trenton is found east of and adjacent to the fault.
TRENTON FALLS SECTION. 1. Sherman Fall.
The lowest strata that outcrop in the Trenton Falls gorge are those at the water level of the pool at the base of the Sherman Fall. They are com- pact, bluish grey, thin bedded limestones interstratified with coarser-grained layers containing numerous well preserved specimens of Prasopora simula- trix. The Prasopora beds form the entire fall. The upper layers of this fall are thin strata, 3 to 5 inches thick, which form a somewhat clearly defined band 23 feet thick. About the middle of the breast of the falls the Prasopora are much larger than elsewhere, forming a distinct layer. The second Pra- sopora zones are the fossiliferous layers just above the crest of Sherman Fall and forming the base of High Falls.
The lists of fossils below were identified from the collections made by Prof. E. R. Cummings in the summer of 1914.
a =abundant e@=common
r=rare ee CalymeneisenanarConradeeeisse een ee ere e Cornyn Otisyqoamnihl asta Celia!) eee eee eee eee r
Sts , CHINO ESE INENGS: eee eer ee en eee a
Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman).................... a Hemiphracnia stenuim irale: Ulrich. 65 aloe ae r lisotelhustciwas deka anes ae Ree Aen ce Orthoceras junceum Hall........................... r-¢ Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby)................-.-.. a Prasopora simulatrix Ulrich........................ aaa Rafinesquina alternata (Hmmons)..................... e Schizocrantaptil oSapil alll eee ene r StiemqatelllanasiSi teases sede ance anes Bee eco es Sila eee nee eas r Trematis terminalis (Hmmons)....................... r
2. Below crest of the lower portion of High Fall.*
The strata, thin and shaly, les at the base of the contorted layer.
following species were collected:
1. >)
3. 4.
Crinoirdeseomients cee hens ue ohn oe ce pe a Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)................. r-¢ Eridotrypa aedilis minor (Ulrich)................... r-@ Prasopora simulatrix orientalis Ulrich .............. aaa
3. A collection at the crest of High Falls yielded the following species:
4. Upper
By GOP ONaiS Drewes oe ee eee ere PT en DS oe r @rinord seomments tay 4. Robe AROS see mee a cee as ce ec Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)................... a Hallopora ampla (Ulmich).......................... r-@ Hallopora goodhuensis (Ulrich)...................... a Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby).................. r-@ Prasopora simulatrix orientalis Ulrich.............. aa vhimudichyasexicuay Ulrichi= = s54 eee ens lees eee r High Fall.
253
The
The rocks are thin bedded both in the upper and lower portion of upper
High Fall.
The contorted stratum lies at the base. The following species
were collected:
1. 2. 3.
Arthoclema cornutum Ulrich...................-:... a Calymene senaria Conrad.:......................-. @ Gorynothypardelicatulas(@ames) 2s see soe. le. ee r
*From a collection made by Mr. T. F. Sayer, five feet below the crest of the lower portion of High Falls.
A.” \Crinoid: seements: soe a2) eee oe ee oer eaee aaa 5: _ Dalmanella testudinarias(Dalman) >... fize-pee se pene aaa 6. Hemiphragma tenuimurale Ulrich.................. a i. Wsotelusieigas. de) Kaya 7.4. Aloe ee ee ere eee ¢ 8 Moitoclema? annridulum™ Ulrich) +222... 4. ee eee r-¢ G2 Nematopora ovalis Uirichvsee: ser eee ee eee nee r-¢ 10). sPachydictya acuta (Hall) ee a ee pee eee Cc hie Pachydichya.numbriata, Wii Ch ser ee eee eee r 1222 Platystrophia. (rentonensis m= Sp-> ee ee eee c 13: ‘Plectambonites sericeus-(Sowerby)...............-- T-¢ 14. Prasopora simulatrix orientalis Ulrich ................ a 155 —Ratnesguina-aliernata (Wnamons)) so je eee eae r low eRhinidichyaresouas Ulrich s:4- he see a ee ie eee r Wee Rihimidichyapalperal Uinichis sete eee a eee r-¢
5. Mill Dam Falls. The Mill Dam Falls or Fourth Falls is formed of thin bedded, rather
coarse-grained and fossiliferous limestone. The following species were identified:
(P= (Chasmotopora revieulatas(Eall) 2 ee eee eee eee €
2, < “Orin oid ySeLIMENTS ete ha eee ee Fe ee eae a
oe Dalmanellartesiiamasta CP alnvam) See eee a
4. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby)..................- a
j= LuMIMIdiGhya pallperar Uli Chest ee ae ee te nen r-¢
6. Power Dam Interval.
The Power Dam Interval includes almost al! of the division of the Prosser and Cummings report except the upper few feet, which were collected from separately. The base of this interval is marked by a heavy stratum of lime- stone. Above this lies thin-bedded compact lime-stone, part of the strata somewhat crystalline, separated by shaly layers. At the upper end of the gorge the layers show the greatest amount of folding visible anywhere in the Trenton Falls section. The strata are very fossiliferous and the following species were collected:
iL sGalymreneisenariai@onradt:) yee ae ee eee a 2. ¢'Ceramoporella-distineta, Ulmeh o.s. se es ee ee ce 3. Chasmotopora refienlata, (Ealll) 22s ee oe ee eee aaa
259
4. Conymowarjog, Clelieairulle, (Vemnes)),. onc oecsnpenctcosucce a S, Compmownriog, imi) Cele) .cccnkc0ccosacenoncaaccsoee a
Gyan ony moby parcuurorc ap Wilt chia ate se eie ey ae Bere a
ere OTM OLA SCQMMEMESt-harese A Uses math eeu nt Otte ie apa aa S, IDellnamelle, wesiuclinerae, (Dealing). ..52cecccccconce aaa Jae Diploclemastrentonense Wilrich = 49s. 4e eee sss aes r lO Beaker Oty pa nckuwexd Ua ty nies es cee eng toe Pea Sh ie Ills (GisistiRoyowre! snReenNMVeIMISS 4 ok ce ecco sece obs suonsscuces r-¢ 2, leona: gimeiilenee (UMC) 5 cg ocsescubsenocec odes IE 13. Hemiphragma tenuimurale Ulrich................. r-¢ TASS elSoteluisnoioasncdeykeanyerrcc sian sete enter a airs r-¢ loeebepiacnanehanlottae) Weiceorerrias + ieee, eae a Ik, Ibejnueveney waco, (ME 6a Wc ocbstccouoccsddes dees aa Vieelitoclemasvyetusiuman (Bassler) niger en hear ae r ie evintoclemae mun culms Wich ess yee en ee @ 18) INemneno ore, Onvaillis: WINMOlN.s oo sdoconectasooec codecs r-c 20 eA Orthocerassiragiments.-1. ie ey eats Ses Seer eae if ZAR VEO) siihac O Guim onmMe MN bSew ase ae, ee cress Wty: eh cee eon ews re r-@ Ze eevee avouiiey CERN). Se cunescebe csitonaconels ce r-¢ Dex, JeRvelinreiGinve, Tomales) Wits@lits5esokeleecss+cceesbace ip 24. Pianodema subaequata conradi (Winchell)............ ie PAS, Men SMTROI OANA), HECTOR is FOS 2 oseececeo soe oceo see ¢ 26. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby)................... a Dil me EASODOLAMUAS IOS we NS SYM er AL ne SEAT pie ieee 2 Naa eet oe! c Asn. IoD, COmanclseh UWlbaelix j4654e0e scene eaceotces. r-¢ ae)s levees ore, wasullericy Wheels oss as etnactaosbedonvecc aa 50 aezrasopokas sim aprixe Uilrtchinne shee se een ae eet ene a Sil, lemmas pumme: eilieniaehesy CNimmamMeNs) 5 2.2scanoreobeeses @ Se atinesquimardelfordea (Conrad) «2s a see = ee a Soy HRV MMT CIG tye See ye ye elas eats i Sicha out eeneacee 2 vl. Ialonuanobionnyey joemogorsits UNIO no As aa oae nee Gah eces eee ce 35. Rhynchotrema increbescens (Hall)..................- r SOME eS UIST a Le MlaR MSP eee hy bad SEAN rors ed wie ee ate marae cose aa
7. Interval from top of High Falls to top of Mill Dam Falls.
From these thin-bedded fossiliferous strata were collected the following species:
256
Arthoclema: cormutuime Uae =, ao oe aaa ces eee e Calymeneisenaria .Conrade 2.4.0 oe 52. 2cutaee ee a r-¢ Chasmotopora reticulata Hall...................... r-¢ Crinom! seemente: se. 3. 28 Ade a eee oe e Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)................ aaa Eseharopora ‘recta. (Hally:) 2 2'es2.2% wet aoe be ao oe r Hemiphragma tenuimurale Ulrich................... r Leplotrypa: Spi) Seo oe san ie = ee r Mitoclema? mundulum-Uilrieh. 22.2 0as0.5. sence - 2 a Nematoporajiovalisy WICK ase eee ere eee r-¢ Pachydictya acuta (Hall)t oe: ee ee ee c Platystrophia trentonensis n Spies. i222 eee a Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby).........--..------ c iPrasopora conoideavUlsich= 4. ose eee eee ee c Rafinesquina alternata (Emmons)...........------.- r-¢ Rbhinidictya'exirua {Ulneh. 2422) 23/42 Ae ee ee T-¢ Rhmidictyasmutabilis: (Ulrich) co: S224 se2 eee eee r-¢
8. Prospect Quarry, below the crystalline layers.
Below the heavy gray crystalline layer that caps the Trenton limestone and in a very thin parting of 8 to 10 inches, that outcrops on the east side of the gorge at Prospect in an old abandoned quarry opposite the large crusher quarry, bryozoa are exceedingly abundant and are weathered out from the
matrix. A small Prasopora is very abdunant.
The crystalline layers above contain a few bryozoa, but difficult to pre-
pare for study.
The species collected from the weathered parting are as follows:
SeHNAN a wD &
Conynotrypasiniiata. Challe. cree eee nee eee r Crinoidh sep ments esk caus ss apie ee ee a Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman).................-- e Bridotrypaexizna- Olrichi= sees ee a es eee eee c Hallopora.coodhuensis,(Uinieh) o-oo aye ee eee ee a Hemiphragma tenuimurale Ulrich................-..- a [sotelustoigas de Kay... es eee ec eee ee ec Pachydictys acuta. (Hall) 2 oo ee G Platystfephia. trentonensis 8s spi) cto bee Gs ee ¢
Pleclambonites sericeus (Sowerby)..........-------- r-¢
NU NP LASOP OLA AM ANASP ea intca Sele sds cal at Ae re meh mtace edie a G 1D, IProloronas, iummmelkocry, UibIClit, oe eke vandaecsnoeae ass r SaaS tromlatellarmiacsip mea imes eit ell sn mewn mate hn. com Gar Laie aa 1A An ZOspinayre ciilavarostrisn (lai) ee yates ae r-¢
9. In the collection from the Quarry in the crystalline layers at Prospect were the following species:
Ile Cryasinoclori, olovmeey) (EIR) 0S Gok no sconcobenoos- san lf DEEN MO CLENTANS Ona nea A es inert ote lt hal mat on se ata Mihscsttgtee anata i Sn Aedooelemme Coramolnicn (WIKI, 5.5 %sbo0 lhe ck eosecoce Tf AC ailyvamenexsenarclam © Onaciseee ian irae ner ae r-@ 5. Chasmotopora reticulata (Hall)...................... Cc Gaur Crinoidssegimenbtsy ees et renters a oe eure a 7. Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman).................. r-¢ 8. Hallopora goodhuensis (Ulrich)...................... ec @); Jelelkayovoven onueyehrenney Willen Gis 0 Oe eo Seo beh eeu es ce ele ec r IO; digosiclus) aieas GO IMA oss s occ dsohebacnosscaneesnae @ Inlo* Wibiio@leman saabnncholtornn UNNI, 22 y5ee oka nee see esse 5: r U2, . exvclayvchiomyea, evoutieh (IRIBIN) oss ccc c kc scone ddcesocncce e 13. Pianodema subaequata (Conrad)................... r-@ 14. Platystrophia trentonensisn.sp............... Saas a De ce 15. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby).................. r-C Grey Brasoporayr Spm wie el er cue Ne he deta OMT ace Mee iy e 17 (Preasojoora, Sernaran (ONO) {dc odo eoedebsenevsec ese: c 18. Rafinesquina alternata (Hmmons).................. r-¢ POSH AR Lan ANG G bays S TOM hehe meals suse te a FeU eel el a eles kes ek Rad @ 20: Rhynchotremaimerebescens (Hall), ..............-- .T-¢
TRENTON AND Buack RIVER OF THE PATTERSON QUARRIES.
At the east end of the quarries, about forty rods from the house of Joe
Jeffers, is the following section in descending order:
6. Mesotrypa-Plectambonites bed, thin limestone. Trenton. 5. Strophomena bed, crystalline, massive limestone. Amsterdam ls.
4. Massive erystalline bed with some Strophomena, and containing numerous light grey pebble-ike masses of Stromatocerium and Solenopora. The layer rests directly with a sutured contact upon the Black river. Amsterdam ls.
5084—17
3. About like No. 2 but even darker, more fossils, and containing num- erous large fragments of a yellowish, sandy limestone. ..1 ft. 3 in. 2. More massive than No. 1 and lighter colored. Very hard. Few fos- sils, some gastropods separated by rather uneven contact from INGOs A ee laste oe FA! 2° SECS OME ae i ee 1 ft. 6 in. 1. Drab, hard limestone, fine grained, light, weathering to rather thin layers. Columnaria abundant throughout. Batostoma varium abundant.
The Trenton in this section lies below the base of the Trenton of the Tren- ton Falls gorge, and is known as basal Trenton. The beds are massive, ery- stalline and contain light weathering “‘pebbles,’”’ (Solenopora and Stroma- tozerium). The Black river also contains similar pebbles and many angular masses of hard, blue, unfossiliferous limestone. The Lowville (Birdseye) is either absent or represented by a thin layer only. The Black river contains a large branching Batostoma (Batostoma varium) in considerable abundance, together with Tetradium and Columnaria. The latter is sometimes in very large masses.
The Strophomena is especially abundant in the massive lower part of the Trenton.
There is a disconformity between Nos. 1 and 2 and between 3 and 4.
The upper layers of the quarry are thin, very dark colored, with black shaly partings. They are very fossiliferous, containing especially Pleetambon- ites, Mesotrypa and Cryptolithus. Small Bryozoa are abundant.
The dip of the rock is variable but is generally about two degrees south- west.
The Amsterdam limestone of Cushing includes the massive beds of the so-called Trenton and the Black river at this outcrop. The following species were collected:
ls JBRyWoSnommey Cleetonems (Wihittelt,..cs0cc on onvenccucdosne r 2, IBAROSHOUNE Veneunin MONTANE, doco teo Son oe son wn lo gee © r 3. Bythopora herricki (Ulrich)......................... C Ae Calyameneysenariany ©ontadusne iinet sein eee een ae eC 5. Chasmotopora reticulata (Hall)...................... a 6. -Columnaria halli Nicholson......................... @ fe: NOLIN OLGMSELTNEMtS).) 2.5 4) ue i ae ey a ene yeoman a
8. Cryptolithus tessellatus Green...................... @
9. Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)................. r-¢ 10; Diselaano non Comiilvems Wiha. 5cecodeccunscouteoons G iil; Ws@laannojorene ilhemiigrs WIE 6 cop decocsstaete core r-¢ IQ, Weelnaixojororta, ine, ISlello oc oscoccannconconcccvcca000. G 1B. . Wgclienoos, Swloccin, (Wiis) 6. 5esocecocusurccdoque e Ze hiospira, sub tilistrtatan (Ela) ees ee see eee en r 15, IMlesomayoes wwliineeivesn CNMelm@lseT)\. 6+ 655ce0c0ccescee a 16. Mitoclema? mundulum Ulrich..................... r-¢ IVs INIGutenojnoma, Onell) WMAOCNssogccccauosveouaucooutae r-€ lS, leaelaxycliouyye, exoutizs CEM) oo. 5ccnoecdcasnsbcco0c0cene e iS), Jeavelagychicuayeas ssianloraienca) WWNiniGln. op bce once eo aob soot]. r-¢ AQ). IPaclaarclioinna, jamal, WWINaWelN. once dcccencduccnanoroes e Ai, IeReACMO DOR tingioens WANE s55c05e00sscnoccbe cous r-¢ Fe,’ WAHT SRARO] ANE) THREVINOUEIASS 1S ID, ocndaceecovoatnoocce r-¢c 23. Plectombonites sericeus (Sowerby)................... a mal piso xoen Soaileyneo< WMG prob ecusbeocosecouree r-¢ 20. Rafinesquina alternata (Kmmons)................... rr AD. Ravan housre) mans olbiss (QIAN) sg oeboeecbecoeessecode e 2. Rdavuanohoinvey joswjoereal, WINN. .senececnsaascersdeuce r-¢ 28. Rhynchotrema inerebescens (Hall).................. r-@ 29. Solenopora compacta (Billings)..................... aa 30. Stictoporella eribrosa Ulrich........................ @ 31. Stromatocerium canadense Nicholson and Murie...... c SYy, (SIRO NACI maroUNeVeNiE) (Sinejoeiel) . <soceessuaencscace aa
The collection from the Black river of the Pattersonville section (Lower Amsterdam) formation, contains the following species:
1. Batostoma supberbum (Foord)............. Ege eae: a 7, OBIS ONG, Weyenebaa Willing 6s eecessnesoeo- OPM en aa oy, (Chilynaine senginty. Comrncle os ss Senkes ae deodssobeods a 4 Ceramoporellapimterporosa, (Wirich 9 s-5+64. 4. 520408" r S- Olluranneraey, Inellii, INGOs sos eck ed ane seaccoauoaee a OL Crimotlsseomaemis a eet se ee en ee he hoes nid ac As eS a W WDienckowmarjoe, aechilig mariner CURED). poss ac ceh coosesce r Sa scharoporasuiorectan (Wilcich)ree ey anno. oe ae @ OmalsovelusroTeas: dewmWlaniny \ tare ee ie Ponce s tastesiced oleae r NOSgeWichenaliatsprcensehen ge sly hs aah ae aren es Sess 5 eee i
lis -Lheperditia fabulites:(Conrad)s-5....- >) eee a eee eee ee r 12. Rhynidictya mutabilis (QUirieh) 2.2. sdk es eee ee aa 13. Rhinidictya mutabilis senilis Ulrich................. ¢ 14. Rhynchotrema increbescens (Hall).................. r-¢ 15. Solenopora compacta (Billings)..................... aa 16. Streptelasma (Petraia) profundum (Conrad)........... a 17. Strophomena incurvata (Shepard)................... a
18. Zygospira recurvirostris (Hall)
The Trenton B** in the Pattersonville section contains well preserved fossils from which were collected the following species:
I> Batostoma? decipiens: Ulriehoe o> ee ee eee ae r 2." Batostoma svaruim Uriel 3326 Vy a ee races eee r So) Mocdentacimiialiss (Uinich) pe see eee ee ee eee r 4. Bolla. subaequata: Wlreher305 5. ace, <2 ee eae ¢ oe eb yinoporar:hericki. (Winch) ees ee eee ec 6: Halloporitia nes. 2) oe ae ee ee ee r i) .Calymenessenansa Conrad = a4 oe ee oer eee eee c 8. Ceramoporella distineta (Ulrich)...............-...-. T-¢ 9. Ceramoporella interporosa Ulrich.................. r-¢ 10. Ceraurus pleurexanthemus Green................... c 1: -:-Chasmotopora retucmaia (Hall). < sence) oe eee a 12:> ‘Chasmotopora-sublaxa | (Uinich)oss<¢ee eee ane eee c 13: -Coelodema irentonensis (Ulrich)... 2... 22.5.2. -2..22- r-¢ 14; Gornulites flexaosus: (Hall): 2 ene hat. Meee Ae r 15: Crenoidsserments (3.22 ee ee Sac ce eae ee ee a 165 Cryptolithus dessellatus (Greene $2522 eee eee € 7. Dalmanella testudmana (Dalman)2.. see). 222 eee c 18; 4.Dinerthis/pectinella, (Emmons). 2. | seo ek eee ee re 19: SU scharopory ancnlares’ Ulneh ee ee ee eee aes e 20: © Eischaropora corntiuens’ Uilnrieh': 42 eae ees ee ee e 21> Hscharopora:iimtanis Winehe pi ce Ae eee eee r-¢ 22. ischaropora: recta, "Hall? 222%: Soo 6 en oe ae ee a 2D oeyeHScharopora SUDEeCian (Wlnich) ee wa eer eee ¢ 2A. Graptodictya proava (HMichwald)...................- r 20. sHomotrypa subramiosa Oleh 2c 4.2.) ee See ae e r
=Bé New York State Museum No. 34, Vol. 7.
261
Domi lsotelusversas de Way si ei Oe cage claus eral baboons be ace r-¢ 27. Mesotrypa regularis (Foord)........................ a Zea Nema toporayovealis MO lirichy-y sls key poe as | Geren leh use. r-¢ 2 OME Pa chiyi dita SP sn le coN er eee eae AAAs ee Aton > aR r 30) Platystrophiatrentonmensisim spe... 28.4. oe se r-¢ 31. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby)................... a 825) Plectorthis splicatella(blall) sear ee es eae oe anaes nee r Sey, I2iestojorovae, srimmoileymebe Wiha. ooo oe ee cote eb no soe c S4l, 1Banmanmpyrongyemonenrey WIC se sos anos oosaoscheoeoooe r-¢ BH, Jeoni@oulsinis, crore, (OME. g Hoses ea bueebcsuce segues a Bo, Meanchey wails (WMC) oo os6cedecn+ see sse50ne a Sie Hvhinidictyam ntabilts; major (Uinich): a e48 9) ole oee e 38. Rhinidictya OPN UU over eee ON Devel iva naustuly alate i rye Senin wales summer ¢ 39. Rhynchotrema inerebescens (Hall).................. r-¢ A0 Sen S chizocrimusssnodosuspectlalla@a nena weer seer e 41. Stictoporella eribrosa Ulrich........................ c Ae Svictoporellavaneularis) Ulcichieyery eae ee e 43. Strophemna incurvata (Shepard).................... aa 44 wletradellasulbquadrans Wlnichiter) eer eet are r-¢ 45. Trematis terminalis(Hmmons)....................... r 46. Turrilepas canadensis Woodward................... r-¢ 47. TZygospira recurvirostris (Hall)..................... 1-¢
Morpuy CREEK SECTION.
About one and one-half miles down the Mohawk river from Port Jack- son on the south side of the river is an outcrop of the Trenton, Black river and Calciferous (Tribes Hill and Little Falls dolmite).
The basal Trenton resting on the Black river in this outcrop contains the pebble-like masses of Stromatoporoids (Stromatocerium canadense Nichol- son and Murie) as at Pattersonville, and consisting of compact beds of dark crystalline limestone in which Strophomena abound. The difference in ap- pearance of this section and that at Pattersonville quarries 1s chiefly due to weathering.
The Black river is underlain by a compact, nearly unfossiliferous blue limestone, which is probably the Birdseye (Lowville).
Collections were made only from the thin-bedded Trenton above the erys- talline bed. Mesotrypa and Prasopora are most abundant about ten feet be-
262
low the Canajoharie shale contact, but are common throughout the upper 10 feet. In the layers of hard limestone just below the Canajoharie (Utica) shale Cryptolithus is common and about the only fossil. Plectambonites is common in the upper thin Trenton.
At the Amsterdam waterworks just north of the city of Amsterdam, Mesotrypa whiteavesi (Nicholson) and Cryptolithus tessellatus Green are very abundant 10 feet or more below the top of the exposed Trenton. The portion outcropping extends almost to the top of the Trenton formation, but the contact with the Canajoharie shale is not shown. The creek flows in a syncline for some distance below the dam.
At the Barge canal dam across the Mohawk river just above Amsterdam station, there is a quarry, mentioned by Prof. E. R. Cummings, in the New York State Museum Bulletin No. 34, as.showing a splendid section of the Birdseye, Lowville and Black river. The latter is of the same general char- acter as at Pattersonville, being black, fossiliferous and thin-bedded. The most abundant fossils are Streptelasma (Petraia) profundum Conrad and Stromatocerium canadense Nicholson & Murie.
The following species were collected at Morphy’s creek from the Trenton
layers: i Bollajsubscquatay Ulnmicht ern. - ees ee er oe eee r-¢ 2. Calymene senaria Conrad.......................... ¢ 3. Chasmotopora reticulata (Hall).................... r-¢ 4. Chasmotopora sublaxa (Ulrich)..................... r-¢ Dav CHINO GSEOIMENMUS nce ene Ay oc ee eee one oe ean ele ee a 6. Cryptolithus tessellatus Green..................... r-@ Oo. -Cxninegllnng mbere (OMS) ons agssodsonsauaccdessc000- r 8. Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)................... @ 9. Eridotrypa aedilis minor (Ulrich).................... e OPEB rid Ofisyoaiexdouaie 0) lnc ee iin r-¢ Li Tsotelustoigas de: dayne secon: nici tence ace cians G 12. Leperditia fabulites (Conrad)........................ e 13. Mesotrypa whiteavesi (Nicholson).................. aa 14. Mitoclema? mundulum Ulrich..................... r-¢ Poot Mionotryparncn. Spyies a. Save eis epee On Oe ran Oe aa 16. Nematopora ovalis Ulrich......................... r-¢ Mer eRachydictyasactitan (Elalll) peepee meet cic sci ieeaeeer c 1S; each dictyae pumila Ulrich tamierene inert crt ern G
263
19. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby).................-- @ FAQ, JeRAgOpOUEy Sionwleyiabe WWilhnell. 5 so casacnesesessocauae5 e 21. Rafinesquina alternata (Hmmons)................... T-c 22. Rhinidictya paupera Ulrich........................ ce 23. Rhynchotrema inerebescens (Hall).................. T-¢ CAME el DAU eres V2) OFS IS) Oesea es AUS) Aa gO oa Rae a Cc na cer eRe AE ee r 25 Ay COSspinasrecurvairostrsn (Eales ess. tee eeree r-¢
SECTIONS IN THE VICINITY OF LOWVILLE.
The Lowville limestone capped by the Black river is exposed in a quarry near Mill creek at the corner of Church and Water Streets. It is exposed also in the bed and banks of Mill creek both above and below this point for some distance. This is the type section of the Lowville. Up stream just below where the exposure is covered by the heavy drift, the basal Trenton, with immense numbers of Dalmanella and Bryozoa, is exposed. The collections were made at this place. In several layers the Bryozoa are abundant. The following are the species collected:
ib) Aparchitesfimbriatuse(Wlrich)s e296. 1.4.4.6 ee aoe r PA Pe) Bava OO) XO) EN 43) OAl a eA Re es Re haces OD MERA UE was aa 3. Calymene senaria Conrad...:..........+........... ec A AC OMMATIAE SP emia Get See ea nees ola Sa eat aa 2 r Hap CTIMOLMMSESMICTESR ya Me fae ree eat eet eR ot ce 6. Ctenobolbina ciliata (Hmmons)...................... r i Dalmanella testudinaria (Dalman)))-5 445. 04050-0006" e Si, ls@lneivojnorma, meouay (IBM), .cacccacauccoccascencoense r 9. Hallopora ampla (Ulrich).......................... aa 105 SEHalloporasplendens: (Uinich)e). 2s eee oe aa EET el OPOLA SPs eelstea es teks ore eee eS aw, Momence r A, le Olayyohonve, Grou (BIEN) weak ede coe onnesehebocaeae r 13. Plectambonites sericeus (Sowerby)................--- ec 14. Prasopora simulatrix Ulrich........................ a 15. Rafinesquina deltoidea (Conrad)..................... e Gym diehyasspie apy ws ke cr aeree ase nal cet ear o spsinli cad aca ckoce sale r 7s Swicioooe, ehesernwiby Ib. oo: dsc ees osenoceuseeneous r Sipe Nentaculitesh sper ent eee yes, ak acti leiorens Gee suas r Oy isrematisnterminalis! (Himamons) sss ee eee -e ir
264
The best exposure of the Lowville with overlying Black river and under- lving Pamelia is on the State Road about one mile northeast of Lowville and in the several quarries nearby in the field along the limestone scarp. The coun- try from here slopes southwest exactly with the dip of the rocks. Nothing higher than Black river is exposed. The Lowville weathers to a light drab or dove color, but some of.the layers are darker and occasionally almost as dark as the Black river. The calcite tubes are always present in the Low- ville except towards the base. In most of the layers they are extraordinarily abundant; usually perpendicular within the strata and lying horizontally at the surface. They are probably plants.
Fossils other than plant tubes are rare. Some of the thinner layers are ripple marked.
The whole mass of the Lowville must be 30 or 40 feet thick. Very little of the underlying Pamelia is seen.
The low country to the east and north of the exposure shows bosses of the Pre-Cambrian, and several of these are very near the bottom of the limestone scrap, so that the base of the limestone cannot be far below the lowest expos- ure on the State Road locallity.
The Black river (Leray) is dark colored and lumpy, thick-bedded, weath- ering to a light color but not so light as the Lowville limestone. It is massive in fresh exposure, showing the characteristic yellow streaks and blotches.
Columnaria, Tetradium and Stromatocerium are abundant. Silicified Bryozoa of large size are present. Near the base Strophomena is common. Leperditia is usually common throughout. In fact, the characterisites are practically the same as in the Mohawk Valley and at Valcour Island. The contact between the Black river and Lowville is usually very even and in unweathered masses appears merely as a slight change of color accompanied by the disappearance of the calcite tubes. Sometimes the contact is some- what uneven. It is evidently a disconformity.
SPECIES FROM THE WATERTOWN SECTION.
A short distance up the river from Watertown a collection was made from the lower Trenton, containing the following species:
1. Batostoma winchelli spinulosum Ulrich.............- c 2. Dalmanella testudinana, (Dalman)= sepa see € 3. Hallopors-ampla; (Uliieh) lee See ee = eae a
265
Ae Halloporan soo bensis; (WUnrich) re aaa ieee: 2 a 5. Hallopora splendens Bassler........................ a On lelomauanaoey, cpilllosey Wilsall. sob sco does ensue enue cee @ 7. Prasopora simulatrix orientalis Ulrich....:........... a
The similarity of the New York fauna to that of upper Mississippi basin as given by Ulrich is shown by the following lists. Of the 108 species identi- fied, 68 appear in the Trenton and Black river of the upper Mississippi Valley. The collections were made with special reference to the Bryozoan fauna, which accounts for the small number of species reported from the other classes. It is interesting to note the small number of new species found, especially among the Bryozoa, notwithstanding the fact that very lit- tle work had been done on that class from collections of the Trenton and Black river of New York. A description of these will be given in a succes- sive paper.
SPECIES FROM TRENTON AND Buack River or New YorK.
(Those marked with an asterisk appear in the Trenton and Black River of the upper Mississippi Valley. T-Trenton. B-Black River.)
Bryozoa. 1. Arthoclema sp. (T) OA ecornutum (T, B) *3. Batostoma? decipiens (T, B) *4, varium (T, B) a5. supberbum (B) *6, winchelli spinulosum (T, B) 7. Bythopora sp. (T, B) *8. herricki (T, B)
*9. Halloporina n. sp. (T) *10. Ceramoporella distincta (T, B)
Sable interporosa (T, B) *12. Chasmatopora reticulata (T, B) *13. sublaxa (T)
*14. Corynotrypa delicatula (T)
lta: turgida (T)
*16. inflata (T)
*17. Coeloclema trentonensis (T, B)
266
*18. Diploclema trentonense (T') *19. Eridotrypa exigua (T)
*20. aedilis minor (T, B) *21. Kscharopora angularis (T, B) a22* confluens (T, B) ee ? limitaris (T, B) #24, recta (T)
Oe subrecta (T, B)
26. Graptodictya proava (T) *27. Hallopora ampla (T, B)
*28. angularis (T, B) *29. goodhuensis (T) 30. splendens (T)
31. MHelopora sp. (T)
aoe quadrata (T) *33. Homotrypa callosa (T) *34, subramosa (T, B)
*35. Hemiphragma tenuimurale (T) 36. Leptotrypa sp. (T)
37. Lioclema vetustum (T)
38. Mesotrypa regularis (T)
39. whiteavesi (T)
*40. Mitoclema? mundulum (T) 41. Monotrypa n. sp. (T)
*42. Nematopora ovalis (T)
43. Pachydictya sp. (T)
*44, acuta (T) *45, fimbriata (T, B) *A6. pumila (T, B)
*48. Phaenopora incipiens (T) 49. Prasopora n. sp. (T)
*50. conoidea (T, B)
cole insularis (T)
=). selwyni (T)
*53 simulatrix (T, B)
#54, simulatrix orientalis (T, B)
*55. Proboscina tumulosa (T, B)
86.
Protocrisina exigua (T) Rhinidictya exigua (T, B) mutabilis (T, B) mutabilis major (T, B) mutabilis senilis (B) paupera (T, B) Stictopora elegantula (T) Stictoporella ecribrosa (T, B) angularis (T, B) Stigmatella n. sp. (T)
Brachiopoda.
Dalmanella testudinaria (T, B) Pianodema subaequata (T, B) Pianodema subaequata conradi (T, B) Dinorthis pectinella (T, B) Leptaena charolottae (T, B) unicostata (T) Platystrophia trentonensis (T) Plectambonites sericeus (T) Plectorthis plicatella (T, B) Rafinesquina alternata (T, B) deltoidea (T, B) Rhynecotrema increbescens (T, B) Schizocrania filosa (T) Strophomena incurvata (T, B) Trematis terminalis (T) Zygospira recurvirostris (T, B)
Crinoidea. Crinoid segments (T, B) Schizocrinus nodosus (T) Pelecypoda.
Ambonychia ef obtusa (T)
267
*95. *96.
ST *98.
99. 100.
101. 102. *103.
*104, 105. *106.
107.
*108.
Ostracoda. Aparchites fimbriatus (T) Kloedenia initialis (T, B) Bollia subaequata (T) Ctenobolbina ciliata (T) Cytherella? rugosa (T) Leperditia fabulites (T, B) Primitia mammata (T, B) Tetradella subquadrans (T)
Trilobita.
Calymene senaria (T, B) Ceraurus pleurexanthemus (T, B) Cryptolithus tessellatus (T) Tsotelus gigas (T, B)
Cirripedia.
Turrilepas canadense (T) Cornulites fiexuosus (T)
Gastropoda.
Liospira subtilistriata (T) Tentaculites sp. (T) Conularia sp. (T)
Coelentrata.
Columnaria halli (T, B) Solenopora compacta (T, B) Streptelasma (Petraia) profundum (B)
Stromatoporoidea.
Stromatocerium canadense (T)
Cephalopoda.
Orthoceras junceum (T, B)
269
GAMMA COEFFICIENTS AND SERIES.
I. THe Corrricients. 1. The function.
Va@+y+ °) IM(@sE Wy wGak ly)
will be called a gamma coefficient of codrdinates x, y, , and parametersa,b, ,
(axby -) =(ax+by+ ')
and a multinomial coefficient when each parameter is unity. We shall use Greek letters to denote coérdinates taken from the series 0, 1, 2,3, ~
At points of discontinuity, the sum of the co6rdinates is zero or a negative integer. ‘These points are excluded in the following properties.
2. A gamma coefficient with a negative integral codrdinate is zero.
3. Zero coordinates and their parameters may be omitted, as (axbycO) = (axby).
4. The gamma coefficient of a point wpon an axis equals the parameter of that axis, as (ax) = a. .
5. -The gamma coefficient of any point is the swm of the gamma coefficient of the preceding points (a preceding point being found by diminishing one coordinate by a unit). Let En operate to diminish the n’th codrdinate by a unit, then in symbols, *(Note)
(axby )=(H,+H.+..)(axby'*)
This may be extended to the n’th repetition of #,+#,+ =1, where the H’s combine by the laws of numbers.
6. The above property furnishes an immediate proof of the multinomiat theorem. Thus let
p= DOeie >) wd. abe Sp i. e. the summation extends to every point the sum of whose coérdinates is n, there being a given number of variables p, g, |, and corresponding in- tegral codrdinates a, B, ©. Applying art.5 to the coefficients of Fn, we find Fn=(p+q+ ')F(n—1), andsince F1 =p+q-+ ‘, therefore Fn =(p+q+ ')".
7. Zero parameters and corresponding cobrdinates may be omitted, if the result be multiplied by the multinomial coefficient of the omitted codrdinates and one other, the sum, less 1, of the retained coérdinates, as,
(OxOybzecw) = (bzew) Axlylw’), w =z+w-1
8. Hqual parameters and their codrdinates may be omitted, except one to
* (Note) Read » for 7 throughout this paper.
270
a coérdinate the sum of the omitted codrdinates, if the result be multiplied by the multinomial coefficient of the omitted codrdinates, as (axaybz) =(ax’bz)(laly), x =x+y. 9. The coefficient of a parameter of a gamma coefficient is the multinoimal coefficient of the corresponding preceding point. In symbols,
(axby °-)=(ak,+bE,+° °)Ax+ly ')
Il. Gamma SERIES.
10. Let there be m variables, pi, p2, °, of weights 1, 2, , and m cor- responding parameters, a1, @2, . The gamma series of weight n is the sum of all terms in the variables of weight n, each multiplied by the gamma coefficient of its exponents and the corresponding parameters:
(a) (ap)n = D(qerd2e2°") pi po”? *, a1 +2a2-+ °° =n.
This series is not a function of an r’th variable and parameter for r>~n, since the simultaneous exponent and cooérdinate ar, is zero.
By applying art. 5 to the coefficients of (ap)n, we have,
(b) (ap)n = pi (ap) (n—-1) +. . +pn—i(ap)1+aypy where, if r>m, p; =O.
The last term apy, which cannot exist if n >m, is determined by the fact that it is given by the coérdinate a, = 1, and the other coérdinates, zero.
11. The difference equation 10(6) has no solution except the gamma series, since all values of (ap)n are determined from it by taking n= 1,2,3, , successively. It is an equation of permanent form only for n>m, when it is the general linear difference equation of n’th order with constant coefficients Pi, p2, , whose general solution with m arbitarty constants is therefore found in the form of a gamma series. The equation whose roots determine its solution (in the ordinary theory of linear difference equations) is,
(a). 27 = pa™~* + pa * +.-+7m
Symmetric functions Fn of the roots of this equation will also satisfy the difference equation and can therefore be expresssed as gamma series by certain values of the parameters.
Since the roots of (a) are constants, the parameters will in general be certain functions of the roots, but we propose here to determine the sym- metric functions that may be expressed by gamma series with parameters independent of the roots: and find two sets of such functions m in each set,
2701
which can be linearly expressed in terms of each other, and either of these sets suffice to express in linear form all of the symmetric functions sought.
12. The parameter ay of (ap)n,n = 1, 2, ', m, is the coefficient of pn. Thus to determine the possible parameters of a given symmetric function, Fn, we must take a, as the value of F'n for the roots of the equation x! =1, this being what 11 (a) becomes when we put p,=1, and other p’s equal to zero. It remains to test the resulting equations,
Fl=aipi, F2=pi\F1+am, F3 =p,F2+p.F1+a3p;, ete.
13. The sum of the n’th powers, $y.
By art. 12, we find a, = n, for the function s,, and the difference equations are Newton’s equations. Hence
Sy = D(la “Nay) prt pq 1, a +--+ +nan =n
This is Waring’s formula for sp.
14. The homogeneous products, rn.
Here, an=1, giving the correct difference equations,
T™ =Pi, 72 = pit + po, 73 = Pit2 + Pot. + ps, ete.
Hence, 7, = (1p)n, 1. e. the coefficient of a term is the multinomial co- efficient of its exponents. Since the equations are symmetrical in 7, — p, we have also, pn = —(1[—7z])n. These formulas seem to be new, as also those which follow.
15. The homogeneous products, k at a time, rnk. Here a, is a binomial coefficient of the n’th power, whose value is zero for n<k, and 1 for n=k, and, tk =(ap)n, Gy =(-1)*-1K1.n—k.) 16. By applying art. 9 to the coefficients of (ap)n, and substituting Tq =(1p)n, we have (a). (ap)n = pity —1+G2Prty — 2 + °° +4nPy We have therefore,
Pity—1 Py —2 P3tn—3 PsTy —4 PsTy —s, elec.
"q = 1 1 1 1 [lererc: sy="m = 1 2 3 4 F 5 etc "De 1 3 6 Wo) aie he = il 4 10 eli =H = 1 5 etc, "a5 = 1 etc
272
From the top line and the diagonal of units, we continue adding a number to the one above for the next number in the same line (a particular case of ‘art. 5). When n>m, the number of functions in each set is m. The solution of these equations for the second set in terms of the first is found by interchanging corresponding functions, pkrn—k and xnk. Rose Pouiytecunic INsTITUTE.
273
SomME RELATIONS OF PLANE AND SPHERIC GEOMETRY. Davin A. RoTHRocK.
Our notions of plane analytic geometry date to the publication by Descartes of his philosophical work: *“‘Discours dela méthode . . . dans les sciences,” 1637, which contained an appendix on “La Geometrie.”’ In this work Des- cartes devised a method of expressing a plane locus by means of a relation between the distances of any point of the locus from two fixed lines. This discovery of Descartes led to the analytic geometry of the plane, and the extension to three dimensional space gave rise to geometry of space figures by the analytic method. A single equation, f(x.y) = 0, between two variables represents a plane curve; a single equation, F; (x,y,z) = o, in three variables represents a surface in space; and two equations, F, (x,y,z) = 0, F2 (x,y,z) = 0, represent a curve In space.
In the Cartesian system of codrdinates, a space curve is determined by the intersection of two surfaces. If we wish to investigate the curves upon a single surface, that is, if we wish to devise a geometry of a given surface. it may be possible to discover a system of codrdinates upon the surface, such that any surface-locus may be expressed by a single equation in terms of two coordinates, as in plane geometry. The sphere furnishes a simple example in which a locus upon its surface may be represented by a single equation connecting the codrdinates of any point upon the locus.
Toward the end of the eighteenth century a fragmentary system of analytic geometry of loci upon the surface of the sphere was developed. This early work on Spheric Geometry seems to have originated with Euler (1707-1783), but many of the special cases of spherical loci were investigated by Euler’s colleagues and assistants at St. Petersburg. In the present paper are enumerated a number of the early investigations on spherical loci, and a derivation of the equations of sphero-conics in modern notation. The correspondence of the spheric equations to the similar equations of plane
analytics is shown.
5084—18
IN ba | oa
HISTORICAL.
One of the first problems involving a locus upon a sphere to be solved by use of spherical coérdinates was the following: Find the locus of the verter of a spherical triangle having a constant area and a fixed base. With the base AB fixed, Fig. 1, and the area of the spherical triangle APB constant, the
P
A Figed
locus of P was shown to be a small circle. This result was derived by Johann Lexell (1740-1784), an astronomer at St. Petersburg, in 1781. The problem was found to have been solved earlier, 1778, by Euler.1 The result is some- times known as Lexell’s theorem.
A second spherical locus appeared as the solution of the problem: To jind the locus of the vertex of a spherical triangle upon a fixed base, such that the sum of the two variable sides is a constant. This problem defines a locus
P
Fi'g- 2
upon the sphere analogous to the ordinary definition of an ellipse in the plane. The locus of P is called the Spherical Ellipse. The solution of this problem was found in 1785 by Nicholaus Fuss (1755-1826), a native of Basel, and an assistant to Euler at St. Petersburg from 1773 until Euler’s death in 1783.
Frederick Theodore Schubert, a Russian astronomer, a contemporary of Fuss, published solutions to a number of spherical loci, types of which
i Cantor, Vol. IV, p. 384, p. 416.
2795
are shown in the following: Given a triangle with a fixed base, find the locus of the vertex P such that the variable sides, p, p’, Fig. 2, satisfy: (1) sinp = k sinp’, (2) cosp = Kk cosp’, (3) sin$ = ksin?, ' (4) cos = k cos Be
In Crelle’s Journal, Vol. VI, 1830, pp. 244-254, Gudermann published an article “‘ Ueber die analytische Spharik,”’ which contains a collection of spherical loci connected with sphero-conics, for example, such as: (1) The locus of the feet of perpendiculars drawn from the focus of a spherical ellipse wpon tangents to the spherical ellipse; (2) The locus of the intersection of perpendicular tangents to a spherical ellipse; and other problems similar to those of plane analytics. The notation employed by Gudermann is not fully explained, and is an adaptation from that used by him in a private publication of his work “Grundriss der analytischen Spharik, to which the present writer does not have access.
Thomas Stephens Davies published, 1834, in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. XII, pp. 259-362, and pp. 379-428, two papers, entitled, “The Equations of Loci Traced upon the Surface of a Sphere.” In these extensive papers the author uses a system of polar codrdinates upon the sphere, and derives the equations of many interesting curves, the spherical conics, cycloids, spirals, as well as many properties of these curves. The polar equations of Davies may be transformed into great-circle co- ordinates, giving equations of spherical loci in a form similar to the Cartesian
equations of corresponding loci in the plane.
SPHERICAL ANALYTICS.
A system of analytic geometry upon the sphere may be derived in direct correspondence to that of the plane by a proper choice of axes of codrdinates.
1. Coérdinates. Let us select as axes two great circles xxiv’ per- pendicular to each other at O, Fig. 3. The spherical codrdinates of any point P are the intercepts, OA = £and OB = 2, cut off upon the axes by per- pendiculars drawn from P. Let the length of the perpendiculars from P be PB es and: PAC =" 5/.
Fig 3
From the right spherical triangles PBY and PAX we have the following fundamental relations:
tan &’ tan é tan 7’ tan 7’ (1) tan € = = , tan 7 = — = sinBY GOS 7 sinAX cos &
2. Equation of the Spheric Line LM in Terms of its Intercepts.
The are of a great circle we will call a spheric straight line. Let the inter- cepts be OL = a, OM = 8, and the angle OLM = 4, Fig. 3. Then from the right triangles MOL and PAL we have
tan 6B tan. 7’ tan 7’
tang = — , and tan ¢ = — ht oe sin @ sinAL sin(a — £)
Equating these values of tan ¢,and substituting the value of tan 7’ from (1),
tan 8 tan 7 Gos — tan 7
sina sinacos— — cosasiné sIna — cosa tané
Expressing each function in terms of tangents and reducing, we find the equa- tion of the spheric line in the intercept form:
P tan & tan 7 (2) =e ——>— _ Ths
tan @ tan p
277
(1) Special Cases. (a) Parallels to the axes. A shperic line parallel to the OY-axis passes through the pole of the axis OX. Hence for a parallel to the OY-axis 8B = 90° and the equation of the line becomes
(3) tan — = tana and for a parallel to the O X-axis, a = 90°, and ‘ (4) tan &€ = tan 6
(b) A line through one point. If a line (2) is to pass through (&, m),
we have tan € — tan & tan 7 — tan m
(5) =F = 0
tan a tan 6
(ec) A line through two points (&, m1), (£, 7), is given by
tan € — tan & tan 7» — tan m
tan & — tan & tan yn. — tan m
Fey. 4
Conditions of perpendicularity, parallelism, angles of intersection of spheric straight lines may also be expressed, but will not be included here.
(2) Correspondence to plane geometry. The intercept form of the spheric straight line is similar to the corresponding equation in plane geometry, and may be reduced to that form by letting the radius of the sphere increase
without limit.
278
3. The Spheric Ellipse. Find the locus of the vertex P of a spherical triangle with fixed base FF’, such that the sum of the sides is a constant, p + p’ = 2a. Vig. 4.
This definition defines the Spheric Ellipse MGM?'G!.
Take the origin at the center O of the base FF’. Let FF’ = 2c, p + p’ = 2a,0M = a,OG = 8. WhenFP falls at G, FG = a = F’G.
Then from the right triangle FOG (hypotenuse not drawn), we have
(1) cosa = cos B cose; and from PAX, (2) tan 7’ = cosé tan 7.
From the right triangles PAF and PAF’, we have
(3) cosp = cosn’ cos (e—£), cosp’ = cosn’cos (¢ + &).
Adding equations (3) and using p + p’ = 2a,
(4) cosa cos z = = GOS7’ cose cosé.
al
and subtracting (3),
p—p 5, O r ; 0 (5) sinew sin = GOS 7 sine siné
p Eliminating and ¢ from (1), (4), (5) and reducing, we find the
symmetrical equation of the spheric ellipse
tan?é tan?7
tan?a tan?
a, and B being the intercepts on the axes, OM, and OG, respectively.
Special Cases. (1) Let a = 6, and we have a circle
(A) tan?é + tan’n = tana,
with center at O and radius a. With a = 90°, this circle becomes the bound- ary of the hemisphere on which our geometry is located, corresponding to the circle with infinite radius in plane geometry.
(2) Let a = 90°, and the ellipse becomes the two ‘‘parallel lines”, tan?y = tan?6, passing through the poles of the OY-axis.
(3) The equation of a circle upon a sphere may be derived quite readily, but the resulting equation is somewhat unsymmetrical. Let 4, m, be the
279
coordinates of the center, and let a be the radius. Then the equation may be derived from the fundamental equations tan 7’ = cos & tan m, tan &’ = cos m tan &, tan 7’ = cos ~ tan 7, tan &’ = cos 7 tan &, and the polar equation cos @ = sin n,’ sin 7’ + cos m’ Gos 7’ Gos (E — £1), by the elimination of £', m’ and £’, 7’. The resulting equation is (tan £— tan &)? + (tan 7— tan 7:)2+ (tan £ tan 7 —tan & tan 2 = tan? a (1 + tan é tan & + tan 7 tan 7)?. When & = 7: = 0, this equation reduces to that given in (A) above.
Fis,
4. The Spheric Hyperbola. This spherical curve may be defined as the locus of a point which moves so that the difference of its distances from two fixed
points is constant, p — p’ = 2 a. Using the notation of Fig. 4, but with p — p’ = 2 a, this definition leads
to the equation
tan? & tan? 7
tan? a tan? B which is the spheric hyperbola. The locus does not intersect the OY-axis; the conjugate spheric hyperbola may be defined by
280
tan? & tan? 7 i oe ak
tan? a tan? 8
and the spherie asymploles to either by
tan & tan 7 = + tan a tan 6
5. The Spheric Parabola. A Spheric Parabola may be defined as the locus of a point moving wpon the surface of a sphere so as to be equally distant from a fixed point F and a fixed great circle CM, Fig. 5.
From the definition PR = PF; let O bisect M F. Then from Fig. 5,
(1) tan 7’ = cos é tan 7, (2) cos PH = sin PR = cos 7’ sin (ec + 6&), (8) cos PF = cos 7’ cos (£ — @). Squaring and adding (2), (3) 1 = cos?n’ {sin2 (é + e) + cos? (E — ©}, or 1 + tan?n’ = 1 + 4 sine cose siné cose. Substituting from (1), tan2y = 2 sin2e tané, which is the required equation.
6. Correspondence to Plane Geometry. The above equations of the spheric straight line, ellipse, hyperbola, parabola, and circle, show a marked similarity to the corresponding equations in the plane. These equations may be reduced to tk~ equations in plano by considering the radius of the sphere to increase without limit. This may be done by expressing the ares in terms of the radius, and finding the limit of the functions in each equation asr = ~.
For example, in the spheric ellipse,
tan?é tan?
(1) a = i,
tana tan?’B
let (£, 7), (a, 8) be radian measure of ares on a unit sphere; then on a sphere
of radius r, we have ares (x, y), (a, b) determined by
x y a b é =- 7 = 5 (OR > B lane r r r r
HK yuation (1) becomes
(x| (y) tan?4— } tan?{—}
let
\rJ ry
a = I
a) * pl tan?4— ; tan?;—;
Lr) Lr}
Expand the tangents into infinite series according to the law Z3 224° 17 Z “7” exponent of Z,
tan Z = Z+— + a= ae 3 15 315 and we find
Pea oe
+ st OER
lreeeoers ) lr 3r3 }
ae
Cac cee oped ee ): 4 + oe j= SF An sheet
lr aa } lr Sars )
Dividing r? from each fraction, and passing to the limit r — ~*~, and we
have the equation of an ellipse in the plane.
x2 y2
Any equation in the “rectangular spheric’ codrdinates will reduce, in the limit when the sphere is made to increase infinitely, to the equation of a
corresponding locus in the plane.
283
SomME NoTtres ON THE MECHANISM OF LIGHT AND HEatT RADIATIONS.
JAMES EH. WEYANT.
In all the realm of the natural sciences there has been no more fascinating and elusive problem than that relating to the mechanism involved in the transmission of light and heat. How energy may be transmitted at a dis- tance; what action is involved at its source; what properties matter may possess that this may proceed over vast spaces; what atomic and molecular changes are involved in the emission and absorption of light and radiant heat, are all questions involving the ultimate structure of matter and are as yet incapable of complete solution.
Some of the familiar types of wave motion we observe in nature; for instance, wave motion in water; the transmission of sound waves through air, water and various solids are of such a character as to be easily repro- duced under conditions whereby they can be accurately measured, their origin determined and their mode of propagation analyzed. In case of vibratory motion in matter capable of affecting the auditory nerve or in other words of producing sound, the mechanism is comparatively simple. As to source we have a material body, executing some form of simple har- monic motion; these vibrations being “‘handed on”’ to adjacent particles in a periodic disturbance or wave. This propagation stops, however, when the limit of matter has been reached, i. e., sound waves cannot traverse a vacuum. In all this process, matter has been concerned, both in the origin and the propagation of the wave motion. In light and heat waves, matter is concerned, ‘also both in its production and absorption; but in its propaga- tion they do not appear to depend in any way upon the presence of matter, as they pass readily through the best vacua and traverse the vast inter- stellar spaces with apparently the greatest ease.
Since we find that all radiations of light and heat energy originate in mat- ter we must find the mechanism necessary for their production intimately involved in the constitution of matter itself. The kinetic theory served to give an incomplete mental picture of this mechanism and upon it was based many of the hypotheses of the past.
Various electrical and optical phenomena have been explained upon the ground of ether disturbances. These disturbances have been inter-
284
preted in different ways, but the consensus of opinion is to assign them to one of two kinds: first, magnetic and electro-static phenomena caused by strains in the ether and, second, based upon a dynamic disturbance; dis- turbances which can be propagated through the ether at the rate of three times ten to the tenth em. per sec. (3 & 10" em.) These ether waves pro- ceeding radially from the source carrying with them, not matter, in its old sense, but energy.
It is an established fact that all bodies emit radiant energy in some degree; the intensity of this radiation being dependent upon the character of the body, its surface peculiarities and upon its temperature. Kirchoff gave us a law which states a relation between the emissive and absorptive power of bodies, ‘‘that the ratio between the absorptive power and the emissive power is the same for all bodies at the same temperature and that the value of this ratio depends only on the temperature and the wave length.”’ For a ‘‘black body”’ this ratio is considered unity in as much as it absorbs all the radiant energy which falls upon it. While we know of no substance which may be considered a ‘‘black body”’ in this sense, the radiations within a uniformly heated enclosure may be considered to approximate those ema- nating from a perfectly “black body.”
Stefan’s law takes us a step further and gives us a relative measure of the radiation of a black body emitted at different temperature. The law states that “the total energy radiated by a black body is directly proportional to the fourth power of the absolute temperature of the radiating body,”
ae) f ac 8 0 i.e. EK = CT4 or — = +— 7 whence — = — or OA = constant.
ts (a! Bp Observation shows that the color of a “black body” is a function of its temperature; for instance at 530° C. it glows with a dull red; at 1000° C. the red gives place to a yellow and when 1200° C. to 1250° C. has been reached it has grown white hot or incandescent. In the spectrum of a black body we find the distribution of energy to be dependent upon its temperature. Wien has shown “‘that as the temperature of the body rises that the peak of the energy curve is displaced towards the shorter wave length.’’ While Wien’s law and his proposed revision stated in his second law satisfied the conditions obtaining in a limited area of the visible spectrum it was found not to hold true with respect to facts relating to wave lengths lying in the
285
region beyond the visible red. To satisfy these conditions Professor Max Planck proposed a modification as follows:
Cio C and ¢ are constant.
1b = @ where ¢ base of natural log. g@O@A—-1
As far as recent determinations have been carried out, this law holds true and gives practically a complete energy curve of a black body for desired temperatures. Not only did the statement of this law serve to reconcile purely theoretical conclusions with experimental determinations but paved the way for a more adyanced step toward the explanation of the mechanism involved in radiation.
It is evident that we have yet to establish the connecting link between the thermal condition of a body and the radiant energy sent out into space by that body. If we go back to the theory developed by Maxwell we can easily see how this energy is propagated when once started in the ether. This theory clearly accounts for its speed, for interference and diffraction phenomena, but it apparently fails to closely associate thermal condition and the subsequent radiant energy. Planck found that this formula did not satisfactorily represent the relation existing between the frequency and the amount of energy involved, i. e. why, as a body grows hotter, does its color change from dull red to yellow and then white, unless there was some definite mathematical relation existing between the frequency and amount of energy given out by each vibratory particle. In an endeavor to determine this relation, Planck was led to advance the Quantum theory or hypothesis wherein he develops a type of function which apparently agrees with the facts better than any theories previously held. In doing this he has made a unique assumption, leaving the idea of the equi--partition of energy so necessary to the former theories, he has put forth the idea of the distribution of energy among the molecules of a substance through a mathematical consideration of probability. It is interesting to note in this connection that Planck states that the reason why no absolute proof of the second law of thermo-dynamies has ever been given is that it rests not. on unchangeable mathematical relations, but upon mere probability or chance. Following out this idea he assumes that there may not be a steady, uniform flow of energy from a heated body, but that this may be propelled outward in quantities which
286
are integral multiples of some fundamental unit of energy. This implies that energy is emitted from a body in some definite, finite unit and is closely related to his idea that the entropy of a body is a function of the probability of its present state.
Conceiving the emission of radiant energy as explosive in type and not continuous, Planck concludes that these energy units may not be neces- sarily of the same magnitude. When a system is vibrating with high fre- quency, a large amount or large unit of energy is associated with it, whereas one of low frequency gives out smaller quantities or units of energy, thus giving us an explanation why so little energy is found in one end of the spec- trum. The fact that some bodies have low thermal capacities at low tem- peratures and that these increase with rise in temperature is indicative of the value of this theory. In this connection it is interesting to note that an explanation of the hydrogen lines in the spectrum has been proposed, based on the idea that no radiations take place except when one electron vibrating changes the form of its orbit, at which instant the energy change of the system is the same. Take the case of the line spectra; it has been asserted that the lines in the spectrum of hydrogen are due to various electronic vibration frequencies in the hydrogen atom, when the equilibrium of this atom has been disturbed; but when this electron is vibrating about the so-called positive core of the atom that we have an entire system in equilibrium. As long as these vibrations are regular no energy can be sent forth, inasmuch as by this, the equilibrium of the system would be disturbed. With this disturbance there would be a change in its vibration frequency and assuming the radiation emission to be continuous it follows that the frequency change will likewise be continuous; but this at once results in the destruction of the lines in the spectrum. An ingenious explanation of these hydrogen lines has been proposed based on Planck’s Quantum theory. The electron is conceived of as vibrating about the central core in some form of a stable orbit, probably ellipical in shape. At the instant that one of these orbits changes form radiation will take place. At this instant the radiation will be of one frequency and the energy change will be represented by E =hn where n is frequency of vibrations and h is the universal constant of radiation and is termed by Planck the ‘‘operating quantity.”
The problem is a very complex one and has been approached from many angles. The Zeeman effect produced when a light and heat center is placed in a magnetic field offers additional evidence relative to the shifting of line
287
spectra. It was found that the line spectra was materially changed when the center in question was placed in a strong magnetic field. Later this was shown to be related to the vibration of a negative charge of small magnitude, giving additional confirmation of the electron theory of radiation. We know that when a particle or particles of matter execute some form of simple harmonic motion with sufficient frequency that a note of definite pitch is produced. Why can not we carry the sound analogy over into the realm of electronic motion and conceive of one of these electrons executing some form of simple harmonic motion with, of course, some definite period, its frequency bearing some definite relation to its temperature, as proposed by Planck.
If the sound analogy referred to applies to combined waves of varying frequency and wave length so as to produce “‘spectral harmonics” to coin such a phrase, the center producing them must of necessity be very complex. Take for instance the fluorescent effects noted when the vapors of certain metals is examined; or the luminosity of a gas when a small portion of its molecular aggregate has been ionized. It has been found that when UOXTRRS part of the molecules of a gas has been ionized that it becomes
luminous. Likewise it has been observed that dissociation of some of the halogen group is accompanied by changes in its absorption spectrum. Many experiments also show that fiuorescence and likewise phosphorescence are due to or accompanied by dissociation or ionization.
Considerable light has been shed upon this problem by the study of the emission of heat by radioactive substances. Curie and Laborde found in 1903 that the temperature of a radium compound was maintained by itself several degrees higher than its surroundings. It was found that radium emitted heat at a rate sufficient to more than melt its own weight of ice per hour. According to Rutherford the emission of heat from radioactive substances is a measure of energy of the radiation expelled from the active matter which are absorbed by itself and the surrounding envelope. This heating effect was supposed to be a measure of the kinetic energy of the expelled @ particles; the heating effect was calculated by determining the kinetic energy of the a particles expelled from one gram of radium per second.
K.E. = }mn LV?2m = mass of particle.
n = no. emitted by each group per second. vy = the velocity of the different group of particles
considering the energy of the recoil as equal and opposite that of the @ particle, the energy of recoil of mass M is 3 a MY?, therefore total energy is 4% mn[l + a! >V2 + E where E is the energy of the 8 and \ rays absorbed under these conditions.
1.38 » 10° ergs per second corresponds to heat
emission of 118 grams calories per hour.
Heating effect of emanations 94.5 calories per hour.
Observed values 94 calories per hour; calculated 94.5 calories per hour.
Rutherford and Robertson made an experimental determination to see how accurately this theoretical value harmonized with the experimental value and found a very close correspondence between the two values. This agreement led Rutherford to say that “‘there thus appears to be no doubt that the heat emissions of radium ean be accounted for by taking into consideration the energy of the radiations absorbed.” (The heat emitted is 2.44 x 10° calories per gram).
He gives an interesting comparison as to the amount of energy set free in the action accompanying the expulsion of the rays, as follows: “the heat emitted during the combination of 1 cc. of H and O to form H:,0 is about 2 gram calories; the emanation during its successive transformations thus gives out more than ten million times as much energy as the com- bination of an equal volume of H and O to form water although the latter reaction is accompanied by a larger release of energy than that of any other known to chemistry.”
Further, “‘the energy emitted by radioactive substances is manifest during the transformation of the atom and is derived from the initial energy of the atoms themselves. The enormous quantity of energy released during the transformation of active matter shows unmistakeably that the atoms them-
99 ¢e
selves must contain a great store of internal energy; ‘“‘undoubtedly this is true of all but it is only perceived in the case of those which undergo atomic transformation.”
Experiments conducted within the past three years at Munich in determ- ining the interference effects produced by the passage of X-rays through
crystalline substances have shown that X-rays possess many of the properties
289
of light waves except in regard to their wave length, these being approximately 1/10000 the length of ultra-violet waves; these and the foregoing phenomena accompanying the ionization and dissociation of various gases; the disinte- gration of radioactive substances have given the champions of the undu- latory theory of light some reason for alarm; the phenomena of interference was formerly considered as explainable only in the light of the wave theory, but the behavior of the X-rays when examined for interference effects in erystals seems to pave the way for a revision of this. Not only can the wave lengths of X-rays be measured by the method suggested but the atomic structure of the crystal itself is revealed and the motion of the atoms outlined. The imporatnce of this discovery in relation to thermal effects and heat emissions accompanying chemical reactions and rearrangements ean hardly be overestimated.
As to the seriousness of the attempts to get at the ultimate constitution of light and heat centers and thereby gain a clearer knowledge of the mechanism of radiation, we have but to note the trend of thought as pre- sented in recent papers read before the British Association for the Advance- ment of Science. At the recent Birmingham meeting of this association, a vigorous discussion arose as to the fundamentals involved in this ques- tion of radiation. At the meeting, J. H. Jeans, F. R. S., gave a very interest- ing and comprehensive summary of the facts relating to this fruitful topic; while he sets forth the new idea involved he retains faith in the truth of Maxwell’s equations, but suggests that these equations can be made of more general application by the addition of the expression. representing the unit quantities employed by Planck in his development. These quan- tities being respectively E and h. The magnitude of H has been determined to be 6.415 & 10 — gm. em./sec., an exceedingly small quantity. We might quote from Einstein in support of the quantum theory; he approached the problem from the standpoint of the theory of relativity. It may be necessary to revise our ideas of an all-pervading ether so essential to the working of the undulatory theory. We are just beginning to realize that we may have arrived at a point in our knowledge of light and heat centers where the wave theory fails to carry us any farther and that whereas it serves us well in explaining: difficulties of elementary problems it does not carry -us to an ultimate solution. We may conclude that as there are unmis- takeable evidences derived from different sources that the undulatory theory fails to give satisfactory solution to many of the newer problems that have
5084—19
290
arisen. The additions which it must receive are in the region of photo- magnetic or photo-electric manifestations as evidenced by the Zeeman effect and the connection existing between ionization and light centers. Perhaps some investigator in the field of electro-magnetic oscillations will be able some day to devise an oscillator of such frequency that not only will he be able to produce radiant heat but run the gamut of a photo- chromatic scale not of sounds and their overtones and harmonics but create for us the gorgeous colors of a sunrise or a sunset; or perhaps there may arise a counterpart of modern orchestral music executed not in a concord of harmonious sounds but of color, with shades and tints more marvelously
beautiful than any the human mind has yet conceived.
291
A STANDARD FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES. C. Francis Harpinc.
Modern developments in the generation, transmission, distribution and utilization of electricity at high voltages have greatly outstripped the accurate measurement of such voltages. Those familiar with the very accurate stand- ards and measurements of voltage, current and power at low potentials may be surprised to learn that the recognized standard for the determination of high voltages is the needle or sphere spark gap. In other words the voltage if measured simply by the distance that it will cause a spark to jump in air between needle points or spheres under specified conditions.
It is hardly necessary to point out that such a standard is readily affected by temperature, humidity and barometric changes, not to mention the presence of other conductors which may be in the immediate vicinity. It is therefore not readily reproducible and it is most difficult to make the two standards agree at 50 kilovolts at which voltage both should be accurate.
With these facts in mind, an attempt is being made in the electrical laboratories of Purdue University to develop a more satisfactory standard for the measurement of high voltages which is based upon the fundamental principles of the electrostatic field. Although many forms of electrostatic voltmeters have been developed in the past, in the endeavor to commercialize them and make them compact, the very uniform field upon which their accuracy depends has been sacrificed. No attempt has been made to make the standard voltmeter described herein portable or a thing of beauty, for it is believed that such qualities are quite subordinate in the consideration of a primary standard.
If a perfectly uniform electrostatic field is produced between two parallel metal plates it can be readily shown that the force action between such plates expressed in dynes is
AE?K peas Sit? where A = area of plate in square centimeters E = potential expressed in electrostatic units kK = dielectric constant (unity for air) t = distance between plates in centimeters.
292
The following relation exists, therefore, between the electro-motive force applied to the plates expressed in volts and the force in grams exerted between the plates.
BH = 47098t / = Ww 4
If the plates are made of very great area, it may be assumed that the electrostatic field at their center is uniform provided that the plates are not far apart.
In the apparatus constructed at Purdue University a circular dise of very small area was cut from the center of the Jower horizontal plate and this dise was mounted upon a float supported in a tank filled with oil in such a manner that its surface is horizontal and concentric with the stationary plate but with its plane a small fraction of an inch below that of the stationary plate.
When an electromotive force is impressed upon the two stationary plates the movable disc is attracted by the upper plate and may be lifted into the plane of the lower plate by raising the voltage to the proper value. This condition can be readily detected by means of a telescope sighted along the surface of the lower stationary plate.
With the plates very near together, and a voltage sufficiently low to be readily standardized, the force necessary to raise the disc may be calculated from the above equation. If now an unknown high voltage be impressed upon the plates which have in the meantime been sufficiently separated to bring again the disc into alignment with the lower plate, the force will of course be the same as before and the new voltage may be determined by the relation
ial 0) E! = — the voltages being directly proportional to the distances between t plates.
Such a voltmeter has been constructed and the ratio of impressed voltages to distance between plates required for a balance has been found to follow surprisingly close to a straight-line law when a previously determined and constant value of force is used. Further studies are now being made to determine the range within which this apparatus may be considered standard for given dimensions of plates and further refinements are being made in its construction, method of reading, and calibration.
293
The writer is under obligation to Professor C. M. Smith for many helpful suggestions and to Messrs. Wright and Holman of the 1915 class in electrical engineering at Purdue University for the working out of details of design, construction and test.
295 IONISATION STANDARDS. Epwin MorrIson.
It is very important under certain conditions in radioactive measure- ments to have an ionisation standard. (See Rutherford’s Radioactive Sub- stances and their Transformation, page 111, article 49.) It is also interesting and profitable for students to study the ionising effects of different thicknesses of radioactive substances. (See McClung’s Conduction of Electricity Through Gases and Radioactive, page 131. article 86. Makower and Giger’s Prac- tical Measurements in Radioactivity, page 42, article 30. and Millikan and Milles’ Electricity, Sound and Light, page 350, experiment 28.)
McCoy describes a method of making an ionisation standard in the Phil. Mag. May. XI page 176, 1906, and such a standard as determined by Geiger and Rutherford was found to emit 2.37x10* @ particles per second per one gram of uranium oxide. (See Geiger and Rutherford, Phil. Mag. May. XX page 391, 1910.)
The following is a very convenient modification of McCoy’s process ot making such an ionisation standard and a method of preparation of material for student work. <A brass rod 36 centimeters in length has a series of shelves
Rig we arranged spirally about it from bottom to top as shown in Fig. 1. Thesw shelves are about four centimeters apart, and are designed to support small brass disks. The brass disks should each be accurately weighed and arranged
in order upon the spiral shelves. Uranium oxide is carefully powdered in a
296
morter and then thoroughly mixed with alcohol in a tall graduate or glass cylinder. The rod supporting the brass disks is next carefully lowered into the mixture of alcohol and uranium oxide. The uranium oxide settles to the bottom, and in doing so deposits a layer upon each disk, the thickness and amount of deposit depending upon the height of the shelf from the bottom.
igiy!
After all the oxide has settled to the bottom the rod is removed and the disks allowed to dry. By again weighing the disks the weight of the oxide upon each one can be determined. Also by determining the density of the uranium oxide the thickness of the films can be calculated. These disks can now be mounted upon metal plates for permanent use as ionisation standards, or for student use in determining the fact that ionisation currents depend upon
the thickness of the layer of material up to a certain maximum thickness.
297
‘A SIMPLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SPECTROMETER. EKpwin Morrison.
Photographie spectrometers of several different types can be purchased from instrument makers. Attachments to convert ordinary prism spectro- meters into photographic spectrometers can also be found upon the market. It is the purpose of this article to describe a method of constructing a simple photographic attachment for a prism spectrometer that can be constructed at shght expense in any well equipped laboratory.
Figure one shows a diagram of the camera attachment. The dimensions have to do with the one I have constructed, and would need to be modified to meet the conditions of available material. That is, the length and diam-
a (piper C + | ay . | A es ee ee | 7 : > 28- SL AUS aay ia eC
Fy g | eter of the camera tube is determined by the focal length and diameter of the objective lense used. The figure is largely self explanatory. The section of the tube from C to B is constructed from a piece of wood 3x3x7 inches. A hole is bored lengthwise through this piece. From C to E this hole is 2 inches in diameter, and in order to shut out the stray light from around the focusing tube the remainder of the distance from E to B is 134 inches. <A brass tube T, 2 inches in diameter is carefully fitted into the hole in this piece so that it can be slipped freely inward or outward for focusing purposes. At the outer end of this tube a 124-inch, 28 inches focal length, achromatic lense L is mounted. The tube from B to A is a tapering box, 2/4 inches square at B and 4 inches square at A. This section is constructed from %s-inch lumber, the joints being carefully glued and reénforced by screws to make the box
298
light tight. At A an attachment is arranged to hold a ground glass for focus-
ing purposes, and a common camera plate holder for making the exposures. The camera tube is mounted on a common prism spectrometer in place of
the telescope as shown in Fig 2. The collimator slit, prism, and light source
to be studied are adjusted in the usual way. When all adjustments, together
it
Hig, 2.
with focusing the objective lense of the camera, have been made, a clearly defined spectrum image. including the Fraunhofer lines. may be seen upon the ground glass. In the usual procedure a plate holder containing an unexposed plate may be substituted for the ground glass and the exposure made.
The instrument constructed in our laboratory has proven to be very
successful for student work.
299
On THE RELATIVE VELOCITIES OF SOUND WAVES OF DIFFERENT INTENSITIES.
Artruur L. Fotry, Head of the Department of Physics, Indiana University, Publication No. 42.
It appears that the first determination of the velocity of sound that can lay claim to any accuracy was made by Cassini, Maraldi, and LaCaille, of the Paris Academy, in 1738. By noting the time interval between seeing the flash of a cannon and hearing the report, with different distances between gun and experimenter, they arrived at the conclusion that the velocity of sound is independent of the intensity. This conclusion seems to have been accepted for more than a century. In 1864 Regnault determined the velocity of sound by firmg guns reciprocally and using an electrical device for recording the instant of firing the gun and the arrival of the sound vave at the distant sta- tion. He found a small difference, about six parts in three thousand, in the velocities measured when the stations were 1,280 meters apart and when they were 2.445 meters apart, the former being the greater. The difference he attributed to the fact that the average intensity of the sound when the sta- tions were nearest was much greater than when farthest apart, thus reach- ing the conclusion that the velocity of sound is a function of its intensity.
Regnault’s conclusion accords with theory and with experimental results obtained by several later experimenters. Among these may be named Jacques at Watertown, Mass., 1879, who obtained velocities of 1,076 feet per second, and 1,267 feet per second, at points 20 feet and 80 feet respectively to the rear of a cannon fired with a charge of one and one-half pounds of powder. Wolfe and others have found varying velocities for explosion waves, a wave from an electric spark being of this nature. A fuller consideration of these experiments will be given when the writer has completed his experimental work on this subject.
The apparatus in use in this investigation, which is still in progress, is practically the same as described by the writer in a paper published three years ago under the title “A New Method of Photographing Sound Waves.” But three changes have been made in the apparatus there shown. One is the short-circuiting of the capacity by a high resistance and inductance to give better regulation of the time interval between the sound and illuminating
physical Review, Vol. XX XV, No. 5. Nov., 1912.
300
sparks, a method described elsewhere in these Proceedings. A second is a considerable increase in the two capacities, to obtain waves of greater inten- sity. A third isa modification of the sound gap, or rather a disposition of screens about the sound spark in order to obtain waves from the same spark of both great and small intensity. These waves are photographed on the same plate, enabling one to determine their relative velocities. A few of the results
are given in this preliminary paper.
The details of the sound gap and screen are shown in Figure 31. A heavy spark is passed between the platinum terminals P-P. This produces a cylindrical sound wave shown in section at S, S. G is a eylindrical metal sereen, which I shall call a grating, concentric with the spark axis, and having longitudinal slits or apertures O, O, cut in it, as shown in the figure, thus forming a sort of grating. The grating is so placed that it intercepts but one end, the left end in the figure, of the cylindrical wave, the right end or half spreading out the same as if the grating were not in use. I shall call this wave the main wave. Some of the energy of the left end of the wave is reflected by the grating, but some of it passes through the apertures which thus become sound sources, the waves spreading out in every direction from these sources. I shall call these waves wavelets.
301
The energy at any point in the wave front of the wavelets must be small compared to the energy at any point in the main wave, for two reasons. In the first place only a fraction of the energy of the original wave passes through the apertures. In the second place, what does get through spreads out to form the wavelets and thus greatly reduces the energy propagated in a partic- ular direction. If the speed of propagation decreases with the energy of the sound wave, and, therefore, with the intensity, it would seem that our photo- graphs should show two results: the velocity of a wavelet should be less than that of the main wave, and the wave front of a wavelet should not be cir- cular, because the energy at a point in the wavelet falls off rapidly as the dis- tance from the pole of the wave increases. One need not cite Stokes’s law, for the pictures clearly indicate a variation in intensity along the front of the wavelets. Yet, taking into consideration the breadth of the apertures the wavelets are circular, showing that the velocity of the pole of the wave is not ereater than the velocity tangent to the grating surface. Nor does the breadth of the aperture, and, therefore, the energy passing through, appear to make any difference in the velocity. It will be noted that the photographs show apertures of four different sizes.
The photographs show that the main wave and the poles of all the wave- lets are tangent to one another, and since the wavelets are circular, that the velocity of the attenuated wavelet propagated tangent to the grating surface is not less than the velocity of the main wave of much greater intensity.
Physies Laboratory, Indiana University, December, 1915.
50
304
305
A SimeLtE Metuop or HARMONIZING LEYDEN JAR DISCHARGES.
ArtTuHUR L. Fotry, Head of the Department of Physics, Indiana University.
Publication No. 41.
In the photography of sound waves! one of the chief difficulties is to secure the proper time interval between the sound producing spark and the illum- inating spark which pictures the wave. A spark gap is always apparently more or less erratic. When one places two gaps in series, Figure 1, and en-
SOUND WAVE ebb SS
LIGHT SPARK Ss 5 ees ———— 4 - gee ELE —— ——— SS
é =
. - cae - gar PERS SER ES
— © capacity
~—— ELECTRIC MACHINE TERMINALS
THEORETICAL CROSS-SECTION OF SOUND WAVE, EXPLAINING FORMATION OF WAVE SHADOW ON THE PHOTOGRAPHIC & HEMISPHERICAL ENDS OF WAVE PRODUCE BUT LITTLE EFFECT ON LIGHT PASSING TO PLATE. OUTER CYLINDRIC&: PORTION REFRACTS RAYS TOWARD THE CENTER. THUS GIVING AN OUTER DARK RING-D.R.. AND AN (NNER LIGHT RING t.R.. WHERE REFRACTED AND NON-DEVIATED RAYS ARE SUPERPOSED.
deavors to adjust the condenser C to make the spark L, occur at a definite time after the spark S, he finds that the time interval is far from constant. The interval varies, not merely because of variations in the spark gaps them- selves, but because of the charge remaining in the capacity C after a spark
14 New Method of Photographing Sound Waves. Physical Review, Vol. XXXV, No. 5, November, 1912.
5084—20
306
has taken place. This spark is due to two causes. One is the tendency of the Leyden jars forming the capacity C to take on what is known as a residual charge. The other results from the oscillatory character of a Leyden jar discharge, the jars having a charge after each spark depending on the direc- tion of the last oscillation. With a charge on the capacity C varying as to both sign and magnitude, one can not expect a constant time interval between the sparks Land S. In my later experiments I have been able to eliminate much of this trouble by short-circuiting the terminals of the capacity C through a high resistance R and an inductance |. The resistance R 1s merely a tube of water with wires passing through corks at either end of the tube. The inductance I is an electromagnet of about a thousand turns of wire. The result may be obtained with either a resistance or an inductance, if suffi- ciently large. Using both one can, without reducing the intensity of the illuminating spark, reduce the resistance R by shortening the water resis- tance until the jars discharge themselves completely very soon after every spark. Thus the condenser is brought into the same electrical condition before every spark and consequently the time required to charge it to sparking potential is made constant.
The arrangement here described does not completely eliminate all varia- tions in the time interval between the sparks because much of the variation is due to change in the effective resistance of the spark gaps themselves, some- thing the writer has been unable to control. The arrangement does, however, reduce the variation about 50 per cent.
Physics Laboratory, Indiana University; November, 1915.
307
An ELECTROSCOPE FOR MEASURING THE RADIOACTIVITY SOILS.
By R. R. Ramsey.
In measuring the radioactivity of soils if extreme accuracy is desired it is necessary to dissolve the sample and then determine the amount of radium or thorium by means of the emanation method. The getting the sample in solution is a long tedious process. For a description of this method I shall refer to Joly’s Radioactivity and Geology.
For an approximate determination of the radioactivity one can use an a ray electroscope provided that the sample is fairly active. The standard being uranium oxide, U;Os, a “‘thick’”’ layer, one gram to 10 square centimeters say, gives a current of 5.8x10-!° amperes or 17.4x10-! E.S.U. per square centimeter surface if the plates of the electroscope are 4 cm. or more apart. The amount of radium in the oxide may be determined by dissolving it and then determining the amount of emanation in the solution after it has stood 30 days. The sample is placed in the @ ray electroscope and compared with the uranium oxide. It will be evident that an assumption is made here that the absorption coefficient of all samples for a rays is the same as the absorp- tion coeffic-ent of uranium oxide for @ rays. This assumption is only approx- imately true.
The radioactivity of soil is very slight and in order to get an appreciable current a large area must be exposed. This necessitates large plates in the ordinary form of @ ray electroscope. The large plates increases the capacity of the electroscope and thus diminishes the sensitiveness of the electroscope. Instead of an ionization chamber with plates I have hit upon the plan of using a cylindrical chamber with a central rod. The material to be tested is packed between the wall of the cylinder and an inside cylinder made of wire gauze. The space between the two walls is made as small as the ease of fill- ing will permit. One or two centimeters, say.
In this form of electroscope the amount of surface exposed can be increased at will by increasing the size of the cylinder, and as the diameter of the cylinder is increased the capacity is decreased. Thus the sensitiveness of the electroscope is increased in two ways as the ionization chamber is increased;
by increasing the surface exposed and by decreasing the capacity of the instru-
HOS
Soil Electroscope.
509
ment. The size of the chamber will be limited only by the potential of the central rod. The potential must be at least the saturation potential, that is the potential must be great enough to pull out the ions as fast as they are formed. With the usual potential, about 300 volts, the diameter may be made 15 or 20 centimeters. The height may be made as great as is convenient to use.
The general plan of the instrument is shown in the figure. A, is the ionization chamber, B, is the chamber containing the gold leaf. LL, is the leaf, W, is the window through which the leaf is read on the seale. C, is the charg- ing system. S, is the sulphur plug and R, is the central rod. For a more detailed deseription of the method of making and reading an electroscope I will refer to my paper on The Radioactivity of Spring Water. (Ind. Acad. Proe. 1914.)
The top of the chamber. B, has a dise with a flange fastened to it. The diameter of this disc is such as to fit the ionization chamber. The lower end of the chamber, A, is closed and a hole js cut large enough to let the sulphur plug, S, pass. The gause cylinder, G, is soldered to a dise which will fit the inside of the large cylinder and pass the plug, S. A dise of diameter of the gause cylinder is soldered in the top. A lid fits over the top of the large cylinder.
To fill in the material to be tested the chamber A, is removed from off the chamber B, the gause cylinder is placed inside and the material is packed lightly between the two walls. The lid is placed on and the chamber A, is placed on the chamber B.
Correction must be made for the absorption of a@ rays by the gause. This can be determined by getting the ionization current of uranium nitrate when free and when covered with a sample of the gause, using an ordinary @ ray electroscope.
Or the electroscope may be calibrated by filling in a material of known activity between the gause and the outside cylinder. Or uranium nitrate may be mixed with an inactive substance in known proportions and placed in the electroscope.
Sin testing soils the sample should be allowed to dry for a few days as fresh damp soil contains a large amount of radium emanation which has come up from the lower material.
Indiana University, December 1, 1915.
310
Tuer CAUSE OF THE VARIATION OF THE HMANATION CONTENT OF SPRING WATER.
By R. R. Ramsey.
Last year at the annual meeting of this Society I presented a paper on “Radioactivity of Spring Water” in which I called attention to the fact that there was a variation of the radioactivity from time to time. During nine months of the past year I have measured the emanation content of two springs once every week. In a short time I discovered that there was a con- nection between the radioactivity and the flow of the springs. The flow of one of the springs was measured every week during six months.
The springs are about 1.3 miles apart. One isuses out of coarse graval the other issues from a crevice in the solid rock. Both springs are known as never failing springs, however the flow of both are affected by the rain fall. They both vary in the same manner but not to the same degree. The variation of the Ill. Cent. spring, the one measured, is much more then the Hottle spring. The method of measuring the flow was by means of a horizontal weir, the depth being measured and computed according to the usual formula.
The radioctivity was measured by means of the 'Schmidt shaking method and an emanation electroscope. The electroscope was standardized by means of an emanation standard secured from the Bureau of Standards. The Schmidt shaking method can be carried out at the spring. The accuracy ot the method when the measurements are made at the spring in 15 to 30 minutes is about 5 per cent. The observations for the nine months are shown in the table I. The date of observation, the temperature, the flow in gallons per day, and the emanation content of the water is given for each spring.
It will be noted that the radioactivity of the Hottle spring is higher and more constant than the Ill. Cent. spring. In the same manner the flow of the Hottle spring is more constant than the Ill. Cent. spring but it is not always greater than the Ill. Cent. It will be noted that the fluctuations of the radio- activity are in the same general manner for both springs.
This is better shown by means of curves Figure II. The full lines are for the radioactivity the dotted line is for the flow. The curves have a general
Indiana Academy of Science Proceedings. 1914.
Olt
fall towards low values and then a rather sudden rise. An inerease in flow is accompanied by an increase in radioactivity.
The inerease of flow follows the melting of a heavy snow or a heavy rain. Thus the radioactivity of the spring depends upon the rain fall. The radio- activity of rain water is very small compared to the values obtained at the springs. ‘It can not be due to the radioactivity of rain water.
The above results, together with the fact that ““wet weather” springs are very radioactive and that one on the campus of Indiana University measured 1920 x10-” a short time after a heavy rain fall, lead to the conclusion that the variation of the emanation content of Indiana springs is due to the rain water percolating through the soil and dissolving and carrying down with it some of the emanation which is continually moving upwards from the interior of the earth to the surface. During dry weather when the flow of the water is not rapid a large per cent of the emanation which was dissolved in the water is transformed into radium A, B, C, and D before the water issues from the ground.
This conclusion is in accord with the observations of Wright & Smith (Phys. Rev. Vol. 5, p. 459, 1915) in which they find that the amount of emanation which issues from the soil is decreased as much as 50 per cent at times after heavy rains.
To recapitulate, the variation of the emanation content of spring water is due to the rain water dissolving emanation as it percolates through the soil.
Department of Physics, Indiana University, December 1, 1915.
TABLE I.
Variation of the Emanation Content of Certain Springs near Bloomington Indiana. (Flow given in gallons per day.)
HorTLe SPRING. ILLINOIS CENTRAL SPRING. Temp | ‘ Temp.| Flow. : DAE C. Flow. piu C | Castes i per Liter. ‘ per Liter. 1914. | Septgan 245 wiusroae 1B 650x10- | 445x10-2 OG tae AGW g ks Ie] 695 12.8 166 Oiis ss BER a roncmaaney 13.3 | 700 13 120 OctigaraOR eb 5: | 33 10000 665 12.7 | 1380000 20
INovgre Gras te ey 13 650 12.6 40
Horr.e SPRING. ILLinois CENTRAL SPRING. DaTE. Temp. Flow. Curies (Temp.| Flow. | Curies 82 per Liter. OF per Liter. Wow. las tet 13 705 13 20 Novel 20's Fo. 13 520 13 20 IN ae ole ee eee 2 550 13 30 Dice Sees. oe | 13 535 13 60 Dee palit eno. 3 510 13 20 Deer iss i 450 13,0 00 [BY nae? eee ee 113. | 445 12.8 | 5000 | 00 1915 | / Janae eee | 20000 | 560 32000 | 40 Namie” Shahan ere | 12.6 1020 12 |136000 | 340 Janitee obAub ea ae 3 770 13 39500 | 278 ATT See lee es 13 680 12.8 , 40000 100 Tage | 188.0 ty 12 610 12 32000 | 20 Rebus A reel te 62000 850 12 |250000 | 750 175 TY ed ieee ene 12 875 12.6 |123000 | 166 Mebeerdsiet oc Les bee 12 (100000 | 350 Wet Poo ans koe 11.3 $90 12 75000 170 Marien Wc theca 11.5 1010 12 (100000 | 143 Maru Din uss 11.5 900 112 | 85000 | 220 Wary Sah. 2 ae RS 3 920 Pare 62500 160 Mar. 25......... | 11.3 800 12 | 40000 | 90 Apnibe beter nt dpb 11 670 12 | 30000 | 45 Aprils eek eee 13 690 12 | 30000 | 30 Apne: te seo. | 830 12 28000 | 60 Aprile Dare ee 12 $90 12 30000 6 Nesril (OR tah iy ues | 750 12.2 25000 | 410 Mity est sacs 11.4 1140 12. 410000 | 365 Misys a4 See i: 11.9 825 | 12.4 | 60000 | 365 Whats OU ates a ae | 1050 | 12.3 | 42000 | 25 Mow | aaa eee yo 12 1340 12 (500000 | 750 June BAe Ast ee 11.6 1420 12. 400000 820 puree) UE a, 11.8 1120 12 _ | 76000 | 355 Tinie ay Ate 123 1280 12.5 | 30000 | 715
313
300 280
260
240
220
200 180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
2
Sao a a = i 5 sitstarearad SBE poses ies at +f i i ova ane i RANE fie + oe Ht} t f EE i H t : ate eects tf el sane t + ie "s i 3 5 faeeaaas f i HH AE AE i H sett CEA ane cee 2 4 . +H i t t tH L rae +H ass bas aay : ft jauenedy HH = 3 pear 9 is + $ H rr] 3 ott ysadan aay tag eH i gay ares = aisieu: Feta 7 Hl H ataaz (tia Hae HEH : # i sey cage poe ES aa ra = Aaa a passe a : 24 (2) ae) 6 20 18 14 28 ik 28 wu 28 & 22 20 aU4/ i og BO) a BY’ a BS) 7 18 4 18 Mi) AR) ahs) 10 Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June 1914 1915
No. 293-M. THE H. COLE CO., COLUMBUS. OHIO.
314.
A STANDARD CONDENSER OF SMALL CAPACITY.
By R. R. Ramsey.
In radioactive measurements of substances which are very feebly radio- active it 1s necessary to have an electroscope which is very sensitive. One of the conditions to obtain this result is, the electroscope must have a very small capacity. A capacity of one to ten centimeters. A sphere has a capac- ity equal to its radius when far removed from other objects but when brought near to the electroscope its capacity changes to a value which depends upon the position, size and share of the electroscope.
It is customary to use a cylindrical condenser. The capacity of a eylindri- cal condenser is
L C= 7 2 loge Ri/Re where C is the capacity; L is the length; Ri is the inside radius of the out- side cylinder; R,. is the radius of the inside cylinder. This formula gives the capacity if the effect of the ends can be neglected. This requires that the length should be great compared to the difference of the two radii. When
these conditions are met the capacity will be 100 cm. or more.
In order to correct for the end effects I have made a condenser in three sections, the construction of which is illustrated in the cross sectional draw- ing. The middle cylinder is made of a brass rod about 9 millimeters in diam- eter. The outside cylinder is made of brass tubing whose inside diameter is about 3.6 em. The diameters are chosen large in order that the accuracy of measurement may be great. The ratio of the diameters is made large in order that the capacity per unit length may be small.
The length of the end sections is 10 em. The length of the middle sec- tion is 20 em. The middle rod is held in place in the end sections by means of sulphur. This was accomplished by means of two wooden dises which were accurately turned to fit in the ends of the large cylinder and hold the middle rod in the center. These dises were placed in the ends of the end sections. The end section was stood upon the outside end and melted sulphur was poured through a hole in the top dise until the cylinder was about one-third filled. The dises were removed after the sulphur had hardened. Dowel pins
are placed on the middle rod to hold the middle section in place.
Standard Condenser.
The capacity of the middle section is calculated by the formula. The electroscope is charged to a potential V;. The charge on the electroscope is divided with the condenser, all sections being used.
If C, is the capacity of the electroscope.
Cy is the capacity of the end sections. C; is the capacity of the middle section. Vis the initial potential. V2 is the final potential. then since Q =CiVi =(Ci+C2+C3) V2 Vi/V2 =(Ci+C2 +C3)/Ci S161
The electroscope is again charged to a potential V’;. The charge is again divided with the condenser, the end sections being used.
Then we have
V'i/V’2 =(C, +C2) /Ci = Ih) combining the two equations involving r; and r2 we get C, =C;/(ti-r2)
In case that one has a steady ionization current as in the case of radium emanation in an emanation electroscope after three or four hours, one can allow the electroscope to discharge through a certain potential difference, dV, first with the electroscope alone, then with the ends of the condenser con- nected to the electroscope, and then with the entire condenser connected. Since 1=C dV/t and dV is constant, we have,
Ci /ti = (Cy +C2) /te = (Cy +C, +Cs;) /t3 = C;/(t3-t»)
Care must be taken to see that the current is constant during the obser- vations. If the current is due to 6 or y rays there is danger of the air inside of the condenser being ionized and thus producing a variable current.
The capacity of the middle section of the condenser which I have is 8.06 cm. The capacity of the end sections is found by experiment to be about 17cm. Thus, since the combined length of the ends is the same as the middle section, the end effects plus the dielectric effect of the sulphur is about 9 em.
Department of Physics, Indiana University, December 1, 1915.
RATE OF HUMIFICATION OF MANURES. 18, JEL, CAaimin.
It has been recognized for a long time that organic matter is an important constituent of the soil, but as to just what way it aids in crop production, there seems to be considerable difference of opinion. Some maintain that it is valuable only for the plant food it carries, while others value it more espec- ially for the plant food in the soil which may be made available by its decom- position. The following paragraph from the Iowa Station, found in the September, 1915, Journal of the American Chemical Society expresses the sentiment of many soil investigators as to the value of humus, and the rate of humification. “‘The organic matter extracted by alkali is of no very differ- ent character than the organic matter of the soils as a whole. This together with the fact proved by Fraps and Hammer, Texas Bul. 129, that upon add- ing organic matter to soil, at the end of a years time there is no more material extracted with diluted ammonia than at the beginning of the period, proves quite conclusively that the determination of the amount of humus as found by the various methods is of no particular value in the study of a soil.’”’” This statement seems rather unreasonable to the author of this article, since the elements that are of value as fertilizers are locked up in most farm manures, green manures, cotton seed meal, etc., as complex compounds and hence are unavailable to the growing plant which must have its food supplied in a very simple form. In well rotted manures these complex molecules are largely broken down to simpler substances containing the same elements, but with a different arrangement in the molecule. They are quite soluble in water and if not leached by rains are very effective as a fertilizer compared with fresh manure.
Therefore, since fertility is so closely related to the unlocking of these complex plant molecules in the manures, an effort was made to measure the rate of humification of the more common ones.
PLAN OF PROCEDURE.
A clay soil was chosen that was very deficient in organic matter and was,
therefore, humus-hungry. With this soil were mixed different manures so
318
that each double box, holding about 1 cubie foot, contained the same amount
of organic matter. The contents of the boxes were as follows:
TABLE I.
Box 1 contained 2. Ibs. hen manure + 50 gr. CaCOs.
Box 2 contained 3.2 lbs. sheep manure.
Box 3 contained 2.4 lbs. hog manure.
Box 4 contained 3.0 lbs. horse manure.
Box 5 contained 6.6 lbs. steer manure + 50 gr. CaCQOs.
Box 6 contained 6.0 lbs. cow manure + 50 gr. CaCOs.
Box 7 contained 4.0 lbs. horse manure + 101 gr. CaO, MgO.” Box 8 contained 4.0 lbs. horse manure + 171 gr. CaO.
Box 9 contained 4.0 Ibs. horse manure + 179 CaCO;, MgCO:. Box 10 contained 4.0 lbs. horse manure + 175 gr. CaCQ,.
Box 11 contained no treatment.
On May 30, 1914, the manure, limestone and soil were well mixed and the boxes were placed in the ground out of doors in order to approximate field conditions. At the same time samples of the mixed soil were taken for humus determinations. Other samples were taken on the following dates: Novem- ber 25, 1914; February 16, 1915, after winter freeze; April 13, 1915, after a period of quite warm weather; June 1, 1915, October 15 and November 22, 1915.
Humus DETERMINATION.
Kiffort was made to follow the course of changes brought about by bacteria and the weathering agencies, etc., by determining the amount of humus present at the various periods. The term humus, as used by American soil investigators, does not refer to the total organic matter present in a soil, but only to that which is soluble in 4 per cent NH,OH, the calcium and mag- nesium having been removed. The Official Method as modified by Smith was used in all the determinations. The following tables give averages for the different periods:
319
“WOU ROI] ON 1600: 6F00’ | soy es Seana | oes ae ce le oto omy | ee reel ak OH o[su ome sale Soo dscleccsacufyenkoralacco sn alnadco a: ZZ “AONFCT “400 9800" 16007 F600 | c600 | O800° | 6800° £800° | 7900 Z800 GLOO €200° P.O) 0) Ste |e she an ee doe CT “PO-T vung GOTO 2600° 8600° | Z600° | S800 8900 | 9600° | €200° 9600° | 9900 XO | SAO | oe [ oung-¢] [lady SILO’ =| 9600 OOTO F600" LOTO” €900° | ZOTLO €800° | OOL'O | GZ00' | ZITO’ HOO Sa. tex a a EL Td y-9T “qaq FLOO' =| G600° 9L00- €600° | S900" 1900 0900° T800° | S900° | 8200° | OS00 6900S ha a 91 “Geq-0E ABT Z800° | 62007 9400° | G600° | Z800° | 8S00° | Sso0° TGO00° | O800° | 8900" €800° | ZG00° |pesodxeun sommueUt “s[Log ‘YSV |snuny| “Yysy |snumy| “ysy |snumpA| “qsy |snumny Yysy |snunpy| “qsy |snuny 9 G v § G 1 *“OORD 0G *OORD 0S *OORD 0S *OOFD 0S “OORO 0G OOF) 0G + MOD ++ 10949 ++ os10of{ + sid + daasys + usp
“IlOG WVU [ NI HSV ANY SOWA AO SWYAY
I a Tavi
TABLE 3.
| Horse + 101 |! Horse + 171 | Horse + 179 Horse + 175
CaO, MgO CaO CaCOs;, CaCO; MgCo; 7 8s 9 10 , | Hu- Hu- | Hu- Hu- |
Soil, manure unexposed...) .0055| .0085) .0048, .0078| .0055) .0075| .0055,
0072 May 30 to Feb. 16.._.... | 0064 0084) 0051, .0065, .0067) .0087, 0051, .0065 Feb. 16 to April 13.......| .0070 | .0090 -0061) .0096 .0066 .0099 .0061 .0103 April 13 to June 1........ .0072 .0094 .0058) .0093 .0123 0062 0069 .0096 une te‘Oct.05:.2-25-- 2 | -0090) .0072 .0081) .0083) 0093) 0087 0074 0090 Ocins sto NOveooss oe se ee ee ee eee eee bye ie oe erie ts: eee: lasers | ss
Check. - -- ee gas ra | .0049! _0097) No treatment
TABLE 4.
PERCENT OF INCREASE OR DECREASE IN Huts.
Hen. | Sheep.| Pig. _ Horse. Steer. | Cow.
\ } ! r] |
_08! 20) 02! -09) -43; .30| NH:OH soluble humus—hbefore ex- | | posure. Over check. ;
| May 39 to Feb. 16.
Sls = 09] ==-30}, 203)" On) Is
-04/ —.06} -02/ -02 -01| .04| Feb. 16 to April 13.
.05| —.06, —.10, .05| .03 01) April 13 to June 1. OTs eee | —.09} .15) —.05) —.06) June-1 to Oct. 15.
oe eee eee | Oct. 15 to Nov. 22.
| / | 601.9) 443 | 1174) 165.9} 928) 620.9 Grams of cornand stalks produced 1915 456 | 401] 281|-222 | 260) 249 | produced 1916 ' ’ f
TABLE 5.
PERCENT OF INCREASE OR DECREASE IN HuMUsS.
Horse Horse Horse Horse 7 8 9 10 CaO, MgO CaO CaCOs, CaCO; Fe MgCO; J .06 —.01 .06 .06 NH: OH soluble humus be- fore exposure Over check. .09 .03 5 j —.04 May 30 to Feb. 16. -06 .10 —.O1 -10 Feb. 16 to April 13. .02 —.03 aff 04 April 13 to June 1. 18 2B} —.30 .05 June 1 to Oct. 15. =] | BRS aE ie Oa (each SCS ee Re oe At Se Ale A ia Oct. 15 to Nov. 22. Pepe 46.6 637 .6 386 Grams of corn and stalks produced 1915 308 392 347 320 produced 1916 Check box IG eee ed er ee pao RTE ES NTS, (el | LONE UR pera Grams of corn and stalks produced 1915 HS ee she pe Cae Ee ac) Ceo ee Paine (Suen nie ene aut produced 1916
It will be noticed in Table 4 that fresh steer manure is quite soluble in NH.OH and the solubility is not increased appreciably on exposure in the soil. The same is true to a large extent of cow manure, but less of pig manure while horse manure is only broken down after about 12 to 18 months’ exposure, except in the case of Box 9 which was treated with dolomitic lime- stone. It will also be noticed in Table 5 that when the acidity was corrected with 171 grams of CaO in Box 8 and 101 grams of CaO, MgO in Box 7, the rate of humification was retarded—the CaO and CaO, MgO both having an antiseptic action when more is added than is needed to correct the soil acid- ity. Chemically equivalent amounts of Ca and Mg (in neutralizing power) were added to Boxes 7,9 and 10. It would seem that the growth of corn ob- tained in Box 9 was due to the early humifying of the manure (June 1). While in Boxes 4, 7 and 8 the humification came too late to benefit this year’s crop. The yields in Boxes 3 and 5 were the largest of all but it is probable that the higher nitrogen content was the main cause.
5084—21
CONCLUSIONS.
1. Growth of corn, other factors being constant, seems to be proportional to the rate of humification of manures.
2. The ammonia soluble matter in cow and steer manure is not apprec- iably increased on 18 months’ exposure, but hog, sheep and horse manure humify less rapidly and in the order named.
THe Foop or NESsTLING BIRDs.
Howarp HK. ENDERS AND WILL Scorr.
' The surprisingly rapid growth of fledgling birds is a matter of common observation but the activities of the parents in the collection of food and the care of the young is scarcely realized by persons who have not carried on observations throughout the whole of a bird’s working-day.
It has been the practice of the authors, each summer, for a period of years, * to assign students in groups of four to the work of observing the activities of birds and their fledgling young from dawn until nightfall. The work was carried on in relays such that two persons were at the nest at all times, one to make the observations at close range with the aid of field-glasses, and the other to make the notes. By this method it was possible to observe, time and note in considerable detail, the activities of the birds, also the character and number of pieces of food brought at each trip to the nest.
Observations, many in duplicate, have thus been made upon seventeen different species of the birds common to Winona Lake, Indiana. In the several instances, the birds were under observation for a period of several consecutive days, and we have reason to believe, without markedly modify- ing their activities after the first hour or two.
The object of the present paper is to indicate the nature, quality and quantity of food brought to the young throughout a bird’s full working-day. A transcript of a single example is given in full while others are given in sum- maries to indicate the number of feeds, number of pieces. Both “‘soft”’ and “hard” food are fed to the young birds in proportions which change somewhat with the age of the nestlings.
It is contended that the stomach contents afford the only accurate and reliable method of study of the food of birds. We believe that this method is not applicable to the food of nestling birds for two reasons: first, the food is soft and not readily identifiable; and the second and more important reason is that the food is digested very rapidly. The stomach contents do not serve as a criterion of the quantity of food that is eaten in the course of a day.
*Biological Station of Indiana University at Winona Lake, Ind.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE Brown THRASHER.
Toxostoma rufum.
There were four young in the nest. They remained in the same position
Mice -2 throughout the day and were, therefore, indicated (ex). The nest was on
the ground in a clump of weeds. The day was bright, warm and calm,
4
on
6 6
~
700 A. M. Parents off the nest.
25 Female fed (unidentified)—cleaned the nest.
26 Male fed (unidentified).
39 Male fed apparently a caterpillar.
55 Male and female fed apparently caterpillars.
57 Male fed caterpiller.
59 Male fed (unidentified)—brooded until 5:11. (7 feeds during the hour.)
:27 Female and male fed—earthworm.
27 to :40 female brooded. 40 Male fed—earthworm. 45 Female fed—earthworm. 47 Male fed (unidentified.) (5 feeds during the hour.)
705 Male fed. :05 Male fed.*
06 Female fed. 09 Female fed. 17 Male fed—earthworm. 17 to :40 the male brooded. 40 Female fed and carried away excrement. 50 Female fed. 50 to :53 the female brooded. 55 Male fedjand carried away excrement. 5 iL (7 feeds during the hour.)
t.
7:03 Male fed—brooded till_:26.
26 Female fed.
*Food not identified where name is not given.
we) ne) or
30 Female and male fed insects.
37 Female fed.
38 Female fed—eaterpiller.
44 Male fed—brooded till :56.
56 Female fed and carried away excrement. (8 feeds during the hour.)
:01 Female fed. 12 Male fed 14 Female fed—worms. . 15 Male fed 24 Male fed—iarge green larva. - 26 Female fed. 28 Male fed. 32 Female fed and brooded till :53. 53 Male fed—insects and brooded till :58. 58 Female fed—ceaterpillar. 59 Male fed—eaterpillar. _
(11 feeds during the hour.)
(0°)
worms.
worms.
9:08 Female fed—ceaterpillar. 09 Male fed—eaterpillar. 18 Female fed—worm. 20 Male fed—worm. 25 Female fed—grasshopper, and brooded till :47. 52 Male fed and brooded till 10:19. (6 feeds during the hour.)
10:19 to 10:29 the nest was vacant. 29 Male fed—eaterpillar. 30 Female fed—insect. 33 Female fed—dragonfly. 33 Male fed—worm. 36 Female fed—worm. 42 Female fed—cutworm. 53 Male fed—cutworm and ate the excrement. 59 Male fed—cutworm and ate the excrement. (8 feeds during the hour.)
326
11:02 Female fed—worm and beetle—carried away excrement. 03 Male fed—cutworm. 05 Male fed—dragonfly. 14 Male fed—ceaterpillar. 20 Female fed—caterpillar. 27 Male fed—eaterpillar to bird No. 3. 33 Female fed—caterpillar to bird No. 1. 34 Male fed—caterpillar to bird No. 2, and brooded till :39. 43 Female fed—caterpillar to bird No. 2. 44 Male fed—caterpillar to bird No. 2. 47 Male fed—caterpillar to bird No. 2—ate excrement. 52 Female fed—caterpillar to bird No. 3. 53 Male fed—2 insects to bird No. 1. 58 Female fed—caterpillar to bird No. 4. 58 Male fed—caterpillar to bird No. 4. (15 feeds during the hour.)
12:04 Male came but did not feed—brooded till :11. 12 Female fed—eaterpillar to No. 1. 21 Male fed—ceaterpillar to No. 2 brooded till :30. 30 Female fed—eut-worm to No. 1. 40 Male fed green larvae to No. 2 and No. 3. 40 to :45, the nest was vacated. 45 Female fed larvae to No. 3 and No. 4, and ate excrement. 46 Chased blackbirds away from the tree; flicker and other birds. 48 Male fed—dragonfiy to No. 2. (6 feeds during the hour.)
1:00 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 2. 08 Male fed—larvae to No. 1 and No. 3—earried away excrement. 09 Female fed—larvae to No. 2. 11 Female fed—larvae to No. 2. 16 Female fed—larvae to No. 3. 21 Female fed—eut-worm to No. 2. 25 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 4. 29 Male fed—ecut-worm to No. 3 and No. 4. 43 Female fed—cutworm to No. 2. 44 Male fed—larva to No. 2.
47 Male fed—larva to No. 3. 50 Male fed—larva. 51 Male fed—larva. 58 Male fed—larva. (14 feeds during the hour.)
2:02 Female fed—larva to No. 1. 14 Male fed—larva to No. 2. 14 Female fed—larvae to No. 1 and No. 3. 23 Female fed—beetle to No. 4. 24 Male fed—hbeetle to No. 3 and No. 4. 24 Female fed—to No. 1 and No. 2. 37 Male fed—larva to No. 4—ate the excrement. 40 to :45 male brooded, and ate the excrement. 45 Male fed—larva to No. 4. 46 Female fed—larva to No. 3. 51 Male fed—larva to No. 1. 54 Female fed—larva to No. 1. 57 Female fed—beetle to No. 1. 58 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 2. (13 feeds during the hour.)
3:00 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4. 05 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 3 and ate the excremnt. 10 Male fed insect to No. 1.
15 to :25 Male fed—cut-worm, rested, ate excrement. 26 Male fed—insect to No. 2. 28 Male fed—2 insects to No. 4. 37 Female fed—to No. 3, and ate excrement. 38 Male fed—to No. 2, and ate excrement. 51 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 2. 52 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 1. 56 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 4. 57 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 3 and No. 4. (12 feeds during the hour.)
4:01 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 4 and ate Semen}. 09 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 1.
328
17 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 2. 20 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 4 and ate excrement. 21 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 1, and ate excrement. 28 Male fed—insect to No. 4. 32 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 3. 36 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 3. 37 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 1. 42 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 4. 44 Male fed—dragonfly to No. 3. 50 Female fed—beetle to No. 3. 51 Male fed—dragonfly to No. 3. 51 to 54, rested at the nest. (13 feeds during the hour.)
On
:02 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 3. 03 Female fed—dragonfly to No. 3. 05 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 3. 09 Female fed—winged ant to No. 1. 10 Female fed—beetle to No. 2. 11 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 1. 14 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 2 and No. 3. 16 Female fed—ants to No. 1 and No. 3; ate excrement. 20 Male fed—ants to No. 1. 25 Female fed—ants to No. 4. 26 Female fed—ants to No. 1. 27 Male fed—ants to No. 1 and No. 4. 32 Female fed—ants to No. 2, rested till :40 at nest. 43 Female fed—ants to No. 3. 49 Male fed—ant to No. 4. (15 feeds during the hour.)
6:02 Male fed—hbeetle to No. 2. 07 Female fed—three ants to No. 1. 17 Female fed—beetle to No. 2, and ate excrement. 24 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 4. 24 Female fed—ants to No. 3. 29 Male fed—moth to No. 3; brooded till :33. 35 Male fed—ants to No. 3.
9
42 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 3. 42 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 3; brooded till 7:00.
(9 feeds during the hour.)
7:04 Male fed—cut-worm to No. | and No. 3. 13 Male fed—heetle to No. 2. 25 Female fed—cut-worm to No. 3. 27 Female fed—beetle to No. 4. 30 Female fed—worm to No. 1; carried away excrement. 35 Male fed—cut-worm to No. 1; ate excrement. 42 Male fed. 47 Male returns without feed: broods. (7 feeds during the hour.)
8:00 Still brooding on the nest for the night.
The young were weighed onthe following day, as indicated below. The weight of the young was 40 grams.
(4 beetle ) The weight of} 7 ants ris 1 gram. 4 dragonfly J
Weight of 308 pieces (estimated number of pieces), 35 grams. Approx- imately this weight of food was consumed by four birds in a single day. Thus each bird consumed approximately one-fourth its weight of insects and worms.
Total number of feeds, 156.
Average number of feeds per hour, 9 5-8.
Individual feeds during the day:
To No. 1, 48 feeds (about).
To No. 2, 42 feeds (about).
To No. 3, 48 feeds (about).
To No. 4, 40 feeds (about).
Reedsiby shemale ses. cnc ae eres eeiehe 75 times.
Feeds by the female.............. Chea SoD 78 times. Age of young not determined. Classified list of food:
150 cutworms.
330
9 ‘“‘worms.” 5 earthworms. 11 dragonflies. 10 beetles. 50 ants. 1 grasshopper. 72 or more other insects.
308 or more.
*OOTM4 SMOdIeds poseyO
OA 0.8), CA GLONG A135 538D0-0 SOUT) 9019 109% AA
Pee eee reese rg9yD T Pee ORC Otero ono Chore acne Cac RRC Soladoq OF cinerea Koimey rer nhisiiell eVisit pela stteuinp spieiriele ne, $}09SUI Joyo Ee SOGOOG O00 .G SJOyOMID pure suoddoysseisd 7 ACTS: Oe ERE RTS OSE OMAR aC er eR SIe[[Id199e9. ZT apfesaimerfeeeee catcetueycciectelncieRauneieuread nese rs SULIOMYIIVO TZ LOL GOO HOdo 9Z1 TOT
(SACP-8) %
GO!
£161 ‘OT Ayns
“PATA MOO “UIqor 10490
solddoq © ANn enon arene ronrero i amma eomarec nS sqoosuT 10y}0 TZ Rieawees “s"*""sqoyoLId pur siaddoysseis OT Srors Or dspsora-o Udo a) ofl Ld ga, Ouo"O saeyidaoyeo 9
Oo Ged. 0/90 Oicio ie oss STTOMYITVO 98 ra 09 OFT OFT
*OUON
DeEROaed GareD Dec COP TOTO CIRO AeED Tes eh proaq |
; (Ar19q9so0038 ‘solLloqdseil ‘solldoqyoRr[q) solasoq 2z BEE cS pict Oreo neo Ana SJOOSUI J0YI0 ZF OMOGOOOG OA eO mt oo ooo Or oD sioddoyssei3 V6 OO O80) 009 Geet 00 Gea Ono O70 6 0.5 (OOD Ie[[id199e%9. T
ANGTahGiD 0 Ons Mo On OA O ONO BND SUIIOMY}IvO CF 6L I¢ Ofl 0e1
“AOMY USATIG Sormmoun
‘oyeumayy | “Oley *S000Id *‘speaq Jequnn | sequiny ‘PoyIssvIg :pooy Jo 4syT TROL TROL ‘spoo0,q Jo I9quInN
) | | |
pro
(shep-y) Z
“4SO NT ayy Ul suno x
sJaquin NI
OF1
9ET
‘Spalg. jquoled Aq 48eN ey} 09 SHISTA JO Joquan fy
£161 ‘OT Ayn
G16) ‘G Ayn.
(SISON UO) DILOIDUBIW Dina SNIGOY NVOIANY FO SHILIAILOY dO SHIUVWWNG
“OUON
“QUON
*solut)
ey) eyyoeas ofd.ing “ABML PAG Ppeunueprun sey o OSTR puke spalqQyoRy[q eAOIp OFF = “UaMjeu Oo) Jey gttudod jou pIp ‘jsou oy? woul Dues avOAp oye
SSeMMOWIp oONsomod
{BMY UDALIC, Sormoun
‘SHOMOLIO puvw swoddoys'
“PONULUO, )-
*SOLUT? OM) JOUR AK
Woq (nu Ayoryo) sonniog oz
“**""S700SUT Lolp.O ST 7 *sroddoyssead 9
"7°" “SULIOMTIPLTRO BG
WOSUT TOYO TI
“*"osoddoysseas p “***"SULIOMTIBO Se
OUT) OUO LOTR AA
poyTPuoprun Gy
ese SOTTO COS JOosur woyyO TL]
OYORO pur sroddoyssvas Gg
os relrdieneo: 7 ""“SUTOMIIIRO GZ
“poy uoprun op ee See SOTTO CEG) WOOSUL LOO SP Id §
~~ “saeyitdaeges 7 *"“SULIOMTY Le TO]
*POUISSeTD :pooyp, JO ASI]
qnoqeu (SAUpP-G) Z
2
~
(Arp oy) Jo puo a1ojoq 4Sou IJoL) &
I~ t™~
PIGT ‘or Arne
PI6L ‘Or Ajoe
PIG ‘OT Arne
“Spooo] OQ UNL NY
TOC UINLN
‘spooyy Jo JOG UINN
—SNIHOVY NVOTUMINYW WO SULLIATLOVY LO Sera VININGS
nt) ou) ut
BUNO AK TOQuUN NY
JUdIe Aq ISON oy) 04 S}ISTA JO LOG UU NY
FIGI ‘OL Arne
‘90U0 MOJIeds ‘SUIqOd g ‘9010 jelambs pol ‘a0TM}
“+> -Sq99QSUT JOTIO EG Spe a eens tata Te TE saoddoysseis ¢
SOHO es SOUT) ps1O UU ae elliot ecm ec ks ee Sie] [Id199e9 ST pop10d01 CI6I Ta; DAGON ACOH)" °° © O88 8 8 SULIOMY LVS OS 16 G8 S8I 961 ION SOG ‘9 Ayn Shae AS SEE OL ee aE RE proiq T SRR Se amie esa ee basta iemtninasecaues salstayo OT Fi Scarce iar EnreRee eo eaeaieed boos sone RareG) [ SRS Slee are Jos)" *"sqo9Sul Joyo GT uo/ouserje oy})Jo J[By JS] Butjanp ures Aavoy/AJeA “SutUIOUT! 94} suTIMp sajamoysg as Se ght ae Oe sioddoysseis ¢ Soe yates eres sess -gpadiques T pjo GI6L QUOT [ooo Bee oe se eeveesezcbGes SULIOMYIAVA FG Sz 9¢ 18 £8 (sAep-¢) G 96 “y, Ayn SOAS PIS aR Se Spoos MojJ & PUe SOI [VIIAIG jsou 9} WOJJ/UTeI suTeIp “sss NEnTUEprIUN 9 {ysou JOAO/ Suey SSUIM +++ +++ -ggtraeqmul ¢ SI] “SUNOA|SI9A09 B[BI Sept So ees sss “gogesur 10440 T WO/OUIA}e 944) Jo J[RY 4Se] Sua]anp ures Aavoy |AJOA “SurTsOMT) ay} suLANp s1jaMoyg ‘sognutu useaIjy jo “sss sss -saoyoTLID pu Sloddoysseis ¢ POO ETO CGS [OMENTINO Ss a ae ae a SIe]IId199e9 ¢ GI6I1 joa BGO WH GMO, [ee o ese tees ee oecons "+" SULIOMY}IVS GF € FG €9 LS G OL ‘y) Ajne
Sess ab dee gic ees S}O9SUI 1OY9O + TF Pt Pasta, ee che dsem yoriq I hoes dasamsa cued Yor ca tastes Wuekareks ajeoq iT “o+++-s-2-sssssssgnmoseip ¢ bebe e eset esses ete sgong 6 lPeectanhes: cunt atc acer Ayaoqyynq I SOU ONT ea gee aaa Satta saeyidaageo 2 + ¢9 G9 & OL9 7 “Gter 2 Aye ‘hog fiusy “O0TM} | on Pe S]o9SUT poyuepiun + FGE jolumbs ‘sdeyoy Gf “urese = Teddoysseis! |. PAIGMOD OULUL EE MOTTON] ths sees toe oe ee que poesuIM T “Ler onig ‘JayoodpooM AUMOG $j, °° oto soIguoseip 2 MIAYOOU DOAN SU OVCOOMINT: OUND Mie sees ee AY I 2 They SOO p PL ESE MAGS = Seog uy.” | PO IS ts Ge oe solgaeyynq §¢ t palq youla WORE MAO OY Gh ee ae saey[id193e@d _& + 69€ 69€ (4958) € LLY )) Se clon s) Amer ‘hog 42va19 ‘spilg JUIIed | 1 ‘SodoIq Pue spooq “4SaN 949 Aq JSON “BMY UOALIC, SOTUIUA “poeyIsse[D poow jo 9svT jo JaquinN Ul SUNO X 0} SJISTA | TRIO, Ja quan NI jo Joqunn |
(suai sndojuo))
‘SSHHAMAd GOOM OML HO SHLLIAILOVY HHL dO AYVININDS
335
SUMMARY OF THE ACTIVITIES OF A KINGBIRD. Tyrannus tyrannus.
The same nest, with two young, was under observation for a period of six days beginning with the morning on which the eggs hatched. The data of the first day were imperfectly recorded and are, therefore, not included in the summary. The data cover the 3rd, 4th, 6th, 7th, and 8th day after the hatch-
ing of the eggs.
“OUON
Se Ser a one **"SUOTPRAMOSGO ON “Urey
rR Sc ee cary Ce “= * > “payTupran 6T nistansistage sia tviouvyncarete ws --sqo0sut 100 ZT Dea RLS PMELA SRT NSS ay ees alcsnan crs “++ gaqqooq %
'* Ssorjjosulep Z% PS A OL rR RET +++ ss sprpagey z ce Os cs Go eC sJoyoulo Z ee ‘saoddoysseis ral
S16. ‘FT Ane
66
“seep UF *
16. ‘ET Aine
“IayoVd poo MA
aS Cat. centicirciag owes. 0-0 Can iit * ‘SULIOMY1v9
Sw )mi-el wus gen en) (ni ie20) ete) e 8iue.e exe S}00SUI I94O ocho cto eforg.c.c, Ghee ) Ceo era) sopQe0q Pr aCU ROS int Cabea CIO CCH Cate DaCe siaddoysseis
soTyjosurep aE SDSS SOOO ques icc} an Pant PCR BEDTONS C1 O10. CO OO ESA (2) CO EDS) LE
NANTANATOONAHS mn
6G
09 GOT
“Sep ple “S16T ‘or Ame
“ABMY UWIATIC, SOTULA UG,
“pood JO 4svy
-oyemoy AG
‘OTRIN A
spooq Jo 1aquinn
“Spoof 1RIOL
‘Sprlq QUdIed
Aq 9SON 9} 0} SPISTA jo JaquinN
GuIGONIM V AO SHILLIATLOV GH
HO AYVININOS
‘BURIPUT ‘UO}SULULOO[Y ‘A}ISTOATUA, BURIPUT “LLOOG TTIAA ‘VUBIPUT ‘oJJOABJeTT YSoM\ ‘APISMOATUL) ONPANG ‘SHAAN “OT CUVAO TF]
asses FE TS 1 -gpediyu oT berlin Ciateat oat cence tie ee sa6sur fouio se Seiten aa atoT to Hn geddousseus
ohh 8A Cuan 0 1 0. 0.0-00 Br Ole “+ - -sonyuoSeap “SpIlIqyor[g € solgjposurep “MOIS *parq Yoel "o* “SULLOMTIAVA OT 09 OF OOT II Sep 198 “ET6T ZT Ame
I I Qe OE byeed Soy! Oa Bededto ool Olnaiclo’a Yow T g €
YQour T Sie} usiialceltalts isis} ieituiis) (ol lelemi ws eleliwialseiie solTyuoseip SI 600.0. 00d) 00D 0n0 Oo s,000NniO.0 oO Ayjosuep I Hobo rOO OO ODE pod oO yO OU 0 UO 6 sqnas
AON, [2 Oh OOo eB Avion os “>> SUOMI Qaea Za 62 19 ie Aer oe sep WIZ “SL6L ‘OT Aue
nee snereke eres sss peyMueprun
Sto oto D0 often odo 6 "= *S959SUT JOYIO OT 60-0 0.000 0 Cote 0 0-0 bed D Oso Herts Q1qQ90q T piiatiolrejiel et eilallevre! eiielia OoOGOo9o08 ‘solTyuoseap G “c*"“SOTplosulep %
OOs0 6 p otole-0.di oun, 4 He Q9yOTID T €
G
qT
0000000 eee wee oe ‘saoddoysseas
“Av OI Glia eae ees samen Le oe “TeT[Id1989e9 BULTC) O/T | toca Hees sss STOIOMYIIRA OT Fe OF PL
Ress Avp WO “S16T “GT Ame
ie 4) I<
5084—2:
: 339
On THE CHANGE THAT TAKES PLACE IN THE CHROMO- SOME IN MuTATING STOCKS.
Roscort R. Hype.
Two new eye mutations, tinged and blood have appeared in my cultures of the fruit fly that throw light upon the question as to the nature of the change that takes place in the chromosome when a new character appears. Both mutations show typical sex-linked inheritance, consequently they are expressions of changes in the X chromosome. Both mutants give the same linkage values when measured with other sex-linked characters. When measured with yellow body color a linkage of 1.2 results; with minia- ture wings 33; with bar eyes 44. Morgan has described three sex-linked - eye mutants, white, eosin and cherry, which give the same linkage values. Consequently, we now have five sex-linked eye mutants, namely, white, tinged, eosin, cherry and blood, which give an increasing color series from white to the bright red of the wild fly. A study of their linkage relations shows that they either lie very closely together on the X chromosome or that they are but different modifications of the same gene. The two possibilities involve the question of the origin of mutations as well as the fundamental make-up of an hereditary factor.
Mendel evidently thought of something in the germ cell that stood for round (R) and something that stood for wrinkled (W) and that these two things could not coexist in the same gamete. That is, (W) isallelomorphic to (R).
The origin of mutation in the light of the above assumption would seem to depend upon the splitting up of more complex hybrids—the bring- ing to the surface of units already created. Evolution in the light of such a conception would seem to depend upon the shifting together of desir- able units.
Bateson viewed the matter in a different light. He knew of the origin of new forms by mutation. He postulated a definite something in the germ cell that stands for the character, as for example (T) which stands for the tallness in peas, which when lacking makes the pea a dwarf (t). In other words, instead of two separate factors he regards the tallness and dwarfish- ness merely as an expression of the two possible states of the same factor,—
340
its presence and its absence. Hence his well-known Presence and Absence theory. In this ease (T) is allelomorphic to its absence (t). The inheritance of combs in chickens is a beautiful application of such a conception. Muta- tions according to this theory appear as the result of losses.
Bateson pushed this idea to its logical conclusion in his Melbourne ad- dress where he speculates on the possibility that evolution has come about by the loss of something. These somethings he assumes to be inhibitors. (Science, August 28, 1914).
us As I have said already, this is no time for devising theories of evolution, and I propound none. But as we have got to recognize that there has been an evolution, that somehow or other the forms of life have arisen from fewer forms, we may as well see whether we are limited to the old view that evolutionary progress is from the simple to the complex, and whether after all it is conceivable that the process was the other way about.
= At first it may seem rank absurdity to suppose that the prim- ordial form or forms of protoplasm could have contained complexity enough to produce the divers types of life. is Let us consider how far we can get by the process of removal of what we call “‘epistatic’”’ factors, in other words those that control, mask, or suppress underlying powers and faculties.
oP I have confidence that the artistic gifts of mankind will prove to be due not to something added to the make-up of an ordinary man, but to the absence of factors which in the normal person inhibit the development of these gifts. They are almost beyond doubt to be looked upon as releases of powers normally suppressed. The instrument is there, but it is “stopped down.” The scents of flowers or fruits, the finely repeated divisions that give its quality to the wool of the merino, or in an analogous case the multiplicity of quills to the tail of the fantail pigeon, are in all probability other examples of such releases. a In spite of seeming perversity, therefore, we have to admit that there is no evolutionary change which in the present state of our knowl- edge we ean positively declare to be not due to loss. When this has been con- ceded it 1s natural to ask whether the removal of inhibiting. factors may not be invoked in alleviation of ‘the necessity which has driven students of the domestic breeds to refer their diversities to multiple origins.”
Another idea as to the way these factors may find expression in the germ cells has been advanced by Morgan under the heading of Multiple Allelo-
341
a
POCA Awa) Soe PROWL, PA
ores
$$ 0 ce W
ANNUM TAENIL WIS OF Kara pooig pry
. hh ©
©)
Tl
6@ - 06.@
XX
¢
~~
Tone eee ZS
OOOO® Oe ©
f
(1 @@9
Fieures A, B, C, and E.—Explanation given in Text.
morphs. According to this conception there is a definite something (W) located at point 1.2 on the X chromosome which stands for the red eye of the wild fly. (Fig. A.) This gene underwent some kind of change and gave rise to white eyes (w). In another stock the same particle mutated and gave rise to eosin (we). In still another stock the same particle changed and gave rise to cherry (we). (W) is allelomorphie to (w), to (we) and to (we). each of these in turn is allelomorphic to each other; hence they form a system of Multiple Allelomorphs. This view is supported by a large amount of experimental data by Morgan and his co-workers, but strange as it may seem the numerical results can be interpreted in terms of the Presence and Absence theory provided the mutants are the result of losses of several factors that stand for red in a completely linked chain of loci.
The assumption that these three mutants are the result of changes in loci lying very closely together on the chromosome as demanded by the Presence and Absence theory has been tested by Morgan and others by means of their linkage relations in three possible combinations as given in Fig. D. (Shown by the broken lines on the left.) The discovery of the two new mutants has made it possible to carry out the test in eight additional ways. The evidence which involves data from something like a half-million animals weighs heavily against the Presence and Absence theory and is entirely in accord with the assumption that something analogous to isomerism may change an hereditary factor resulting in the production of a new form. I have attempted to visualize this in Fig. E. If this is the correct inter- pretation the possibilities locked in a small amount of chromatin may be almost infinite, for a great many different arrangements are possible from a few things.
There are some points worthy of consideration as tending to give weight to the Multiple Allelomorph theory.
1. On the Presence and Absence theory it is necessary to assume that in the region of 1.2 on the X chromosome there is a chain of five completely linked loci (very close together) upon which the color of the red eye of the wild fiy depends. Multiple Allelomorphs accounts for all of the facts while postulating but one locus.
2. Gratuitous to the Presence and Absence theory let us assume that the loci are in jutaposition. If we assume that blood, cherry, eosin, tinged and white have appeared as a result of successive losses as shown in Fig. C, we encounter a difficulty. When any two of these mutants are crossed the
343
two chromosomes are brought together in the female, each restores the missing part to the other and a red-eyed female should result in the F, generation. Asa matter of fact no red-eyed female appears. She is invariably a compound, that is, in each case she is intermediate between the eye colors of the two stocks used as parents.
Again the evidence is fairly conclusive that when the two X chromosomes are brought together in the female they break and reunite at apparently all levels on the chromosome. Accordingly, it would seem that a break and reunion would occasionally take place between the members of this chain of loci. If such a phenomena should occur a complete chain of loci would result like the chain in Fig. C (on the extreme left), which would express itself in the F, generation in the production of a red-eyed male. But in all the possible attempts to break up such a line, as shown in Fig. D, no such a red- eyed male has been found. To be sure the loci may be so close together that crossing over would take place infrequently, but the evidence from such large counts as have been made in which the red-eyed male has been specifically looked for would weigh heavily against its ever taking place.
3. The mutations may be due to losses according to the scheme repre- sented in Fig. B., one loss produced blood, two losses produced cherry, and soon. Such an assumption would seem to accord with the fact that when any two of these stocks are crossed no red females are produced in the F, generation. On the other hand it should be expected that the chromosome in which the least number of losses had occurred would act as a dominant. For example, when blood and tinged are crossed, the females should be like blood. But no such result is obtained. The female is intermediate in color.
Again we should expect from the phenomena of crossing-over that, in a eross for example between blood and white occasionally a cherry, oran eosin, or a tinged male would appear in the F, generation, but none has been ob- served.
4, The history of the appearance of the members of this multiple allelo- morph system shows that they are rare phenomena. Careful observation by Morgan, Sturtevant, Muller, Bridges, myself and others show these mutants to have appeared but a few times. It would be safe to say, I think, that only one has occurred in five million times. I have represented blood by one loss from the chromosome. Tinged is the result of four losses in this completely linked chain of loci. The possibility of such mutants appear- ing involves so many simultaneous losses that there would be one chance
o44
in millions. It seems almost impossible to believe that we should have ever found such a mutant.
5. The experimental evidence shows there are many factors arranged in a linear series on the X chromosome. Some affect wings, some body colors, others the shape of the eye, and so forth. Sturtevant has pointed out the significance of the fact in light of the above statement that the characters which behave as members of a multiple allelomorph system are closely related physiologically.
6. If the mutants are the result of changes as shown in Fig. D it would seem as if a mutated stock would more readily give rise to subsequent mu- tations, since fewer simultaneous losses are necessary. As a matter of fact four of the members mutated directly from red while eosin came from white.
7. Morgan has emphasized the idea that it is difficult to account for reverse mutations on the assumption of losses from a completely linked chain of loci, as the Presence and Absence theory postulates. On the other hand it is conceivable how such a reaction could come about if the mutant is the result of an expression of something analogous to an isometric change.
8. Is chromatin such simple material that the only change conceivable
is a loss?
LITERATURE CITED.
1. Morgan, Sturtevant, Muller and Bridges. Mechanism of Mendelian Heredity. Henry Holt. 1915.
2. Bateson, William. The Address of the President of the British Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science. Science. August 28, 1914.
3. Hyde, Roscoe R. The new members of a Sex-Linked Multiple (Sextuple) Allelomorph System. Genetics. November 1916. Princeton
Press.
345
SoME PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS ON THE OXYGENLESS REGION OF CENTER LAKE, Kosciusko Co., IND.
HERBERT GLENN IMEL.
It has been found that some of our lakes contain no free oxygen during the summer months.
Birge and Juday (11) found that Beasley and Mendota Lakes not only had such oxygenless regions but that animal life existed in these regions. They report sixteen genera of living, active protozoa, three of worms, two rotifers, two crustacea and one molluse.
Scott found in his studies of lakes of northern Indiana that Center Lake, Kosciusko county, had such a region, and under his direction the writer undertook, during the summer of 1915 to find out what forms of animal and plant life existed in this region.
According to Birge and Juday (11), after the autumnal overturn, during the winter, and until the approach of spring, the gas conditions are very nearly uniform throughout the lake, but with the approach of spring, and through the spring and summer, the oxygen content becomes less and less in the lower strata while the carbon dioxide, both free and fixed, becomes greater and greater until by July 15 or August 1, the free oxygen is zero while the carbon dioxide is very great. (See Figs. 6, 7, 8.)
This condition is brought about in three ways: (1) by the respiration of the plants and animals in it; (2) lack of surface contact with the air; (3) decomposition of the dead organisms in it.
Determinations of the temperature, free oxygen, free and fixed carbon dioxide, were made at the beginning and the end of the observation period, July 28 and August 26. The oxygen was determined by the Winkler method and the temperature was read by means of a thermophone. The results of these readings are shown on graphs attached hereto. (See Wig. 5.)
A pump, with a hose marked off in meters, was used in the collection of the water. The samples of plankton were collected by pumping a quantity of water through a plankton net at the desired depth and then rinsing off with the last stroke into a collecting bottle. This method was used for
346
FlGd
Ground glass stopper Cord fo portly withdraw
Card 7o rarse and
lower bottle Cord Sasfens stopper
Cord fastening Cord fastening bottle
to cement b/ochk.
Cement bLlock
BOTMO COLLECTING LO Ua Ve
camera
WwW of under wafer
Side vie
apparatus showing camera in position andmeans of operating.
OAS
bul 4oiado fo SUDaLI pub uoiiicod ul b1awo? buimoys snzoavddo
DIaWOI 4340M JapuN fo MIA doy
Net /1od [o 129
ee
4®AOl APLLNYS
aS
juod buisamoy puo bujsipy 40f pod
4as4ny4s Uedo of pioz —»
sf (fred Ui sas 02 Pol) of Sp4105
349
Y22yY2 DSO 42D pud buy Jom f Usanard of pedo, Sebp J U2aMJog aZ/s alos JOU IL Y{IM SPPYS 3AOISOJIIW
OM, fOIPOUl afojd bIDWD)
p2soaxd aqo4 UN/f fo UVOlLA0
422949 40f adoJ YIM pesan0d apis fo UOl{IO-/
ww Dis
S2pl{S Dd0d50/ Ti jy
350
FIG 5 MSE ei Wile. (Elica
s Zz 4 & 8 /0 12. 14
READING JULY, 28.
ie TEA NO ING TUG IEAO! READ DEGREES FROM TOP TO BOTTOM. READ METERS FROM LEFT TO RIGHT.
fminGenG
FIRE OG EIN (6 WR We
READING JULY,28
af rik Aaa Ne PEADING AUG, 29 FIGURES AT TOP REPRESENT METERS DEEP. FIGURES AT SIDE REPRESENT CC FREE QO. PER LITER
ie En V
PE B GOo Curves
S 2 4 6 8 10 I
L264
42.976 4-5 507
64624
READING JULY, 28
ee a EADINGWAUGH ac FIGURES AT TOP REPRESENT METERS DEEP FIGURES AT SIDES REPRESENT CC FREE COa PEP LITER
QE
IVA
rPilG © PEDO CUiRVis Ss S rz 4 6 e /0 12 53.8752. pe eee eee, ‘ : | 34. 6330) 361504 ae oo #a0a 8 37.4144 3 7 ee 36.9840 - \ 43.7394 \ 43.7344 14.745 © 16-9 /S \ 49.0432 | SPs N \ \ \ Ne 53, 5936 A %
FREADING TAKEN JULY,26
cee ee READING TAMEN AUG. 26 FIGURES AT TOP REPRESENT METERS DEEP FIGURES AT SIDES REPRESENT C C
5084—23
504
all but the bottom collection, which was taken in the manner described below and as illustrated by the figures.
A sixteen-ounce reagent bottle (see Fig. 1) with a ground glass stopper was securely fastened to a block of cement weighing approximately 30 Ibs. The stopper was so tied that it could be partly pulled out. A strong cord was attached to the neck of the bottle to permit raising and lowering the bottle. A second cord was attached to the stopper so that when the empty bottle was at the bottom the stopper could be pulled as far as its fastenings would permit, allowing the bottle to be filled with the bottom ooze. When the bottle was filled the cord attached to the stopper was loosened, thus allowing it to snap back in place and securely close the bottle, and with the cord around the neck the bottle was drawn to the surface. The stopper and neck of the collecting bottle were rinsed off first with alcohol, then distilled water. The contents were then transferred to smaller reagent bottles, corked and sealed with paraffin to insure their being air tight.
The contents of the collections, especially the bottom collection, were examined microscopically and the plants and animals that seemed alive were listed. As a check, some bottles of the same collection were kept fifteen days in darkness and at approximately the same temperature as the lake bottom. Their contents were then examined and the plants and animals found therein were apparently as active as when first collected. The animals were all seen moving with more or less rapidity, the protozoans quite rapidly, the higher forms not so much so. Their activity increased with exposure to light and air. :
From the total examinations made. the following were found, demon- strated to be alive and classified. Nine protozoa, one rotifer, one crustacea, twenty algae and fourteen diatoms.
Animals Classified afler Conn and Webster.
Protozoa: ;
Dactylasphaerium radiosum Ehr.
Difflugia globostoma Leidy.
Amoeba proteus Ehr. Helizoa:
Actinosphaerium eichornii. Mastigophora-flagellata:
Peranema sp.(?)
Ciliata: Colpidium sp.(?) Paramoecium Bursaria Ehr. Stentor coerulus Ehr. Vorticella sp.(?) Gastotricha: One form belonging to this group was abundant. Crustaceae: Copepoda— Cyclops biénspidatus. Algae—classified after Conn and Webster. Cyanophyceae (Blue-green): Oscillatocia subtilissima Kiitz. Oscillatoria aeruginoso caerulea. Merismopedia nagelil. Microcystis aeruginoso Kiitz. Nostoe rupestre Kiitz. Nostoe rupestre sp.(?) Chlorophyceae (Green Algae) : Scenodesmus caudatus. Pediastrum pertusum var. clarthratum A. Br. Pediastrum Boryanum Turp. (two types). Pediastrum Boryanum Turp. var. granulatum Kiitz. Ulthorix sp.(?) Zygnemeae stellium var. genuinum Kirch. Spirogyra variens (Hass) Kiitz. Heterokontae (Yellow green): Tribonema minus (Wille) Raz. Bacillarieae (Diatomaceae) classified after Wolle: Navicula Silimanorum Ehrb. Navicula Tabellaria. Navicula Tabellaria var. Macilenta. Gomphonema Geminatum (two types). Asterionella Formosa. Asterionella Formosa var. Ralfsii (two types) Asterionella Formosa var. Bleakeleyi. Asterionella Formosa var. Gracillima. Fragalaria Capucina Desmaz. Stephanodiscus Niagara Ehr. (two types).
306
Thus far we have established the following: (a) Center Lake, during part of the year, has a region devoid of free oxygen. (b) A number of living organisms are found in it during this time.
Many of these organisms are chlorophy] bearing. This made it desirable to determine, if possible, whether or not any light reached the bottom of this rather turbid lake.
To answer this question a Brownie No. 0 camera, boiled in paraffine tu make it impervious to water, was fastened into a pail weighted in the bottom with lead to sink it. (See Fig. 2.) The lever of the shutter was arranged with strings running through opposite sides of the top of the pail (see Fig. wf so that when the camera was sunk to the desired depth the shutter could }* opened, exposing a bit of film arranged between two microscopic slides which were taped around the edges, serving the double purpose of keeping the film dry and acting as a check. (See Fig. 4.)
After an exposure of five minutes, the shutter was closed by means of the other cord and the camera raised to the surface. The film was developed. The exposed part of the film was distinctly darkened, showing that there is some light at the bottom of the lake. The intensity and quality of this light remains to be determined.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Birge, E. A., and Juday, C.: (11) The Inland Lakes of Indiana. Wisconsin Survey Bulletin No. 22. Conn, H. W., and Webster, L. W.: (08) A Preliminary Report on the Algae of the Fresh Waters of Con- necticut. Conn. State Geology & Nat. History Surv., pp. 1-78. (05) The Protozoa of the Fresh Waters of Connecticut. Kdmondson, C. H.: (06) The Protozoa of Iowa. Proceedings of the Davenport Academy of Science. Vol. XI, pp. 1-24. Wolle, F.: (94) The Diatomaceae of N. A. Comenius Press, Bethlelem, Pa. Sedgwick, A.:
Bol
THe OccuRRENCE OF More THAN ONE LEAF IN OPHIOGLOSSUM.
It is usually stated that in the Ophioglossales one leaf develops each year. In collecting material of Ophioglossum vulgatum near Gary, Ind., during the summer of 1914, it was observed that there was a large proportion of plants with more than one leaf, so a count was made. Of a total of two hundred plants, selected at random, ninety-one had one leaf above ground, one hundred and five had two leaves, and four had three leaves. A similar pro- portion was found the same year in plants collected in a wood adjoining the Earlham College campus. Material collected during the summers of 1913 and 1915 showed few plants with more than one leaf.
M. S. Mark ie.
Earlham College,
Richmond, Ind.
309
Tue Puytecoutocy or Peat Boes NEAR RIcHMOND, INDIANA.
we
M. S. MaARKLE.
LITERATURE USED FOR REFERENCE. @) Transeau, E. N., On the geographical distribution and ecological relations of
the bog plant societies of northern North America. Bot. Gaz. 36: 401-420, 1908.
(?) Leverett, F., The glacial formations and drainage features of the Erie and Ohio basins. Mon. 41, U.S. G.S.
(3) Dachnowski, M., A cedar bog in central Ohio. Ohio Naturalist, 11: No. 1, 1910.
While the peat bog is a common feature of the landscape in northerly latitudes, the presence of a bog as far south as Central Indiana or Ohio excites considerable interest. It is the belief of modern botanists (1), that these bogs originated during the period immediately following the glacial period, when the area abutting on the edge of the ice approximated arctic conditions, and gradually emerged from this condition after the recession of the ice. Since the retreat of the ice began at its southern border, areas retaining any of the primitive conditions incident to the original arctic climave increase in rarity southward. In Indiana and Ohio, the Ohio river formed the approximate southern boundary of the ice sheet at the time of its greatest extension; so these bogs are within sixty or seventy miles of the southernmost limit of glacial action and even nearer the edge of the most recent ice sheet. No doubt many bogs formerly existed in central Indiana and Ohio, but, with changed conditions, practically all have disappeared.
The principal features of interest involved in an ecological study of the vegetation of peat bogs are, first, the presence of a large number of xero- phytic forms, a situation not to be inferred from the well-watered condition of the habitat; second, the existence of many plants characteristic of arctic and subarctic regions. Little study was made of the anatomy of these xerophytic forms, as they are not nearly so well represented here as in the northern bogs.
The presence of boreal forms may be accounted for as follows: During the glacial period, the flora of the area bordering on the ice was aretic, such a flora having been able to retreat southward before the slowly-advancing
ice, and consisted of such forms as were able to withstand the many north-
360
Indiana Oh io
: "set SSE Comer malti WG i* care r de in? Oho Ein 4! ‘Ver L a 6 Sores
Fic. 1. Map of part of southeastern Indiana and southwestern Ohio, showing glacial moraines of the Early and Late Wisconsin Ice Sheets and the boundary of the Illinoian drift: also the location of the bogs near Richmond, Indiana and Urbana, Ohio. Adapted from Leverett and supplemented by observation.
361
and-south oscillations of the ice. When the ice finally retreated, the plants followed. As any area became warmer and drier, some species perished. The southern flora, long held in check by the glacier, began to crowd in and where conditions were favorable for its growth, replaced the arctic flora, which remained only in such situations as were unsuitable for the growth of the southern plants, such as bogs and cool, shady ravines. Such places as these are islands of northern plants left in our now southern and south- eastern flora.
The physiographic cycle of a bog differs from that of an ordinary swamp in several particulars; while both are ephemeral features of the landscape, soon being destroyed by sedimentation or by drainage, they differ in the manner in which they are filled; a swamp fills up from the bottom by the gradual accumulation of sediment deposited by incoming streams and that formed by decaying plant and animal matter; while a bog fills largely from the top by the formation, beginning at the edge, of a gradually thickening and settling floating mat of partially decayed vegetation, which is finally capable of supporting a rich flora. Bogs are more likely to develop in un- drained or poorly drained depressions, though there are partially drained bogs and undrained swamps.
The glacial age was not a unit, but was characterized by alternate ad- vances and recessions of the ice, repeated no one knows how often. The last few advances were, in general, less extensive than their predecessors, so the terminal moraine of each was not, in every case, destroyed by its successor. The moraines of three of these successive advances of the ice can be distinguished in Ohio (2). The oldest, the Illinoian, extended almost to the Ohio river. The second, the Early Wisconsin, extended nearly as far, and was divided by an elevation of land into two lobes, the Scioto on the east and the Maumee-Miami on the west. The Late Wisconsin sheet followed the same course as did its predecessor. The terminal moraines of the two sheets are roughly parallel. The medial moraine of the two lobes of the Early Wisconsin Sheet was not destroyed by the Late Wisconsin, and the outwash plain between the medial moraine of the Early Wisconsin and the lateral moraine of the Late Wisconsin formed a broad valley, now drained by the Mad river. In this valley is located a bog, known locally as the Cedar Swamp. See accompanying map, Fig. 1.
Cedar Swamp is in Champaign county, Ohio, about five miles south of Urbana. It is between the river and the east bluff of the valley. There is
/
& Sedqt-grass asseciafhisn
EJ Aroer vitac “
talip-psplar ” oO dry bsg.
Fic. 2. Map of Cedar Swamp, showing relation of the plant associations. The birch-alder association is not shown.
Fic. 3. Panoramic view of Cedar Swamp, looking northward from near the road.
Made from two photographs. Sedge-grass association in foreground, arbor vitae
association in background, with birch-alder association between. The sedge-grass association had recently been burned over.
363
no evidence that it occupies a former bed of the stream. The bog probably occupies what was originally a small lake on the valley floor, fed by springs in the underlying gravel. The former area of the bog was no doubt much greater than its present area, as is shown by extensive outlying deposits of peaty soil. The area of the bog has been greatly reduced during the last few years by artificial means. From natives of the vicinity, it was learned that the bog was formerly much wetter and more impenetrable. A story is told of an “herb-doctor’ who entered the bog on a collecting expedition and never returned. A skeleton recently unearthed was supposed to be that of the unfortunate doctor.
The bog is now artificially drained by a large ditch, but the natural drainage was evidently very sluggish.
The bog in its present condition throws no light on the question of the origin of the floating mat of plants characteristic of the earlier stages. Four rather distinct plant associations, representing four stages in the plant suc- cession in a bog formation, are represented here. These are the sedge-grass association, the birch-alder association, the arbor vitae association and the maple-tulip association.
The quaking mat, occupied by the sedge-grass association, has almost disappeared, and exists only in isolated patches, the largest of which is shown on the accompanying map, Fig. 2. One of the smaller patches appears in a photograph, Fig. 7. The areas that are left are quite typical. Walking about over the mat is to be conducted with some caution, especially in the wetter seasons. By jumping on the mat, one can shake it for many feet around. A stick can be thrust down with little resistance to a depth of four to six feet. The burning over of the largest of these areas has destroyed many of the typical plants. The principal species found in the association are as follows:
Drosera rotundifolia. Parnassia caroliniana. Carex spp.
Lophiola aurea. Solidago ohioensis. Solidago Riddellii. Calopogon pulchellus. laparis Loeselii. Habenaria peramoena.
364
Fic. 4. Arbor vitae trees two feet in diameter with the logs upon which they germinated still remaining. The ends of the logs near the trees do not show. The hatchet is stuck in the nearer log. Cedar Swamp.
Equisetum arvense. Typha latifolia. Utricularia minor. Lobelia Canby. Cardamine bulbosa. Seirpus americanus. Geum rivale. Aspidium thelypteris.
The birch-alder association occupies the smallest area of any of the associations, since 1t forms merely a narrow fringe between the areas of quaking mat and the areas occupied by the arbor vitae association. Some of the same plants are found intermingled with the trees and others on the mat. The tendency is for these bordering shrubs gradually to close in upon the mat areas they enclose until the mat is covered. The shrubs may gain a foothold upon higher points in-the mat association from which they spread outward. The principal plants of the birch-alder association are as follows:
Potentilla fruticosa.
Aldus ineana.
Betula pumila. Hypericum prolificum. Salix cordata. Physoearpus opulifolius. Cephalanthus occidentalis. Steironema quadrifolia. Silphium terebinthinaceum. Ulmaria rubra.
Phlox glaberrima.
By far the largest part of the bog is occupied by the arbor vitae associa- ciation. The association is noticeable from a distance, on account of the presence of these trees of arbor vitae, or white cedar, which gave the bog its name. Trees two feet in diameter are common. <A stump, oblong in cross-section, was found to be twenty feet in circumference and five by eight feet in diameter. The stump was hollow, so that its age could not be de- termined, but the outer six inches showed about one hundred growth rings, so the tree must have been several hundred years old. Under natural conditions, this association would probably persist for a very long time,
as invasion from without goes on very slowly. The Thuyas have very com-
366
Fig. 5. Stump of an arbor vitae tree 40 years old, and the log upon which it germinated. Cedar Swamp.
367
plete possession of the habitat. Shade conditions are such as to exclude light-demanding forms. First attempts at photography under the arbor vitaes resulted in failures, on account of uniform under exposures. The vegetation of the forest floor is not abundant, except in early spring. The herbs are largely shade-enduring species. The mat of roots and fallen branches and leaves is another factor that deters invasion from without. If the toxicity of the substratum is a factor, it exerts its maximum influence here, under present conditions. Then, too, the plants of the association are reproducing themselves very efficiently, all stages of seedlings and saplings being found. Nearly all the Thuyas germinate on stumps and logs. A specimen four or five inches in diameter and twenty-five feet in height was found growing on a stump four feet high. Even the oldest trees, which must be hundreds of years old, are still grasping in their roots the partially decayed remains of the logs upon which they germinated. The fact that the logs are lying in a position that subjects them to the greatest exposure to decay shows the resistant qualities of arbor vitae wood. The logs shown in the photograph (Fig. 4) are still fairly sound, though the trees which grew upon them are two feet in diameter.
One of the commonest undergrowth shrubs is Taxus canadensis, which is here a prostrate, creeping shrub, seldom more than one or two feet in height. No traces of seed formation were observed, but the plant reproduces abundantly by layering. What at first glance seems to be a group of plants is found to be a series of layered branches from a common central plant. This habit is of considerable ecological importance here, since it seems to be the only means of reproduction of the species.
As the accompanying list shows, the arbor vitae association is the habitat of a large number of species of ferns, which form a prominent part of the flora of the association. Camptosorus was found in four widely-separated situations, growing luxuriantly upon fallen logs. Plants of Pteris more than four feet in height are rather common. Osmunda cinnamomea is common, but only two specimens of O. regalis were seen. Botrychium virginianum is abundant. Prothallia of O. cinnamomea are common.
A single plant of Lycopodium lucidulum, probably the last representative of its species, was found. The disappearance of this species is indicative of what has occurred in the case of many other northern forms and of the eventual fate of those that remain. Another disappearing species is
68
€ e
Trees
allow rooting.
A fallen arbor vitae tree, showing sh
6.
Fia.
Swamp.
edar
Cc
ly uprooted.
are frequent
Vaccinium corymbosum, only one specimen
cipal species of the association are as follows:
*Thuya occidentalis. *Taxus canadensis. *Alnus incana. Populus deltoides. *Populus tremuloides. Rhus vernix. Rhus cotinus. Rhus glabra. Lindera benzoin. Ribes Cynosbati. Rubus idaeus. *Rubus triflorus. *Vaccinium corymbosum. Cornus paniculata. Cornus alternifolia. Acer rubrum Pyrus arbutifolia. Ampatiens biflora. Laportea canadensis. Asclepias incarnata. Caltha palustris. Symplocarpus foetidus. Cypripedium parviflorus. Cypripedium hirsutum. Aralia racemosa. Polygonatum biflorum. Dioscorea villosa. Polymnia canadensis. Mitchella repens. Anemonella thalictroides. Anemone quinquefolia. Pedicularis lanceolata. Polemonium reptans. Uvalaria perfoliata. Mitella diphylla. 50 4—24
of whieh was seen.
369
The prin-
370
Fic. 7. One of the small areas occupied by the sedge-grass association, with Sil- phium and Typha in the foreground, and Thuya in the background. The birch-alder association is not well developed here. Cedar Swamp.
Hydrophyllum appendiculatum. Hydrophyllum virginianum. Arisema diphylla.
Trillium grandifiorum.
Trillium cernuum.
*Trientalis americana.
*Maianthomum canadense. Senecio aureus. Botrychium virginianum. Osmunda regalis. Osmunda cinnamomea. Pteris aquilina. Cystopteris fragilis. Aspidium spinulosum. Aspidium eristatum. Aspidium thelypteris.
- Adiantum pedatum. Anoclea sensibilis. Camptosorus rhizophyllus. Asplenium acrosticoides.
*Lycopodium lucidulum.
On the west side of the arbor vitae association is an almost undisturbed tree association, differing greatly in composition from that just described. The arbor vitae zone is made up largely of plants of northern origin or plants characteristic of bogs, while the plants of the other group, called the maple- tulip association, are those typical of the climax mesophytie forest of the region and are distinetly southern in their origin. A comparison of the distribution of the more distinetly boreal forms of the arbor vitae associa- tiln, indicated thus (*) in the list, with those given below for the maple- tulip association, will make the difference in origin very striking. Practically all these boreal forms occur outside the limits of distribution given by the best manuals. The beech is usually a member of the climax mesophytic forest of this region, but since for some reason it is absent from all the forests of this vicinity for several miles around, it is also absent in the bog. The
principal trees of the maple-tulip association follow:
Liriodendron tulipifera. Acer saccharinum. Acer rubrum.
Fraxinus nigra. Fraxinus americana. Juglans cinera.
Ulmus americana. Ulmus racemosa. Platanus occidentalis. Lindera benzoin. Xanthoxylum americanum. Pilea pumila. Urticastrum sp.
Thalictrum dasycarpum.
We have in the cedar swamp a formation of plants of a decidedly boreal aspect, maintaining itself, but for the influence of man, in the midst of a flora predominantly southern. Ability to maintain itself in the struggle with the southern flora was probably due originally to differences in the habitat. Just what the factors are that make hog conditions unsuitable for the growth of most plants have not been fully determined; but some combination of edaphie conditions permitted the northern plants to remain and removed them very largely from competition with the southern forms. In the later stages of the development of the bog, many of these conditions have probably been modified or removed. Many of the southern plants could undoubtedly maintain themselves under the present conditions; but the bog plants have such complete possession of the habitat that invasion is practically pre- eluded. But for the influence of man, the formation would no doubt have been able to maintain itself for many centuries to come.
About two miles southeast of Richmond, Ind., lies a small remnant of a formerly much more extensive peat bog. It is known as the Elliott’s Mills bog and is in such an advanced state in the physiographic cycle of bogs that little resemblance to a typical bog remains. But the characteristic peat soil and the presence of certain bog and boreal plants indicate its former character. The bog lies in a broad, shallow valley between morainic hills. It evidently occupies a shallow, undrained depression scooped out in a softer
part of the underlying Niagara limestone. The bog is crossed by a public
9-9 o19
highway and is now drained by the roadside ditch. It was necessary to blast through rock in order to get an outlet for the bog, showing that it is a rockbound depression. Tile drains from the bog carry streams of cold water throughout the year. Galleries supplying part of the water for the city of Richmond oceupy a drier part of the bog.
The very advanced state of the bog is due, no doubt, to its nearness to the southern limit of glaciation and its consequent great age. Few typical bog plants remain. The following, however, are more or less characteristic of bogs: Rhus vernix, Salix pedicellaris, Hypericum prolificum, Parnassia earoliniana, Potentilla fruticosa. Only one specimen of Rhus vernix remains and it is dying—a fate typical of that of many bog plants which must formerly have existed here.
Nearly all boreal forms have likewise disappeared. The following species have a range reaching far into the north: Potentilla fruticosa, Salix rostrata, Populus tremuloides. Only one specimen of Salix rostrata was found. No other specimen is known in the region. Populus tremuloides occurs sparingly thru central Indiana, but is common in the bog.
A very striking fact is the presence of a large number of species character- istic of prairies. This is somewhat strange when it is remembered that the prairie is a formation not at all characteristic of eastern Indiana, which was originally heavily forested. Eastern Indiana is, however, not far from the tension line between the forest formation characteristic of the east and southeast and the prarie formation characteristic of the west and south- west. No doubt after the retreat of the glacial ice there was a migration of plants of both of these formations and a consequent struggle between them for the possession of the new territory. In some instances the pond-swamp- prairie succession or the pond-bog-prairie succession may have occurred, while in other cases the pond-swamp-forest or the pond-bog-forest succession may have taken place. The last named is the succession that oceurred at Cedar Swamp. In Eastern Indiana, the condition that finally prevailed over the entire area was the mesophytic forest, but it is not likely that the patches that may have followed the succession toward the prairie would have entirely disappeared. This hypothesis would account for such islands of prairie plants in a forested area as we find in this bog. This is not an isolated case. for other such situations are found in eastern Indiana and western Ohio and are known locally as “quaking prairies.’’ “The writer hopes to make further studies of these areas.
The following plants occur in the Elliott’s Mills bog:
Rhus vernix.
Cornus stolonifera. Potentilla fruticosa. Parnassia caroliniana. Hypericum prolificum. Salix pedicellaris. Salix rostrata. Gerardia paupercula. Populus tremuloides. Aster Nova-Angliae. Aster oblongifolius. Phlox glaberrima. Physostegia virginica. Ulmaria rubra. Solidago ohioensis. Solidago Ridellii. Solidago stricta. Solidago rugosa. Rudbeckia hirta. Desmodium paniculata. Monarda fistulosa. Rosa setigera.
Koellia virginica. Chelone glabra. Cirsium muticum. Salix nigra.
Salix cordata.
Lobelia syphilitica. Lobelia Kalmii. Aspidium thelypteris. Selaginella apus. Physocarpus opulifolius. Inula Helenium. Geum canadense. Symploearpus foetidus.
Kupatorium pertohatum.,
3790
Eupotorium purpureum. Sagittaria latifolia. Alisma plantago. Carex spp. Cuscuta sp. Ludwigia palustris. Bidens trichosperma. Oxypolis rigidior. Campanula americana. M. S. Markte. Earlham College, Richmond, Ind.
red”,
4 i}
O70
A REPORT ON THE LAKES OF THE TIPPECANOE BASIN.* Wi. Scort.
This paper presents the first section of the results of the survey of the Indiana lakes. The lakes herein described all lie in the Tippecanoe basin. This basin contains 1,890 square miles. The plan of the survey has been to construct a hydrographic map of the lakes; and to determine at critical levels the temperature together with the amount of oxygen, free carbon- dioxide, carbonates and plankton.
The following lakes have been mapped: Manitou, Yellow Creek, Beaver Dam, Silver, Plew, Sawmill, Irish, Kuhn, Hammon, Dan Kuhn and Ridinger.
Gas determinations and plankton collections have been made in the following lakes: Manitou, Yellow Creek, Pike, Eagle (Winona), Little Eagle (Chapman), Tippecanoe, Plew, Hammon (Big Barbee).
_All of the lakes in this basin have been caused by irregularities in the great Erie-Saginaw interlobate moraine which was formed by the Erie and Huron-Saginaw lobes of the Wisconsin ice sheet. The basins are either kettle holes, irregulatities in the ground moraine, channel lakes, or a combination of these.
In the lakes that we have mapped the area varies from 85,084 sq. M. in Sawmill lake to 3,265,607 sq. M. in Manitou. The volume varies from 284,716 cu. M.in the former to 9,787,024 cu. M. in the latter. Their maximum depth varies from 7.9 M. in Dan Kuhn lake to 22M. in Yellow Creek lake. The average depth of Dan Kuhn lake is 2.588 M. and that of Yellow Creek lake is 10 M. These are the maximum and the minimum for the lakes mapped.
The bottom temperatures vary from 5.3° C. in Tippecanoe lake to 15° C. in Little Eagle (Chapman). The amount of wind distributed heat (. e. in excess of 4° C.) has been calculated in gram calories per square centimeter of surface. This varies from 5,361 gram calories in Manitou to 10,563 calories in Yellow Creek lake.
The oxygen is always abundant in the epilimnion. In six observations it was found to exceed the saturation point at one or more levels. The
*A complete report of this work, with maps, tables, and other data, will be pub- lished as the July number of the Indiana University Studies for 1916.
378
oxygen is always reduced in the hypolimnion. The following lakes have no free oxygen in their lower levels: Hammon, Lingle, Little Eagle, Pike, Center and Webster.
All lakes that have been examined are hard water lakes. The maximum amount of carbondioxide as carbonates varies in the different lakes from 27 ce. per liter to 60 ce. per liter. They are all increasingly acid in their lower levels, but in the epilimnion they are sometimes alkaline. This is due to photosynthesis.
The above statements in this discussion apply only to summer con- ditions.
No very general correlation has been found between the plankton and the dissolved gases. Some of the lakes are much richer in plankton than others. It seems probable at the present stage of the investigation that this is related to, and possibly caused by the varying amount of phanerogams that are produced in their littoral region.
A List or PLANT Diseases oF Economic IMPORTANCE IN INDIANA WITH BIBLIOGRAPHY.
F. J. Prpat.
INTRODUCTION.
Plant diseases cost Indiana considerably more every year than the maintenance of all public schools in the State. In other words, they exact an annual tax of over $15,000,000. The loss on the grain crops alone amounts to about $11,000,000. The above estimates are based upon the results of the experimental and demonstrational work conducted for a number of years with grain smuts over a large section of the state, upon special reports from coéperators in plant disease survey, general correspondence, and per- sonal investigations and observations by the members of the Botanical and other departments of the Agricultural Experiment Station.
A considerable proportion of this damage to growing crops can be readily and cheaply prevented by employing certain well-established, precautionary measures. This has been clearly demonstrated in the disinfection of seed erain by the formaldehydge treatment and in the spraying of fruit trees. Other effective sanitary measures and methods of control are available, which, if put into practice, will save yearly a neat sum of money.
It is highly desirable, therefore, that Indiana farmers realize these facts and avail themselves of the knowledge regarding plant diseases and their control. A greater interest of the farmer in this phase of work will also add stimulus to further and more extensive investigations of plant diseases so that new and more practical measures of prevention and control can be evolved and made available for general practice.
In order to bring together the accumulated information regarding the plant diseases that occur within the State the writer has made an attempt in this paper to present a list and a bibliography of plant diseases in Indiana. It is far from complete, however, and when a thorough survey is completed many additions will be made to it. This list is merely intended to serve as a foundation for plant disease surveys to be made in the future.
With a few exceptions the list includes all plant diseases that have been reported heretofore in various publications, and other diseases of which
380
specimens have been collected or received from correspondents by former and present members of the Department of Botany, Indiana Agricultural Experimental Station, or by Professor G. N. Hoffer, of the School of Science, Purdue University. Unless otherwise stated in the list the specimens are in the phytopathological collection of the Station Department of Botany, or in the collection of Professor Hoffer. The distribution of the diseases is given either by counties, together with the dates of collections when known; or by sections of the State in which they are prevalent. If they occur generally over the State they are mentioned as common.
The bibliography includes articles written by Indiana workers and pertaining to Indiana plant diseases, published mostly in the bulletins and reports of the Indiana Agricultural Experiment Station, Proceedings of the Indiana Academy of Science, Transactions of the Indiana Horticultural Society, and the Annual Reports of the State Entomologist. It also includes several papers presented at meetings by out-of-state scientists, but pertaining to diseases common to Indiana and printed in the State publications. Ref- erences to the articles dealing with the diseases mentioned in the following list are given by number, in the chronological order in which they were published.
In order to make the plant disease survey as complete as possible, co- operation is solicited, and the Department of Botany, Agricultural Experi- ment Station, Lafayette, will be pleased to receive specimens, especially of the less common or unreported diseases. Any valuable information as to the prevalence of such diseases, the extent of damage caused, relation to weather conditions, etc., will also be appreciated.
The writer wishes to express his gratitude to Prof. H. S. Jackson, Chief of the Department of Botany, Indiana Agricultural Experiment Station, for valuable advice and assistance in the preparation of this list.
381 LIST OF DISEASKS.
Alfalfa (Medicago sativa L.)
Downey Mildew, Peronospora Trifoliorwm DeB. Tippecanoe, 1915.
Leaf Spot, Pseudopeziza Medicaginis (Lib.) Sace. Common. 78.
Rust, Uromyces Medicaginis Pass. Putnam, 1907.
Violet Root Rot, Rhizoctonia Crocorum (Pers.) DC. Referred to formerly as R. Medicaginis D.C. St. Joseph, 1915. County agent, J. S. Bordner, reported a number of affected spots in one field, each spot being as much as 10 feet across and enlarging at the rate of 1 foot every 30 days during the growing season. So far as known to the writer this disease has been reported on alfalfa only from Nebraska, Kansas and Virginia.
Wilt, Sclerotinia Trifoliorum Eriks. Clark, Fulton and Henry, 1914. Especially prevalent in Clark county.
Apple (Pyrus Malus L.)
Bitter Pit (cause physiological). Common on Baldwin variety. Bald- win Fruit Spot, caused by Cylindrosporiuwm Pomi, has been reported but no definite determination of it has yet been made. References to Baldwin Fruit Spot: 58, 59, 84, 36.
Bitter Rot, Glomerella rufomaculans (Berk.) Spaul. and von Schr. Preva- lent in the southern half of the State. 46, 76, 78, 57, 58, 84, 100, 36, 40.
Black Rot, Sphaeropsis Malorum Peck. Shear’s studies indicate genetic connection with Melanops. Prevalent in the southern half of the State. 78, 58, 59, 84, 100, 67, 36, 40, 117.
Blister Canker, Nummularia discreta (Schw.) Tul. Becoming serious in the southern part of the State. 36, 40, 39, 117, 86.
Bloteh, Phyllosticta solitaria EK. & HK. Common. 78, 58, 59, 84, 37, 40.
Brown Rot, Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Wor. Common. 58, 59, 84.
Crown Gall, Pseudomonas tumefaciens E. F. Smith & Towns. Reported serious occasionally on nursery stock. 57, 59, 84, 36.
European Canker, Nectria ditissima Tul. Found injurious to nursery stock. 57, 58, 59.
Fire Blight, Bacillus amylovorus (Burr.) DeToni. Common. 76, 78. 57, 58, 59, 34, 36, 38, 117, 62. See also under Pear.
382
IKly Speck, Leplothyrium Pomi. (Mont. & Ir.) Sace. Usually found to- eether with sooty blotch. 78, 58, 84, 36, 40.
Jonathan Fruit Spot (cause unknown). Serious on Jonathan apples in storage.
Leaf Spot, Phyllosticta limitata Pk. Tippecanoe, 1915. Pestalozzia concentrica B. & Br. Monroe, Franklin and Martin, 1912.
Mildew, Podosphaera oxyacanthae (D.C.) DeB. Floyd, 1906, and Podo- sphaera leucotrichia (KH. & EK.) Salm. Sullivan, 1915. 84.
Pink Rot, Cephalotheciwm rosewm Cda. Common. 58, 84.
Root Rot, Clitocybe parasitica Wileox and Armillaria mellea (Vahl.) Qual. Serious in some orchards in the southern counties.
Rust, Gymnosporangium Juniperi-virginianae Schw. Common. 133, 94, 78, 57, 58, 84, 100, 36, 40, 39, 117.
Seab, Venturia inaequalis (Fr.) Wint. Common. 76, 78, 57, 58, 84, 59, 100, 36, 40, 39.
Soft Rot, Penicillium spp. Common. 58, 59, 84.
Sooty Blotch, Phyllachora pomigena (Schw.) Sace. Most abundant in unusually moist seasons and in damp situations. 78, 58, 84, 36, 40.
Trunk Rot, Fomes applanatus (Pers.) Wallr. Kosciusko, 1914.
Ash (Fraxinus spp.)
Mildew, Phyllactinia corylea (Pers.) Karst. Johnson, 1890. Montgomery and Putnam, 1893. 132. White Heart Rot, Fomes fraxinophilus Peck. 132, 71.
Asparagus (Asparagus sp.) Rust, Puccinia Asparagi D.C. Rather common. 110, 21, 142, 76, 77 136, 25.
s
Astec, Chinese (Callistephus hortensis Cass.)
Fusarium Wilt, Fusariwm sp. Tippecanoe, 1912; Clinton, 1914; Allen and Marion, 1915. Rust, Coleosporium Solidaginis (Schw.) Thum. Jefferson, 1914.
383
Barley (Hordeum sp.)
Black Stem Rust, Puccinia poculiformis (Pers.) Wettst. Common.
Covered Smut, Ustilago Hordei (Pers.) Kell. & Sw. Rather common. 132, 42.
Loose Smut, Ustilago nuda (Jens.) Kell. & Sw. Rather common.
Stripe Disease, Helminthosporium gramineum (Rag.) Erik. Tippecanoe, 1910.
Bean (Phaseolus vulgaris L.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum Lindemuthianum (Save. & Magn.) Bri. & Cav. Common. 78, 128.
Rust, Uromyces appendiculatus (Pers.) Lev. Common. 132, 142, 78.
Stem Rot, Corticitwm vagum B. & C. var. Solani Burt. Laporte, 1911.
Beech (Fagus sp.)
Heart Rot, Steccherinum septentrionale (Fr.) Banker. Rather common. 132, 71.
Leaf Spot, Phyllosticta faginea Pk. Monroe, 1909. 137.
Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (D.C.) Wint. Johnson, 1890. 132.
Beet (Beta vulgaris L.)
Bacterial Disease. While the cause of this disease has been ascribed to a bacterial origin, the matter has not been definitely settled. The general characteristics of the diseased plants are similar to those caused by the curly top disease described by Townsend (U. 8. Dept. of Agr. B. P. I. Bul. 122). The curly top disease, however, appears to be caused, as indicated by Shaw (U.S. Dept. of Agr. B. P. I. Bul. 181) and Ball (U. S. Dept. of Agr. Bur. Ent. Bul. 66), by the beet leafhopper (Hutettix tenella). As this insect is claimed to be confined to the southern states and therefore is not likely to be found in Indiana, it is doubtful if the Indiana disease is the same as the curly top. 65, 31, 55.
Leaf Blight, Cercospora beticola Sace. Probably common. 128, 78.
Leaf Spot, Septoria Betae West. Tippecanoe, 1896.
Seab, Oospora scabies Thaxter. Common. 65, 31.
354
Birch, Yellow (Betula lutea Michx. f.)
Rust, Melampsoridium betulinum (Pers.) Kleb. Steuben, 1913. 25.
Blackberry (Rubus spp.)
Anthracnose, Gloeosporium veneltum Speg. Burkholder reported genetic connection with Plectodiscella. Common. 128, 78, 57, 36, 40. Crown Gall, Pseudomonas tumefaciens EK. F. Smith and Townsend. Rather serious in some localities. 76, 57, 40.
Leaf Spot, Septoria Rubi West. Common. 78, 40.
Rust, Gymnoconia interstitialis (Schlecht.) Lagh. Common. 64, 128, 142, 78, 57, 36. Puccinia Peckiana Howe. Tippecanoe, 1895. Kuehneola Uredinis (Link) Arthur. Common.
Blue-grass (Poa pratensis L.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum cereale Manns. Tippecanoe, 1914.
Leaf Spot, Scoletotrichum graminus Fekl. Johnson, 1890. 132.
Mildew, EHrysiphe graminis D.C. Common in wet seasons. 132.
Rust, Puccinia epiphylla (L.) Wettst. Common. 132.
Slime Mold, Physarum cinereum (Batsch) Pers. Tippecanoe, 1913. Marion, 1915.
Cabbage (Brassica oleracea lL.)
Black Leg, Phoma oleracea Sace. Elkhart, 1915. Large percentage of the crop in two fields was severely affected.
Black Rot, Pseudomonas campestris (Pammel) E. F. Smith. Common. 108, 76, 78, 42.
Club-root, Plasmodiophora Brassicae Wor. Rather common. 77.
Drop, Sclerotinia libertiana Fekl. Tippecanoe, 1915. No specimen preserved.
Leaf Blight, Allernaria Brassicae (Berk.) Sace. Clark, 1908. One field almost ruined. No specimen preserved. ;
Wilt or Yellows, Fusarium conglulinans Wr. Pike and Deeatur, 1914.
Canteloupe (Cucumis Melo L.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum Lagenarium (Pass.) Ell. & Halls. Becoming common. 78.
380
Leaf Blight, Alternaria Brassicae (Berk.) Sace. Common. 128, 78, 144. Wilt, Bacillus tracheiphilus KE. F. Smith. Very serious in many localities. 76, 78, 144.
Carnation (Dianthus Caryophyllus L.) Bacteriosis, Bacterium Dianthi Arth. & Boll. Serious in greenhouses. 30. Bud Rot, Sporotrichum anthophilum Peck. Marion, 1909. 58. Leaf Spot, Alternatia Dianthi S. & H. Monroe, 1912. 138. Rust, Uromyces caryophyllinus (Schrank) Wint. Common. 132, 138.
Catalpa (Catalpa spp.)
Heart Rot, Collybia velutipes Fr. and Polyporus versicolor Fr. Tippecanoe, 1GiS2 71.
Leaf Spot, Cladosporium sp. Common. 58. Macrosporium Catalpae Ell. & Mart., Kosciusko, 1914, and Phyllosticta Catalpae Ell. & Mart., Kosciusko, 1914. 71.
Mildew, Microsphaera vaccinii (Schw.) Salm. Reported as Microsphaera elevata Burrill. Putnam, 1891. Owen, 1893. Tippecanoe, 1890. Phyllactinia suffulata (Reb.) Sace. Montgomery, 1893. 132.
Cauliflower (Brassica oleracea lL. var. botrytis D. C.) Black Rot, Pseudomonas campestris (Pammel) E. F. Smith. No locality
mentioned. 77.
Celery (Apium graveolens L.) Leaf Spot, Septoria Petroselini. Desm. var. Apil. Br. & Cav. Tippecanoe, 1915. Cercospora Api Fr. Marshall and St. Joseph, 1915. Cherry (Prunus spp.) Black Knot, Plowrightia morbosa (Schw.) Sace. Common. 127, 10, 130, 57, 36, 40, 117. Brown Rot, Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Wor. Common. 57, 58. 36, 40. Leaf Spot, Cylindrosporium Padi Karst. Higgins has reported genetic relation with Coccomyces hiemalis Higgins. Common. 78, 57, 36, 38, 40. ; Powdery Mildew, Podosphaera oxyacanthae (D.C.) DeB. Common. Seab. Venturia cerasi Aderh. Kosciusko, 1913.
5084—25
386
Chestnut (Castanea spp.)
Blight, Endothia parasitica (Murrill) Anders. Marion and Benton, 1915. Leaf Spot, Mycosphaerella maculiformis (Pers.) Sehw. Martin, 1915.
Chrysanthemum (Chrysanthemum spp.)
Rust, Puccinia Chrysanthemi Roze. Tippecanoe, 1900. 24.
Clover (Trifolium spp.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum Trifolii Bain. Monroe, 1908, on red clover. 137. Gloeosporium caulivorum Kirchner. Tippecanoe, 1915, on red clover.
Black Mold, Phyllachora Trifolii (Pers.) Fekl. Johnson, 1890, on red clover. 132.
Rust, Uromyces fallens (Desm.) Kern and Uromyces Trifolii (Hedw.) Lev. Common. 132, 25, 142, 98.
Sooty Spot, Polythryncium Trifolii Kze. Franklin, 1912, on red and white clover.
Wilt, Sclerotinia Trifoliorum Eriks. Gibson, 1915, on red and erimson
clover.
Corn (Zea Mays L.)
Dry Rot, Fusarium sp. Common. 77, 78.
Rust, Puccinia Sorghi Schw. Common. 132, 142.
Smut, Ustilago Zeae (Beckm.) Ung. Common. 49, 12, 56, 107, 33, 111, 113, 45, 76, 78.
Cucumber (Cucumis sativus |.)
Angular Leaf Spot, Bacterium lachrymans. EK. F. Smith & Bryan. Pu- laski, Marshall and Fulton, 1915.
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum Lagenarium (Pass.) Ell. & Hals. Marshall, Laporte, St. Joseph, Starke, Pulaski and Fulton, 1915.
Bacterial Wilt, Bacillus tracheiphilus E. F. Smith. Marshall, Tippe- canoe, Laporte, Fulton, Starke, Pulaski and St. Joseph, 1915.
Downy Mildew, Peronoplasmopara cubensis (B. & C.) Clinton. Marshall, 1915.
387
Powdery Mildew, Erysiphe Cichoracearum D.C. Marshall, 1915. White Pickle or Mosaic Disease (cause not known). Marshall, Laporte, Tippecanoe, Fulton, Pulaski, St. Joseph and Starke. 1915.
Currant (Ribes spp.) Anthracnose, Pseudopeziza Ribis Kleb. Rather common. 138, 40. Leaf Spot, Septoria Ribis Desm. Common. 78, 40. Powdery Mildew, Sphaerotheca Mors-uwoae (Schwein.) Berk. & Curt. Common. 40.
Eggplant (Solanum Melongena L.) Leaf Spot, Ascochyta Lycopersici Brun. Tippecanoe, 1915.
Elm ( Ulmus spp.) Leaf Spot, Mycosphaerella Ulmi Kleb. Johnson, 1890. Dothidella ulmea (Schw.) E. & E. Montgomery, 1893. Kosciusko, 1912. 132, 135, 71. Mildew, Uncinula macrospora Pk. Rather common. 132. Rot, Pleurotus ulmarius Bull. Common. 71.
Ginseng (Panax quinquefolium L.)
Wilt, Acrostalagmus albus Preuss. Brown, 1909. 58.
Gooseberry (Ribes grossularia L.) Anthracnose, Pseudopeziza Ribis Kleb. Becoming common. 40. Leaf Spot, Septoria Ribis Desm. Common. 78, 138, 40. Mildew, Sphaerotheca Mors-uvae (Schw.) Berk. & Curt. Common. 128. 78, 40.
Grape (Vitis spp.) Anthracnose, Gloeosporium ampelophagum Sace. Rather common. 58, 60, 36, 40. Black Rot, Guignardia Bidwellii (Ell.) Viala & Ravaz. Common. 8, 128, 78, 60, 36, 40. Crown Gall, Pseudomonas tumefaciens E. F. Smith & Towns. No locality mentioned. 38.
388
Downy Mildew, Plasmopara viticola (B. & C.) Berl. & DeToni. Common. 132, 58, 60, 36, 40.
Powdery Mildew, Uncinula necator (Schw.) Bull. Common. 8, 127, 36. 40.
Necrosis, Fusicoccum viticolum Red. Tipton, 1907. 60.
Hickory ( Hicoria spp.) Leaf Spot, Bacterium sp. Common. 71. Marsonia sp. Kosciusko, 1913. Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (D.C.) Wint. Johnson, 1890; Marshall, 1893. 132. Root Rot, Armillaria mellea Vahl. Tippecanoe, 1915. 71.
Hollyhock (Althaea rosea Cay.) Rust, Puccinia malvacearum Mont. St. Joseph, Montgomery, Marshall, Huntington, Marion, and Tippecanoe, 1915.
Horse Chesnut (Aesculus Hippocastanum L.) Mildew, Uncinula fleruosa Pk. Johnson, 1890; Montgomery. 132.
Japanese Ivy (Ampelopsis tricuspidata Sieb. & Zucc.) Cladosporium Wilt, Cladosporium herbarum Link. Tippecanoe, 1914.
Lettuce (Lactuca sativa L.) Downy Mildew, Bremia Lactucae Regel. Found frequently in green- houses. 143. Drop, Sclerotinia libertiana Fckl. Common in greenhouses. Leaf Spot, Septoria Lactucae Pass. Johnson, 1890. Kosciusko, 1913. 132.
Lilac (Syringa vulgaris L.) Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (Wollr.) Wint. Common. 102.
Linden (Tilia americana L.) Mildew, Uncinula Clintonii Peck. Montgomery, 1890; Putnam, 1893. 132.
389
Locust, Black (Robinia Pseudacacia |.)
Yellow Heart Rot, Fomes rimosus Berk. Rather common. 71.
Locust, Honey Gleditsia triacanthos L.) Leaf Spot, Melasmia hypophylla Sace. Marion, 1890; Tippecanoe, 1892; Putnam, 1893. 132. Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (Wallr.) Wint. Common. 71.
Maple (Acer spp.)
Anthracnose, Gloeosporium apocryptum EK. & E. Marion, Floyd, Van- derburg and Boone, 1914. 39. °
Bark Canker, Schizophyllum commune Fr. Rather common. 71.
Canker, Nectria cinnabarina (Tode) Fr. Carroll, 19138. 71.
Leaf Spot, Phleospora Aceris Lib. Johnson, 1890, on red maple. Stagonos- pora collapsa (C. & EK.) Sace. Putnam, 1893, on soft maple. 132. Leaf Tar Spot, Rhytisma acerina (Pers.) Fr. Common in some localities.
132, 137, 39, 71.
Mildew, Uncinula circinata C. & P. Montgomery, 1885; Johnson, 1890; Marshall, 1893, on red and soft maple. 132, 102.
Sun Seald. This trouble, thought to be due to drouth and storm injury has been quite prevalent over the State during the past few seasons. 38, 39.
White Heart Rot, Fomes igniarius (L.) Gillet. Common. 71.
White Rot, Polyporus squamosus (Huds.) Fr. Tippecanoe. 71.
Millet (Chaetcchloa italica (L.) Seribn.
Smut, Ustilago Crameri Koern. Rather common but not serious. 112.
Oak (Quercus spp.)
Leaf Spot, Ceratophorum uncinatum (Cl. & Pk.) Sace. Johnson, 1890, on bur-oak. Didymella lephosphora Sace. & Speg. Monroe, 1911, on red oak. Gloeosporium septorioides Sace. Montgomery, 1890; Monroe, 1909, on red oak. Marsonia Martini Sace. & Ell. Common on several species. Phyllosticta Quercus Sace. & Speg. Montgomery, 1898, on bur-oak. 132, 137, 71.
390
Brown Heart Rot, Fomes Everhartii Ell. & Gall. = (Pyropolyporus Ever- hartti (Ell. & Gall.) Murrill). Common in the northern counties. 7
Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (Wallr.) Wint. Frequently on leaves of coppice growth of red and white oaks. Phyllactinia suffulita (Reb.) Sace. Shelby, 1890; Vigo, 1893, on swamp and red oaks. 132, 71.
Piped Rot, Polyporus pilotae Schw. = (Aurantiporus pilotae (Schw.) Murrill). In the southern part of the State. 71.
Red Heart, Polyporus sulphureus (Bull.) Fr. = (Laetiporus speciosus (Batt.) Murrill). Common. 71.
Root Rot, Armillaria mellea Vahl. Common. Polyporus Berkeleyi Fr. = (Grifolia Berkeleyi (Fr.) Murrill). Tippecanoe and Monroe. Poly- porus dryadeus Fr. Tippecanoe and Monroe. 71.
Speckled Rot. Stereum frustulosum Pers. Putnam, 1891. 132.
Straw-colored Rot, Polyporus frondosus Fr. = (Grifolia frondosa (Fr.) Murrill.) Common, although it does not frequently attack living trees. 71.
White Rot or Coral Fungus, Hydnum erinaceus Bull. Common. 71.
Oats (Avena sativa L.) Covered Smut, Ustilago levis (Kell. & Sw.) Magn. Common. Loose Smut, Ustilago Avenae (Pers.) Jens. Common. 3, 6, 9. 132. 56. 122, 109, 20, 123, 115, 26, 27, 76, 78, 42, 32, 75, 91. Rust, Puccinia Rhamni (Pers.) Wettst. Common. 132, 25, 142, 76. 78.
Ohio Buckeye (Aesculus glabra Willd.) Mildew, Uncinula fleruosa Pk. Johnson, 1890; Montgomery. 132. Leaf Spot, Phyllosticia Paviae Desm. Montgomery and Johnson, 1890; Brown, 1893. 132. Onion (Allium Cepa L.)
Black Mold, Macrosporium parasiticum Thuem. Starke, 1912.
Smut, Urocystis cepulae Frost. Becoming serious locally in the north eentral counties. 135.
Soft Rot, Bacillus sp. Occasionally casues considerable loss in storage.
Pea (Pisum sp.) Blight, Ascochyta Pisi Lib. Common. 42, 136.
391
Peach (Amygdalus persica 1.)
Bacterial Leaf Spot, Bacterium Pruni EB. F. Smith. Vanderburg, 1915.
Blight, Coryneuwm Beyerinkii Oud. Reported in several localities in the peach-growing districts. 61, 40.
Brown Rot, Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Wor. Common. 76, 57, 58, 61.
Crown Gall, Pseudomonas tumefaciens EK. F. Smith & Towns. Probably not common. 57, 61.
Leaf Curl, Exoascus deformans (Berk.) Fekl. Common. 132, 128, 17, 76, 78, 57, 61, 40.
Powdery Mildew, Sphaerotheca pannosa (Wallr.) Lev. Common. 58, 61.
Seab, Cladosporium carpophilum Thuem. Common. 2, 98, 58, 61, 40. .
Yellows. Common. 76, 78, 57, 58, 61, 40, 117.
Pear (Pyrus communis L.)
Black Rot, Sphaeropsis Malorum Pk. Shear’s studies indicate genetic connection with Melanops. Tippecanoe, 1915.
Blight, Bacillus amylovorus (Burr.) DeToni. Common. 43, 57, 81, 92, 93, 97, 121, 52, 53, 51, 105, 128, 99, 63, 95, 76, 78, 59, 84, 36, 38, 40, 117, 62. See also under Apple.
Leaf Blight, Entomosporium maculatum Ley. Perfect stage = Fabrea maculata (Lev.) Atk. Rather common. 36, 40.
Leaf Spot, Septoria pyricola Desm. Rather common. 135. M ycosphaer- ella sentina (Fr.) Schw. Kosciusko, 1914.
Seab, Venturia pyrina Aderh. Rather common. 128, 78.
Pepper (Capsicum annuum L.)
Black Rot, Macrosporium Solani Ell. & Mart. Tippecanoe, 1912.
Plum (Prunus spp.)
Black Knot, Plowrightia morbosa (Sehw.) Saecc. Common. 127, 10, 128, 130, 76, 78, 57, 58, 36, 40, 117.
Brown Rot, Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Wor. Common. 128, 76, 78, 97, 58, 36, 40.
Leaf Spot, Cylindrosporium Padi Warst. Common. 128, 78, 57, 36, 40.
Plum Pocket, Exoascus Pruni Fekl. Common. 17, 38, 117.
392
Poplar (Populus spp.)
Leaf Spot, Marsonia Populi (Lib.) Sacc. Tippecanoe, 1910. Mildew, Uncinula Salicis (D.C.) Wint. Common. 132. Rust, Melampsora Medusae Thuem. Common. 142, 71. Melampsora Abjietis-canadensis (Farl.) Ludwig. Tippecanoe, Jasper, Steuben, Putman.
Potato (Solanum iuberosum L.)
Bacterial Wilt, Bacilus solanacearum E. F. Smith. Serious locally. 78.
Early Blight, Macrosporium Solani Ell. & Mart. Common. 128, 119,
AES
Fusarium Rot, Fusarium sp. Common.
Late Blight, Phytophthora infestans (Mont.) DeB. Common. 128, 119, 78.
Seab, Oospora scabies Thaxter. Common. 11, 13, 14, 15, 20, 76, 78, 54.
Tipburn. Probably sunseald injury. Tippecanoe, 1907.
Privet (Ligustrum oulsere L.)
Anthracnose, Gloeosporium cingulatum Atk. Marion, 1908. 58.
Quince (Cydonia vulgaris Pers.)
Black Rot, Sphaeropsis malorum Pk. Shear indicates genetic connection with Melanops. Common. 76, 78.
Blight, Bacillus amylovorus (Burr.) DeToni. Common. 76, 78, 36, 40.
See also under Apple and Pear.
Leaf blight, Entomosporium maculatum Levy. Common. 128, 58, 36. 40. Perfect stage = Fabrea maculata (Lev.) Atk.
Mildew, Podosphaera oxyacanthae (D.C.) DeB. Montgomery, 1885. 102.
Rust, Gymnosporangium germinale (Schw.) Kern. Perry, 1914. 77.
Radish (Raphanus satious L.)
Downy Mildew, Peronospora parasitica (Pers.) DeB. 143. White Rust, Albugo candida (Pers.) Roussel. Common. 132, 113.
393
Raspberry (Rubus spp.)
Anthracnose, Gloeosporium venelum Speg. Burkholder reported genetie connection with Plectcdiscella. Common. 128, 76, 78, 58, 36, 40.
Cane Blight, Coniolthyrium Fuckelii Sacc. No locality mentioned. 40.
Crown Gall, Pseudomonas tumefaciens E. F. Smith & Towns. Common. 40.
Leaf Spot, Septoria Rubi West. Common. 78, 40.
Rust, Gymnoconia interstitialis (Schlecht.) Lagh. Common. 78, 36.
Rhubarb (Rheum Rhaponticum L.) Leaf Spot, Ascochyla Rhei EK. & KE. Tippecanoe, 1912 and 1915.
Rose (Rosa spp.) Black Spot, Actinonema Rosae (Lib.) Fr. Wolf reported perfect stage, Diplocarpon Rosae Wolf.
Leaf Spot, Dicoccwm Rosae Bon. Howard, 1911.
Mildew, Sphaerotheca pannosa Wallr. Common. 132.
Rust, Phragmidium americanum Dietel. Probably common. 132. Phragmidium disciflorum (Tod) J. F. James. St. Joseph, 1915. Phragmidium subcorticium (Schrank) Wint. Tippecanoe, 1915.
Rubber Plant (Ficus elastica Roxb.) Leaf Spot. Macrosporium sp. Tippecanoe, 1910.
Rye (Secale cereale L.) Ergot, Claviceps purpurea (Fr.) Tul. Common. 132. Leaf Rust, Puccinia asperifolia (L.) Wettst. Common. Stem Rust, Puccinia poculiformis (Jasq.) Wettst.. 25.
Sorghum (Sorghum spp.) Kernel Smut, Sphacelotheca Sorghi (Lk.) Clinton. Common. Collected
on several members of the sorghum group.
Snapdragon (Antirrhinum majus L.) Anthracnose, Colletotrichum Antirrhini Stew. Tippecanoe, 1915. Rust, Puccinia Antirrhini Diet. & Holw. Montgomery, Lagrange, Hen- dricks and Wabash, 1915.
394
Strawberry (Fragaria spp.) Leaf Spot, Mycosphaerella Fragariae (Tul.) Linden. Common. 128, 58, 40, 90, 39. Mildew, Sphaerotheca Humuli (D.C.) Burr. Common. 38, 40. Sweet Pea (Lathyrus spp.)
Root Rot, Fusarium Lathyri Taubenhaus. Tippecanoe, 1912.
Sweet Potato (/pomoea Batatas Lam.) Black Rot, Sphaeronema fimbriatum (Ell. & Hals.) Sace. Rather common. 77, 83. Dry Rot, Diaporthe batatatis Harter & Field. Tippecanoe, 1912. 83. Fusarium Rot, Fusarium sp. Tippecanoe, 1912. 83. Stem Rot, Nectria Ipomoeae Hals. Tippecanoe, 1912. Monroe. 83.
Swiss Chard (Beta sp.) Leaf Spot, Cercospora beticola Sace. Tippecanoe, 1910.
Sycamore (Platanus occidentalis L.)
Leaf Spot, Stigmina Platani Fckl. Tippecanoe, 1914. 71. Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (DC.) Wint. Johnson, 1890; Putnam, 1891; Montgomery, 1893. 132. Phyllactinia Corylea (Pers.) Karst. Common. 71.
Timothy (Phleum pratense L.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum cereale Manns. Hamilton and Bartholomew, 1909.
Leaf Spot, Scoletotrichum graminis Fckl. Johnson, 1890. 132.
Rust, Puccinia poculiformis (Jacq.) Wettst. Common. 79, 80, 74.
Silver Top, Sporotrichum Poae Pk. Kosciusko, 1914.
Smut, Ustilago striaeformis (West.) Niess. Common. 132.
Tomato (Lycopersicum esculentum Mill.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum phomoides (Sace.) Chest. Common. Bacterial Blight, Bacillus solanacearum E. F. Smith. Serious locally. 78, 39.
3990
Black Rot, Alternaria sp. Tippecanoe, 1912.
Blossom End Rot (cause not known). Common, especially during dry weather. 76, 78, 131.
Fusarium Wilt, Fusarium Lycopersici Sace. Knox, 1913; Tippecanoe, 1914 and 1915.
Leaf Mold, Cladosporium fuloum Cke. Wabash, 1915, in greenhouse.
Leaf Spot, Septoria Lycopersici Speg. Common. 128, 78, 131.
Mosaie Disease (cause not definitely known). Common in greenhouses.
Oedema. Cause physiological. Tippecanoe, 1912, in greenhouse.
Walnut, Black (Juglans nigra 1.)
Leaf Spot, Marsonia Juglandis (Lib.) Sace. Perfect stage = Gnomonia leptostyla (Fr.) Ces. & d. Not. Tippecanoe, 1914.
Mildew, Microsphaera Alni (D.C.) Wint. Johnson, 1890. Putnam, 1893. 132.
Walnut, White (Juglans cinerea L.) Mildew, Phyllactinia Corylea (Pers.) Karst. Carroll, 1913. 71.
Watermelon (Citrullus vulgaris Schrad.)
Anthraenose, Colletotrichwm Lagenarium (Pass.) Ell. & Hals. Common.
128, 78.
Fusarium Wilt, Fusarium vasinfectum Atk. var. nivewm Sm... Common. 78, 144.
Leaf Blight, Alternaria Brassicae (Berk.) Sace. var. nigrescens Pegl. Com- mon.
Wheat (Triticum vulgare 1.)
Anthracnose, Colletotrichum cereale Manns. Posey, 1912.
Ebony Point, Alternaria sp. Common.
Fusarium Blight, Fusariwm sp. Unusual outbreak of Fusarium trouble occurred during the past season (1915) in Orange, Washington, Jeffer- son and Green counties. The maturing heads had a dull grayish- brown color instead of the normal golden brown. The kernels were small, shrunken, and in many eases covered with mycelial growth. Prof. G. N. Hoffer, who co-operated in the investigation of this disease, found many kernels internally infected with Fusarium.
596
Leaf Rust, Puccinia triticina Eriks & Henn. Common. See under Stem Rust.
Loose Smut, Ustilago Tritici (Pers.) Jens. Common. 82, 35, 9la, 132, 19, 109, 23, 116, 76, 78, 42, 32.
Scab, Fusarium sp. Common, 7, 18, 76, 78.
Septoria Spot, Seploria graminum Desm. Common. Another species of Septoria which agrees closely with S. glumarum Sace. was found associated with the Fusarium blight disease. Pyenidia were found in abundance not only on glumes but on sheaths and nodes as well. In one of the fields examined by the writer every wheat plant was severely affected.
Stinking Smut, Tilletia foetans (B. &.C.) Trel. Common. 82, 3, 5. 9la, 9, 56, 20, 76, 78, 42, 57, 32, 88. Tilletia Tritici (Beij.) Wint.
Franklin, 1912.
Stem Rust, Puccinia poculiformis (Jacq.) Wettst. Common. 82, 50. 4,
47, 48, 142, 76, 78, 57.
Willow (Salix spp.) Mildew, Uncinula Salicis (D.C.) Karst. Common. 132, 71. Rust, Melampsora Bigelowii Thuem. Common. 71. Wood Rot, Daedalea confragosa (Balt.) Pers. Tippecanoe, 1912.
Yellow Poplar (Liriodendron tulipifera lL.) Mildew, Erysiphe Liriodendri Schw. Putnam, 1891 and 1893; Mont- gomery 1893. Phyllactinia suffulta (Reb.) Sace. Johnson, 1890; Montgomery, 1893. 132.
397
BIBLIOGRAPHY. . Anderson, H. W.
1914 A new leaf spot of Viola cucullata. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci- 1914:187-190. Description of leaf spot diseases caused by Colletotrichum.
DP. Rennes Fu.
1889 Spotting of peaches and cucumbers. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 19:5-10, figs. 1-6. Description and brief discussion of Cladosporium carpophilum Thuem. and Cladosporium
cucumerinum EK. & A. 3. ————-—-— Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 28:3-23,
1889 Smut of wheat and oats. figs. 1-7. Detailed discussion of the stinking smut of wheat and briefer reference to the loose smuts of wheat, oats,
barley and rye.
1889 What is common wheat rust? Proce. Soe. Prom. Agric. Sci.
7:11-12.
On
1890 Treatment of smut in,wheat. Ind. Agri. Exp. Sta. Bul. 32:3-9. Discusses copper sulfate and hot water treatments for pre-
venting stinking smut.
6. ——— 1891 The loose smut of oats. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 35:81-97, figs. 1-4. Discussion of the occurrence of oat smut in the State and its prevention by the hot water treatment. ts:
1891 Wheat seab. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 36:129-132. Observa- tions on the occurrence of scab, caused by Fusarium sp.,
in the vicinity of Lafayette.
398
10.
ie
12.
13.
15.
1892
1892
1894
1895
1895
1896
1897
1897
Treatment of powdery mildew and black rot on grapes. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 38:17-18, pl. 1. Results on spraying with a solution of potassium sulphide and dusting with sulphur for mildew and spraying with bordeaux for black
rot. Grain smut and the use of hot water to prevent it. Agric. Sel. 6:393-397. Abstract in Proce. Soe. Prom. Agr. Sci.
9:135. Experiments with the stinking smut of wheat.
Black knot and other excrescences. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1894:76-80. Discussion of the nature and control of Plow- rightia morbosa on plums and cherry and of similar ex- crescences on other trees, as poplar, oaks, peach, apricot,
ete.
Potato scab and its prevention. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 56:69-80. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1895:537-545. Cor- rosive sublimate treatment recommended.
Treatment of corn smut. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 16. Gathering and destroying of smut recommended.
Prevention of potato scab. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul.
24. Diseussion of the corrosive sublimate treatment.
A new remedy for potato seab. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 43. First announcement of the formaldehyde treat-
ment.
Formalin for prevention of potato scab. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 65:19-32, pls. 2,
16.
Ze
18.
tore
20.
21.
22.
1897
1898
1898
*
1898
1899
1900
1900
1900
599
Distinction between health and disease in plants. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1897 :26-30.
Peach leaf curl and plum pockets. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 60. General description and suggestions on preventive measures.
Seab in heads of wheat. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 62. General discussion and suggestion on measures of control.
Loose smut of wheat. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 65. General discussion and recommendation of the hot water treatment.
Formalin for grain and potatoes. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 77:38-44. Discussion of smut of corn, wheat, oats and of potato scab. Preventive measures recommended.
Asparagus rust. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. An. Rep. 1900:10-14. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:520-524. General discussion of the nature of this disease with suggestions on methods of control.
Damping off of beets in the field. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. An. Rep. 1900:15-16. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:524-526. Beet seedlings were observed killed in the field by some parasitic organism whose identity had not been estab- lished.
Formalin and hot water as preventive of loose smut of wheat. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. An. Rep. 1900:17-24. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900-526-532.
*Article 19 should be credited to Wm. Stuart.
Mpg a Sk 1900 Chrysanthemum rust. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 85:145-150. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:637-648. Reports detailed study of the rust. Preventive measures suggested. 25 1903. Revised list of Indiana plant rusts. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1903 :141-152. 26 1905 Rapid method of removing smut from seed oats. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 103:257-264. Description of method of treating oats with formaldehyde solution on a large seale. 27. ——-—~- —— 1906 Treatment for oat smut. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 125. Brief discussion of the formaldehyde treatment. 28. 1909 Right and wrong conception of plant rusts. Proe. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1909: 383-390. 29,
1914 Some large botanical problems. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1914: 267-271. Reference to a number of serious diseases affecting
cereal, vegetable and forage crops.
30. Arthur, J. C., and Bolley, H. L.
1896 Bacteriosis of carnations. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 59:17-39 pls. 1-8. Detailed description and discussion of carnation disease caused by Bacterium Dianthi Arth. and Bol. n.sp.
31. Arthur, J. C., and Golden, Katherine.
1892 Diseases of the sugar beet root. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 39: 54-62, pl. 1. Description of beet scab, bacterial disease,
and water-core spots.
32. Arthur, J. C., and Johnson, A. G.
1910 Loose smut of oats and stinking smut of wheat and their prevention. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Cir. 22:1-15, figs. 1-9. Formaldehyde treatment recommended.
401
33. Arthur, J. C., and Stuart, Wm.
1899
Corn smut. Ind. Exp. Sta. An. Rep. 1899:84-135, pls. 10-13, fig. 1. Detailed account of corn smut, including its early records, life history, modes of dissemination, methods of control and chemical properties.
34. Baldwin, C. H.
1912 30.
1912 36.
1912 37.
1912 38.
1913 39.
1914
Fungicides and spray calendars. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1911-1912:26-36. Spray calendar includes treatments for diseases of apple, pear, quince, cherry, plum and grape.
Some points on the control of plant diseases. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1911-1912:237-238.
Some important diesases of apple, pear, quince, stone fruits, grapes, raspberry and blackberry. Rep. Ind. State Ento- mol. 1911-1912:239-281, figs. 27. r
Shade tree troubles. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1911-1912: 282-284, fig. 8. Discussion of root suffocation, malnutri- tion, and other causes as gas, drouth, smoke and fungi. Also gives an account of tree surgery methods.
Plant diseases. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1912-1913:61-73, fig. 5. Discussion and partial list of diseases of the maple, apple, pear, cherry, peach, plum, currant, gooseberry, grape, blackberry, raspberry and strawberry.
Diseases of the year. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1913-1914: 59-67, fig. 5. Account of some diseases of the maple, apple, tomato and strawberry.
40. Baldwin, C. H. and Dietz, H. T.
1913
5084—26
A program for the treatment of orchard insect pests and plant diseases. Office Ind. State Entomol. Bul. 3:119-123 and 145-200, fig. 33. Discussion of fungicides and diseases
402
of and spray calendars for apple, pear, quince, stone fruits, grape, currant, gooseberry, raspberry, blackberry, straw- berry, potatoes and cucurbits.
41. Banker, H. J.
1910 Steccherinum septentrionale (Fr.) Banker, in Indiana. Proe. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1910:213-218, fig. 1. Detailed description and discussion as to its occurrence on hosts and in the State.
42. Barrus, M. F.
1908 The dissemination of disease by means of the seed of the plant host. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1908:113-126, figs. 1-7. The host list includes bean, pea, wheat, barley, oats. flax, cabbage and sweet corn.
43. Beecher, H. W.
1844. Fire blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1902:263-275. An in- teresting paper on fire blight read before the Society in 1844, by Henry Ward Beecher, the famous preacher. 44. Bitting, A. W.
1899 The effects of eating moldy corn. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. An. Rep. 1899:44-45. Tests conducted with two horses.
1901 Corn smut and disease. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 98. Brief account of the tests in feeding corn smut to live- stock. 46. Blair, J. C., and Burrill, J. T. 1902 Prevention of bitter rot. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1902:290-
292. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1902:437-439. Bordeaux mixture recommended.
47. Bolley, H. L.
1889. Sub-epidermal rusts. Bot. Gaz. 14:139-145, pl. 1. Notes on various species of Puccinia in Indiana.
48.
49.
52.
o6.
403
1889 Wheat rust. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 26:5-19, figs. 1-9. De- tailed description and discussion of the nature of wheat rust.
Brown, Ignatius.
1856 Enemies and diseases (of corn). Ind. Agr. Rep. 1856:354- 355. Brief description of corn smut with suggestion on
eontrol.
. Brown, R. T.
1868 Rust (on wheat). Ind. Agr. Rep. 1868:364-365. Brief ac- count of wheat rust with suggestions on measures of pre- venting damage.
. Budd, J. K. 1885 Blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1885:31. Brief discussion of blight of apple and pear. Burrill, J. T.
1880 Blight, or bacteria ferments in fruit trees. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1880:84-92. Discussion of bacteria causing fire blight.
1881 Bacteria and pear blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1881: 20-24. Report on inoculation experiments.
Conner, S. D. 1913 Irish potato scab (Oospora scabies) as affected by fertilizers containing sulfates and chlorides. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1918 :131-137, figs. 1-5.
Cunningham, C. A. 1899 A bacterial disease of the sugar beet. Bot. Gaz. 28:177-192, pls. 16-20. Review and further investigation of the disease reported on by Arthur and Golden.
Davis, E. W.
1895 Rust and fungous diseases of plants. Ind. Agr. Rep. 1895: 450-455. General discussion of the nature of fungi, es- pecially of grain smuts and potato diseases. Preventive measures suggested.
104
57. Douglas, B. W. 1908 The diseases of plants. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1907-1908: 170-189, fig. 12. Discussion of the diseases of apple, pear, blackberry, cherry, cucumber, grape, maple, peach, rasp-
berry and wheat.
1909 Plant diseases. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1908-1909:129- 168, fig. 36. Discussion of the diseases of apple, catalpa, cherry, chesnut, carnation, ginseng, grape, peach, plum,
privet, pear, quince, raspberry and strawberry.
1909 Some diseases of the apple. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1909: 92-101. Description and recommendation of methods of control.
60.
1910 Grape diseases. Report Ind. State Entomol. 1909-1910:
205-210, fig. 3. Description and recommendation of
methods of control.
61.
1911 Diseases of the peach. Rep. Ind. State Entomol. 1910-1911: 53-66, fig. 10. Deserintion and recommendation of meth- ods of control. 62. Durham, C. B.
1915 Fire blight of apples and pears. Purd. Univ. Dept. Agr. Ext. Leaflet 63:1-4, fig. 1. Suggests methods of control.
63. Flick, W. B. 1903 Shall the fire blight remain unconquered? Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1903:96-101. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1903:360-364. General discussion of the fire bight problem. 64. Furnas, A.
1874 Rust in blackberries. Trans. Ind. Hort Soc. 1874:74. Fourteenth report. -Account of personal experience with the disease,
405
65. Golden, Katherine.
1891 Diseases of the sugar beet. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1891: 92-97. Discussion of seab and a new disease thought to be caused by bacteria.
66. Goodrich, C. E.
1856 Potato disease. Ind. Agr. Rep. 1856:49-59. Account of
mildew rot (blight?). Conducted experiments to prevent it. 67. Hesler, L. R.
1911 The New York apple tree canker. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1911:325-339, figs. 1-7. Detailed description and dis- cussion of Sphaeropsis Malorum and its economic im- portance.
68. Hobbs, C. M., Reed, W. C., and Flick, W. B. 1906 Spray calendar of the Indiana Horticultural Society. Trans.
Ind. Hort. Soe. 1906:284-285.
69. Hoffer, G. N. 1913 <A test of Indiana varieties of wheat seed for fungous in- fection. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1913:97-98. Reports isolation of a number of imperfect fungi.
70. 1913 Polyporus Everharti (Ellis & Gall.) Murrill as a wound parasite. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1913:99-101, pls. 1-4. ile a : |
1914 The more important fungi attacking forest trees in Indiana. Rep. State Board Forest. 1914:84-97. Figs. 5. Desecrip- tion and discussion of parasitic fungi attacking the wood, leaves and roots of forest trees. 72. Huston, H. A. 1895 Sugar beet. Bacterial disease: Effect on sugar content. Ind. Agr. Rep. 1895:523-524. 73. Johnson, A. G. 1908 On the heteroecious plant rusts of Indiana. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1908:87-94. Account of what has been done and what remains to be done in connecting the various forms.
406
74. 1910 Further notes on timothy rust. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1910: 203-204. Notes on distribution of the rust in the State. TAD)
1911 What about oat smut this year? Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 173. Brief account of the formaldehyde treatment. 76. Kern, F. D. 1906 Indiana plant diseases in 1905. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 111: 121-134. Brief description and discussion of diseases re-
ported by correspondents.
77
1906 Parasitic plant diseases reported for Indiana. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1906:129-133, fig. 1. List of diseases reported by correspondents.
78.
1907 Indiana plant diseases in 1906. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 119: 424-436. Brief description and discussion of diseases re- ported by correspondents.
79.
1908 The rust of timothy. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1908:85. Brief
note on the occurrence of timothy rust in the State. 80.
1909 Further notes on timothy rust. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1909: 417-418. Additional notes on distribution.
81. Kirtland, J. P. 1866 Pear tree blight—concerning its cause and cure. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1866:62-65. 82. Lemmon, A. W. 1856 (Brief reference to wheat diseases.) Ind. Agr. Rep. 1856: 398. Apparently refers to the stinking smut of wheat. Blue vitriol treatment is recommended. 83. Ludwig, C. A. 1912 Fungous enemies of the sweet potato in Indiana. Proe. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1912:103-104. Notes on several fungi causing rots.
$4.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
Sie
407
M’Cormack, Edna F.
1910 Fungous diseases of the apple. Rep. State Entomol. 1909- 1910:128-165. fig. 29. Description and recommendation of methods of control.
Newby, T. T.
1888 Spraying fruit trees. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1888:18-19.
Discussion of spraying apple trees in particular. O’Neal, Claude E.
1914 Some species of Nummularia common in Indiana. Proe- Ind. Acad. Sci. 1914:235-241. Description and key to five species of Nummularia, including N. discreta, a serious parasite.
Orton, C. R.
1910 Disease resistance in varieties of potatoes. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1910:219-221.
1911 The prevalence and prevention of stinking smut in Indiana.
Proe. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1911:348-346. Osner, G. A.
1911 Diseases of ginseng caused by Sclerotinias. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1911:355-364, figs. 1-6. Description of black and crown rots.
Oskamp, J.
1913 Strawberries. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 164:764. Brief
réference to leaf spot and mildew of strawberry. Pipal, F. J.
1914 Oat smut in Indiana. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1914:191-196. Reference to oat smut demonstrations conducted in c¢o- operation with county agents and data on prevalence of the smut in the State.
9la. Plumb, C. S.
1891 How to prevent smut in wheat. Hot water treatment recome mended. i
408
92. Ragan, W. H. 1874 Pear blight, its prevention and cure. Trans. Ind. Hort.
Soe. 1874:55-57 and 102-109. Thirteenth report.
93. — 1874 The pear blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1874:37-38. Four- teenth report. General discussion of the blight problem. 94. - 1896 The relations of the red cedar to our orchards. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1896:85-88. 95
1906 Pear bight—frozen sap blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1906: 150-151. Mentions the origin of the theory that frozen sap is responsible for pear blight.
96. Ramsey, Glen B. 1914 The genus Rosellinia in Indiana. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1914: 251-265, pls. 1-3. Deseritpion of a number of saprophytic
and parasitic species. Key to species.
97. Ratcliff, J. C. 1874 (Remarks on pear blight.) Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1874:20.
98. Richards, M. W. 1912 Orchard spray calendar. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Cir. 34:1-12, figs. 1-8. 99. R. J. B. 1902 Pear blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1902:294-295. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1902:441-442. Geuce™ discussion of the blight problem.
100. Roberts, J. W. 1910 Some apple diseases common to the middle west. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1910:48-51. Discussion of scab, bitter and
black rots, and rust.
101. 1910 The dilute lime-sulphur sprays versus bordeaux mixture for apple diseases—is bordeaux to be abandoned? ‘Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1910:82:90.
105.
104.
105.
106.
108.
109.
110.
409
. Rose, J. N.
1886 The mildews of Indiana. Bot. Gaz. 11:60-63. Enumerates twelve species of Erysiphaceae.
Selby, A. D. and Manns, T. F.
1908 A new anthracnose attacking certain cereals and grasses. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1908:111. Colletotrichum cereale n. sp. is reported as being found throughout the State of Ohio.
Simpson, R. A.
1902 Spraying. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1902:237-240. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1902:385-389. Discussion of orchard spraying.
Snyder, Lillian. 1897 The germ of pear blight. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1897:150-
156, fig. 1. Account of cultural studies of the bacterial organism causing pear blight.
Stahl, Wm. 1891 Spraying: Why, how, when. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1891: 101-103. Discussion of orchard spraying.
. Stuart, Wm.*
1895 Fungicides for the prevention of corn smut. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1895:96-99. Spraying tests with bordeaux mixture and a solution of ammoniacal copper carbonate.
1898 Bacterial rot of cabbage. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 69. Preventive measures recommended.
1898 The resistance of cereal smuts to formalin and hot water. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1898:64-70. Tests with spores of Ustilago Tritici and Ustilago Avenae.
1899 Asparagus rust, a serious menace to asparagus culture. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 80. Discussion of the nature of the disease and recommendation of preventive measures.
*See, also, No. 19.
410
111. ——————_ 1900 Corn smut, its cause, remedy, effect upon cattle. Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:315-318. i: 1900 Formalin as a preventive of millet smut. Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900 :532-533. 1 1900 <A study of the constituents of corn smut. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1900:148-152. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:533- 538. 114. 1900 A bacterial disease of tomatoes. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sai. 1900: 153-157, figs. 1-3. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1900:539-543. Notes on greenhouse inoculation studies of rot supposed to be caused by bacteria. 115. 1901 Formalin as a preventive of oat smut. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 87:1-26. 116. ———_—_
1901 Spore resistance of loose smut of wheat to formalin and hot water. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1901:275-282.
117. Swallow, A. P. 1914 Pruning and the care of trees in relation of disease and insect control. Rep. State Entomol. 1913-1914:71-101, figs. 23.
118. Taft, L. R.
1900 The philosophy of spraying. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1900:
153-160. Discussion of orchard spraying. 119.
1905 The potato and potato blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1905: 143-148. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1905:523-528. Dis- cussion of the early and late blights.
120. Templin, L. J.
1873 Diseases of potato. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1873:59-60.
Brief account of “rot,” suggesting probable causes and
remedies.
121.
122
1874.
411
Pear blight. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1875:89-91. General discussion of the fire blight problem.
. Thomas, M. B.
The effect of formalin on germinating seeds. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1897:144-148. Tests with seeds of oats, rye, gorn, buckwheat, millet, beans and others.
Experiments with smut. Proc. Ind. Acad. Se. 1900:123- 124. Field tests in the formaldehyde treatment for pre- venting oat smut.
Ind. Hort. Soc. (Discussion on black rot of grapes.) 1888: 102-104. (Discussion on root rot of apple.) 1903:121-125.
(Discussion on anthracnose of raspberry.) 1903:217-219.
Spraying as a means of protecting our fruits from insects and fungi. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1893:46-52.
Formulas for making insecticides and fungicides and direc- tions for spraying. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1897:272-277.
Insecticides, fungicides and spraying. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 69:33-40. Same in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1898:530-535.
Black knot of the plum and cherry. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Newsp. Bul. 90. Same in Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1901:
- 245-246, and in Ind. Agr. Rep. 1901:425-426. Account of the nature and control of this disease.
1897 PB
1900 124. Trans.
1888 125
1903 126.
1903 127. Troop, J.
1893 128.
1897 129.
1898 L305 —
1901 131. Troop,
1910
J., Woodbury, C. G., and Boyle, J. G.
Growing tomatoes for the canning factory. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 144:509-528, figs. 1-8. Reference to point rot, anthracnose and leaf spot of tomato.
132. Underwood, Lucien M. 1893 Report of the Botanical Division of the Indiana State Bio- logical Survey. Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1893:13-67. Includes list of fungi collected in the State.
133. 1894 The relations of the red cedar to our orchards. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1894:81-84. 134. 1894 An increasing pear disease of Indiana. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1894:67. Abstract on the occurrence and description of Septoria pyricola. 135.
1894 Report of the Botanical Division of the Indiana State Bio- logical Survey for 1894. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1894:144-156. Includes additions to the list of Indiana fungi. 136. Van Hook. J. M. 1910 Indiana fungi. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1910:205-212. List of species in the collection at Indiana University. 137. 1911 Indiana fungi—II. Proc. Ind. Aead. Sei. 1911:347-354, fig 2. Additional list of species collected.
1912 Indiana fungi—III. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1912:99-101. Further report on additional collections. 139. Webster. F. M. 1901 Spraying and spraying mixtures. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1901:115-124. Directions for spraying orchards. 140. Whetzel. H. H. 1901 Notes on apple rusis. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1901:255-260.
141. White, F. D. 7 1893 Spraying fruit for the control of fungi and insects. Trans. Ind. Hort. Soe. 1893:116-118.
142. Wilson. G. W. 1905 Rusts of Hamilton and Marion counties, Indiana. Proc, Ind. Acad. Sei. 1905:177-182.
413
143. —— 1907 The Peronosporales of Indiana. Proe. Ind. Acad. Sei. 1907: 80-84. List of species collected to date. 144. Woodbury, C. G. 1907 (Discussion of rust (Alternaria leaf spot) and wilt of melons.) Trans. Ind. Hort. Soc. 1907:190-192.
1910 Spraying the orchard. Ind. Agr. Exp. Sta. Cir. 21:1-20, figs. 1-17. Directions for spraying apple, pear, peach,
plum and cherry trees.
Purdue University Agricultural Experiment Station,
Lafayette, Indiana.
tetas aL A Tete iy te ee ees i eer i ub a
ere
6 my, 7
ear ty
on
Mee ae}
* "
415
THE Ontympic CoAL FIELDS OF WASHINGTON. By ALBert B. REAGAN.
The Olympic Peninsula covers an area of about eight thousand square miles. It is approximately a right angle triangle in shape with its hypote- nuse on the Pacific side. Its shorter limb faces the ‘“‘Sound,”’ the longer limb of the triangle faces the Strait of Juan de Fuca. This peninsula consists of a moderately benched area forming a coastal bench surrounding a high central area termed the Olympic Mountains which are situated somewhat southeast of the center of the peninsula. And from this high area there extends northwestward to Cape Flattery a gradual declining ridge. The most commonly heard-of places of the region are LaPush and Quillayute on the Pacific front and Neah Bay, Clallam Bay, Port Angeles, and Port Townsend on the Strait of Fuca side.
The region is much fissured and faulted and much of the strata are tipped at a high angle. The core of the Olympic Mountains is supposed to be pre-Cretaceous in age. The exposed rocks along the Strait of Fuca are Pleistocene and Tertiary. The Pleistocene is the Country rock from Port Townsend to Fresh Water Bay north of Port Angeles. Eocene rocks are exposed at Port Crescent, and from there northward to Cape Flattery and then down the Pacific front as far south as the Point of Arches, the exposed rock is Oligocene-Miocene. The Point of Arches appears to be pre-Cretaceous in age, as do also the rocks at Point Elizabeth, one hundred twenty miles further south, while the intervening coast exposures appear to be Cretaceous in age. The troughs of the Quillayute river and its tributaries are incised in Tertiary strata.
Coal is exposed in the Oligocene-Miocene from Pyscht to Clallam Bay on the Strait of Fuca, a distance of about eight miles. Coal is also found inland near Fresh Water Bay. Small stringers of coal are also exposed in the Hoko Canyon. Small seams of coal were also observed at Strawberry and Johnson Points and near Portage Head on the Pacific Coast. Coal is also found in the Quillayute trough. The three principal coal areas will re- celve special mention.
The Quillayute River Field. About two miles southeast of Mora P. O. on the east bank of the Quillayute River a coal seam runs in an east and
416
west direction with nearly a vertical dip. A thirty-foot tunnel was driven into this seam some years ago. The coal was found to be good quality of lignite, but the vein being less than a foot in thickness, the work was alvan- doned.
Another exposure in this field is near the Bogachiel river, about eight miles southwest of Forks P. O. Some years ago a company, said to be the Narrow Gauge Railroad Company, drove a thirty-foot tunnel into the exposed coal seam here. The coal was found to be a good quality of lignite, but as the vein was less than a foot in thickness, the work was abandoned. Below is an analysis of a specimen of coal from the headwaters of the Quil- layute river, likely from the above tunnel
IMI OISHORG 5. e256 ya ehieie he wc-eeyo, Be es we ee 5.10 per cent. Volatile combustible matter..................39.15 per cent. Nixed (Carbon | 54.23) ace ee eS ee oe 47.01 per cent. STF ee is A Ino oe Le ee wee eee 7.77 per cent. Sulphlurs.5 35,25... c.o<55, oo eee ye ee eee .97 per cent.
Fo teal 6 eo seen Cae ae aE Pee 100.00 per cent.
The Fresh Water Bay Field. Drilling inland from the bay has exposed several seams of coal, some of workable size. The coal is in the Oligocene- Miocene formation. So far no development work has been done. Below is a drill record from a hole in a deep gulch in a broad synclinal trough about one mile south of the eastern end of Fresh Water Bay:
Feet. Dark sandstone 5 Ae eee Ere ee Oe ere 392 OAL Eel ees ee en ee LAE Oe ee a Gray sandstone yan on seo Oy hc. pee ER ee 24 SOLG. WILE SAanGStONG. ee ara moe f° hee eee eee ne 17 Sandstone containing oyster shells...................- 10 Sandstone containing green boulders................. 10 DaAnGStONe Lee eo ere ee ee a oe eee ae eee 40 Wireelay oo ee. 5 20 Gray«sandstone:)).. 5 eee es te a eee 40 Hard bineyshale * : 223.0 3 Pee ee: 2 eee 30
iMines and Minerals of Washington. Ann. Report, First State Geological Survey pp. 15, 16, Olympia, 1891.
Feet GrayesanastOney eters. ele ey aN epee Gaetan Sere 50 Cla eee Pat ee Pe che Rees Gee OM Ry ence eee 2} Grave SAnOSbOne ects his ys ieee sacs esa ee ee 420 COATES Paseo earner tt RAN k PLM DE Tah py ANA AR rine mp tg 42 ETS GED ene es eres eerie pees te hee Nn ey Oe Tt 5272
The Clallam Bay Field. This field ies in a synclinal trough between Pillar Point at Pyscht and Slip Point on Clallam Bay on the Strait of Fuca and extends inland about seven miles, but is interrupted on the east and south by sharp faults and is truncated at the north by the Strait of Fuca. The coal is in the Oligocene-Miocene formation. The formation here consists of six hundred feet of coarse, thick-bedded, massive sandstone, interbedded with an occasional bed of conglomerate. In it are also interbedded several workable seams of coal.
This field was discovered in the early 50’s of last century. Of a specimen of coal obtained at Shp Point then, Prof. J. S. Newberry gave the following analysis 2
Urb -¢e(0 [i(eFe Nn 0X0 a ash orem is Ree ne lee a a even ur 46.40 per cent. Wolatile macnn eer eee oe ee OU RO Ta percents PAS Tian a Be oe Pee tena ee nies “taun, Del OS Per CGMt
EL) Gy red cee sk Bo cio, Seen cp Pee es dir Reo 100.00 per cent.
Later, in about 1865, a mine was opened up 23 miles east of Slip Point, known as the Thorndike Mine. At this place there were six leads of coal, ranging in thickness from one to three feet, all having a dip of ten degrees. The formation was sandstone and the coal seams were found to be from twelve to one hundred feet apart. The coal was one of the best coals found in the State of Washington. Mining at this time was continued till a fault cut off the veins, or they pinched out.
Coal is now being mined from other locations in the sea-front of the same field. The work is being done by the Clallam Bay Coal Company. Prospecting in 1904 discovered veins as follows: One seam exposed along the coast was forty inches in thickness, another eighty feet stratigraphically below this one was twelve inches in thickness, and another, a twenty-two
2Pacific Railroad Report, Vol. IV, Part TI, p. 67.
5084—27
418
inch seam, is about one hundred feet below this one. This was near Slip Point. Other seams have been discovered farther down the sea-cliff to the eastward of these.
A tunnel has been driven more than 600 feet along the line of the 40- inch seam near Slip Point. The mouth of this tunnel is on the beach, so that coal can be loaded right onto ships from it.
The coal of this mine breaks with a conchoidal fracture and shows extreme sharp edges. It is clean, hard, glossy black lignite, with small quantities of pyrite. This pyrite is often included in the coal in veinlets, but not in quantity to damage the coal. The coal leaves no clinkers. Until recently the output of this mine was said to be 200 tons per month. An analysis of a specimen of this coal gave the following:
IVI OIST URE earns aE Ole cere act Ee 5.55 per cent. Volatile combustible matter.................. 34.25 per cent. EhiEe CAT DOT cunts bidet ia tee ae Nm eae 47.80 per cent. INS Taudaeatertn hci ey Ay AN as MOA con, TEN eis gs fant Re 11.40 per cent.
AM OGa snes: et dase awe a earache mest OOROOMperxcentt:
Thorough prospecting will likely disclose more and large coal seams.
’Analysis by Prof. N. W. Lord of the Department of Metallurgy and Mineralogy, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.
419
THe Onymic Forest Anp Its PoTENTIAL POSSIBILITIES. By Anpert B. REAGAN.
The Olympic Peninsula lies west of Puget Sound in the State of Washing- ton. It comprises a wide, somewhat benched coastal strip bordering both the Strait of Juan de Fuca at the north, the Pacific Ocean at the west, and the “Sound” on the east. This coastal strip surrounds a central high area termed the Olympic Mountains. These mountains are wholly isolated. They form an eroded, domed area in the central-northeastern part of the peninsula. From this main mass there extends a western limb in declining altitude to Cape Flattery at the entrance of the Strait of Fuca, Mounts Constance, Meany, and Olympus of the central area approximate 8,150 feet in height, while the immediate region exceeds 6,000 feet in elevation, while the ridge towards the Cape receds to less than 2,000 feet in altitude. Asa result of the practically domed area the drainage is radial in all directions, but the larger streams flow into the Pacific.
This peninsula, with its lofty peaks, stands first in the path of the moisture bearing winds from the Pacific. As a result, the precipitation is very heavy; at the coast it is usually rain, in the mountains snow. The precipitation averages about 40 inches east and north of the mountains, as far up the Strait of Fuea side as Port Angeles. West of the mountains at an elevation of 3,000 feet the precipitation averages 80 inches and in Upper-Strait-Flattery region and along the Pacific front 100 to 120 inches annually. The climate, also, is controlled by the prevailing southwesterly winds from the Pacific. Notwithstanding this, however, the valleys of the upper mountain districts are filled with glaciers. At the coast, however, especially on the Pacific front, snow seldom stays on the ground any length of time.
Growing under this equable climate with such an abundance of rainfall (enough in amount to preserve the forest and shrubbery from general de- struction by fire), the peninsula, with few exceptions, is the most densely forested region in North America, and smaller plants do also equally well. Of course, as one approaches the mountains, the forest becomes less dense till the timber line is reached; but in the reverse proportion the flowering herbs at the same time increase in number and beauty. The open country at timber line in summer is one of nature’s flower gardens. The region in
oe
420
the lower levels is a jungle of trees, shrubs, and entangled vines, which must be seen to be appreciated.
The plants identified in the region to date number 687. The trees and plants most noticeable in the peninsula are fir, cedar, spruce, hemlock, red elder, “‘Shallon,”’ “‘Rubes,’’ salal, ““‘Vaccinum,” ‘“‘Ribes,’’ Selaginella (‘‘S.
,
oregona’’), crab-apple, devil’s club, ‘‘usnea,’’ bearded lichens, bearberry, dogwood (‘‘Cornus nuttallii’’), and oregon grape. Here Douglas fir, tide- land spruce, and red cedar reach gigantic proportions. The avilable timber per township averages 3,000 feet B. M. per acre amid the high mountains up to 59,000 feet B. M. per acre often in the Quillayute region. There is estimated to be 32,890.717 M. feet B. M. lumber in the region according to the estimate of Henry Gannett, Chief of Division of Forestry (1899).! This estimate has been more than doubled by Dodwell and Rixon at a later date; they give 69,000,000 M. feet B. M.2. And the close measurement now used would likely double that amount. One quarter section in the Quillayute country cruised both by the Lacy Company cruisers and by the Clallam county cruisers for purpose of tax-estimating, aggregated more than 30,000,000 feet B. M. There is enough timber in the region to supply the whole United States’ demand for considerable over two years.®
The timber by species is approximately as follows: Spruce, 6 per cent.; cedar, 10 per cent.; Lovely fir, 18 per cent.; Red fir, 24 per cent; hemlock, 42 per cent.
Geographically, the Olympic Peninsula is parcelled out in the following county divisions: Chehalis county, Mason county, Jefferson county, and Clallam county. For convenience the area of the timber in each and the timber of same will be considered separately.
Mason County.
This county includes the southeastern part of the Olympic Mountains, from which it extends eastward so as to include much of the Hood Canal country. The portion within the mountains contains but little timber of present merchantable value. the ‘‘low country” of the county, however,
1Twentieth Annual Report, U. S. G. S. (1898-1899). Part V, pp. 12-37.
2Arthur Dodwell and Theodore F. Rickson: Forest Conditions in the Olympic Forest Reserve, Washington. Professional paper, U. 8S. Geol. Survy., No. 7, 110 pages, 20 plates, 1 map, 1902.
3See Reagan: Transactions of the Kansas Acadamy of Science, p. 136, in article, “Some Notes on the Olympic Peninsula, Washington.’’
421
with the exception of a few small prairie tracts, was originally heavily tim- bered, but the timber is now more than half logged.
Area of timbered and other lands in Mason county, Washington.
NGG ER a can a0 cae dna Ta ne aby nN oR are Vea ed eae 996 square miles Present merchantable timber area...................395 square miles Wogeedkareals Aare Nea ae rete nee maton aan 493 square miles Neaiunallyabarencarea-y sree see ae ae ee 0 O Square mules FS UT COAT Cy epee aro Sea ety SEE eI SE E c ER ie 112 square miles
Estimate of timber in Mason county, Washington.*
TERN eam ROY ed eS we Ae one WS 2,055,648 M. feet B. M. SS ITU CORRE ee eens eae crs et yates eres Mee ies 492 M. feet B. M. OER Mohs (eikonal ao tht rahe 25,970 M. feet B. M. ELST OC Kp = Gee aye ner Scr EIN ere ae 8,955 M. feet B. M.
Bea rite aw ean Ad Stor ko ees 2a 2,091,065 M. feet B. M.
Average per acre of timbered land, 5,600 feet B. M.
CHEHALIS COUNTY.
This county borders upon the Pacific Ocean, and on the north extends far up into the Olympic Mountains. The mountainous part is high and rugged and contains but little merchantable timber, and in other parts there are numerous prairie tracts. Barring these areas, the county was originally heavily forested, mainly with fir in the interior and with spruce and cedar upon the coast. There have been but few fires in this county and the burned area is trifling. The county, however, les in the Grays Harbor lumber district and an approximate third of it has been denuded of its forests.
Area of timbered and other lands in Chehalis county, Washington.
Ahotalbancanpee ited: eet on Ste ee ic eee SOO OASoumaresmiles Present merchantable timber area..................1,000 square miles Woosedtarearrcn Aas maken eo eae Une Mirna, Veneto 831 square miles INatunalllivgibamevaneai ssc: ects oe epee en. aceey tu eee ae 47 square miles armed e areal eas he aa a Cb AM RU, BO 236 square miles
4After Gannett. Loc. cit., p. 28. It is well to add that under the present close cruising of timber, however,:Mr. Gannett’s figures should be multiplied by 3.
Bair an. FB) 2) ee A ec ee ee A ee 9,799,418 M. feet B. M. 310) 4016: a a eh enc Mere) core I9( hubebysreirdss. isl. Cedar > 2. 2h sees ees ds anes Be ate © oe ks OE OU DV Lee nae Hemlock sh.) oiccc cd ihecn a aho PO ee Oe OP OOO Oo EE eee te
Rotal eo vcs 5 ac aot cn tes ate ee Mn seni 18,579,058 M. feet B. M.
Average per acre of timbered land, 21,300 feet B. M.
JEFFERSON COUNTY.
This county stretches from Hood’s Canal upon the east to the Pacific Ocean. Its central portion, comprising three-fourths of it. lies within the Olympic Mountains. Scattered here and there in this area there are con- siderable timber in the below-timber-line districts, but on account of the inaccessibleness of the district it is of no value at present for milling purposes. Barring the mountain area, the county was formerly heavily forested, on the west with cedar and spruce, on the east with fir. The timber in the eastern part of the county has been largely destroyed either by ax or fire, mainly the latter. The timber in the western part of the county is yet virgin, being untouched by fire or ax. The most abundant species represented in this
county is the cedar.
Area of timbered and other lands in Jefferson county, Washington.
ANG fehl AC AR ye, Ny ec pea are ae a 1,688 square miles Present merchantable timber area.................. 430 square miles lhOC Ped Area se ash, Meet veoh s eta seeatce on 2 eee ae ee 296 square miles Naturallyabareiancar.» cerca ser ioe ha eee 100 square miles Burned sarear tek Bake cn eee een a ee eee ees 215 square miles Non=merechantable timber area..-............-..-. 647 square miles
EPS ee eea as” cee Sa yo ee ora eRe Ae 794,232 M. feet B. M. SS DEUCE aE en te ee: Oe ree ete Ee eae 267,427 M. feet B. M. fe 0 eT ay Hie lc fel Rg MRA DR AD Tn ee Llu tinal Ch 2,124,725 M. feet B. M. lem lockers et es cae ee an eer etre ee 1,043,776 M. feet B. M.
RO tale Pee Me Schone pee Tak ys ieee) thas eg ee 4,230,160 M. feet B. M.
Average per acre of timbered land, 15,300 feet B. M.
*>Loc. cit., p. 19. Remarks above apply. sLoc. cit., ». 24. Remarks above apply.
423
CLALLAM CouUNTY.
This county extends from the top of the Olympic Mountains north to the Strait of Fuca and from near Dungeness on that strait to a little to the south of LaPush on the Pacific coast, occupying a large area both to the north and to the west of the Olympics. The mountainous part of the county is not regarded as containing any timber of present merchantable value. The remainder of the county is heavily forested; but the ax has made in- roads in these forests along the shores of the Strait of Fuca as far west as Crescent Bay, and millions of feet of logs have been cut at Clallam Bay and in the Hoko district on the same side of the peninsula. In addition, fires have extended inland from these cuttings to the mountain districts, destroy- ing large areas of timber. The western part of the county is still in the virgin state. In this county hemlock and fir vie with each other in amount of merchantable log-lumber.
Area of timbered and other lands in Clallam county, Washington.
NOs ail BE fee aad a Sarhet Pas ee ak Be Se ec Ree eS fa 1,824 square miles Present merchantable timber area..................1,000 square miles hose cdbart care rue sieht iter tans Ser eat a Rien anal ae 217 square miles IBEW eA Raeats so pee mye ae eae 8 Beek AME Su mae oo eat 181 square miles Bare and unmerchantable timber area.............. 426 square miles
Estimate of timber in Clallam county, Washington.“
eee ey rea ere Bey Or Mk tas meee D4 O Tele hectare Wie SEU CO Ser veer et Chews en eM ery ace Rael Sanh = 1,758,845 M. feet B. M. CEG ROR Reyer. meet 2k rat be a OR Sted emma ELL age teat 547,617 M. feet B. M. email Oc keseiece ee eee eee ens ee ee 3,719,840 M. feet B. M.
FCG Geller eee oe Oe a ene ees Ce 9,071,599 M. feet B. M.
Average per acre of timbered land, 15,700 feet B. M.
Below is a description of the merchantable timber species as they occur in the peninsula.
7Loce. cit., p. 20. Remarks above apply.
FAMILY PINACEAE: Pine FaAmMILy. Genus Chamaecyparis.
C. nootkatensis (Lamb) Spach: Alaska Cedar. This tree is found on all the mountain ridges below 3,500 feet elevation. It is a conspicuous tree on the ridges at the headwaters of the Soleduck and Bogachiel rivers and in the vicinity of the Soleduck Hot Springs. It is often called Yellow Cedar. It is also more abundant in the swamp regions near the Pacific coast, bordering the rivers near their mouths. It is a medium tree in height for this region, but exceeds the Red Fir in girth. Its greatest development is usually where it stands the heaviest. It averages about 140 feet in height and 50 inches in diameter. This tree is subject to rot; half of the stand is injured by this disease.®
Genus Thuja.
T. plicata Donn: Red Cedar; Giant Cedar. This cedar is found in all parts of the peninsula, except in the high mountain districts. It is of larger growth near the coast, where it often measures from 40 to 50 feet in cireu- ference; some trees in the Elwa valley are said to measure even 80 feet in circumference.
This tree differs from C. nootkatensis above in its wood being reddish in color, in its larger size in cireumference-measurements, and in the scales of its cones being oblong, not pileate.*
’The juice of the bark of this tree and that of the Giant Cedar is used by the natives in dyeing basket straw. The other coloring matter used by these Indians is burned yellow clay. black earth, blood, soot and charcoal.
Of this giant cedar the Indians make their dug-out canoes, canoes ranging from the siz2 of a little river canoe to an ocean-whaling canoe that will hold ten whale hunters. or three tons of freight. These canoes are in each case made from a single piece (section) of log and the canoe is in each case one continuous piece when finished. except just the front totem (river-deer) part. In making these canoes in the old time it was a slow process of burning and scraping with clam shells, and a possible chiseling with some wedge-shaped stone. Today they are hewed out with ax and Indian adz. A canoe for ocean use in now worth about $100.
The cedars are used for may purposes by the Indians of the coast. The juice cf the green bark is used as medicine. after being boiled. The outer bark is used in matkizg wigwams. In the old times they also shredded the inner bark of these species and wove it into a sort of cloth. Of this cloth they then made skirts for the women, and other wearing «pparel both for the men and the women. They also lined their cradles with this bark and wrapped their babies up in it before tying them in the cradles. A peculiar raincoat was made from this bark to be worn by the men while fishing in stormy weather.
Genus Pinus.
P. monticola Dougl.: Western White Pine. This tree is found on the western slopes of the Olympics, above 500 feet elevation, usually in swamps and wet places.
Description: Cones oblong-cylindrical; scales of cones unarmed; leaves five in each fascicle.
Genus Abies.
A. nobilis Lindl.: Lovely Fir; Noble Fir. This tree is found at consider- able elevations; but rarely at elevations less than 1,500 feet.
Description: This is a tall, silvery-barked, noble-looking tree. It differs from the other firs principally in the color of its bark and in its having cones with conspicuous refiexed bracts.
A. lasiocarpa (Hook) Nutt.: Alpine Fir; Subalpme Fir. This tree is found only on the higher parts of the mountains, rarely below 5,000 feet.
Description: A tree of 60 to 80 feet in height; bark pale, thin, smooth, ash-gray in color; leaves dark-green above, with two resin-ducis about equi-distant between the upper and lower face; cones oblong-cylindrieal, puberulent, with bracts concealed.
A. amabilis (Doug!1.) Forbs.7 Lovely Fir; Amabilis Fir. This tree is found only on the high ridges adjacent to the mountains, rarely below 1,200 feet elevation. It is one of the large lumber-producing trees of the region. pro- ducing more than 11,000,000 M. feet B. M.
Description: This tree is distinguishable from A. lasiocarpa above by its cones not being puberulent and by the greater length of the cones.
A. grandis Lindl.: White Fir. This tree is oceasionally met with in the Soleduck Hot Spring region.
Genus Pseudotsuga.
P. mucronata (Raf.) Sudw.: Douglas Fir; Red Fir. This tree grows in abundance. It reaches its greatest development in the Quillayute-middle- upland region. In its growth, however, it extends up the mountain slopes to the altitude of 3,500 feet. In the high mountains and in the neighborhood of the Pacific coast, this species is practically entirely wanting. It grows to its greatest dimensions where the stand is heaviest. Throughout the region it averages 240 feet in height; 77 feet clear of limbs, with a diameter
426
of 55 inches. This tree is everywhere free from disease. The stand of timber of this species is estimated to be more than 15,000,000 M. feet B. M. Description: Tree large; in youth, spruce-like and pyrimidal, more spread-
ing in old age; leaves somewhat two-ranked by a twist at base.
Genus T'suga.
T. heterophylla (Raf.) Sarg.: Western Hemlock. This tree is found throughout the region.
Description: This is a lowland tree, with cones 1 to 2 em. long.
T. mertensiana (Bong.) Carr: Black Hemlock; Merten’s Hemlock. This tree is found almost everywhere in the forest from the shore line up to 4,500 feet elevation. With the Western Hemlock above, it is by far the most abundant tree in the region, being found in every part of it to timber line. It is not so large a tree as the other merchantable trees, either in height or diameter, the amount of clear trunk is also less. In the high mountain regions the tree is greatly affected by disease, but as the shore line is ap- proached the percentage of diseased trees diminish to the minimum. This tree with the Western Hemlock estimate 26,000,000 M. feet B. M.
Deseription: Characteristically, this tree differs from the Western Hemlock above in its having appreciably longer cones.”
Genus Picea.
Picea sitchensis (Bong.) Traut: Sitka Spruce. This species is found only in the neighborhood of the coast, seldom ever found thirty miles inland. It is densest a little way back from the coast, the immediate coast seeming to be too damp for its best development. The tree averages 225 feet in height, 81 feet of which is often clear of limbs. Its diameter exceeds 5 feet on the average. This tree seems to be less affected by disease than any other merchantable tree in the region. It aggregates over 4,000,000 M. feet B. M. in merchantable timber.
Description: Trees tall, pyrimidal, with soft, white, tough timber; leaves flattened, somewhat two-ranked, and spirally arranged around the branch- lets.
P. engelmanni Parry: Engelmann Spruce. This spruce is only seattered
10The Indians use the bark of this tree in tanning hides. Hemlock bark tea is also used as an emetic.
427
here and there and in too small quantities, usually, to be of much value in a merchantable way.
Description: Tree subalpine, with height averaging about 90 feet; branches horizontal; bark thin. scaly, reddish to purplish brown; branches pubescent; leaves quadrangular.
i Ve es a es
LN
THe UREDINALES OF INDIANA.
By H. S. Jackson.
The first authentic record of the collection of any species of plant rust in Indiana of which we have any knowledge was made by Dr. J. M. Coulter in the Botanical Bulletin (Botanical Gazette) 1:20, 1876. In a short article he noted the common occurrence of Uromyces lespedezae Schw. on Lespedeza violacea, presumably in the vicinity of Hanover. .
The first account of the rusts of the State presented before the Indiana Academy of Science was included in a paper by E. M. Fisher on the Parasitic Fungi of Indiana, which was read at the annual meeting for 1890. This paper listed a considerable number of species of Uredineae, but unfortunately was not published and is unavailable. The specimens on which the paper was based were deposited in the-herbarium of the United States Depart- ment of Agriculture. A list of the species was, however, obtained by Dr. L. M. Underwood and included in his “List of the Cryptogams at present known to inhabit the State of Indiana,’ which was printed in the Proceedings for 18938.
The latter list forms the basis of our knowledge of the cryptogamic flora of the State and enumerates 88 species of Uredinales including the unattached aecial and uredinial forms. Supplementary lists by various authors have appeared in the Proceedings from time to time since that date, only the most noteworthy of which need be mentioned.
In 1896 Miss Lillian Snyder presented a list of the rusts of Tippecanoe county, supplementing the work in 1898 with lists from Madison and Noble counties. The rusts of Hamilton and Marion counties were listed by G. W. Wilson in 1905.
Two complete State lists have been presented to the Academy by Dr. J. C. Arthur. The first was read in 1898 and enumerated 80 species; the second was presented in 1903 and included 105 species. Both these lists were prepared in such form as to illustrate the latest developments in revised nomenclature. The unattached aecial and uredinial forms were omitted.
The present list is based on the information contained in all the preceding ones which have appeared in the Proceedings of the Academy, together with the wealth of material collected in all parts of the State contained in the
430
Arthur herbarium at the Purdue Experiment Station. An attempt has been made to show the distribution within the State by counties. Under each host is given a list of the counties within which the species has been collected, together with the name of the person making the first collection and the year in which the collection was made. <A considerable number of the collections which have been recorded in the first lists were not available to the writer. These have been included in the distribution only when there seemed to be no chance of mistaking their identity. A few species evidently wrongly determined of which no specimens were available, have been omitted.
The nomenclature followed is that of Dr. J. C. Arthur as used in the N. Am. Flora, volume 7, in so far as that admirable work has been com- pleted, or as proposed for the unpublished portion. The nomenclature of the hosts in general conform to that of Britton & Brown, Illustrated Flora, 2nd edition.
For convenience in consulting the list, the species not previously recorded are marked *. Hosts not previously recorded are printed in black-faced type. References are inserted following the host name to the year and page of preceding volumes of the Proceedings, where additional information may be obtained. Wherever Indiana rusts have appeared in published sets of exsiccati reference is made following the collector’s name. Reference by number is made to the rusts included in the set of Parasitic Fungi dis- tributed by the Indiana Biological Survey. December, 1894. Series 1. (See Proceedings 1894:154-156. 1895.)
It is the plan of the writer to submit additions and corrections to this list as material is collected. It would be greatly appreciated if collectors would send duplicates of their collections to the writer.
The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to Dr. J. C. Arthur for the unrestricted use of his herbarium and notes in the preparation of this list without which any approach to completeness would have been im- possible. Dr. Arthur has also kindly read the manuscript and offered many helpful suggestions.
Pall:
2
“Dh
*4.,
COLEOSPORIACEAE.
COLEOSPORIUM CAMPANULAE (Pers.) Lev. On Campanula americana L. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1907 (Arthur & Kern).
COLEOSPORIUM DELICATULUM (Arth. & Kern) Hedg. & Long On Euthamia graminifolia (L.) Nutt. Harrison, 1915 (Fogal); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1915 (Pipal); Orange, 1915 (Jackson).
COLEOSPORIUM ELEPHANTOPODIS (Schw.) Thum. On Elephantopus carolinianus Willd. Gibson, 1915 (Hoffer); Jefferson, 1915 (Demaree); Oke 1915 (Jackson).
COLEOSPORIUM HELIANTHI Schw. On Helianthus decapetalus L. Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1915 (Ludwig). On Helianthus hirsutus Raf. Orange, 1915 (Jackson).
. COLEOSPORIUM IPOMOEAE (Schw.) Burrill.
On Ipomoea pandurata (L.) Mey. 1896:171, 218. Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur); 1896 (Snyder); 1914 (Ludwig in Barth. Fungi Col. 4519).
. COLEOSPORIUM SOLIDAGINIS (Schw.) Thwm. 1908:89.
On Aster azureus Lindl. 1893:50.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher), 1893 (Olive). On Aster cordifolius L. 1893:51.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Aster Drummondii Lindl.
Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). On Aster ericoides L. 1905:179.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Orange,
1915 (Jackson); Tippecanoe, 1915 (Mrs. Emily Arthur).
On Aster longifolius Lam.
Putnam, 1907 (Wilson).
432
On Aster Novae-angliae L. 1893:51.
Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur).
On Aster paniculatus Lam. 1893:51, 1905:179.
Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Aster puniceus L. 1893:51.
Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Steuben, 1903
(Kellerman): Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Aster sagittifolius Willd. 1893-51.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe. 1896 (Snyder).
On Aster salicifolius Lam. 1893:51.
Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
On Aster Shortii Hook. 1893:51.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Aster Tradeseanti L. 1893:51.
Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
On Callistephus hortensis Cass.
Jefierson, 1914 (Demaree).
On Solidago arguta Ait. 1893:51.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Solidago caesia L. 1893-51.
Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippe- eanoe, 1912 (Pipal).
On Solidago canadensis L. 1893 51. 1905:179.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson): Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery. 1890 (Fisher): Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Tippecanoe, 1915 (Jackson); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal); Wabash, 1890 (Miller).
On Solidago fiexieaulis L. (S. latifolia L.) 1893:51 1896-218.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Survey No. 54); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Solidago patula Muhl. 1893:51. Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern).
433
On Solidago rugosa Mill. 1893:51. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham); Tippe- eanoe, 1904 (Arthur). On Solidago serotina Ait. 1893:51. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. ' Survey, 54 in part); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). On Solidago ulmifolia Muhl. Montgomery, 1907 (Fitzpatrick); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). Following the usage of earlier American authors this species has often erroneously been referred to the European C. Sonchi- arvensis (Pers.) Ley.
*7. COLEOSPORIUM TEREBINTHINACEAE (Schw.) Arth. On Silphium integrifolium Michx. Tippecanoe, 1915 (Ludwig). On Silphium terbinthinaceum Jacq. Tippecanoe, 1912 (Hoffer); 1914 (Ludwig, in Barth. N.Am. Ured. 1109).
8. COLEOSPORIUM VERNONIAE B. & C. On Vernonia fasciculata Michx. 1893:51. 1905:179.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Vernonia noveboracensis (L.) Willd. 1893:51.
Jefferson, 1915 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
On Vernonia altissima Nutt.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Tippecanoe, 1905 (Kern).
UREDINACEAE. *9. BUBAKIA CROTONIS (Cooke) Arth. On Croton monanthogynus Michx. Franklin, 1912 (Oskamp); Lawrence, 1915 (Hoffer); Putnam, 1907 (Wilson). 5084—28
434
10 HYALOPSORA POLYPODII (DC.) Magn. Uredo polypodii DC. On Felix fragilis (L.) Underw. (Cyslopteris fragilis (.) Bernh. 1893 :56. 1903:143. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Survey 53).
*11. MELAMPSORA ABIETIS-CANADENSIS (Farl.) Ludwig. On Populus deltoides Marsh. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). On Populus grandidentata Michx. 1893:51. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 50). On Populus heterophylla L. Tippecanoe, 1914 (Ludwig). On Populus tremuloides Michx. Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). Some of above collections were previously recorded in the Proceedings as M. Medusae Thiim.
12. MELAMPSORA BIGELOWII Thum. — 1908:89. On Salix amygdaloides Anders. 1903:148. Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). On Salix cordata Muhl. 1893:51. 1905:180. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). On Salix discolor Muhl. 1893:51. 1896:218. Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Salix interior Rowlee (S. longifolia Muhl.) 1893:51. 1905:180. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Owen, 1893 (Under- wood Ind. Biol. Sur. 49); St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart). On Salix nigra Marsh. 1893:51. Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, - 1887 (Arthur). On Salix Wardii Bebb. (1893:51 as S. nigra Marsh.) Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). Following frequent usage of American authors this species has been variously referred to in the Proceedings as Melampsora
435
Salicona Lev., M. farinosa (Pers.) Schroev. and M. Salicis-cupreae (Pers.) Wint., all of which apply to European species.
13. MELAMPSORA MEDUSAE Thum. 1908:89. On Populus balsamifera L. 1893:51.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Populus deltoides Marsh. (P. monilifera Ait.) 1893:51. 1896: 218. 1905:180.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1891 (Under- wood); Tippecanoe, 1914 (Ludwig, in Barth. Fungi Col. 4737 and in Barth. N.Am. Ured. 1122); 1888 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder); Warren, 1909 (Kern & Johnson).
_On Populus grandidentata Michx. 1893 :51. Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1890 (Underwood). On Populus tremuloides Michx. 1893:51. 1898:188.
Marshall, 1893 (Underwood); Noble, 1897 (King).
This species has occasionally been erroneously referred in the
Proceedings to M. populina (Jaeq.) Lev., a European species.
14. MELAMPSORIDIUM BETULAE (Schum.) Arth.
Melampsoridium betulinwm (Pers.) Kleb. On Betula lutea Michx. 1903:148. 1908:89. Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman).
15. PUCCINIASTRUM AGRIMONIAE (Schw.) Tranz. Caeoma Agrimoniae Schw. On Agrimonia hirsuta (Muhl.) Biekn. (A. Eupatoria Am. Auct.) 1898 :50. Montgomery (Rose); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); 1807 (Wilson). On Agrimonia mollis (T. & G.) Britton. 18938:50. 1896:218. 1905:180. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
456
On Agrimonia parviflora Soland. 1893:50.
. Jefferson, 1915 (Demaree); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Biol. Surv. 51); Tippecanoe, 1913 (Travel- bee).
16. PUCCINIASTRUM HYDRANGEAE (B. & C.) Arth.
Uredo Hydrangeae B. & C. Coleosporium Hydrangeae (B. & C.) Snyder. Thecopsora Hydrangeae (B. & C.) Magn. On Hydrangea arborescens L. 1893:56. 1896:218. 1903:143. Marion, 1890 (Tracy); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
* AECIDIACEAE.
17. ALLODUS AMBIGUA (A. & S.) Arth.
Puccinia ambigua (A. & 8S.) Lagerh. Dicaeoma ambigua (A. & S.) Kuntze. On Galium Aparine L. 1896:172. 1903:146. Jefferson, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
*18. ALLODUS CLAYTONIATA (Schw.) Arth.
Caeoma (Aecidium) Claytoniatum Schw. Puccinia Mariae-Wilsoni G. W. Clinton. On Claytonia virginica L. St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham).
19. ALLODUS PODYPHYLLI (Schw.) Arth.
Puccinia Podyphylli Schw. Dicaeoma Podyphylli (Schw.) Kuntze.
On Podyphyllum peltatum L. 1893:54. 1896:221. 1898:184, 189. 1905:182.
Brown, 1893 (Underwood); Dearborn, 1889 (Bolley); Fayette, 1914 (Ludwig in Barth. N. Am. Ured. 1166 and in Barth. Fungi Col. 4760); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson): Jasper, 1915 (Arthur); Jefferson, 1910 (Johnson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Monroe, 1893 (Underwood); Noble, 1897 (King); Owen, 1893 (Under- wood); Posey, 1906 (Arthur & Kern); Putnam, 1892; 1893
20.
*21.
*24.
(Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 15); St. Joseph, 1905 (Cunning- ham); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder); Wabash, 1890 (Miller); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
ALLODUS TENUIS (Schw.) Arth.
Caeoma (Aecidium) tenwe Schw. Puccinia tenuis Burr. Dicaeoma tenue (Burr.) Kuntze. On Eupatorium urticaefolium Reich. (H. ageratoides L.) 1893:55. 1896-2212 SV L9Os alle Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). BULLARIA BARDANAE (Cda.) Arth. Puccinia Bardanae Corda. On Arctium Lappa L. Carroll, 1915 (Hoffer); Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Tippecanoe, 1915 (Jackson).
. BULLARIA BULLATA (Pers.) Arth.
Puccinia bullata (Pers.) Wint. On Taenida integerrima (L.) Drude. Tippecanoe, 1915 (Ludwig).
. BULLARIA CHRYSANTHEMI (Roze) Arth.
Puccinia Chrysanthemi Roze. Dicaeoma Chrysanthemi (Roze) Arth. On Chrysanthemum Sinense Sabine. 1903:147. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Dorner); 1900 (Arthur). BULLARIA GLOBOSIPES (Pk.) comb. nov. Puccinia globosipes Pk. Uredo similis Ell. On Lycium halimifolium Mill.
Shelby, 1890 (Fisher); Type of Uvredo similis Ell. Jour. Myce.
7:275. 1893.
. BULLARIA HIERACII (Schum.) Arth.
Puccinia Hieracii (Schum.) Mart. On Hieracium scabrum Michx.
Montgomery, 1913 (Arthur).
4358
26. BULLARIA KUHNIAE (Schw.) comb. nov. Puccinia Kuhniae Schw. Dicaeoma Kuhniae (Schw.) Kuntze. On Kuhnia eupatorioides L. 1893:54. 1896:220. Harrison, 1915 (Fogal); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley); 1900 (Arthur).
27. BULLARIA TARAXACI (Reb.) Arth. Puccinia Taraxaci (Reb.) Plowr. Dicaeoma Taraxaci (Reb.) Kuntze. On Leontodon Taraxacum L. (Tararacum Taraxacum (1.) Karst.
_1893:53. 1896:219. 1898:188. 1903:51. 1905-182.
Franklin, 1915 (Ludwig); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson): Jefferson, 1910 (Johnson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Miami, 1915 (Ludwig); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1897 (King); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder); Vigo, 1893 (Arthur).
On Leontodon erythrospermum (Andrz.) Britton (Tararacum erythrospermum Andyrz.)
Hamilton, 1909 (Kern & Johnson); Jefferson, 1910 (Johnson); Tippecanoe, 1907 (Arthur).
Reported erroneously in the Proceedings as Puccinia floscu- losorum (A. & S.) Wint. and Dicaeoma flosculosorum (A. & S.) Martins.
28. DASYSPORA ANEMONES-VIRGINIANAE (Schw.) Arth. Puccinia Anemones-virginianae Schw. Dicaeoma Anemones-tirginianae (Schw.) Arth. On Anemone cylindrica A. Gray. 1896-219. Tippecanoe. 1892 (Arthur). On Anemone virginiana L. 1903:146. Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur).
29. DASYSPORA ASTERIS (Duby) Arth. Puccinia Asteris Duby. Dicagoma Asteris (Duby) Kuntze. On Aster azureus Lindl. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Stuart).
30.
32.
439
On Aster cordifolius L. 1893:52. Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher). On Aster longifolius Lam. Putnam, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1905 (Wilson). On Aster Novae-angliae L. ‘Tippecanoe, 1910 (Johnson & Orton). On Aster paniculatus Lam. 1893:52. 1896:219. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson);, Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Tippe- canoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Aster punicens L. Tippecanoe, 1905 (Kern). On Aster sagittifolius Willd. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson).
DASYSPORA CIRCAEAE (Pers.) Arth.
Puccinia Circaeae Pers. Dicaeoma Circaeae (Pers.) Kuntze. On Cireaea Lutetiana L. 1893:53. 1896:219. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 28); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder); Wabash, 1886 (Miller).
. DASYSPORA DAYTI (Clint.) Arth.
Puccinia Dayi Clinton. Dicaeoma Dayi.(Clint.) Kuntze. On Steironema ciliatum (L.) Raf. 1893:53. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Kosciusko, 1913 (Hoffer); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 25).
DASYSPORA GLECOMATIS (DC.) Arth.
Puccinia verrucosa (Schultz) Lk. On Agastache nepetoides (L.) Kuntze. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1915 (Pipal); Sullivan (Hof- fer); Tippecanoe, 1910 (Johnson).
. DASYSPORA LOBELIAE (Ger.) Arth.
Puccinia Lobeliae Ger. Dicaeoma Lobeliae (Ger.) Arth.
440
On Lobelia syphilitica L. 1893:54. 1896:220. Fulton, 1893 (Underwood); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 20); Tippecanoe, 1883 (Arthur); Vermillion, 1889 (Arthur) Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
*34. DASYSPORA MALVACEARUM (Bert.) Arth. Puccinia malvacearum Bert. Dicaeoma malvacearum (Bert.) Kuntze. On Althaea rosea L. Huntington, 1915 (Miller); Marion, 1915 (Dietz); Marshall, 1915 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1915 (Anderson); St. Joseph, 1915 (Bordner). On Malvya rotundifolia L. Marshall, 1915 (Arthur); St. Joseph, 1914 (Anderson).
35. DASYSPORA PHYSOSTEGIAE (P. & C.) comb. nov. Puccinia Physostegiae P. & C. Dicaeoma Physostegiae (P. & C.) Kuntze. On Dracocephalum virginianum L. (Physoslegia virginiana (L.) Benth.) 1894:151. 1896:220. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 13); Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur).
36. DASYSPORA RANUNCULI (Seymour) Arth. Puccinia Ranunculi Seymour. Dicaeoma Ranunculi (Seym.) Kuntze. On Ranunculus septentrionalis Poir. 1893:55. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); 1903 (Hughart).
*37. DASYSPORA SAXIFRAGAE (Schlecht.) Arth. Puccinia Sazifargae Schlecht. On Micranthes pennsylvanica (L.) Han. (Sazifraga pennsyl- vanica 1.) Porter, 1913 (Deam). *38. DASYSPORA SEYMERIAE (Burr.) Arth. Puccinia Seymeriae Burr. On Afzelia macrophylla (Nutt.) Kuntze. Tippecanoe, 1907 (Dorner).
441
The combination D. Seymeriae (Burr.) Arthur was made in Result. Sci. Congr. Bot. Vienne 347. 1906. By a typographical error the specific name was written ““Seymouriae.” Puccinia Seymeriae Burr. not Puccinia Seymourii Lindl. was clearly in- tended. The latter is probably not a Dasyspora and in any case ds a synonym of P. musenii HE. & HK.
39. DASYSPORA SILPHII (Schw.) Arth.
Puccinia Silphii Schw.
Dicaeoma Silphi (Sechw.) Kuntze.
On Silphium integrifolium Michx. 1903:151.
Tippecanoe, 1901 (Dorner).
On Silphium perfoliatum L. Tippecanoe, 1906 (Wilson, Olive, Kern). On Silphium sp. 1893:55.
Putnam, 1891 (Underwood).
40. DASYSPORA XANTHII (Schw.) Arth.
Puccinia Xanthii Schw.
Dicaeoma Xanthii (Schw.) Kuntze.
On Ambrosia trifida L. 1896:222. 1905:182.
Gibson, 1915 (Hoffer); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Xanthium americanum Walt. 1893:56.
Johnson, 1890 (Underwood); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Orange, 1913 (Arthur & Ludwig); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Tippe- eanoe, 1905 (Wilson).
On Xanthium communis Britton.
Allen, 1911 (Orton); Montgomery, 1910 (Jennison); Tippecanoe, 1914 (Travelbee).
On Xanthium pennsylvanica Wallr. 1893:56. 1896:222. 1905:182.
Fountain, 1914 (Arthur); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Xanthium spinosum L.
Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur).
The earlier collections recorded in the Proceedings were mainly
442
referred to as occurring on Xanthium canadense Mill. and X. strumarium L. The exact identity of the host can not now be determined and the collections so referred are here placed under
X. pennsylvanicum and X. americanum respectively. 41. DICAEOMA(?) ALETRIDIS (B. & C.) Kuntze. Puccinia Aletridis B. & C.
On Aletris farinosa L. 1903:146. Lake, 1884 (Hill).
42. DICAEOMA ANDROPOGONIS (Schw.) Kuntze. Aecidium Penstemonis Schw. Puccinia Andropogi Schw. I. On Penstemon hirsutus (L.) Willd. 1896:217. 1908:90. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Stuart in Arth. & Holw. Ured. Exsice. et Icones, 39a). IIT. On Andropogon fureatus Muhl. 1896:219. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Stuart, Snyder). On Schizachyrium scoparium (Michx.) Nash (Andropogon sco- parius Michx.) 1896:219. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder in Arth. & Holw. Ured. Excice. et
Icones, 39f); 1898 (Stuart in Arth. & Holw. Ured. Exsice. et Ieones, 39e).
43. DICAEOMA ANGUSTATUM (Pk.) Kunize. Puccinia angustata Peck. Aecidium Lycopi Gerard. I. On Lycopus americanus Muhl. (L. sinuatus Ell.) 1893:50. 1898:189; 1908:91. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Snyder); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood). On Lycopus uniflorus Michx. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1908 (Johnson). III. On Scirpus atrovirens Muhl. 1893:52. 1896:219. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Tippecanoe, 1889 (Bolley); 1896 (Snyder).
*44.
46.
*47.
48.
443
On Scirpus eyperinus (L.) Kunth. 1893:52. Fulton, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1891, 1893 (Underwood, in Ind. Biol. Sur. 32); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). DICAEOMA(?) ANTIRRHINII (D. & H.) comb. nov. Puccinia Antirrhinii Diet. & Holw. On Antirrhinum majus L. Hendricks, 1915 (Miller); Lagrange, 1915 (Hissong); Montgomery 1914 (Rees).
. DICAEOMA ASPARAGI (DC.) Kuntze.
Puccinia Asparagi DC. On Asparagus officinalis L. 1903:146. 1905:181.
Fountain, 1900 (Beatty); Franklin, 1913 (Ludwig, in Barth. Fungi Col. 4255); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Lake, 1899 (Breyfogle); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); St. Joseph, 1915 (Balzer); Tippecanoe, 1900, 1901 (Arthur)
DICAEOMA ASPERIFOLII (Pers.) Kuntze. 1908:91. Aecidium Asperifolii Pers. Puccinia rubigo-vera (DC.) Wint. p.p. On Secale cereale L. 1896:221. Carroll, 1913 (Pipal); Marion, 1896 (Chapman); Posey, 1910 (Johnson); Tippecanoe, 1889 (Arthur); Vigo, 1914 (Cox.)
DICAEOMA CALTHAE (Grev.) Kuntze. Aecidium Calthae Grey. Puccinia Calthae (Grey.) Link. On Caltha palustris L. Tippecanoe, 1914 (Hoffer).
DICAEOMA CANALICULATUM (Schw.) Kunize. Sphaeria canaliculata Schw. Puccinia Cyperi Arth. Puccinia nigrovelata Ell. & Tracy. Dicaeoma Cyperi (Arth.) Kuntze. I. On Ambrosia trifida L. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Xanthium americanum Walt. Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur).
+44
On Xanthium commune Britton. Montgomery, 1899 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur). Ill. On Cyperus Engelmannii Steud. Newton, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). On Cyperus esculentus L. 1896:220 (as C. strigosus L.) Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Cyperus filiculmis Vahl. 1896:219 (as C. strigosus L.) Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Cyperus strigosus L. 1893:53, 54. 1894:154, 157. 1905:181. 1908 :94. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1890 (Earle); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). On Cyperus Schweinitzii Torr. Montgomery, 1893 (Underwood).
*49. DICAEOMA CEPHALANTHI (Seym.) comb. nov.
Aecidium Cephalanthi Seymour. Puccinia Seymouriana Arth. I. On Cephalanthus occidentalis L. Jasper, 1915 (Arthur). Ill. On Spartina Michauxiana Hitche. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme); Starke, 1903 (Arthur). 50. DICAEOMA CNICI (Mart.) Arth. Puccinia Cnici Mart. Puccinia Cirsti-lanceolati Schroet. Jackya Cirsii-lanceolati (Schroet.) Bub. 1898:182. On Cirsium lanceolatum (L.) Hill (Carduus lanceolatus L.) 1893: 5d. 1898:182. 1903:152. Marion, 1890 (Bolley); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). Previously reported in the Proceedings (1893:53; 1898:182) as P. flosculosorum (A. & S.) Roehl and Dicaeoma flosculosorum (A. & S.) Mart.
445
51. DICAEOMA CLEMATIDIS (DC.) Arth. Aecidium Clematidis DC. Aecidium Aquilegiae Pers. Puccinia tomipara Lagerh. Puccinia Agropyri E. & EH. Puccinia Paniculariae Arth. TI. On Aquilegia sp. 1893:49. Tippecanoe, 1889 (Bolley). On Clematis virginiana L. Tippecanoe, 1907 (Arthur). On Syndesmon thalictroides (L.) Hoffmg. 1894:151. Montgomery, 1894. (Olive). III. On Agropyron repens (L.) Beauv. Miami, 1912 (Holman); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur, Stuart). On Bromus eciliatus L. Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart). On Bromus japonicus Thunb. Tippecanoe, 1914 (Roberts). On Bromus purgans L. Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur). On Bromus seealinus L. Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig). On Hordeum jubatum L. Tippecanoe, 1910 (Johnson). On Panicularia grandis (S. Wats.) Nash. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). *52. DICAKOMA CONOCLINII (Seymour) Kuntze. Puccinia Conoclinii Seymour. On Eupatorium coelestinum L. Orange, 1915 (Jackson & Pipal). 53. DICAEOMA CONVOLVULI (Pers.) Kuntze. Puccinia Convolvuli (Pers.) Cast. ‘ On Convolvulus sepium L. 1893:53. 1896:219. 1905:181. Carroll, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1899, Putnam, 1891, 1893 (Under- wood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 21); Tippecanoe, 1895 (Stuart); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal).
446
*54. DICAEOMA(?) CYPRIPEDII (Arth.) Kuntze. Puccinia Cypripedii Arth. On Limodorum tuberosum L. Kosciusko, 1914 (Hoffer). 5. DICAEOMA EATONIAE Arth. Aecidium Ranunculi Sehw.
Puccinia Eatoniae Arth.
il wt
I. On Ranunculus abortivus L. 1893:50. 1908:91. Brown, 1893 (Underwood); Decatur, 1889 (Arthur); Putnam, 1892, 1893, 1894 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 55); St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden).
IIT. On Sphenopholis pallens (Spreng.) Seribn. (Eatonia pennsyl-
vanica A. Gray). 1903:148. Jasper, 1915 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur). 56. DICAEOMA ELEOCHARIDIS (Arth.) Kuntze. Puccinia Eleocharidis Arth. I. On Eupatorium maculatum L. Tippecanoe, 1908 (Johnson).
On Eupatorium perfoliatum L. 1894:151. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1894 (Olive); Tippecanoe,
1896 (Snyder).
On Eupatorium purpureum L. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Arthur).
III. On Eleocharis palustris (L.) R. & S.
91. Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur): Montgomery, 1907 (Dorner); Tippe-
canoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder). 57. DICAEOMA ELLISIANUM (Thum.) Kunize.
Puccinia Ellisiana Thum.
1896:217. 1908:91.
1893:53. 1896:219. 1908:
I. On Viola papilionacea Pursh. Tippecanoe, 1897 (Arthur). Ill. On Schizachyrium scoparium scoparius Michx.) 1903:148. Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart).
(Michx.) Nash (Andropogon
447
58. DICAEOMA EMACULATUM (Schw.) Kuntze. Puccinia emaculata Schw. On Panicum eapillare L. 1893:53. 1896:220. 1905:181. Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig); Franklin, 1913 (Ludwig); Grant, 1915 (Pipal); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Henry, 1897 (Pleas); Jasper, - 1903 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1906 (Whet- zel); Putnam, 1892 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 29); Tippe- eanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Panicum miliaceum L.
Tippecanoe, 1910 (Orton). 59. DICAKOMA EPIPHYLLUM (L.) Kunize.
Puccinia Poarum Niels. On Poa pratensis L. 1893:57. 1898:189. 1908:91.
Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1909 (Kern & Johnson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Putnam, St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Alopecurus geniculatus L.
Clinton, 1910 (Maish).
Reported erroneously in the Proceedings (1893:57) as Uromyces dactyloides Otth.
60. DICAEOMA ERIOPHORI (Thum.) Kuntze. Puccinia Eriophori Thiim. On Eriophorum angustifolium Roth. (EZ. polystachyon L.) 1903:146. Noble, 1884 (Van Gorder). On Eriophorum virginicum L. 1903:146. Lake, 1914 (Hoffer); Noble, 1884 (Van Gorder); Wells, 1905 (Deam).
61. DICAEOMA EXTENSICOLA (Plowr.) Kuntze. 1908:92. Puccinia extensicola Plowr. Puccinia Dulichii Syd. Puccinia vulpinoidis D. & H. Dicaeoma Caricis-erigerontis Arth. Dicaeoma Caricis-asteris Arth. Dicaeoma Caricis-solidaginis Arth. Dicaeoma Dulichii (Syd.) Arth.
448
I. On Aster cordifolius L. 1895:49. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, LS97 (Arthur). On Aster Drummondii Lindl. 1903:147. Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Aster paniculatus Lam. 1903:147. 1905:1S1. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Aster sagittifolius Willd. 1893:49. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive). On Aster salicifolius Lam. Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Doellingeria umbellata (Mill.) Nees. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur). On Erigeron annuus (L.) Pers. 1894:151. Montgomery, 1889 (Arthur), 1894 (Olive); Posey, 1906 (Arthur) ; Tippecanoe, 1899 (Arthur). On Erigeron ramosus (Walt.) B.S. P. 1903:147. Jasper. 1903 (Arthur). On Leptilon canadense (L.) Britt. 1903:147. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur). On Solidago caesia L. 1893:49. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive). On Solidago canadensis L. 1893 :49. Jasper, 1915 (Mrs. J. C. Arthur); Laporte, 1893 (Arthur); Tippe- canoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Solidago flexicaulis L. (S. latifolia L.) 1893:49. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden). On Solidago patula Muhl. 1903:147. Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur). On Solidago serotina Ait. _ Vigo, 1899 (Arthur). On Solidago ulmifolia Muhl. Putnam, 1896 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden). III. On Carex cephalophora Muhl. 1903:147. Newton, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Snyder); 1902 (Arthur). On Carex cephaloidea Dewey (?) Tippecanoe, 1898 (Snyder).
449
On Carex conoidea Schk. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1900 (Stuart). On Carex festuecacea Schk. 1903:147. Marion, 1913 (Overholtz & Young); Tippecanoe, 1899, 190) (Arthur). On Carex foenea Willd. 1903:147. Lagrange, 1912 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Carex nebraskensis Dewey (Carex Jamesti Torr.) 1903:147. Fayette, 1913 (Ludwig); Jefferson, 1913 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur).
On Carex oligocarpa Schk. Fayette, 1915 (Ludwig). On Carex Pennsylvanica Lam. Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern & Olive). On Carex sparganioides Muhl. Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1897 (Arthur). On Carex straminea Willd. 1893:52. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). On Carex tetanica Schk. 1903:147. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Arthur). On Carex vulpinoidea Michx. 1893:56. 1896:221. Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig); Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Orange, 1913 (Arthur & Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley); 1896 (Snyder).: On Dulechium arundinaceum (L.) Britt. 1893:52. Jasper, 1915 (Arthur & Ford); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood).
*62. DICAKOMA FRAXINI (Schw.) Arth.
Aecidium Fraxini Schw. Puccinia peridermiospora Arth. On Spartina Michauxiana Hitche. Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme).
63. DICAEOMA GROSSULARIAE (Schwm.) comb. nov. 1908:92.
5084—29
Aecidiwm Grossulariae Schum. Puccinia albiperidia Arth. Puccinia quadriporula Arth.
Puccinia uniporula Orton.
450
I. On Grossularia Cynosbati (L.) Mill. (Ribes Cynoshati L.) 1893- 50. 1898:188. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1897 (King); Putnam, 1892 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern). On Grossularia missouriensis (Nutt.) Cov. & Britt. (Ribes gracile Pursh). Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern). On Grossularia oxyacanthoides (L.) Mill. ( Ribes oxryacanthoides L.) Montgomery, 1899 (Arthur). On Grossularia rotundifolia (Michx.) Cov. & Britt. (Ribes rotundifolium Michx.) 1893:50. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 58). On Grossularia setosa (Lindl.) Cov. & Britt. (Ribes setosum Lindl.) Tippecanoe, 1909 (Johnson). II]. On Carex crinita Lam. Jasper, 1915 (Arthur & Ford); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). On Carex digitalis Willd. Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig). On Carex hirtifolia MacKenzie (C. pubescens Muhl.) 1903:145. Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Carex Hitcheockiana Dewey. Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig). On Carex laxiflora Lam. Fayette, 1915 (Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1897 (Arthur). On Carex squarrosa L. Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern). On Carex stricta Lam. Lagrange, 1912 (Arthur). On Carex tetanica Schk. Tippecarce, 1899 (Arthur). 64. DICAEOMA HELIANTHI (Schw.) Kuntze. Puccinia Helianthi Schw. On Helianthus annuus L. 1893:55. 1905:181. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890
451
(Fisher); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1891, 1892 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern). On Helianthus divericatus L. 1893:55. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1905 (Kern). On Helianthus giganteus L. 1903:148. Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1907 (Arthur). On Helianthus grosse-serratus Mart. 1893:55. 1896:221. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippe- canoe, 1906 (Snyder). On Helianthus hirsutus Raf. Harrison, 1915 (Fogal); Orange, 1915 (Jackson). On Helianthus mollis Lam. 1903:148. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Helianthus occidentalis Riddle. Harrison, 1915 (Fogal).
On Helianthus petiolaris Nutt. Tippecanoe, 1905 (Wilson). On Hehanthus strumosus L. 1893:55. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1903 (Underwood); Tippe- eanoe, 1888 (Bolley); 1894 (Golden). On Helianthus tuberosus L. 1905:181. Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Marion, 1905 (Wilson). On Helianthus tracheliifolius Mill. 1893:55. Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Shelby, 1890 (Fisher).
65. DICAKOMA HELIOPSIDIS (Schw.) Kuntze. Puccinia Heliopsidis Sechw. On Heliopsis helianthoides (L.) Sweet. 1893:54. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1901 (Stuart).
66. DICAKOMA HIBISCIATUM (Schw.) Arth. Caeoma Hibisciatum Sechw. Aecidium Napaeae Arth. & Holw. Puccinia Muhlenbergiae Arth. I. On Napaea dioica L. 1894:151. Tippecanoe, 1889 (Arthur).
III. On Muhlenbergia mexicana (L.) Trin.
Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1915 (Pipal); Lake, 1913
(Pipal); Lawrence, 1905; Tippecanoe, 1896 (Stuart, Snyder). On Muhlenbergia Schreberi Gmel. (VW. diffusa Sehreb.) 1893:53, 5d. 1905:181.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder in Arth. & Holw. Exsic. et Icon. 50a).
On Muhlenbergia tenuiflora (Willd.) B.S. P. Montgomery, 1915 (Mrs. J. C. Arthur). On Muhlenbergia umbrosa Schreb. (M. sylvatica Torr.) 1896: 221. Johnson, 1915 (Pipal); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). 67. DICAEOMA IMPATIENTIS (Schw.) Arth. Aecidium Impatientis Schw. Puccinia perminuta Arth. I. On Impatiens biflora Walt. (J. fulva Nutt.) 1893:50.
Jefferson, 1915 (Demaree):; Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery (Rose): Putnam. 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1914 (Lud- wig in Barth. Fungi Columb. 4757, and Barth N. Am. Ured. 1254).
On Impatiens pallida Nutt. (J. aurea S. Wats.) 1896-217.
Carroll, 1910 (Hoffer); Fayette, 1913 (Ludwig); Putnam, 1903.
(Wilson): Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). III. On Agrostis perennans (Walt.) Tuckerm.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson): Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig); Johnson 1890 (Fisher).
On Elymus canadensis L.
Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Elymus striatus Willd.
Jefferson, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur).
On Elymus virginicus L. 1893:55. 1896:221. 1908:91.
Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1900 (Arthur).
On Hystrix Hystrix (L.) Millsp. 1893:52. Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
*68. DICAEOMA IRIDIS (DC.) Kunize. Uredo Iridis DC. On Iris versicolor L. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood. Ind. Biol. Sur. 52).
69. DICAEOMA MAJANTHAE (Schum.) Arth. Aecidium Majanthae Schum. On Phalaris arundinacea L. 1903:149. 1909:90. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Stuart).
70. DICAEOMA MELICAE (Syd.) Arth.
On Melica mutica Walt. 1903:149. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Stuart).
71. DICAEOMA MENTHAE (Pers.) S. F. Gray. Puccinia Menthae Pers. On Blephila ciliata (L.) Raf.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson).
On Blephila hirsuta (Pursh) Torr. 1893:54. 1896:220. 1905:181.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher): Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Posey, 1906 (Arthur): Tippecanoe, 1899, 1901 (Arthur), 1896 (Snyder); Vermillion, 1889 (Arthur).
On Cunila origanoides (L.) Britton (C. mariana L.) 1893:54.
Martin, 1915 (Hoffer); Monroe, 1886 (Blatchley).
On Koellia pilosa (Nutt.) Britton (Pycnanthenum muticum pilosum A. Gray). 1893 :54. Vigo, 1893 (Underwood). On Koellia virginiana (L.) MacM. (Pycnanthemum lanceolatum Pursh). 1893:54. 1896-220. Marshall. 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Mentha canadensis L. 1893:54. 1905:181.
Grant. 1915 (Pipal); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood. Ind. Biol. Sur. 11); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1883 (Arthur).
On Mentha spicata L.
Hamilton, 1915 (Pipal).
1893:54. 1896:220. 1905:181.
On Monarda fistulosa L. (Wilson); Jefferson,
1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 1905 (Wilson); Marshall, 1893 1890. (Fisher); Steuben, 1903 (Golden); 1896 (Snyder):
Carroll, 1914 (Demaree); Marion, (Underwood); Montgomery, (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1894 Vigo, 1893 (Underwood). #72. DICAEOMA MINUTISSIMUM (Arth.) comb. nov. Aecidium Nesaeae Ger. Puccinia minutissima Arth. I. On Decodon verticillatus (L.) Ell.
Jasper, 1915 (Arthur). III. On Carex lasiocarpa Ehrh. (C. filiformis Good).
Fulton, 1893 (Underwood); Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme).
*73. DICAEOMA MONTANENSE (Ellis) Kuntze. Puccinia montanensis Ellis. On Elymus canadensis L. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Arthur). 74. DICAEOMA ARGENTATUM (Schultz) Kuntze. Puccinia nolitangeris Corda. Uredo Impatientis Rebh. Puccinia argentata (Schultz) Wint. III. On Impatiens biflora Walt. (J. fulva Nutt.) 1893:52. 1896:220.
1903 :146. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher): Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
#75. DICAEOMA OBSCURUM (Schroet.) Kuntze. Puccinia obscura Schroet. On Juncoides campestre (L.) Kuntze (Luzula campestris DC.)
Montgomery, 1913 (Arthur).
76. DICAEOMA OBTECTUM (Pk.) Kuntze. Puccinia obtecta Pk.
1908 :91.
On Scirpus americanus Pers. 1894:151. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 12); Tippecanoe,
1906 (Kern). On Scirpus validus Vahl. (S. lacustris L.) 1894:151. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Vermillion, 1889 (Wright).
77. DICAEOMA ORBICULA (Peck & Clinton) Kuntze. Puccinia orbicula Peck & Clinton. On Nabalus albus (L.) Hook. 1893:55. 1896:221.
Putnam, 1890 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1895 (Golden); Vigo, 1893 (Arthur). - Erroneously reported in the Proceedings as P. Prenanthes
(Pers.) Fekl., which is a Brachy-form (Bullaria) not recorded for
Indiana.
78. DICAEOMA PAMMELII (Trel.) Arth.
Aecidium Pammelii Trel. Puccinia Panici Diet. I. On Tithymalopsis corollata (L.) Kl. & Gareke (Huphorbia corollata Li.) 1893:49. 1901:284. 1903:149. 1908-90. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Tippecanoe, 1901 (Stuart). III. On Panicum virgatum L. 1901:283. 1903:149. 1908:90. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Lake, 1910 (Johnson); Newton, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme): Starke, 1905 (Arthur); Tippecanoe. 1901 (Stuart).
79. DIAECOMA PATRUELIS (Arth.) comb. nov. Aecidium compositarum lactucae Burrill. Puccinia patruelis Arth.
I. On Lactuea canadensis L. 1894:151. Jasper, 1906 (Arthur); Lagrange, 1912 (Arthur): Montgomery,
1894 (Olive): Tippecanoe, 1903 (Seaver).
On Lactuea floridana (L.) Gaertn. Tippecanoe, 1906 (Olive).
On Lactuea sativa L. Tippecanoe, 1902 (Burrage).
On Laectuea virosa L. (L. scariola 1.) Jasper, 1910 (Kern & Billings).
III. On Carex sp.
Jasper, 1903 (Arthur).
80. DICAEOMA PECKII (DeT.) Arth. Aeeidium Peekii DeToni.
Puecinia ludibunda Ell. & Evy.
456
I. On Oenothera biennis L. 1893:50. 1896:217. 1908:92.
Jasper. 1910 (Kern & Billings); Laporte, 1883 (Arthur); Putnam, 1896 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder), 1902 (Arthur): Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
IIT. On Carex lanuginosa Michx.
Lagrange, 1912 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1911 (Johnson).
On Carex sparganioides Muhl. Lagrange, 1907 (Wilson).
On Carex stipata Muhl. 1903:149. Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur), 1912 (Overholts & Orton).
On Carex trichocarpa Muh]. 1903:149. Hamilton, 1909 (Kern & Johnson); Jasper, 1906 (Arthur & Kern); Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur).
81. DICAEOMA POCULIFORME (Jacq.) Kuntze. Aecidium Berberidis Pers. Puccinia graminis Pers. Puccinia phlei-pratensis Erikss. & Henn. I. On Berberis vulgaris L. 1893:49. 1908:92.
Lagrange, 1889 (Arthur).
III. On Agrostis alba L. 1893:53. 1903:150. 1905:182.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jasper, 1906 (Arthur); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 14); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart); Wayne, 1910 (Johnson).
On Arrhenatherum elatium (L.) Beauy.
Tippecanoe, 1898 ( Stuart ))
On Avena sativa L. 1893:53. 1896:220. 1905:182.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder).
On Bromus secalinus L. Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig). On Cinna arundicacea L. 1903:150. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Stuart); 1901 (Arthur). On Dactylis glomerata L. 1896:220, 223. Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
82.
457
On Hordeum jubatum L. 1896:220, 224.
Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder); 1898 (Arthur).
On Hordeum yulgare L.
Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart).
On Phleum pratense L. 1909:417. 1910:203.
-Bartholomew, 1909 (Hunter); Cass, 1910 (Johnson); Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1910 (Wilson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Jefferson, 1910 (Johnson); Posey, 1910 (Johnson); Spencer, 1910 (Johnson); Tippecanoe, 1910 (Johnson); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal); Wayne, 1910 (Johnson); Wabash, 1910 (Johnson); Whitley, 1910 (Johnson):.
On Secale cereale L.
Clay, 1910 (Ringo).
On Triticum vulgare Vill. 1893:54. 1898:188. 1905:182.
Carroll, 1912 (Pipal); Decatur, 1912 (Moor); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Marion, 1914 (Hameisen); Noble, 1897 (King); Posey, 1912 (Pipal); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1890 (Arthur): Wayne, 1910 (Johnson).
DICAKOMA POLYGONI-AMPHIBII (Pers.) Arth. Puccinia Polygoni-amphibii Pers. Aecidium sanguinolentum Lindr. I. On Geranium maculatum L. 1893:40. 1896:217. 1898:188. 1908 :92. Laporte, 1915 (Cotton); Noble, 1893 (King); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood, Arthur). III. On Persicaria amphibia (L.) S. F. Gray (Polygonum Hart- wrightit A. Gray). 1903:150. Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). On Persicaria hydropiperoides (Michx.) Small (Polygonum hy- droptiperoides Macouni). 1898:184. 1898:189. Noble, 1897 (King); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Stuart). On Persicaria lapathifolia (L.) S. F. Gray (Polygonum lapathifolium L.) 1898:184. Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). — On Persicaria Muhlenbergii (S. Wats.) Small (Polygonum Muhlen- bergit S. Wats., P. emersum Britt.) 1893:55. 1905:182.
458
Fulton, 1893 (Underwood); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Hunting- ton, 1915 (Troop); Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur); Wabash, 1890 (Miller).
On Persicaria pennsylvanica (L.) Small (Polygonum pennsylvani- cum L.) 1898:184.
Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 26); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal).
On Persicaria punctata (Ell.) Small (Polygonum punctatum EL, 125 nei Mths 184, 1) neko ciysy ai7/ Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood).
83. DICAEOMA POLYGONI-CONVOLVULI (Hedw.) Arth. Puccinia Polygoni-convolvouli Hedw. On Tiniaria Convolvulus (L.) Webb. & Mog. (Polygonum convol- vulus L.) 1898:184. 1905:182. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). On Tiniaria scandens (Iu.) Small (Polygonum scandens L.) 1896: Dae Putnam, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1900 (Arthur).
84. DICAEMOA PUNCTATUM (Link) Kunize. Puccinia punctata Link. Dicaeoma Galiorum (Lk.) Arth. On Galium asprellum Michx. 1893:53. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). On Galium concinnum Torr. & Gray. 1893:53. 1905:182. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Owen, 1893 (Under- wood. Ind. Biol. Sur. 17); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippe- canoe, 1909 (Arthur). On Galium tinctorum L. 1905:182. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson). On Galium triflorum Michx. 1893:53. Montgomery, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood). 85. DICAEOMA PUSTULATUM (Curtis) Arth. Aecidium pustulatum Curtis. Puccinia pustulata (Curtis) Arth.
459
I. On Comandra umbellata (L.) Nutt. 1893:50. 1908:90.
St. Joseph, 1914 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippe- canoe, 1897 (Arthur); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 57).
III. On Andropogon fureatus Muhl. 1903:150.
Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Starke, 1905 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder in Arth. & Holw. Ured. et Icones 39h); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 33).
On Sechizachyrium scoparium (Michx.) Nash (Andropogon scoparius Michx.) 1903:150. Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur).
86. DICAEOMA RHAMNI (Gmel.) Kuntze.
Aecidium Rhamni Pers. Puccinia coronata Corda. Puccinia Lolii Niels. J. On Rhamnus ecaroliniana Walt. Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). 3 On Rhamnus lanceolata Pursh. 1898:184. 1908:90. Tippecanoe, 1897 (Arthur). III. On Avena sativa L. 1893:55. 1896:219. 1898:188. 1905:182. Clay, 1910 (Ringo); Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Fayette, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Noble, 1897 (King); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Stuart); Wayne, 1910 (Johnson). On Cinna arundinacea L. Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). On Calamagrostis canadensis (Mx.) Beauv. 1893:53. Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley).
37. DICAEOMA RUELLIAE (B. & Br.) Kuntze.
Uredo Ruelliae B. & Br. Diorchidium lateripes (B. & Rav.) Magn. Dicaeoma laieripes (B. & Ray.) Kuntze. On Ruellia ciliosa Pursh. Tippecanoe, 1904 (Marquis). On Ruellia strepens L. 1893:54. 1896:218. 1905:181. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson,
460
1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 31): Tippecanoe, 1895 (Stuart), 1896 (Snyder); Wabash, 1887 (Miller).
88. DICAEOMA SAMBUCI (Schw.) Arth. Aecidium Sambuci Schw. Puccinia Bolleyana Sace. Puccinia Altkinsoniana Diet. I. Sambusecus canadensis L. 1895:50.
Brown, 1893 (Underwood); Fayette, 1913 (Ludwig); Franklin, 1914 (Ludwig); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1892, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 56); Tippecanoe, 1899 (Arthur); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
III. On Carex Frankii Kunth. 1893:55. 1898:187.
Boone, 1891 (Arthur); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Fulton, 1893 (Underwood); Hamilton, 1909 (Kern & Johnson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Orange, 1913 (Arthur & Ludwig); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Parke. 1900 (Snyder) ; Putnam, 1893 (Underwood).
On Carex lupulina Muhl.
Noble, 1904 (Whetzel).
On Carex lurida Wahl. 1893:52.
Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur); Marion, 1890 (Arthur); Orange, 1913 (Arthur & Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Carex trichocarpa Muhl. 1893:52. 1896:219.
Bartholomew, 1909 (Kern); Jasper, 1906 (Arthur & Kern); Tippe-
canoe, 1889 (Bolley).
89. DICAEOMA SANICULAE (Grev.) Kuntze.
Puccinia Saniculae Grey. On Sanicula canadensis L. 1893:55.. Montgomery (Rose).
*90. DICAKOMA SMILACIS (Schw.) Kuntze. Aecidium Smilacis Schw. Puccinia Smilacis Schw. On Smilax glauca Walt. Lawrence, 1915 (Hoffer); Orange, 1913 (Ludwig’
461
91. DICAKOMA SORGHI (Schw.) Kuntze. Puccinia Sorghi Schw. Puccinia Maydis Bereng. T. On Xanthoxalis eymosa Sma!] (Oxalis eymosa Small).
Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur). IIT. On Zea Mays L. 1893:54. 1898:188. 1905:182. 1908:90. Dearborn. 1889 (Bolley); Delaware. 1915 (Jackson); Franklin,
1913 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1©05 (Wilson); Henry 1915 (Jack- son); Marion, 1805 (Wilson): Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1897 (King); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol, Sur. 23); Tipton, 1912 (Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1887 (Arthur),
92. DICAEOMA TRITICINUM (Erikss.) comb. nov. Puccinia triticina Eriksson. On Triticum vulgare Vill.
Carroll, 1913 (Pipal); Decatur, 1912 (Moor); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Jefferson. 1910 (Johnson); Laporte, 1910 (G. C. Cook): Orange, 1915 (Pipal): Posey, 1906 (‘Arthur & Kern); Pulaski, 1898 (Arthur); Putnam, 1896 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1890 (Arthur); Vigo, 1899 (Arthur): Wayne, 1906 (Hiatt).
93. DICAEOMA (?) TROGLODYTES (Lindr.) comb. nov. Puccinia troglodytes Lidr.
On Galium triflorum Michx. Hamiiton, 1905 (Wilson).
94. DICAEOMA URTICAE (Schum.) Kuntze. Aecidium Urticae Schum. Puccinia Caricis Schrét. not Reb. T. On Urtica gracilis Ait. (U. Lyallii S. Wats.) 1898:185. 1908-92. St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham): Lagrange, 1912 (Arthur); Tippe canoe, 1905 (Kern).
Ill. On Carex lacustris Willd. (C. riparia Muhl.) 1903:151.
Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman).
On Carex stipata Muhl. Tippecanoe, 1905 (Arthur);
On Carex stricta Lam. 1903:151.
462
Jasper, 1906 (Arthur & Kern); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). Many of the collections reported in previous lists of Indiana
rusts as belonging to this species are now included elsewhere.
95. DICAEOMA VERBENICOLUM (Ell. & Kell.) Arth. Aecidium verbenicolum Ellis & Kellerman. Puccinia Vilfae Arth. & Holw. Dicaeoma Vilfae (A. & H.) Arth. I. On Verbena stricta Vent. 1896:218. 1908:90. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). III. On Sporobolus asper (Michx.) Kunth. 1896:221. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). Erroneously reported in Proceedings for 1896:221 as Puccinia Sporoboli Arth. 96. DICAEOMA (?) VERNONIAE (Scw.) Kuntze. Puccinia Vernoniae Schw. On Vernoniae fascieulata Michx. 1893:55. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood). This collection is on the stems and has been distributed in the following exsiccati: Ind. Biol. Sur. 30; Barth. N. Am. Ured. 578; Ell. & Ev. N. Am. Fungi 2988; Seymour & Earle Economie Fungi Supl. B20. 97. DICAKOMA VEXANS (Farl.) Kuntze. Puccinia vezans Far). On Atheropogon curtipendulus (Michx.) Fourn. (Bouleloua curti- pendula (Michx.) Torr.) 1901:283. Tippecanoe (Stuart). No specimens of this collection are now available and the determination is somewhat doubtful. Since the species is rep- resented in the Arthur herbarium only from the western plains.
98. DICAEOMA VIOLAE (Schum.) Kuntze. Puccinia Violae (Sechum.) DC. On Viola eriocarpa Schwein. 1903:152. Decatur, 1889 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1906 (Olive). On Viola papilionacea Pursh (V. obliqua Hill) 1893:56.
463
Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1890 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur); Vigo, 1893 (Arthur) On Viola pubescens Ait. 1903:152. Fayette, 1915 (Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). On Viola sororia Willd. Tippecanoe, 1906 (Kern). On Viola striata Ait. 1893:56.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher); Owen, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 18); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1912 (Pipal).
99. DICAKOMA WINDSORIAE (Schw.) Kuntze. Puccinia Windsoriae Schw. Aecidium Pteleae Berk. & Curt. I. On Ptelea trifoliata L. 1893:50. 1896:217. 1908:90.
Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
III. On Tridens flava (.) Hitche. (Sieglingia seslerioides (Mx.) Schrib. 1894:154, 1896:221. Harrison, 1915 (Kopp): Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). 100. EARLEA SPECIOSA (Fr.) Arth. Aregma speciosa Fr. Phragmidium speciosum (Fr.) Cooke. On Rosa earolina L. 1896:219.
Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur).
On Rosa virginiana Mill. (Rosa hwmilis Marsh). 1898:179.
Fulton, 1894 (Arthur); Putnam, 1900 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur).
101. GYMNOCONIA INTERSTITIALIS (Schlect.) Lagerh. Aecidium nitens Schw. Puccinia interstitialis (Schlecht.) Tranz. On Rubus alleghaniensis Porter. 1893:54.
Jefferson, 1910 (Johnson); Marion, 1901 (Dickey); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 19); St. Joseph, 1909 (Cun- ningham); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden); 1896 (Snyder); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
464
On Rubus occidentalis L. 1893:54. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive). On Rubus procumbens Muhl. (. villosus Ait.) 1893:54. 1896: 220. 1898:188. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1897 (King); Tippecanoe, 1899 (Stuart): 1896 (Snyder). On Rubus strigosus Michx. 1893:54. Marshall, 1889 (Parks). *10z. GYMNOSPORANGIUM GERMINALE (Schw.) Kern. On Crataegus mollis (T. & &.) Scheele. Shelby (Brezze).
On Cydonia yulgaris L. Perry, 1914 (Odell).
103. GYMNOSPORANGIUM GLOBOSUM Fazrl. Roestelia lacerata (Sow.) Fr. Gin part). Puccinia globosa (Farl.) Kuntze. Aecidium globosum (Farl.) Arth. I. On Crataegus coccinea L. 1893:56. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Henry, 1909 (Gardner). On Crataegus Crus-galli L. 1894:153. Montgomery, 1894 (Olive). On Crataegus mollis (T. & G.) Scheele (C. subvillosa T. & G.) 1898; 186, 188. Allen, 1911 (Orton); Clay, 1910 (Ringo); Marion, 1896 (B. M. Davis); Noble, 1897 (King); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). On Crataegus punctata Jacq. 1893:56. 1896:222. 1905:182. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 60); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Crataegus Pringlei Sarg. Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). IIT. On Juniperus virginiana L. 1893:51. 1908:89. Clinton, 1907 (Kern); Jefferson, 1903 (Arthur); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 45); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Arthur).
465
104. GYMNOSPORANGIUM JUNIPERI-VIRGINIANAE Schw. Roestelia pyrata Thax. Gymnosporangium macropus Lk. Puccinia Juniperi-virginianae (Schw.) Arth. Aecidium Juniperi-virginianae (Schw.) Arth. I. On Malus coronaria (L.) Mill. 1893:56. 1896:218.
Hamilton, 1907 (Wilson); Henry, 1909 (Gardner); Marion. 1907 (Shell); Putnam, 1907 (Wilson); Spencer, 1910 (Johnson); Tippecanoe. 1896 (Snyder); Wabash, 1891 (Miller).
On Malus Tonensis (Wood) Britton.
Tippecanoe, 1892 (Arthur).
On Malus Malus (L.) Britt. 1898:186. 1901:255.
Carroll, 1913 (Kerlin); Clark, 1912 (Richards); Fayette, 1912 Richards); Floyd, 1890 (Latta); Franklin, 1903 (Kleim). Greene, 1912 (Richards); Howard, 1902 (Armstrong); Jasper, 1913 (Coe); Jackson, 1912 (Richards); Jefferson, 1914 (Dema- ree); Martin, 1912 (Richards); Montgomery, 1901 (Whetzell); Morgan, 1911 (Lewis); Newton, 1898 (Griggs); Orange, 1912 (Brown); Putnam, 1907 (Wilson); Ripley, 1902 (Ferris); Rush, 1911 (Smiley); Spencer, 1900 (Johnson); Wayne, 1904 (Helms); Wabash. 1911 (Fisher); Warrick, 1912 (Alltz); White, 1913 (Pipal); Whitley, 1911 (More).
III. On Juniperus virginiana L. 1893:51. 1896:218. 1901:255. 1908 :89.
Clay, 1910 (Ringo); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig): Henry, 1914 (Travelbee); Monroe, 1898 (Arthur); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Orange, 1915 (Jackson); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1892, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 46); Tippe- canoe, 1889 (Bolley), 1898 (Arthur); Warren, 1908 (Davis). 105. KUEHNEOLA OBTUSA (Strauss) Arth. On Potentilla canadensis L. 1893-52. 1896:218. 1898:179. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Fulton, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 47); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree): Johnson, 1890 (Fisher): Marshall, 1893 (Underwood); Orange, 1913 (Arthur); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1889 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder) ; 5084—30
466
1901 (Arth. in Barth. N. Am. Ured. 313); Vigo, 1893 (Arthur, Underwood). Previously reported in the Proceedings as Phragmidium Fragar- iae (DC.) Wint. and Aregma Fragariae (DC.) Arth.
106. KUEHNEOLA UREDINIS (Link) Arth. Chrysomyza albida Kuhn. Coleosporium Rubi BE. & H. On Rubus allegheniensis Porter. Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Hamilton, 1907 (Wilson); Mont- gomery, 1913 (Kern); Warrick, 1906 (Heim). On Rubus caneifolius Pursh. 1893:50. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). On Rubus hispidus L. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). On Rubus procumbens Muhl. (Rubus villosus Ait.) 1893:50. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
107. NIGREDO AMPHIDYMA (Sydow) Arthur. Uromyces glyceriae Arth. On Panicularia septentrionalis (Hitch.) Bicknell. 1893:57. 1898: 180. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). Previously reported as Uromyces graminicola Burr. on Pani- cum virgatum L.
108. NIGREDO APPENDICULATA (Pers.) Arth. Uromyces appendiculata (Pers.) Ley.) Caeomurus Phaseoli (Pers.) Arth. On Phaseolus vulgaris L. 1893:56 in part. 1905:180.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Putnam, 1892 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 40); Tippecanoe, 1905 (Wilson); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal).
On Stropostyles helvolva (L.) Britt. (Phaseolus angulosus ELL, P. diversifolius Pers.) 1893:56. 1896:172. 222. 1905:180.
Franklin, 1914 (Roy Allen); Laporte, 1915 (L. B. Clore); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1895 (Arthur), 1896 (Snyder).
467
On Sirophostyles pauciflora (Benth.) 5S. Wats. “Putnam, 1896 (Cook). On Strophostyles umbellata (Muhl.) Britton. Sullivan, 1915 (Hoffer). On Vigna sinensis (L.) Endl. 1903:145. Tippecanoe, 1902, 1903 (Arthur in Barth. N. Am. Ured. 381).
109. NIGREDO CALADII (Schw.) Arth. Uromyces Caladii (Schw.) Farl. Caeomurus Caladit (Sechw.) Kuntze. On Arisaema Dracontium (L.) Schott. 1893:56. 1896:222. 1905: 180.
Brown, 1893 (Underwood); Fayette, 1913 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jasper, 1915 (Arthur); Kosciusko, 1915 (Hoffer); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1897 (Cook); Tippe- canoe, 1896 (Snyder); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood).
On Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Torr. 1893:56. 1896:222. 1898: 189. 1905:180.
Fayette, 1913 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jasper, 1915 (Arthur); Johnson. 1890 (Fisher); Monroe, 1893 (Underwood); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Noble, 1897 (King); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Posey, 1906 (Arthur & Kern); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1894 (Golden), 1896 (Snyder); St. Joseph, 1904 (Cunningham); Vigo, 1893 (Underwood, Ar- thur).
On Peltandra yirginica (L.) Kunth. Jasper, 1915 (Arthur); Lake, 1881 (A. B. Seymour).
110. NIGREDO CARYOPHYLLINA (Schrank.) Arth. Uromyces Caryophyllinus (Schrank.) Wint. Caeomurus Caryophyllinus (Schrank.) Kuntze. On Dianthus earyophyllus L. 1893:56. 1898:180. 1912:99. Marion, 1892 (Arthur); Monroe, 1912 (Von Hook); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). 111. NIGREDO FABAE (Pers.) Arth. Uromyces Fabae (Pers.) DeBy. On Lathyrus venosus Muhl. 1896:222. 1898:181. 1903:145. Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
168
Previously reported in the Proceedings as on Vicia americana
Muhl. and erroneously referred to Uromyces Orobi (Pers.) Wint.,
Caeomurus Pisi (Pers.) Gray, Caeomurus Orohi (Pers.) Arth.,
which refer to European species not yet recorded in America. #112. NIGREDO FALLENS (Desmaz ) Arth. Uromyces fallens (Desmaz.) Kern. On Trifolium pratense L. 1893:58. 1896:223. 1898:187, 189.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamil- ton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Kosciusko. 1913 (Hoffer); Madison, 1898 (Snyder), Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Miami, 1915 (Ludwig); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher), i893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 38); Noble, 1897 (King): Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tipton, 1912 (Ludwig); Tippecanoe, 1891 (Ar- thur), i896 (Snyder); Wabash, 1891 (Miller) ;.
113. NIGREDO HEDYSARI-PANICULATI (Schw.) Arth. Uromyces Hedysari-paniculati (Schw.) Farl. Caeomurus Hedysari-paniculati (Sehw.) Arth. On Meibomia bracteosa (Michx.) Kuntze.
Delaware, 1915 (Jackson).
On Meibomia canescens (L.) Kuntze. 1893:57. 1903:144.
Johnson, 1890 (Misher); Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, 1907 (Dorner).
On Meibomia Dillenii (Darl.) Kuntze. 1893:57. 1896:222. 1905: 144. 1905:180.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson, reported as on M. sessilifolia (Torr) Kuntze); Martin, 1915 (Hoffer); Montgomery, 1893 (Under- wood Ind. Biol. Sur. 35); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder), 1914 (Ludwig in Barth. Fungi Columb. 4592).
Ou Meibomia laevigata (Nutt.) Kuntze. 1893:57.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Meibomia paniculata (L.) Kuntze. 1893:57. 1896:222.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder, reported as on Desmodium canadense DC.)
On Meibomia viridiflora (L.) Kuntze. 1893:57. 1905:180.
469
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1904 (J. C. Marquis).
114. NIGREDO HOWEI (Pk.) Arth. Uromyces Howei Pk. Caeomurus Howei (Pk.) Kuntze. On Ascelepias inearnata L. 1893:57. 1896:222. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive): Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Asclepias purpurascens L. 1893:57.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Asclepias Syriaca L. (A. cornuti Dee.) 1893:57. 1896:222. 1898:187. 1905:180.
Dearborn, 1888 (Bolley); Delaware, 1890 (Arthur); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson): Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Macion, 1890 (S. M. Tracy), 1905 Wilson); Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher), 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 36:; Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman); Tippecanoe, 1887 (Arthur), 1896 (Snyder); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal); Wabash, 1891 (Miller).
On Vincetoxicum Shortii (A. Gray) Britton.
Crawford, 1915 (C. C. Deam).
115. NIGREDO HYPERICI-FRONDOSI (Schw.) Arth. Uromyces Hyperici (Schw.) M. A. Curtis. Caeomurus Hyperici-frondosi (Schw.) Arth. On Hypericum canadense L. 1893:57. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). On Hypericum mutilum L. 1893:57. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1891, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 42); Spencer, 1910 (Johnson). On Triadenum virginicum (L.) Raf. (Elodea camoanulata Pursh). 1893 :57. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood).
116. NIGREDO LESPEDEZAE-PROCUMBENTIS (Schw.) ‘Arth. Uromyces Lespedezae (Schw.) Pk. Caeomurus Lespedezae-procumbentis (Schw.) Arth. On Lespedeza capitata Michx. 1903:145. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur).
170
On Lespedeza frutescens (L.) Britton.
Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur).
On Lespedeza hirta (L.) Hornem. 1903:145.
Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood) Ind. Biol. Sur. 39); Martin, 1915 (Hoffer); Orange, 1915 (Jackson).
On Lespedeza procumbens Michx. 1893:57.
Montgomery, 1890 (Fisher).
On Lespedeza repens (L.) Bart. 1896:222.
Tippecanoe, 1894 (Snyder).
On Lespedeza Stuvei Nutt.
Harrison, 1915 (Fogal).
On Lespedeza virginica (L.) Britton (L. reticulata S. Wats.) 1893: 57. Lagrange, 1907 (Arthur): Montgomery, 1910 (Fisher).
*117. NIGREDO MEDICAGINIS (Pass.) Arthur. On Medicago lupulina L. Grant, 1915 (Pipal); Tipton, 1915 (Pipal). On Medicago sativa L. Putnam, 1907 (Wilson).
*118. NIGREDO MINUTA (Diet.) Arth.
On Carex lanuginosa Michx. 1903:144. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur).
On Carex virescens Muhl. 1893:57. Putnam, 1890 (Arthur). The former collection erroneously reported as Cacomurus Solidagini-caricis Arth. in Proceedings (1903:144) and the latter (1893:57) as Uromyces perigynius Hals. on C. virescens.
119. NIGREDO PERIGYNIA (dalst.) Arth. Uromyces perigynius Halsted. Caeomurus perigynius (Halst.) Kuntze. Caeomurus Solidagini-Caricis Arth. On Carex tribuloides Wahl. Newton, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). On Carex varia Muhl. 1903:144. Jasper, 1903 (Arthur, type of Uromyces Solidagini-Caricis Arth.)- Lake, 1899 (Hill).
471
120. NIGREDO PLUMBARIA (Pk,) Arth. Uromyces gaurina (Pk.) Snyder. Caeomurus plumbarius (Pk.) Kuntze. Caeomurus gaurinus (Pk.) Arth. On Gaura biennis L. 1896:222. 1898:180. 1903:145. Hamilton, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). On Oenothera biennis L. Tippecanoe, 1912 (Orton).
121. NIGREDO POLYGONI (Pers.) Arth. Uromyces polygoni (Pers.) Fuckel. Caeomurus Polygoni (Pers.) Kuntze. On Polygonum aviculare L. 1893:57. 1896:223. 1905:181. Franklin, 1912, 1914 (Ludwig, in Barth. N. Am. Ured. 1196); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Kosciusko, 1909 (Funk): Montgom- ery, 1893 (Olive); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley); 1896 (Snyder). On Polygonum erectum L. 1893:58. Boone, 1911 (Miller); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Putnam, 1893 (Underwood Ind. Biol. Sur. 41); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley); 1895 (Snyder).
122. NIGREDO POLEMONII (Pk.) Arth. Aecidium Polemonii Pk. Uromyces acuminatus Arth. Caeomurus acuminatus (Arth.) Kuntze. I. On Polemonium reptans L. Tippecanoe, 1901 (Arthur). III. On Spartina Michauxiana Hitch. (S. cynosuroides (L.) Roth). 1903:144. 1908:89. Jasper, 1903, 1915 (Arthur); Lake, 1913 (Arthur); Starke, 1905 (Arthur); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman).
123. NIGREDO PROEMINENS (DC.) Arth. Uromyces Euphorbiae (Schw.) C. & P. Caeomurus Euphorbiae (Schw.) Kuntze. On Chamaesyce humistrata (Engelm.) Small (Huphorbia humis- trata Engelm.) 1903:144. 1905:180.
472
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, 1906 (Thomas); Put- nam, 1911 (Banker); Tippecanoe, 1902 (Arthur).
On Chamaesyce maculata (L.) Small (Huphorbia maculata 1.) 1893:49. 1896:217. 1905:180.
Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Montgomery, (Rose); Tippecanoe, 1887 (Arthur).
On Chamaesyce Preslii (Guss.) Arth. (Huphorbia Preslii Guss., E. hypericifolia A. Gray). 1893:57. 1896:222. 1898:187. 1905:180.
Franklin, 1913 (Ludwig); Fulton, 1909 (Kern); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Henry, 1915 (Jackson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Putnam, 1891 (Underwood); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1896 (Snyder), 1914 (Ludwig in Barth. Fungi Col. 4594, 4595).
On Poinsettia dentata (Michx.) Small (Euphorbia dentata Michx.) 1893 :49, 57. 1896:217, 222. 1905:180.
Franklin, 1914 (Alley); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Putnam, 1891, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 43, 59); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder).
On Poinsettia heterophylla (L.) Kl. & Garke (Euphorbia hetero- phylla 1.)
Tippecanoe, 1904 (Arthur).
124. NIGREDO RHYNCOSPORAE (Ellis) Arth. Uromyces Rhyncosporae Ellis. Caeomurus Rhyncosporae (Ellis) Kuntze. On Rynchospora alba (L.) Vahl. 1903:145. Tippecanoe, 1894 (King).
*125. NIGREDO SCIRPI (Cast.) Arth. Uromyces Scirpi (Cast.) Burrill. Aecidium sii-latifolii Wint. I. On Cicuta maculata L. Tippecanoe, 1903 (Arthur). III. On Seirpus americanus Pers. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme); Montgomery, 1895 (Olive).
On Scirpus validus Vahl. Jasper, 1913 (Arthur & Fromme). 126. NIGREDO SILPHII (Burr.) Arthur. Aeicidium compositarum Silphii Burr. Uromyces Junci-tenuis Sydow. IT. On Silphium perfoliatum L. Vigo, 1899 (Arthur). III. On Juneus Dudleyi Wieg. Posey, 1910 (Johnson); Steuben, 1903 (Kellerman). On Juncus tenuis Willd. 1896:222. 1898:187. 1905:180. 1908: 90. Fayette, 1914 (Ludwig); Franklin, 1912 (Ludwig); Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Marion, 1905 (Wilson); Marshall, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 37); Newton, 1913 (Arthur); Orange, 1913 (Arthur); Owen, 1911 (Pipal); Pulaski, 1912 (Ludwig); Starke, 1905 (Arthur); Tippecanoe, 1896 (Snyder). *127. NIGREDO SPERMACOCES (Schw.) Arth. Uromyces Spermacoces (Schw.) M. A. Curtis.
On Diodia teres Walt. Harrison, 1915 (Fogal). 128. NIGREDO TRIFOLII ( Hedw.f.) Arth. Uromyces Trifolii (Hedw.f.) Lev. Caeomurus Trifolii .(Hedw.f.) Gray). On Trifolium hybridum L. 1893:58. 1905:181. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson); Wabash, 1886 (Miller). On Trifolium medium L. 1893:58. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher). On Trifolium repens L. 1893:58. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, 1888 (Bolley), 1893 (Golden).
*129. NIGREDO VALENS (Kern) Arth.
Uromyces valens Kern. On Carex lupulina Muhl. 1893:58. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
474
On Carex rostrata Stokes (Carex utriculata Boot.) 1905:180. Hamilton, 1905 (Wilson, type collection of Uromyces valens Kern). *130..PHRAGMIDIUM AMERICANUM Diet. On Rosa sp. cult. 1893 :52. Putnam, 1892 (Uuderwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 48). On Rosa virginiana Mill. (R. lucida Ehrh.) 1893:52. Johnson, 1890 (Fisher).
131. PHRAGMIDIUM DISCIFLORUM (Tode) J. F. James. Aregma disciflora (Tode) Arth. On Rosa sp. cult. “St. Joseph, 1915 (Emery). *132. PHRAGMIDIUM ROSAE-SETIGERAE Diet. On Rosa earolina L. (?) 1893:52. Putnam, 1893 (Underwood). On Rosa rubiginosa L. Monroe, 1914 (Van Hook). On Rosa setigera Michx. 1893:52. Hamilton, 1907 (Wilson); Jefferson, 1914 (Demaree); Johnson, 1890 (Fisher); Madison, 1907 (Wilson); Tippecanoe, 1896 - (Snyder). 133. PHRAGMIDIUM SUBCORTICIUM (Schrank.) Wint. On Rosa sp. cult. Tippecanoe, 1897 (Arthur).
134. PILEOLARIA TOXICODENDRI (Berk. & Rav.) Arth. Pileolaria brevipes Berk. & Rav. On Toxicodendron radieans (L.) Kuntze (Rhus radicans L.) 1893:
\, 58).01896-223 1898-188
Laporte, 1888 (Arthur); Jefferson, 1915 (Demaree); Montgomery, [S90 (Fisher); Owen, 1893 (Underwood); Putnam, 1893 (Un- derwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 34); Tippecanoe, 1893 (Golden); 1896 (Snyder).
Commonly but erroneously referred to Uromyces Terebinthi DC. by American authors.
475
135. POLYTHELIS FUSCA (Pers.) Arth. Puccinia fusca (Pers.) Wint. Dicacoma fuscum (Pers.) Kuntze. Dicaeoma Anemones (Pers.) Arth. On Anemone quinquefolia L. 1894:151. 1898:181. Fulton, 1894 (Arthur). 136. POLYTHELIS THALICTRI (Chev.) Arth. Puccinia Thalictri Chev. Dicaeoma Thalictri (Chey.) Kuntze. On Thalictrum dioicum L. 1893:55. Montgomery, 1893 (Olive); Tippecanoe, 1912 (Hoffer). *137. RAVENELIA EPIPHYLLA (Schw.) Diet. On Cracea virginiana L. Harrison, 1915 (Kopp); White, 1911 (Bushnell). 138. TELEOSPORA RUDBECKIAE (A. & H.) Arth. Uromyces Rudbeckiae Arth. & Holw. Caeomurus Rudbeckiae (A. & H.) Kuntze. On Rudbeckia laciniata L. 1894:152. 1898:187. 1903:145. Madison, 1898 (Snyder); Montgomery, 1894 (Olive). 139. TRANZSCHELIA PUNCTATA (Pers.) Arth. Aecidium punctatum Pers. Aecidium hepaticatum Schw. Puccinia Pruni-spinosae Pers. On Hepatica acutiloba DC. 1893:50. Jennings, 1912 (C. C. Deam); Montgomery, 1892, 1893 (Thomas); Tippecanoe, 1898 (Arthur). 140. TRIPHRAGMIUM ULMARIAE (Schum.) Link. On Filipendula rubra (Hill) Robinson ( Ulmaria rubra Hill). 1903: 43. Tippecanoe, 1899 (Arthur, in Barth. N. Am. Ured. 83). 141. UROPYXIS AMORPHAE (M. A. Curtis) Schrot. On Amorpha canescens Pursh. 1893:58. Marshall, 1893 (Underwood, Ind. Biol. Sur. 44). Purdue University, Agricultural Experiment Station, Lafayette, Ind.
INDEX
bv. PAGE Address of the President. Wilbur A. Cogshall...................... 53 AN OOK OBIE AKOna ore HONS AIG .'s bo widclee adios oe buos ede oA sou eb ee aeed c 9 B. Birds, Their Nests and Eggs, An Act for the Protection of............ 9 Bodine, Donaldson, A Memoir of, H. W. Anderson.................. 63 IB yo AWS spe ae Pi sentate ye Rm a Neda ce eens Re cea Ne, eu aya mies SUP eels Eve abelN ga a C. Cave, A New, near Versailles. Andrew J. Bigney.................... 183 Center Lake, Kosciusko Co., Ind., Some Preliminary Observations on the Oxygenless Region of. Herbert Glenn Imel................. 345 Chromosome in Mutating Stocks, On the Change That Takes Place in. FVOSC@e aly alle ay Cle inee ae reveal RY ee ry eae An Sea cart ets a aM 339 Coal Fields, The Olympic, of Washington. Albert B. Reagan........ 415 Collections, A Study of, from the Trenton and Black River Formations oleNie wn ork: TILGN aC. oryelligt iin sion alae (am mcinmnnss, sueh Neuse conan 2 249 Committees of the Indiana Academy of Science, 1915-1916.......... 11-13 Condenser, A Standard, of Small Capacity. R. R. Ramsey.......... 315 Constitution of the Indiana Academy of Science..................... 5 D.
Deposits, Loess and Sand Dune, in Vigo County, Indiana. Wm. A.
TNA CeU Be) a Ohare Wade en 8 eran ee fa UH PROM ante oH es EA AUTO Ra EIR gE 185 K. Klectroscope, An, for Measuring the Radioactivity of Soils. R. R. EVAIAS Ops ait SS ab ned eam e pee cui die UO cede RAE A URE TRS nana shila a otha 307 F. Food, The, of Nestling Birds. Howard HK. Enders and Will Scott. .... 323 Forest, The Olympic, and Its Potential Possibilities. Albert B. Regan.. 419 ume, Imeohienme., JIU, di. IML, Wetim IIOOIKK.. 5. eo co co sc asaecacaeccsuses 141
ATT
478
(i. PAGE
Gamma Coefficients and Series: - ..20- thet ek 4. 2 eae ee 269 Geographical Literature, A Bibliography of. Concerning Foreign Coun-
tries... B:cH. 'Schockel. 22) fea ee ee ee 191
Geometry, Plane and Spheric, Some Relations of. David A. Rothrock... 273
H.
Wooley foe ree ey a ee | ee ee 305 High Voltages, A Standard for the Measurement of. C. Francis Harding. 291
1
Tonisation Standards... dwin Morrison.’ <..2.. 225.22 -7. 2 fas. 295 L.
Lakes, A Report on, of the Tippecanoe Basin. Will Seott............ 377 M.
Magnolia Soulangiana, A Second Blooming of. D. M. Mottier........ 149 Moanures: Rate of Eumidiiestion ob | Roos Carr 2 Joe eee 317 Micro-Organisms, Soil, Tolerance of, to Media Changes. H.A. Noyes... 89 Members.
ACV ERs Bes he ee ee SO ERS, Cenk eae 24
MeO WSs 25 fy eat a ee a ene a ON 2 Se 15
INon=Residentii® 3445.04) Se eee ae Re nce ea 21
Minutes of Spring Meeahing® os sen neste anna sie ieee eae ee 41 N.
Nickel, Detection of, in Cobalt Salts. A. R. Middleton and H. L.
Millers 22 - 2205. by. Saree SR ee ES eh ee pee eat eee 163 O. Officers Indiana Academy of Science, 1915-1916 .................... 11 Officers Indiana Academy of Science, 1885-1916 .................... 14 Ophioglossum, The Occurrence of More Than One Leaf in. M. S. IMisrkles). 2 chee calc S32 tel ts ce ee en aaa ear he 357
Oscillatoria, The Effect of Centrifugal Force on. Frank M. Andrews... 151
479 12. PAGE
Peat Bogs, The Phytecology of, near Richmond, Ind. M.S8. Markle... 359
Plants not Hitherto Reported from Indiana, VI. C.C.Deam........ 135 Plant Diseases, A List of, of Economic Importance in Indiana. F. J. TEST Oe sts adil ere ato era mia et rei INURL I als (aa elie ie aga ae ee Ce eae 379 Plastids, Some Methods for the Study of, in Higher Plants. D. M. INTOG ITE React aes Ae ora oie eR a yea hon SURES Ran Dua ate HC UL Roti 3 eon 127 Proceedings General Session Indiana Academy of Science............ 45 Program of the Thirty-first Annual Meeting of the Indiana Academy of SCTE TC Chat regen Porsches Ho hes etre Roe ea he ere Bie yah? Rec ov as HR Mates ar Pig Ne 49 Protein, The Different Methods of Estimating, In Milk. George IS) ONIASY Sear te ane IL eae RE eet ON ei Ue eae A Ram og 173 Publie Offences, Hunting Wild Birds, Penalty....................... 10 R.
Radiations, Light and Heat, Some Notes on the Mechanism of. James
ESOC au ea eg asa concatenate haters arian. . caer oe ae Dane Carel Ns 283 Reports and Papers, the, An Act for the Publication of, of the Indiana JNA H TOYZ! OME SOY OMI OKELE Sas as ile ounce ian ene Gl een eo eee es eet oe eee aces i Riecia Flutians L., The Morphology of. Fred Donaghy............. 131 S. Scovell, Josiah Thomas, Memoir of. Charles R. Dryer............... 67 Scovel, Josaln Anon, oncMiOr, gacnesasoblecdasescasscessb bose V2 Sound Waves, On the Relative Velocities of, of Different Intensities. ANTE aN tex Wl EMO) Kestrel ne A Me ne cs SME RUT eo a ilo soe I WIEN SCT dee a 299 Spectrometer, A Simple Photographic. HKdwin Morrison............. 297 Spring Water, The Cause of the Variation of the Emanation Content of. 1 Saeed a sl RYP2YL OASYS v7 em Oats ater Ra OA URE Veni AR a Nod fee ie an gs a 311 (age ‘oloeceo Pirololkernn, Ine, IRoloeirt: Hessler. .502.-500cccce nen en oon eee ne 7a Balle voh Combet she y wc sew resin eo see tee ace eto oa eas Ore aR DURA Piha 3
U.
Uredinales, The, of Indiana. H.S. Jackson........................ 429
480
4 W. PAGE Wabash River, Volume of the Ancient. Wm. A. MeBeth............ 1S9 Water, Analysis of, Containing Aluminum Salts and Free Sulphurie Acid, imRovaal fehay IbaKobleyoven (Gforal WMivavsy, Sy ID) (Cloyatevoies 4256 2 eo 161 White Oak, Some Elementary Notes on Stem Analysis of. Burr N. PROMI GO 6 kei co aN aan MA aD alc Pa NN aL 153
4) BL
Oy) PRA a
vere)
Pay Oe ;
Sy
pe be.
Teds! 7 oro) meted) ae
oe
$
000M